# SellerMagnet Docs Complete documentation for SellerMagnet, your all-in-one Amazon seller toolkit. Guides, tutorials, and reference for every feature. Welcome to the official SellerMagnet documentation. Find guides, walkthroughs, and best practices for every tool and feature in the platform. {% embed url="" %}
🚀 New to SellerMagnet?Start here to create your account, connect Amazon, and configure your dashboard.Welcome to SellerMagnet
🔧 Looking for a specific tool?Browse the full feature index below to jump directly to the tool you need.#feature-index
❓ Need help?Check out our FAQ or reach out through the Help Center.Help Center
*** ## Feature Index | Feature | Description | Guide | | ---------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Dashboard & Analytics | Real-time P\&L, orders, refunds, expenses, and transactions | [Dashboard Overview](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview) | | Product Sourcer | Find profitable products to sell on Amazon | [Product Sourcer](/selling-tools/product-sourcer-overview) | | Repricer | Automated repricing with AI-powered strategies | [Repricer Overview](/selling-tools/repricer-overview) | | Review Requester | Request reviews from buyers automatically | [Review Requester](/selling-tools/review-requester-overview) | | Listing Optimizer | AI-powered listing optimization for better rankings | [Listing Optimizer](/selling-tools/listing-optimizer-overview) | | Inventory Planner | Forecast demand and plan restocking | [Inventory Planner](/inventory-and-operations/inventory-management) | | Fee Audit | Detect Amazon fee errors and recover overcharges | [Fee Audit](/inventory-and-operations/fee-audit) | | Reimbursements | Claim refunds for lost or damaged FBA inventory | [Reimbursements](/inventory-and-operations/reimbursements) | | PPC Manager | Manage and optimize Amazon advertising campaigns | [PPC Manager](/ppc-management-beta/ppc-manager-overview) | | Alerts & Notifications | Real-time alerts for listing changes and Buy Box events | [Alerts](/inventory-and-operations/alerts-notifications) | # Welcome to SellerMagnet Welcome to SellerMagnet, the all-in-one Amazon seller toolkit. Learn what SellerMagnet offers, create your account, and take your first steps toward data-driven selling. {% hint style="info" %} **Difficulty:** 🟢 Beginner · **Reading time:** \~7 min {% endhint %} {% embed url="" %} ## What Is SellerMagnet? SellerMagnet is a complete analytics and automation platform built exclusively for Amazon sellers. Whether you manage 50 orders a month or 20,000+, SellerMagnet gives you the real-time data, AI-powered tools, and workflow automations you need to grow profitably across every Amazon marketplace worldwide. {% hint style="success" %} **Pro Tip:** SellerMagnet supports **21 Amazon marketplaces** across the Americas, Europe, Asia-Pacific, and Middle East & Africa, all from a single dashboard. {% endhint %} ### Core Feature Suite | Feature | What It Does | Best For | | ----------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------ | | **Analytics Dashboard** | Real-time profit & loss, sales trends, fee breakdowns | Daily performance monitoring | | **Amazon Repricer** | Automated, rule-based price adjustments to win the Buy Box | Competitive pricing at scale | | **Product Sourcer** | Scan barcodes or search ASINs to find profitable products | Retail & online arbitrage, wholesale | | **Listing Optimizer** | AI-powered listing analysis and keyword optimization | Improving conversion rates | | **Review Requester** | Automated, compliant review request scheduling | Building social proof | | **PPC Manager** | Campaign analytics, bid rules, AI optimizer, keyword research | Advertising ROI optimization | | **Lost & Found** | Detect FBA reimbursement opportunities automatically | Recovering lost revenue | | **Alerts System** | Price, Buy Box, hijacker, and inventory alerts | Protecting your listings 24/7 | | **Inventory Planner** | Demand forecasting and restock recommendations | Preventing stockouts | | **Fee Audit** | Identify incorrect Amazon fee charges | Cost reduction | | **Tags** | Organize products and orders with custom labels | Portfolio management | *** ## Your First 10 Minutes with SellerMagnet Follow this path to go from zero to fully operational: ### Step 1: Create Your Account 1. Go to [sellermagnet.com](https://www.sellermagnet.com) and click **Start Free Trial**. 2. Enter your email address and create a secure password (minimum 8 characters, mix of upper/lowercase, numbers, and symbols recommended). 3. Verify your email by clicking the confirmation link sent to your inbox. 4. Log in to your new SellerMagnet account. {% embed url="" %} ### Step 2: Complete the Welcome Survey After your first login, SellerMagnet presents a **5-step personalization survey**. This helps us tailor your experience: | Survey Step | What You Provide | | ------------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Step 1 : Seller Status** | Whether you are already an active Amazon seller | | **Step 2 : Business Profile** | Monthly order volume, company size, active marketplaces, fulfillment method (FBA / FBM / Mixed) | | **Step 3 : Tool Preferences** | Which SellerMagnet tools interest you most, your top priorities, budget range, preferred onboarding style | | **Step 4 : Advanced Features** | Lost & Found preferences, PPC advertising details | | **Step 5 : Confirmation** | Review and submit your answers | {% hint style="warning" %} **Don't skip the survey.** Your answers directly influence which features are highlighted in your dashboard and what onboarding guidance you receive. You cannot revisit the survey after submission. {% endhint %} ### Step 3: Connect Your Amazon Account This is the most important step. SellerMagnet needs access to your Amazon Seller Central account via the official Amazon SP-API (Selling Partner API). 1. Enter a **Connection Name** (e.g., "My EU Store" or "US Main Account"). 2. Set an **Import Start Date**: SellerMagnet will pull historical data starting from this date. 3. Select your **Primary Marketplace** from the dropdown. 4. Toggle **VAT on Amazon Fees** if applicable, and enter your VAT rate. 5. Click **Connect to Amazon**: you will be redirected to Amazon Seller Central to authorize the connection. {% hint style="danger" %} **Security Notice:** SellerMagnet uses Amazon's official OAuth flow. You will authorize the connection directly on Amazon's website. SellerMagnet **never** stores your Amazon login credentials. The connection is encrypted end-to-end. {% endhint %} ### Step 4: Configure Your Settings After connecting Amazon, you complete the final setup: 1. Choose your **Display Currency** (the currency used throughout the dashboard). 2. Select your **VAT Collection Method**. 3. If applicable, enter your **Firm VAT Rate**. 4. Click **Finish Setup**. ### Step 5: Explore Your Dashboard Once setup completes, SellerMagnet begins syncing your data. While the initial sync runs, you are guided through three onboarding steps: 1. **Watch the overview video:** A 3-minute introduction to navigating the platform. 2. **Explore your products:** Jump directly into your Products page to see imported catalog data. 3. **Add your expenses:** Enter COGS (Cost of Goods Sold) and other expenses for accurate profit calculations. {% hint style="success" %} **Pro Tip:** The initial data sync typically takes 5-30 minutes depending on your order volume and import date range. You can start exploring the platform immediately while sync completes in the background. {% endhint %} *** ## Understanding the SellerMagnet Dashboard The dashboard is organized into three navigation sections in the sidebar: ### Dashboard Section * **Dashboard:** Main analytics overview with KPIs * **Orders Overview:** Orders, ordered products, refunded orders, analytics * **Products:** Full product catalog with cost and profit data * **Inventory Planner:** Demand forecasting and restock alerts * **Expenses:** COGS, shipping costs, and custom expenses * **Transactions:** Amazon transaction-level detail * **Listing Performance:** Traffic and conversion analytics * **Reports:** Custom report generation * **Tags:** Custom labels for products and orders ### Tools Section * **Product Sourcer:** Find profitable products * **Repricer:** Automated pricing engine * **Review Requester:** Compliant review automation * **Listing Optimizer:** AI listing analysis * **Lost & Found:** FBA reimbursement detection * **Alerts:** Real-time listing monitoring * **PPC Manager:** Full advertising suite (Dashboard, Analytics, Search Terms, Keyword Research, Bid Rules, AI Optimizer, Approval Center, Activity Log, Settings) * **Fee Audit:** Amazon fee verification ### Subscription Section * **Manage Plan:** View and upgrade your subscription *** ## Supported Amazon Marketplaces SellerMagnet supports the following Amazon marketplaces: | Region | Marketplaces | | ------------------------ | -------------------------------------- | | **Americas** | US, CA, MX, BR | | **Europe** | UK, DE, FR, IT, ES, NL, SE, PL, BE, TR | | **Asia-Pacific** | IN, SG, JP, AU | | **Middle East & Africa** | AE, SA, EG | You can connect **multiple Amazon accounts** and switch between them from the sidebar connection selector. *** ## FAQ
Is SellerMagnet free to try? Yes. SellerMagnet offers a free trial that gives you access to the full analytics dashboard. Premium tools like the Repricer and PPC Manager require an active subscription.
How long does the initial data sync take? Typically between 5 and 30 minutes, depending on how much historical data you are importing. Larger import date ranges and higher order volumes take longer.
Can I connect multiple Amazon accounts? Yes. You can add multiple Amazon connections under a single SellerMagnet account. Switch between them using the connection selector at the bottom of the sidebar, or choose "All" to see aggregated data.
Is my Amazon data safe? Absolutely. SellerMagnet uses Amazon's official SP-API with OAuth 2.0 authorization. Your Amazon login credentials are never stored. All data transfers use TLS encryption.
What happens if I skip the welcome survey? You can still use SellerMagnet, but your dashboard experience will not be personalized. The survey helps us surface the most relevant tools and recommendations for your specific business type and scale.
Which browsers are supported? SellerMagnet works best on the latest versions of Google Chrome, Mozilla Firefox, Microsoft Edge, and Safari. We recommend Chrome for the optimal experience.
Can I use SellerMagnet on mobile? SellerMagnet's dashboard is responsive and accessible on tablets and mobile devices. For the best experience with advanced tools like the PPC Manager and Repricer, we recommend using a desktop browser.
***
⚠️ Common Mistakes to Avoid | Mistake | Why It Matters | What to Do Instead | | ------------------------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------- | | Setting the import start date too far back | Syncing years of data slows your initial experience | Start with the last 3-6 months; you can extend later | | Skipping expense entry | Profit calculations will be inaccurate without COGS | Add at least your top 20 products' costs in the first session | | Ignoring the VAT settings | Incorrect tax configuration distorts your margins | Configure VAT before analyzing any profit data | | Not verifying the primary marketplace | Reports default to the wrong marketplace | Double-check the marketplace matches your main selling region | | Using an outdated browser | Some features may not render correctly | Update to the latest Chrome, Firefox, Edge, or Safari |
\## ➡️ What's Next? {% content-ref url="/pages/QGyB93CIr3fRhSHebJlM" %} [Initial Setup Wizard](/getting-started/welcome/initial-setup-wizard) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/J1elC3SXHhx2qxhDYKLK" %} [First Steps](/getting-started/welcome/first-steps) {% endcontent-ref %} # Initial Setup Wizard Walk through SellerMagnet's Initial Setup Wizard step by step, from the welcome survey to connecting your Amazon Seller Central account, configuring VAT and currency, and starting your first data sync {% hint style="info" %} **Difficulty:** 🟡 Intermediate · **Reading time:** \~10 min {% endhint %} ## Overview ![SellerMagnet Initial Setup Wizard - connect your Amazon account screenshot](https://4139654583-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Fih2knSvVpBcq5rIeXVjM%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-e67a019a9b8b368f04465acbf2479e301a98e6fc%2Finitial-setup-wizard.png?alt=media) The Initial Setup Wizard runs automatically the first time you log in to SellerMagnet. It guides you through three critical phases: 1. **Welcome Survey:** Personalize your experience 2. **Amazon Connection:** Link your Seller Central account 3. **Account Configuration:** Set currency, VAT, and display preferences Completing all three phases typically takes **5-10 minutes**. After that, SellerMagnet begins syncing your Amazon data in the background. {% hint style="info" %} **Not ready to connect Amazon yet?** Paid users can **skip the Amazon connection** and start straight away with the research tools - Product Sourcer, Listing Optimizer, and Title Checker - in Limited Mode, then connect Seller Central whenever they're ready. See [Using SellerMagnet Without Connecting Amazon (Limited Mode)](/getting-started/welcome/optional-amazon-connection). {% endhint %} *** ## Phase 1: Welcome Survey ### What It Is The Welcome Survey is a 5-step questionnaire that runs before the main setup. It collects information about your business to personalize the SellerMagnet experience. ### Step-by-Step Walkthrough #### Step 1: Seller Status **Question:** Are you already an Amazon seller? | Answer | What Happens Next | | ------- | ----------------------------------------------------- | | **Yes** | Proceeds to business profile questions | | **No** | Adjusts onboarding to focus on getting started basics | #### Step 2: Business Profile Provide details about your business: | Field | Options | Purpose | | ----------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------- | | **Monthly Orders** | 0-50, 51-250, 251-1,000, 1,001-5,000, 5,001-20,000, 20,001+ | Determines recommended plan tier | | **Company Size** | Solo, 2-5, 6-20, 21-50, 51+ employees | Helps tailor collaboration features | | **Active Marketplaces** | Checkboxes for 21 marketplaces grouped by region | Pre-selects marketplaces in setup | | **Fulfillment Method** | FBA, FBM, Mixed | Adjusts shipping and fee calculations | **Marketplace Regions Available:** | Region | Countries | | ------------------------ | -------------------------------------- | | **Americas** | US, CA, MX, BR | | **Europe** | UK, DE, FR, IT, ES, NL, SE, PL, BE, TR | | **Asia-Pacific** | IN, SG, JP, AU | | **Middle East & Africa** | AE, SA, EG | > **Pro Tip:** Select **all** marketplaces where you currently sell, even if some are low-volume. SellerMagnet uses this to configure cross-marketplace analytics from the start. #### Step 3: Tool Preferences Tell SellerMagnet which tools matter most to you: | Field | Options | | ------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Tools of Interest** | Repricer, Analytics, Review Requester, Listing Optimizer, Product Sourcer, Alerts, Lost & Found, PPC Manager (multi-select) | | **Top Priorities** | Buy Box winning, Margin optimization, Reviews, Reimbursements, PPC (multi-select) | | **Budget Range** | Undecided, 0-49, 50-199, 200-499, 500+ | | **Onboarding Preference** | Self-guided, Guided onboarding, Concierge onboarding | {% hint style="warning" %} **Your tool interest selections influence which features are highlighted in your dashboard.** If you skip a tool here, it will still be accessible but may not appear in your personalized recommendations. {% endhint %} #### Step 4: Advanced Features (Lost & Found & PPC) This step gathers details for two advanced feature areas: **Lost & Found:** | Field | Options | | ------------------------------ | ------------------------------------------- | | **Track Reimbursements?** | Yes (manually), No, Unaware of this feature | | **Estimated Unclaimed Amount** | Dropdown with value ranges | **PPC Advertising:** | Field | Options | | -------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Currently running PPC?** | Yes, No, Planning to start | | **Monthly PPC Spend** | Dropdown with spend ranges | | **PPC Priorities** | Multi-select: ACoS (Advertising Cost of Sale) reduction, Revenue growth, Launch campaigns, Brand defense | #### Step 5: Confirmation Review your answers and click **Submit Survey**. After submission, you are redirected to the Amazon Connection page. {% hint style="danger" %} **The survey cannot be retaken after submission.** Double-check your answers on the confirmation page before clicking Submit. If you need to change your responses later, contact support at . {% endhint %} *** ## Phase 2: Amazon Connection (Page 1) After completing the survey, the setup wizard presents a two-page configuration flow. Page 1 handles the Amazon connection. ### Top Bar Navigation The top bar shows a **step indicator** with two steps: 1. **Connect Amazon** (active on Page 1) 2. **Finish Setup** (active on Page 2) A checkmark replaces the step number once a step is completed. The top bar also shows: * **SellerMagnet logo:** Links back to the homepage * **Secure badge:** Confirms the connection is encrypted * **Logout button:** Exit the setup if needed ### Connection Form Fields | Field | Required | Description | Example | | ----------------------- | ----------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------ | ------------- | | **Connection Name** | Yes | A label to identify this Amazon account (max 36 characters) | "My EU Store" | | **Import Start Date** | Yes | Date picker: SellerMagnet imports historical data from this date forward | 2025-01-01 | | **Primary Marketplace** | Yes | Dropdown: the default marketplace for this connection | amazon.de | | **VAT on Amazon Fees** | Optional | Toggle: enable if Amazon charges VAT on their fees in your region | On / Off | | **VAT Rate** | Conditional | Number input (0-100%): only shown when VAT toggle is enabled | 19 | ### Real-World Scenario: EU Seller Setup **Maria sells on Amazon DE, FR, and IT with FBA:** 1. **Connection Name:** "EU Main Account" 2. **Import Start Date:** January 1, 2025 (6 months of history) 3. **Primary Marketplace:** amazon.de (her highest-volume marketplace) 4. **VAT on Amazon Fees:** Enabled (Amazon charges VAT on fees in Germany) 5. **VAT Rate:** 19% (German standard VAT) ### Clicking "Connect to Amazon" When you click the **Connect to Amazon** button: 1. SellerMagnet validates all form fields. 2. You are **redirected to Amazon Seller Central** (seller.amazon.com or your regional equivalent). 3. On Amazon's page, you log in with your Seller Central credentials. 4. Amazon asks you to **authorize SellerMagnet** to access your selling data. 5. After authorizing, Amazon **redirects you back to SellerMagnet**. 6. SellerMagnet receives the authorization token and begins the connection process. {% hint style="danger" %} **You are authorizing directly on Amazon's website.** SellerMagnet never sees or stores your Amazon login password. The authorization uses Amazon's official SP-API (Selling Partner API) OAuth 2.0 flow with end-to-end encryption. {% endhint %} {% hint style="warning" %} **Do not close the browser during the redirect.** The authorization flow involves multiple redirects between SellerMagnet and Amazon. Closing the browser mid-flow will cancel the process. If this happens, simply start the connection again. {% endhint %} ### Troubleshooting Connection Issues | Issue | Cause | Solution | | -------------------------------- | -------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------- | | "Authorization failed" error | Amazon session expired during redirect | Log into Seller Central in a separate tab first, then retry | | Redirect loops | Browser blocking third-party cookies | Enable cookies for sellermagnet.com and sellercentral.amazon.com | | "Connection name already exists" | Duplicate name | Choose a unique name for each connection | | Marketplace dropdown is empty | Network error loading marketplace list | Refresh the page; check your internet connection | | VAT rate not saving | Value outside 0-100 range | Enter a number between 0 and 100 without the % symbol | *** ## Phase 3: Account Configuration (Page 2) After successful Amazon authorization, you return to Page 2 of the setup wizard. ### Configuration Fields | Field | Required | Description | Example | | ------------------------- | ----------- | --------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------ | | **Display Currency** | Yes | The currency shown throughout your dashboard | EUR (Euro) | | **VAT Collection Method** | Yes | How your business handles VAT | "I collect VAT from customers" | | **Firm VAT Rate** | Conditional | Only shown for certain VAT collection methods | 19% | ### Available Currency Options SellerMagnet supports all major currencies. The dropdown displays the currency symbol alongside the full name (e.g., "EUR Euro", "USD US Dollar", "GBP British Pound"). ### VAT Collection Methods | Method | When to Use | | ---------------------------- | --------------------------------------- | | **No VAT** | You are not VAT registered | | **VAT included in price** | Your listed price already includes VAT | | **VAT collected separately** | You add VAT on top of your listed price | > **Pro Tip:** If you sell across multiple EU countries with different VAT rates, select "VAT collected separately" and enter your primary country's rate. You can adjust per-marketplace rates later in Settings. ### Clicking "Finish Setup" When you click **Finish Setup**: 1. SellerMagnet saves your currency and VAT preferences. 2. The data sync process begins in the background. 3. You are redirected to the **post-setup onboarding page**. *** ## Post-Setup: Onboarding Steps After completing the wizard, SellerMagnet shows a guided onboarding page with three steps to help you get productive immediately: ### Step 1: Watch the Overview Video A 3-minute video introduction to the SellerMagnet dashboard. Click the **thumbnail** to open the video player. ### Step 2: Explore Your Products Click the **Products** link to jump to your product catalog. While the initial sync is running, you will see products appearing in real-time as they are imported. ### Step 3: Add Your Expenses Click the **Expenses** link to start entering your Cost of Goods Sold (COGS). Accurate expense data is essential for meaningful profit calculations. {% hint style="warning" %} **Your profit data will be inaccurate until you add expenses.** SellerMagnet calculates profit as Revenue minus Amazon Fees minus Shipping minus COGS (Cost of Goods Sold). Without COGS, your margins will appear artificially high. {% endhint %} ### Skipping the Onboarding If you prefer to explore on your own, click **Skip** in the top-right corner. You can always access the documentation and tutorials from the Help Center in the sidebar. *** ## Data Sync Process ### What Happens During Sync Once you complete setup, SellerMagnet begins importing your Amazon data: | Data Type | Import Order | Typical Duration | | ---------------------- | ------------------------- | -------------------------------- | | **Products & Catalog** | First | 2-5 minutes | | **Orders** | Second | 5-15 minutes (depends on volume) | | **Financial Data** | Third | 5-10 minutes | | **Advertising Data** | Fourth (if PPC connected) | 5-15 minutes | ### Sync Duration Estimates | Order Volume (in import range) | Expected Sync Time | | ------------------------------ | ------------------ | | < 1,000 orders | 5-10 minutes | | 1,000 - 10,000 orders | 10-20 minutes | | 10,000 - 50,000 orders | 20-40 minutes | | 50,000+ orders | 40-90 minutes | > **Pro Tip:** You do not need to wait for the sync to complete. Start exploring the dashboard immediately, data will populate in real-time as it is imported. ### After Sync Completes Once the initial sync is done: * Your **Dashboard** shows full KPIs and charts * **Products** page displays your complete catalog with cost data * **Orders** page shows historical order data * **All tools** are fully operational SellerMagnet continues to sync data automatically every few hours to keep your dashboard up to date. *** ## FAQ
Can I restart the setup wizard if I made a mistake? The setup wizard runs once per project. If you need to change settings after completion, use the **Settings panel** (gear icon in the sidebar) to modify connection details, currency, VAT, and other preferences.
What if I close the browser during Amazon authorization? The authorization will be cancelled. Log back into SellerMagnet and the setup wizard will resume from where you left off. You will need to click "Connect to Amazon" again to restart the authorization flow.
Can I connect multiple Amazon accounts during initial setup? The initial setup wizard connects your first Amazon account. After setup is complete, you can add additional connections from **Settings > Connections** in the dashboard.
How far back should I set the import start date? We recommend **3-6 months** for the initial import. This gives you enough historical data for meaningful analytics without an excessively long sync time. You can extend the date range later from Settings.
What happens if my Amazon account has multiple regions (NA, EU, FE)? Each Amazon region requires a separate connection. Connect your primary region first during the wizard, then add additional regions from **Settings > Connections**.
Is the demo mode available without connecting Amazon? Yes. SellerMagnet offers a **Demo Mode** that lets you explore the full dashboard with sample data. Demo mode is accessible from the login page and does not require an Amazon connection. Demo sessions last 30 minutes.
Why does the setup wizard show two steps instead of the survey? If you have already completed the survey in a previous session, the wizard skips directly to the two-page Amazon connection and configuration flow. The survey runs only once.
***
⚠️ Common Mistakes to Avoid | Mistake | Impact | Solution | | ------------------------------------------ | ---------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------ | | Setting import start date to years ago | Extremely long sync time (hours) | Start with 3-6 months; extend later if needed | | Choosing the wrong primary marketplace | Default reports show wrong marketplace data | Select the marketplace where you have the most sales volume | | Skipping the VAT configuration | Profit calculations are incorrect | Always configure VAT during setup; EU sellers: enable VAT on Amazon fees | | Closing the browser during Amazon redirect | Authorization fails silently | Wait for the full redirect cycle to complete before navigating away | | Not completing the survey | Dashboard is not personalized to your business | Take the 2 minutes to complete all 5 survey steps | | Selecting wrong fulfillment method | Shipping cost calculations may be inaccurate | Choose Mixed if you use both FBA and FBM |
\## ➡️ What's Next? {% content-ref url="/pages/J1elC3SXHhx2qxhDYKLK" %} [First Steps](/getting-started/welcome/first-steps) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/gEHjN0IlyP0zjQ7jBbK4" %} [Dashboard Overview](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview) {% endcontent-ref %} # First Steps Your first 3 steps after completing the setup wizard. These are the exact actions SellerMagnet recommends to new users while your historical data is importing in the background. {% hint style="info" %} **Difficulty:** 🟢 Beginner · **Reading time:** \~7 min {% endhint %} ## 🎯 Overview After you complete the **Initial Setup Wizard** and connect your Amazon account, SellerMagnet shows a **"First Steps"** screen while your historical data imports in the background. This page walks you through the **3 essential actions** every new seller should take in their first session. {% hint style="success" %} **Data import runs in parallel.** You don't have to wait for the import to finish before taking these steps. Your first numbers appear within **5-10 minutes**, and the complete historical import typically takes **up to a few hours** depending on your account size. {% endhint %} {% hint style="info" %} **What you'll see:** A welcome banner *"Connection Successful! Data Import in Progress."* followed by 3 numbered step cards. Each card has a title, description, and a button to jump directly to the relevant page. {% endhint %} {% hint style="info" %} **Haven't connected Amazon yet?** You don't have to. Paid users can **skip the Amazon connection** and start with the research tools - Product Sourcer, Listing Optimizer, and Title Checker - in Limited Mode, then connect Seller Central later. See [Using SellerMagnet Without Connecting Amazon (Limited Mode)](/getting-started/welcome/optional-amazon-connection). {% endhint %} ![First Steps - SellerMagnet Welcome Page](https://4139654583-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Fih2knSvVpBcq5rIeXVjM%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-1ba797e87e972d5919d6a5ddb0c9f26dcd32acef%2Ffirst-steps.png?alt=media) *** ## 👣 The Three First Steps ![Products Management: enter COGS (Cost of Goods Sold) to enable accurate profit tracking](https://4139654583-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Fih2knSvVpBcq5rIeXVjM%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-6ec3325dbdf37658a59e55a7c05c8af4b6baaf93%2Fproducts-management.png?alt=media) {% stepper %} {% step %} ### 📺 Step 1: Watch the "Getting Started" Video **A 2-minute overview of your new dashboard features.** Click the **video thumbnail** (shown with a ▶ play icon overlay) to open the video in a modal player. The video walks through: * The main dashboard layout * How to navigate between tools (Sidebar, top bar, connection selector) * Where to find your sales data, products, and reports * How to switch marketplaces and date ranges {% hint style="success" %} **Why watch it first:** You'll save 30+ minutes of self-exploration. The video answers the most common questions new users have before they even ask them. {% endhint %} **Player controls:** Standard play/pause, volume, and fullscreen. Click anywhere outside the video or press **Esc** to close. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### 💰 Step 2: Enter Your Buy Prices (COGS) **Go to the Products page to bulk-upload or enter unit costs.** This is the **single most important step** for accurate profit tracking. Click the **"Go to Products →"** button on the First Steps page to jump directly to your product catalog in a new tab. Once on the Products page, you have two options:
OptionHow it worksBest for
Manual entryClick a product row, then click the Edit icon in the COGS column. Enter your purchase price per unit.Small catalogs (< 50 products)
Bulk CSV uploadClick the Bulk Upload button → download the template CSV → fill in ASINs & cost prices → upload. SellerMagnet matches by ASIN (Amazon Standard Identification Number)/SKU (Stock Keeping Unit).Medium-to-large catalogs (50+ products)
{% hint style="danger" %} **Without COGS data, profit calculations are wrong.** SellerMagnet computes profit as `Revenue - Amazon Fees - Shipping - COGS`. If COGS is missing, your margins will appear **artificially high** because only Amazon fees are being subtracted. Start with your **top 20 best-selling products** and expand from there. {% endhint %} {% hint style="info" icon="lightbulb" %} **Pro Tip:** If you have variable cost prices (seasonal suppliers, bulk discounts), use **Product Batches** instead of a single COGS value. Batches let you track cost-per-unit across multiple purchase lots, so SellerMagnet picks the right cost for each order based on when it shipped. {% endhint %} {% endstep %} {% step %} ### 📋 Step 3: Add Indirect Expenses (Optional but Recommended) **Software subscriptions, VA salaries, tools, and other recurring costs go on the Expenses page.** Click the **"Go to Expenses →"** button to jump to the Expenses page in a new tab. **Why it's important:** Amazon fees + COGS cover your direct costs, but most sellers also have **indirect operating costs** that eat into real profit:
Expense TypeExamplesFrequency
Software / SaaSSellerMagnet subscription, accounting softwareMonthly
Virtual AssistantsCustomer service VAs, listing optimization, PPC managementMonthly / Hourly
Warehouse / StorageOffsite storage, 3PL fees (if any), bubble wrap and packagingMonthly
ServicesPhotographer, copywriter, graphic designer, translatorOne-time / Project
Legal / AdminTrademark registration, VAT filings, accountant, insuranceAnnual / Quarterly
MarketingNon-PPC advertising, influencer fees, coupons off-AmazonVariable
{% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Quick win:** Add your **SellerMagnet subscription** and **accountant/tax costs** first. These are the most common recurring expenses and are easy to forget when calculating "real" profitability. {% endhint %} {% hint style="info" %} **This step is optional:** you can come back later. But if you skip it, your Net Profit KPI will be higher than reality. {% endhint %} {% endstep %} {% endstepper %} *** ## ⏭️ Skip to Dashboard If you prefer to explore on your own, click **"Skip to Dashboard →"** in the top-right corner of the First Steps page. You can always come back to these steps by revisiting them from the **Help Center** in the sidebar. {% hint style="warning" %} **Your profit data will be incorrect until you complete Step 2 (COGS).** Even if you skip the First Steps page, make sure to enter product costs within your first day of using SellerMagnet, otherwise every profit figure you see will be too high. {% endhint %} *** ## ⏱️ What's Happening in the Background While you work through the First Steps, SellerMagnet is importing your Amazon data. Here's what to expect:
PhaseWhat's loadingTypical duration
Phase 1📦 Products & catalog metadata (titles, images, ASINs)2-5 minutes
Phase 2📋 Orders (oldest to newest, chronologically)5-15 minutes (<1k orders)
20-40 minutes (10k+ orders)
Phase 3🧾 Financial transactions, fees, settlements5-10 minutes
Phase 4🎯 PPC campaigns & keywords (if connected)5-15 minutes
**Live sync indicator:** Look for the progress pill in the top-right corner showing *"Syncing. XX% complete"*. It updates in real time. When the sync finishes, a **green success banner** appears at the top of the dashboard: *"✓ Initial sync complete."* *** ## ❓ FAQ > Quick answers to the most common First Steps questions.
Can I see my data before the import finishes? Yes. Products and orders appear **in real time** as they're imported. You can click around the dashboard and see data filling in. Some KPIs may show "N/A" until the relevant import phase completes.
What happens if I close the browser during the import? Nothing, the import runs on SellerMagnet's servers, not your browser. You can log out, close the tab, or come back tomorrow. When you return, your data will be ready (or still importing if it's a large account).
Why do I need COGS data so urgently? Because profit calculations without COGS are **wrong**. SellerMagnet knows what Amazon paid you (revenue) and what Amazon charged you (fees), but it has no way to know what **you** paid for each product. Without that, "profit" is actually just "revenue minus Amazon fees", which massively overstates reality. Entering COGS is the single fastest way to get real profit numbers.
Do I have to add every expense? No. Expenses (Step 3) are **optional**. But every recurring cost you skip means your Net Profit number is inflated by that amount. For the most accurate picture, add your top 5-10 recurring expenses first (software, accountant, VA, storage), then add one-time costs as they happen.
Where's the "Getting Started" video if I miss it? The video is always available in the **Help Center** (sidebar → Help Center → Tutorials). You can also re-trigger the guided dashboard tour anytime by clicking **Help Center → Replay Tour**.
Can I come back to the First Steps page later? The First Steps page only shows automatically right after your first setup. However, you can always revisit the same guidance from the **Help Center → First Steps** link. The key actions (COGS entry and expense tracking) are accessible anytime from their respective pages.
*** ## ✅ Quick Checklist Use this checklist to make sure you're ready to use SellerMagnet effectively: * [ ] 🎥 Watched the 2-minute Getting Started video * [ ] 💰 Entered COGS for at least your **top 10 products** * [ ] 📋 Added at least 1 recurring expense (e.g., SellerMagnet subscription) * [ ] 📊 Checked the Dashboard to see your first KPIs populating * [ ] 🔔 Set up at least 1 alert (price, Buy Box, or inventory) * [ ] ⚙️ Reviewed your Settings (currency, VAT, connections) * [ ] 📺 Completed the guided dashboard tour (or scheduled to do so) Once all items are checked, you're fully set up and ready to make data-driven decisions about your Amazon business. *** ## ➡️ What's Next? {% content-ref url="/pages/gEHjN0IlyP0zjQ7jBbK4" %} [Dashboard Overview](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/XxiOnXmNvAunjLWPxJPP" %} [Repricer Overview](/selling-tools/repricer-overview) {% endcontent-ref %} # Using SellerMagnet Without Connecting Amazon You don't have to connect Amazon to start using SellerMagnet. Learn what works in Limited Mode - Product Sourcer, Listing Optimizer, and Title Checker - which tools need a connection, and how to conne {% hint style="info" %} **Difficulty:** 🟢 Beginner · **Reading time:** \~6 min {% endhint %} {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Open this page in your dashboard:** [**Go to your Dashboard →**](https://dashboard.sellermagnet.com/) {% endhint %} ## 📋 Overview You can start using SellerMagnet **before** linking your Amazon Seller Central account. After you have a paid plan, a project with no Amazon connection lands on a **limited "getting started" home** instead of being forced into the setup flow. From there, the research tools that don't depend on your own account data are ready to use immediately. {% hint style="info" %} **Who this is for:** sellers who want to evaluate the research tools first, sellers researching products before they go live, and anyone who isn't ready to authorize Amazon yet. You keep the full dashboard layout (sidebar, banners, connect prompts) - you just see what already works alongside a prominent **Connect Amazon** button. {% endhint %} {% hint style="warning" %} **A plan is still required.** Limited Mode skips the *Amazon connection*, not *checkout*. You still need an active subscription - skipping the connection is never a way around billing. If you don't have a plan yet, you'll be directed to choose one first. {% endhint %} *** ## ✅ What Works Without a Connection These tools run on market/research data, not on your Seller Central account, so they work in Limited Mode: | Tool | What it does without a connection | | --------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | | **Product Sourcer** | Research any ASIN or EAN - live prices, Buy Box history, sales estimates, and profit calculation from market data. | | **Listing Optimizer** | AI-powered listing analysis for any ASIN: title, bullet points, images, and keywords - including competitor listings. | | **Title Checker** | Check any product title against Amazon style rules and length limits before you publish. (Reached from the Listing Optimizer.) | The limited home page surfaces these as **"Ready to use right now"** cards, each marked with a **Ready** badge, plus a clear prompt that no Amazon connection is needed. {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro Tip:** Use the Sourcer to validate a product idea and the Listing Optimizer to draft a strong listing *before* you ever connect - then connect Amazon to track how the live product actually performs. {% endhint %} *** ## 🔒 What Needs an Amazon Connection Anything that reports on **your own** sales, orders, fees, inventory, or advertising requires linking Seller Central via the official Amazon SP-API (Selling Partner API). This includes, for example: | Area | Why it needs a connection | | --------------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Dashboard home (live KPIs)** | Net profit, margin, orders, refunds all come from your account data. | | **Orders, Ordered Products, Refunds** | Read directly from your Amazon orders. | | **Products Management, Transactions, Expenses, Reports** | Built on your synced catalog and financials. | | **Repricer** | Acts on your own listings and Buy Box. | | **Review Requester** | Sends requests against your own orders. | | **Inventory Planner, Fee Audit, Reimbursements (Lost & Found)** | Operate on your inventory, fees, and shipments. | | **PPC Manager** | Requires an advertising connection in addition to SP-API. | {% hint style="info" %} When you open one of these pages without a connection, SellerMagnet routes you to the connect/setup prompt rather than showing empty or misleading numbers. {% endhint %} *** ## 🧭 Tool → Connection Requirement (Quick Reference) | Tool | Requires Amazon connection? | | ---------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------- | | Product Sourcer | ❌ No | | Listing Optimizer | ❌ No | | Title Checker | ❌ No | | Free tools (e.g. fee calculator, ASIN/EAN converter) | ❌ No | | Dashboard home (live KPIs) | ✅ Yes | | Orders / Ordered Products / Refunds | ✅ Yes | | Products / Transactions / Expenses / Reports | ✅ Yes | | Repricer | ✅ Yes | | Review Requester | ✅ Yes | | Inventory Planner / Fee Audit / Reimbursements | ✅ Yes | | PPC Manager | ✅ Yes (SP-API **and** Ads connection) | *** ## 🔌 How to Connect Later When you're ready to unlock the full dashboard: 1. From the limited home, click **Connect Amazon account** (or open **Settings > Connections**). 2. Enter a connection name, set your import start date, and choose your primary marketplace. 3. Click **Connect to Amazon** - you'll be redirected to Amazon Seller Central to authorize. 4. After authorizing, you're returned to SellerMagnet and your data begins syncing in the background. {% hint style="danger" %} **You authorize directly on Amazon's website.** SellerMagnet uses Amazon's official SP-API OAuth flow and never sees or stores your Seller Central password. Access is read-only and you can revoke it at any time in Seller Central. {% endhint %} For the full walkthrough, see the [Initial Setup Wizard](/getting-started/welcome/initial-setup-wizard). *** ## 🧪 Real-World Scenario Meet Anna. She has just subscribed to a plan but hasn't authorized Seller Central yet - she wants to size up an opportunity before committing her account. Here's how her first session plays out. **Day one, no connection (Limited Mode):** 1. Anna lands on the limited "getting started" home. Instead of an empty dashboard, she sees the **"Ready to use right now"** cards, each with a **Ready** badge, and a prominent **Connect Amazon** button. 2. She opens the **Product Sourcer** and pastes in an ASIN she's considering. It returns live prices, Buy Box history, sales estimates, and a profit calculation - all from market data, no connection needed. She repeats this for a competitor ASIN to compare. 3. She runs the **Listing Optimizer** on the same ASIN to see how a strong title, bullets, and keywords should look, and uses the **Title Checker** to confirm her draft title fits Amazon's style rules and length limits. 4. Curious what the full dashboard feels like, she starts **Demo Mode** and browses the complete layout populated with synthetic data. She understands it's sample data - not her account. **What stays locked for Anna until she connects:** * The **Dashboard home** live KPIs (net profit, margin, orders, refunds) - opening them routes her to the connect prompt instead of showing empty tiles. * **Orders, Refunds, Transactions, Expenses, Reports** - all read from her real Amazon account. * Operational tools: **Repricer, Review Requester, Inventory Planner, Fee Audit, Reimbursements**, and the **PPC Manager**. **The moment she connects:** Anna clicks **Connect Amazon account**, sets a connection name, import start date, and primary marketplace, then authorizes on Amazon's own site. Back in SellerMagnet, her data starts syncing in the background. The account-based pages unlock and begin filling in - and her earlier Sourcer and Optimizer work is untouched, now sitting alongside her live numbers. *** ## ⚠️ Common Mistakes to Avoid
Mistakes to avoid in Limited Mode | Mistake | Why It Hurts | | ---------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | | Expecting live order, sales, or profit numbers before connecting | Those KPIs are built from your Seller Central data, so they can't appear until you link via SP-API - the pages will route you to the connect prompt instead. | | Assuming Limited Mode is a way around billing | Limited Mode skips only the Amazon connection, not checkout. Without an active plan you'll be sent to choose one first. | | Mistaking Demo Mode data for your own account | Demo Mode shows synthetic sample data and is time-limited - it's for exploring the layout, not for real decisions. | | Not realizing the PPC Manager needs a second connection | PPC requires an Advertising connection in addition to SP-API, so linking Seller Central alone won't unlock it. | | Worrying that connecting will overwrite your research | It won't. Connecting only unlocks the account-based pages; your Sourcer and Optimizer work keeps working exactly as before. |
*** ## ❓ FAQ
Do I need a paid plan to use Limited Mode? Yes. Limited Mode skips the Amazon connection, not billing. You need an active subscription; without one you'll be directed to choose a plan first.
Will the dashboard look broken without a connection? No. You get a dedicated "getting started" home with a connect call-to-action and the tools that work right now. You won't see misleading empty KPI tiles - connection-dependent pages prompt you to connect instead.
Is there a way to explore the full dashboard with sample data? Yes - Demo Mode shows the complete dashboard populated with synthetic data and doesn't require an Amazon connection. Demo sessions are time-limited.
Can I research competitor products before connecting? Absolutely. The Product Sourcer and Listing Optimizer work on any ASIN - including competitors - without any connection.
What happens to my Sourcer/Optimizer work after I connect? Connecting simply unlocks the account-based pages. The research tools keep working exactly as before, now alongside your live data.
*** ## ➡️ What's Next? {% content-ref url="/pages/QGyB93CIr3fRhSHebJlM" %} [Initial Setup Wizard](/getting-started/welcome/initial-setup-wizard) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/J1elC3SXHhx2qxhDYKLK" %} [First Steps](/getting-started/welcome/first-steps) {% endcontent-ref %} # Help Center Learn how to get help with SellerMagnet, access documentation, submit bug reports, contact support, schedule calls, and find answers in our complete FAQ. {% hint style="info" %} **Difficulty:** 🟢 Beginner · **Reading time:** \~10 min {% endhint %} ## 📋 Overview SellerMagnet provides multiple support channels to ensure you can get help quickly, whether you prefer self-service documentation, email support, or live assistance. This guide covers every way to access help and how to use each channel effectively. *** ## Accessing the Help Center There are two ways to reach the Help Center: ### 1. From the Public Website Navigate to [sellermagnet.com/help-center](https://www.sellermagnet.com/en/help-center). This page is available to everyone, you do not need to be logged in. The public Help Center includes: * **Search functionality** to find specific topics * **Help categories** organized by feature area * **Quick help links** for documentation, email support, and contact forms * **FAQ section** with tabbed categories (General, Technical, Billing) ### 2. From Inside the Dashboard While logged in, click the **speech bubble icon** (Help Center) in the bottom section of the left sidebar. This expands a submenu with five options: | Option | What It Does | | ---------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Guides** | Opens the full documentation site (docs.sellermagnet.com) in a new tab | | **Bugs & Suggestions** | Opens a feedback modal to report issues or suggest features | | **Get in Touch** | Opens a contact modal for general inquiries | | **Schedule a Call** | Opens a booking modal for a live support call | | **Replay Tour** | Restarts the interactive onboarding tour of the dashboard | {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro Tip:** The **Replay Tour** option is invaluable after major platform updates. It walks you through any new features that have been added since your last tour. {% endhint %} ### 3. The In-App Help Sidebar (Top Bar) Alongside the sidebar submenu, every dashboard page has an **in-app Help sidebar**. Click the **question-mark icon** in the dashboard **top bar** (next to the notifications bell) to slide it open. The panel has two tabs: | Tab | What It Shows | | ------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Help** | **Context-aware help for the page you are on.** The panel surfaces guidance relevant to the current page, plus quick links to resources such as the full documentation. If a page has no page-specific help yet, a general help card is shown. | | **Changelog** | The **product changelog** - a running list of recent updates, fixes, and new features, so you can see what has changed without leaving the dashboard. | {% hint style="info" %} The Help sidebar is **context-aware**: open it on the Repricer page and you get Repricer help; open it on the PPC pages and you get PPC help. It is the fastest way to get oriented on a specific screen without leaving your workflow. {% endhint %} {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro Tip:** Check the **Changelog** tab after logging in to catch new features and fixes at a glance - it is the in-dashboard companion to the release notes on the documentation site. {% endhint %} *** ## ⌨️ Command Palette (Quick Search) ![SellerMagnet Command Palette - Ctrl+K quick search screenshot](https://4139654583-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Fih2knSvVpBcq5rIeXVjM%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-b411c76ab50d5906224ba0863e623103619df0a9%2Fcommand-palette.png?alt=media) Every dashboard page has a built-in **Command Palette**, a quick-search overlay that lets you jump anywhere or act on a product or order without hunting through the sidebar. It is the fastest way to move around SellerMagnet. ### How to Open It There are two ways to open the palette: | Method | How | | --------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Keyboard shortcut** | Press **Ctrl + K** (Windows/Linux) or **Cmd + K** (Mac) from any dashboard page. | | **Top-bar button** | Click the **magnifying-glass icon** in the dashboard top bar (next to the notifications bell). | Press the same shortcut again, click outside the overlay, or press **Esc** to close it. ### What You Can Do Start typing and the palette shows matching results grouped into **Quick actions** and **Pages**: | Capability | What Happens | | ------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Jump to any page** | Type part of a page name (for example "repricer", "transactions", "sourcer") and press **Enter** to navigate there. Page names are read live from your sidebar, so they are already in your language and locked/coming-soon items are hidden automatically. | | **Search orders** | Type any text and choose **Search orders for "..."** to open the Orders page pre-filtered to that search. | | **Open an ASIN directly** | Paste a 10-character **ASIN** and the palette offers three deep links: **Open in Repricer**, **Listing Performance**, and **Open in Sourcer**, each pointing straight at that ASIN. | | **Find an order ID** | Paste an order ID (for example `123-1234567-1234567`) to jump to that order in the Orders page. | Use the **Up/Down arrow keys** to move between results and **Enter** to open the highlighted one, or click any result with your mouse. {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro Tip:** The palette is pure navigation, so it is completely safe to use, it never changes any data. When you copy an **ASIN** from an email or Seller Central, hit **Ctrl/Cmd + K**, paste it, and jump straight into the Repricer, Listing Performance, or Sourcer for that product in one step. {% endhint %} *** ## Support Channels in Detail ### Documentation (Guides) SellerMagnet's documentation site at [docs.sellermagnet.com](https://docs.sellermagnet.com) is the most complete resource available. It includes: * **Getting Started guides:** Account setup, initial configuration, first steps * **Feature documentation:** Detailed guides for every tool (Repricer, Sourcer, PPC Manager, etc.) * **Video tutorials:** Embedded walkthrough videos for complex features * **API documentation:** Technical details for advanced integrations * **Release notes:** What has changed in recent updates The documentation is available in multiple languages: | Language | URL Pattern | | ---------- | ------------------------- | | English | docs.sellermagnet.com/en/ | | German | docs.sellermagnet.com/de/ | | Italian | docs.sellermagnet.com/it/ | | French | docs.sellermagnet.com/fr/ | | Spanish | docs.sellermagnet.com/es/ | | Polish | docs.sellermagnet.com/pl/ | | Portuguese | docs.sellermagnet.com/pt/ | | Swedish | docs.sellermagnet.com/sv/ | {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro Tip:** The documentation site has a built-in search function. Use specific terms like "repricer min price" or "PPC bid rules" rather than broad queries for the best results. {% endhint %} *** ### Bug Reports & Feature Suggestions Found a bug or have an idea for a new feature? Use the **Bugs & Suggestions** modal: {% stepper %} {% step %} Click the **Help Center** icon in the sidebar. {% endstep %} {% step %} Select **Bugs & Suggestions**. {% endstep %} {% step %} Fill in the feedback form: {% endstep %} {% endstepper %} | Field | Description | Tips | | --------------- | --------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Type** | Bug report or feature suggestion | Be specific about which category applies | | **Title** | A concise summary | "Repricer: Min price not saving" is better than "Something is broken" | | **Description** | Detailed explanation | Include steps to reproduce for bugs; describe the use case for suggestions | | **Priority** | How urgently this affects your workflow | High = blocking your business; Medium = workaround exists; Low = nice to have | {% hint style="warning" %} **Include reproduction steps for bug reports.** The more detail you provide (browser, operating system, marketplace, specific product/ASIN (Amazon Standard Identification Number)), the faster our team can diagnose and resolve the issue. {% endhint %} #### What Happens After Submitting 1. Your submission is logged in our internal tracking system. 2. The support team reviews new submissions within 24 business hours. 3. For bugs: you may receive a follow-up email requesting additional details. 4. For feature suggestions: popular requests are prioritized in the product roadmap. *** ### Email Support Reach the support team directly at: **** Email support is available for: * Account issues (login problems, billing questions) * Technical problems that need investigation * Enterprise or custom plan inquiries * Partnership or integration requests | Response Time | Priority | | -------------- | --------------------------------------------------- | | **< 4 hours** | Critical (account locked, data loss, billing error) | | **< 24 hours** | High (feature not working, sync issues) | | **< 48 hours** | Normal (general questions, how-to inquiries) | {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro Tip:** When emailing support, include your **account email address**, the **connection name** (if applicable), and **screenshots** of any error messages. This dramatically reduces back-and-forth and speeds up resolution. {% endhint %} *** ### Contact Form For structured inquiries, use the contact form: 1. Visit [sellermagnet.com/contact](https://www.sellermagnet.com/en/contact), or 2. Click **Get in Touch** from the dashboard Help Center submenu. The contact form collects: * Your name and email * Subject line * Detailed message * Optional: attachment (screenshots, files) *** ### Schedule a Call For complex issues or onboarding assistance, schedule a live call: 1. Click the **Help Center** icon in the sidebar. 2. Select **Schedule a Call**. 3. Choose an available time slot from the booking calendar. 4. Provide a brief description of what you need help with. {% hint style="info" %} **Scheduled calls** are available for all plan tiers. Call availability is during European business hours (CET/CEST), Monday through Friday. {% endhint %} #### Preparing for a Support Call To make the most of your scheduled call: 1. **Write down your questions** in advance. 2. **Have your dashboard open** so you can screen-share if needed. 3. **Note specific ASINs or order IDs** related to your issue. 4. **Test your microphone and camera** before the call. *** ## Help Center Categories The public Help Center organizes content into nine feature areas: | Category | Coverage | Documentation Link | | ------------------------------ | ----------------------------------------------- | -------------------------- | | **Getting Started** | Account setup, onboarding, first steps | docs.sellermagnet.com | | **Analytics Dashboard** | KPIs, profit/loss, sales trends, fee breakdown | Dashboard Overview | | **Amazon Repricer** | Pricing strategies, rules, Buy Box optimization | Repricing Strategies | | **Product Sourcer** | Product research, profitability analysis | Product Sourcer Overview | | **PPC Advertising** | Campaign management, bid rules, AI optimization | PPC documentation | | **Listing Optimizer** | AI listing analysis, keyword optimization | Listing Optimizer Overview | | **Review Requester** | Automated review requests, compliance | Review Requester Overview | | **Fee Audit & Reimbursements** | FBA fee verification, reimbursement claims | Transactions | | **Alerts & Notifications** | Price, inventory, hijacker, and review alerts | Alerts and Notifications | Each category card links directly to the relevant section of the documentation site. *** ## Interactive Onboarding Tour SellerMagnet includes a built-in interactive tour that highlights key features of the dashboard. The tour runs automatically on your first login after completing setup. ### What the Tour Covers 1. **Dashboard overview:** Where to find key metrics 2. **Sidebar navigation:** How features are organized 3. **Connection selector:** Switching between Amazon accounts 4. **Settings access:** Where to configure preferences 5. **Help Center access:** Where to get support ### Replaying the Tour You can replay the tour at any time: * **From the sidebar:** Help Center > Replay Tour * **From Demo Mode:** The demo banner includes a "Replay Tour" button {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro Tip:** Replay the tour after major SellerMagnet updates to discover new features and UI changes you might have missed. {% endhint %} *** ## ❓ FAQ {% hint style="info" %} Quick answers to the most common questions about this feature. {% endhint %} The Help Center FAQ is organized into three tabs: ### General
What is SellerMagnet? SellerMagnet is an all-in-one toolkit for Amazon sellers that provides analytics, repricing, product sourcing, listing optimization, review management, PPC advertising tools, and more. It lets you help sellers make data-driven decisions and automate repetitive tasks.
Which Amazon marketplaces are supported? SellerMagnet supports 21 Amazon marketplaces across the Americas (US, CA, MX, BR), Europe (UK, DE, FR, IT, ES, NL, SE, PL, BE, TR), Asia-Pacific (IN, SG, JP, AU), and Middle East & Africa (AE, SA, EG).
Is there a free trial? Yes. SellerMagnet offers a free trial with access to the full analytics dashboard. You can explore the platform and connect your Amazon account without entering payment information.
### Technical
Why is my data not syncing? Check your connection status in **Settings > Connections**. If the status shows "Error," reconnect by clicking the reconnect button and re-authorizing through Amazon Seller Central. If the issue persists, contact support at .
Which browsers are supported? SellerMagnet supports the latest versions of Chrome, Firefox, Edge, and Safari. For optimal performance, we recommend Google Chrome.
Can I access SellerMagnet from multiple devices? Yes. Your SellerMagnet account is cloud-based and accessible from any device with a modern web browser. There is no limit on simultaneous sessions.
### Billing
How do I change my payment method? Go to **Settings > Manage Payment** to open the Stripe billing portal. From there, click "Update payment method" and enter your new card details. The change takes effect immediately.
Can I get a refund? Refund requests are handled on a case-by-case basis. Contact support at within 14 days of your charge with your reason for requesting a refund.
***
⚠️ Common Mistakes to Avoid | Mistake | Why It Matters | What to Do Instead | | -------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Searching with vague terms like "not working" | Returns irrelevant results | Use specific terms: "repricer min price error" | | Not checking the documentation before contacting support | Delays getting your answer | Search docs.sellermagnet.com first, most questions are answered there | | Submitting bug reports without reproduction steps | Support cannot diagnose the issue | Always include: what you did, what you expected, what happened instead | | Not attaching screenshots to support requests | Multiple email exchanges needed to understand the issue | Attach at least one screenshot showing the problem | | Ignoring the onboarding tour | Missing key features and workflows | Complete the tour on first login; replay after updates |
\## ➡️ What's Next? {% content-ref url="/pages/zaY93yUXdyynB54Byv7Z" %} [General FAQ](/resources/general-faq) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/RY6pCN6IiOP4ab0YSwSI" %} [Plans & Billing](/resources/plans-and-billing) {% endcontent-ref %} # Dashboard Overview Your central command center for monitoring Amazon business performance in real time. Track sales, profit, orders, refunds, margins, and ROI across all marketplaces from a single view. {% hint style="info" %} **Difficulty:** 🟢 Beginner · **Reading time:** \~15 min {% endhint %} {% embed url="" %} {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Open this page in your dashboard:** [**Go to Dashboard Overview →**](https://dashboard.sellermagnet.com/dashboard) {% endhint %} The SellerMagnet Dashboard Home is the first screen you see after logging in. It consolidates every critical metric, from today's sales to long-term profitability trends, into a single, scannable interface. Whether you sell on one marketplace or twenty, this page gives you the real-time pulse of your Amazon business. > The Dashboard refreshes automatically when you log in. You can also trigger a manual refresh at any time by clicking the **Refresh** button (the circular-arrows icon) in the header of the orders table at the bottom of the page - one button that reloads the whole screen. ![SellerMagnet Dashboard Overview](https://4139654583-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Fih2knSvVpBcq5rIeXVjM%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-b0723a722fc682e21ca8eb31a9fa88c2f2c2b474%2Fdashboard-home.png?alt=media) *** ## 🎥 Video Walkthrough {% hint style="info" %} **Video tutorial coming soon.** A full guided walkthrough of this feature will be available here shortly. {% endhint %} *** ## 🗂️ Page Layout Summary View The Dashboard Home is organized into distinct sections, each serving a specific analytical purpose:
Today's SnapshotLeft column, top cardTwo live headlines for the current day - Gross Sales Volume and Profit - each with a vs-yesterday sub-line, plus Orders and Refunds mini-tiles
Order Type (FBA/FBM split bar)Left column, below TodaySlim horizontal bar showing the split between Fulfilled by Amazon and Fulfilled by Merchant orders
Top ProductsLeft column, bottom cardYour top three products by net sales, with a "View all products" link
Statistics PanelCenter column (large card)Gross sales, net sales, VAT due, profit, plus eight KPI tiles for a selectable date range, with the main chart below
Main ChartBelow the Statistics KPIsStacked cost-decomposition bar chart: net sales stacked against each cost category, with the day's Net Profit shown on hover
Seller PerformanceRight rail, top cardAccount Health Rating (AHR) and health metrics pulled from Amazon Seller Central
Return RateRight railThree tiles: return Rate, average gross refund, and average net refund
ReviewsRight railLatest customer reviews and average rating, per default marketplace
Amazon PayoutsRight rail, bottom cardCurrent balance and next expected disbursement with a history chart
Orders TableBottom sectionFull sortable, paginated table of recent orders with inline breakdown
Products TableBottom section (tab)Ordered products view with per-product metrics
Refunds TableBottom section (tab)Refunded orders with refund-specific columns
Breakdown PanelRight side panel (toggle)Detailed financial breakdown for a selected order or the entire date range
*** ## Today's Snapshot The **Today** card at the top of the left column provides an instant read on your current-day performance. It leads with **two headline numbers side by side** - your **Gross Sales Volume** and your **Profit** for today - each with a small **vs-yesterday** sub-line so you can see at a glance whether today is running ahead of or behind the same point yesterday. Below the headlines sit two mini-tiles for **Orders** and **Refunds**, each linking straight to the matching page. ### Metrics Displayed | Metric | Description | Example | | ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------ | | **Gross Sales Volume** | Total revenue from all orders placed today, incl. VAT, before Amazon fees, product costs and refunds - with a vs-yesterday sub-line | EUR 2,847.32 | | **Profit** | Today's net sales minus Amazon fees, product costs (COG) and refunds (plus a smoothed share of account-level costs when enabled) - with a vs-yesterday sub-line | EUR 612.40 | | **Orders** | Number of individual orders received today (mini-tile, links to Orders) | 47 | | **Refunds** | Number of refund transactions processed today (mini-tile, links to Refunds) | 3 | {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro Tip:** Check the Today card first thing each morning to compare against your daily average. If orders are significantly below your 30-day average by midday, investigate whether a listing has been suppressed or a [PPC campaign](/ppc-management-beta/ppc-manager-overview) has paused. {% endhint %} *** ## Order Type Breakdown (FBA vs. FBM) Directly below the Today card, a **slim horizontal split bar** shows the distribution of your orders between FBA (Fulfilled by Amazon) and FBM (Fulfilled by Merchant). The bar fills proportionally from each side, with the FBA and FBM shares labelled beneath it, so you can read the balance at a glance without a legend. ### Why This Matters | Scenario | What It Tells You | | ----------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | 90%+ FBA | You are heavily dependent on Amazon's fulfillment; monitor IPI score and storage fees | | 50/50 split | Diversified fulfillment; ensure FBM shipping times remain competitive | | 90%+ FBM | Consider shifting high-velocity SKUs to FBA for Buy Box advantage | *** ## 🏆 Top Products At the bottom of the left column, the **Top Products** card lists your **top three products by net sales** for the selected period, each with its thumbnail, title, and net-sales figure. A **View all products** link at the foot of the card jumps to the full [Products](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview/products-management) view when you want the complete ranking. *** ## 📊 Statistics Panel The Statistics Panel is the most data-rich section of the Dashboard Home. It occupies the large **center column** of the page (between the left column and the right rail) and contains: ### Marketplace and Date Range Selectors At the top of the Statistics Panel, two dropdowns let you filter all displayed data: **Marketplace Selector:** | Option | Behavior | | ---------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------- | | All Marketplaces | Aggregates data across every connected Amazon marketplace | | Individual Marketplace | Filters to a single marketplace (e.g., Amazon.de, Amazon.com) | **Date Range Selector:** | Option | Period Covered | | -------------- | ----------------------------------------------------- | | Today | Current calendar day | | Yesterday | Previous calendar day | | Last 7 Days | Rolling 7-day window | | Last 30 Days | Rolling 30-day window | | This Month | 1st of current month to today | | Last Month | The full previous calendar month | | This Year | January 1st to today | | Last 6 Months | Rolling 6-month window | | Last 12 Months | Rolling 12-month window | | Last Year | Full previous calendar year | | Custom | Opens a date picker for any arbitrary start/end range | {% hint style="warning" %} When using **Custom** date ranges spanning more than 12 months, the chart may become dense. For long-term trend analysis, consider using the **Last 12 Months** or **Last Year** presets for cleaner visualization. {% endhint %} ### Trends (Period Comparison) Next to the selectors is a **Trends** pill that toggles comparison on and off. **Click the Trends pill to turn on comparison delta badges** - small +/- % chips that appear next to each KPI tile. When enabled, the Dashboard fetches a comparison and each badge shows how that metric changed versus it. Trends can compare against **another time period** or against **another marketplace**: | Comparison mode | What it compares against | | ----------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Previous period** (default) | The equivalent window immediately before your selected range | | **Same period last year** | The same date window one year earlier (year-over-year) | | **Custom range** | A comparison window you choose | | **Another marketplace** | Puts your marketplaces side by side for the same period, in a per-marketplace matrix with a Δ versus the baseline marketplace | {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro Tip:** Turn on **Trends** with the **Same period last year** mode for a fair seasonal benchmark, this strips out normal seasonal swings (e.g., January returns or Prime Day spikes) that make a plain previous-period comparison misleading. Switch it to **Another marketplace** when you want to see which storefront is really carrying your profit. {% endhint %} ### Forecast Toggle Next to the Trends pill is a **Forecast** pill. Turning it on reveals a **snapshot strip** across the top of the page and adds a **month-end forecast** to the chart. The snapshot strip lays out five periods at a glance: | Snapshot cell | What it shows | | ------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Today** | Sales so far today | | **Yesterday** | Yesterday's total | | **This Month** | Month-to-date total | | **Month Forecast** | Projected month-end total (carries a **Forecast** badge and a **confidence** read-out) | | **Last Month** | The previous month's total, for context | With Forecast on and a month-to-date range selected, the main chart also draws **faded forecast bars** for the remaining days of the month, separated from the actual bars by a dashed **Forecast** divider line, so you can see the projected shape of the rest of the month. ### KPI Cards Beneath the headline financial numbers, **eight mini-tiles** display the core metrics for the selected period. On wide screens they sit in one compact row; on narrower screens they wrap 4 + 4. | KPI tile | Metric | | -------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | | **Orders** | Total number of orders (links to Orders) | | **Refunds** | Total number of refunds (links to Refunds) | | **Margin** | Average profit margin percentage | | **ROI** | Average return on investment percentage | | **Units Sold** | Total units ordered in the period (one order can contain several units) | | **Avg. Order Value** | Average customer-paid value per order (incl. VAT and shipping) | | **Amazon Fees** | All Amazon fees for the period (referral, FBA, storage, ...) excl. VAT on fees | | **Profit / Order** | Net Profit divided by the number of orders | #### Health Bands (Tiered KPI Pills) The **Margin**, **ROI**, and **Refund Rate** values are shown as tiered pills that change color based on the value, so you can read business health at a glance without doing the math. Hover any banded pill for a tooltip that explains the bands. | Metric | 🟢 Good | 🟡 Watch | 🔴 Low / High | | --------------------------------- | ----------- | -------- | ------------- | | **Margin** (higher is better) | 15% or more | 8-15% | under 8% | | **ROI** (higher is better) | 25% or more | 10-25% | under 10% | | **Refund Rate** (lower is better) | 3% or less | 3-6% | above 6% | The tooltips read, for example: > **Margin:** *Net Profit divided by gross revenue (incl. shipping). Good: 15% or more / Watch: 8-15% / Low: under 8%.* > > **ROI:** *Net Profit divided by product costs (COG), over orders with known costs. Good: 25% or more / Watch: 10-25% / Low: under 10%.* {% hint style="info" %} The Refund Rate band is inverted, a **green** pill means a low (healthy) refund rate, while red flags a refund rate above 6% that warrants investigation. {% endhint %} ### Financial Summary Above the KPI cards, four headline numbers provide the financial picture: | Metric | Description | | ---------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------- | | **Gross Sales Volume** | Total revenue before any deductions | | **Net Sales Volume** | Revenue after Amazon fees, refunds, and adjustments | | **VAT Due** | Estimated Value Added Tax liability for the period | | **Profit** | Net profit after all costs (COGS, fees, shipping, expenses) | ### COGS Coverage Banner When some of your recent orders have no product cost (COG) on file, an amber **COGS coverage banner** appears just above the chart. It tells you how much of your order flow is missing costs and offers an **Add product costs** link straight to the [Products](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview/products-management) page, so your Profit, Margin, and ROI can be based on complete data. You can dismiss the banner with the **×** once you have handled it. ### Main Chart The interactive chart below the KPI tiles is a **stacked cost-decomposition bar chart**. For each day (or week/month), it stacks your **Sales Volume (Net)** against every cost category that eats into it, so a single bar tells the whole story of where the money went. Each series has its own colour: | Series | Colour | What it is | | ------------------------- | ----------- | -------------------------------------------------------- | | **Sales Volume (Net)** | Blue | Net revenue (excl. VAT) - the income the bar starts from | | **VAT Due** | Dark blue | VAT contained in the period's sales | | **Cost of Goods (COG)** | Orange | Product cost pulled from your batches | | **Amazon Fees** | Purple | Referral, FBA, storage and other Amazon fees | | **PPC / Ad Spend** | Teal | Advertising cost | | **FBM Shipping Cost** | Brown | Your own shipping cost on FBM orders | | **FBM Return Shipping** | Light brown | Return-shipping cost on FBM orders | | **General Expenses** | Gray | Account-level expenses you track yourself | | **Amount Refunded (Net)** | Red | Net value refunded | | **VAT Refunded** | Dark red | VAT returned on refunds | Cost series that are zero across the whole period (for example PPC or General Expenses on accounts that do not use them) drop out entirely, keeping the chart and legend clean. You can: * **Hover** over any bar to see the exact value for each series, plus that bar's **Net Profit** in the tooltip footer (net of everything above, and excluding VAT, which is collected for the tax authority rather than kept as profit) * **Click** a series name in the legend to toggle it on or off - the axis rescales to what is left * **Click** a bar to filter the orders table below to that specific day/month * The chart automatically adjusts its time granularity based on your selected date range {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro Tip:** Watch the height of the coloured cost blocks relative to the blue income block. If sales are climbing but the Amazon Fees, COG, or PPC blocks are growing faster, your Net Profit (in the tooltip) can shrink even as revenue rises - that is your cue to check batch costs, ad spend, or return rates. {% endhint %} *** ## 👤 Seller Performance, Return Rate, and Reviews The **right rail** stacks four cards - Seller Performance, Return Rate, Reviews, and Amazon Payouts: ### Seller Performance Displays key Amazon Seller Central health metrics: | Metric | Healthy Target | Warning Level | | --------------------------- | -------------- | ----------------------------- | | Order Defect Rate (ODR) | < 1% | > 1% triggers account risk | | Late Shipment Rate | < 4% | > 4% impacts account health | | Pre-Fulfillment Cancel Rate | < 2.5% | > 2.5% impacts account health | ### Return Rate The Return Rate card shows **three tiles**: | Tile | Description | | ------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Rate** | Refunded orders divided by all orders in the period (Good: 3% or less / Watch: 3-6% / High: over 6%) | | **Avg gross** | Average value refunded per refunded order, gross (incl. VAT) | | **Avg net** | Average value refunded per refunded order, net (excl. VAT) | ### Reviews The Reviews card surfaces your latest customer feedback and average rating. A **Default marketplace** chip in the card corner is a reminder that reviews are pulled per the default marketplace set on each Amazon connection - click it to jump to **Settings → Connections** to change which marketplace a connection uses. | Metric | Description | | ------------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Average Rating** | Average star rating across the pulled reviews | | **Latest reviews** | The most recent customer reviews for your products on the default marketplace | {% hint style="danger" %} If your **Order Defect Rate** exceeds 1%, Amazon may suspend your selling privileges. Monitor this metric daily and address any customer complaints immediately. {% endhint %} *** ## 💳 Amazon Payouts The Payouts widget shows: * **Next expected payout**, emphasized in a highlighted (amber) hero tile so the most important number stands out * **Recent payout history** displayed as a mini chart * A **cadence** indicator describing your typical payout cycle * **Info tooltips** (the small circle-info icons) that explain how the figures are derived * A **Details** button that opens the full **Payouts History** modal ### Payout Breakdown → Transactions A payout's breakdown links straight into your fee data. Each breakdown entry includes a **View in Transactions** link that opens the [Transactions](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview/transactions) page pre-filtered to that payout's date window, so you can drill from "Amazon paid me X" down to the exact fees and charges behind it. {% hint style="info" %} The breakdown groups a payout into buckets such as **product sales, promotions, refunds, Amazon fees, FBA fees, ads spend,** and **other**. Use **View in Transactions** when a payout looks smaller than expected, the Transactions page shows the underlying line items for that period. {% endhint %} *** ## Orders, Products, and Refunds Tables ![Orders Analytics sub-view: drill into trends, channels, and totals](https://4139654583-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Fih2knSvVpBcq5rIeXVjM%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-f1618b6fb6b1566338fd4cb901b0b74bfedf4b2d%2Forders-analytics.png?alt=media) The bottom section features a **tabbed table interface** with three views: ### Tab Switching | Tab | What It Shows | | ------------ | ----------------------------------------------- | | **Orders** | Individual order records with financial details | | **Products** | Aggregated product-level view of ordered items | | **Refunds** | Refunded order records with refund amounts | ### Orders Table Columns | Column | Description | | --------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | | **(checkbox)** | Select a row (or all rows) for bulk actions such as tagging | | **Fulfillment** | FBA or FBM indicator | | **Order** | The Amazon order ID | | **Products** | Product name/title with thumbnail image | | **Unit Price** | Per-unit selling price | | **Units** | Number of units in the order | | **Refunded** | Refund amount, if any (hidden by default) | | **Total** | Order total | | **Cost** | Product cost (COGS) allocated to this order from your purchase batches (hidden by default) | | **Profit** | Calculated profit per order | | **Margin** | Profit margin percentage | | **ROI** | Return on Investment percentage | | **(breakdown)** | The chart-pie icon in the last column opens the side breakdown panel for that order | {% hint style="info" %} **Refunded** and **Cost** are **hidden by default**. Turn them on (and hide any column you do not need) with the column chooser described below. {% endhint %} ### Column Chooser and Saved View **Right-click the orders-table header** to open the **column chooser**, where you can show or hide the Fulfillment, Unit Price, Units, Refunded, Total, Cost, Profit, Margin, and ROI columns. Your choice is remembered as **your default view** - it is saved per user and follows you across devices, so the table looks the same next time you log in from anywhere. A **Reset to default** option restores the original layout. ### Table Features * **Search:** Type any product name, ASIN (Amazon Standard Identification Number), or SKU (Stock Keeping Unit) to filter the table instantly * **Sort:** Click a sortable column header to sort ascending/descending * **Pagination:** Navigate through pages; adjust items per page * **Refresh:** The circular-arrows button in the table header reloads the dashboard * **Breakdown Button:** Click the chart-pie icon in the last column (or table header) to open the side breakdown panel {% hint style="info" %} The **Breakdown Panel** on the right side gives you a detailed financial decomposition for any selected order or for all orders in the current view. It includes Amazon fees, COGS, shipping costs, and net profit calculations. **How to read it:** the line items sum down to **Net Profit** - revenue at the top, each deduction (fees, promotions, COGS, expenses) subtracted below it, and the final figure at the bottom. {% endhint %} ### Order Row Badges The Home **Orders** tab shows the **same order-row badges and status pills** as the full Orders page - the blue **Ads** pill, green **Repricer** pill, amber **currency/FX** chip, the business-order info icon, FBA/FBM fulfillment tags, and the refund/return status pills (**Refunded**, **Partially Refunded**, **Incoming Refund**, **Return Started**) with their live carrier-tracking **Track** button. {% content-ref url="/pages/nyA0VpPgo3x5qsCLMF26" %} [Orders Overview](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview/orders-overview) {% endcontent-ref %} For the full legend - every badge's color, icon, tooltip, and the Ads-badge confidence tiers - see **Order Row Badges & Status Pills** on the [Orders Overview](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview/orders-overview) page. ### Repricer Insight Chip When you have an active Repricer, a small insight chip appears **above the Home orders table** summarizing how much of your order flow the Repricer touched, e.g. *"{n} of {m} orders repriced."* Unlike the per-row badge, this count covers the **whole selected timeframe**, not just the rows currently loaded in the table. {% hint style="info" %} The chip only appears when a Repricer was active during the selected period. Hover it for the point-in-time explanation: an order counts as **Repriced** when your Repricer was actively managing the price of one of its products on that marketplace **at the moment the order was placed** (reconstructed from the Repricer's activation history). {% endhint %} *** ## 🎯 Action Center (Smart CTAs) Near the top of the Home page, the **Action Center** surfaces context-aware call-to-action cards that point you to the next thing worth doing. The cards are generated from your live account state, so the Action Center is empty when nothing needs attention and fills in as signals appear. Typical cards include: | Card | Triggered by | | ------------------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Pending reimbursements** | Lost & Found has reimbursement claims ready (or going stale) to file with Amazon | | **Inventory / restock alerts** | A product is forecast to run low or stock out soon | | **PPC approvals** | Your PPC autopilot has actions waiting for your approval | | **Account health** | Your Account Health Rating has dropped into a warning band | {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro Tip:** Treat the Action Center as your daily to-do list. Clearing its cards each morning keeps reimbursements filed on time, inventory restocked, and PPC approvals from piling up. {% endhint %} *** ## 🩺 Seller Performance & Account Health The **Seller Performance** card surfaces your **Account Health Rating (AHR)** on a **0-1000 scale**, with a status band that changes color so you can read account health at a glance: | Band | AHR range | Meaning | | --------------- | --------- | ------------------------------------------------ | | 🟢 **Healthy** | 200-1000 | Your account is in good standing | | 🟡 **At Risk** | 100-199 | Issues are accumulating; review and resolve them | | 🔴 **Critical** | 0-99 | Urgent - your selling privileges may be at risk | A **Details** button opens the **Seller Performance History** modal, where you can review how your rating has moved over time alongside the underlying health metrics. ### On-Time Delivery (OTDR) & Late-Shipment Alerts {% hint style="info" %} There is **no standalone OTDR card** on the Home page. On-time-delivery / late-shipment detail lives inside the **Seller Performance History** modal: open it from the **Details** button on the Seller Performance card to see a **per-order OTDR breakdown** showing which FBM orders are dragging your On-Time Delivery Rate down. {% endhint %} #### Live Carrier Status (Beta) - Verify On-Time Delivery Inside the OTDR breakdown table, every order row that carries a **tracking number** shows a small **Fetch status** button (satellite-dish icon). Clicking it opens the **Live carrier status** modal (marked **Beta**) with a **Fetch live status** button - nothing is fetched until you click, so you stay in control of carrier lookups. When you fetch, SellerMagnet pulls the order's **live delivery state** directly from the carrier and shows: | Field | What it tells you | | -------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------- | | **Status badge** | Delivered / In Transit / Pending / Exception | | **Carrier & service** | The courier and service level handling the parcel | | **Ship & delivered dates** | When the parcel left and when it arrived | | **Transit days** | How long the shipment took door-to-door | | **Route** | Origin → destination (with country flags) | | **Latest event** | The most recent carrier scan | | **Timeline** | The full history of carrier scans for the tracking number | The modal also prints a plain-language **verdict** comparing the promised date with the actual delivered date - **Delivered on time**, **Delivered late** (by N days), or **Awaiting delivery confirmation**. {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro Tip:** Use this to confirm whether an FBM order was *actually* delivered on time versus late - it verifies on-time delivery against the carrier's own scans, independent of Amazon's flag. This is separate from (but complements) the opt-in late-shipment email alert below: the alert warns you *before* a shipment goes late, while Live Carrier Status lets you audit what *already* happened. {% endhint %} Email alerts for late FBM shipments are **opt-in**. You can enable them from the toggle inside the OTDR breakdown, or from the late-shipment switch under **Settings → Notifications** - both control the same project-level flag and stay in sync. When enabled, SellerMagnet emails and notifies you about orders pending shipment past the 12h / 24h thresholds. {% content-ref url="/pages/mFDigaHTVAfu4MnejXki" %} [General Settings](/account-and-settings/settings) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/SeThQ0Hu0ps7B1ktUwCr" %} [Alerts & Notifications](/inventory-and-operations/alerts-notifications) {% endcontent-ref %} *** ## Privacy Mode The Dashboard supports a **Privacy Mode** toggle that blurs all sensitive financial data. This is useful when: * Sharing your screen during a call * Working in a public space * Recording tutorials without exposing real numbers Toggle Privacy Mode by clicking the **eye icon** in the top navigation bar. When active the icon switches to an **eye-slash** and turns purple. Numbers, tables, and breakdown panels are blurred with an 8px blur, and charts get a slightly stronger 10px blur. Your choice is remembered on this device, so Privacy Mode stays on until you switch it off. *** ## Product Batches (COGS Management) From the Orders table, you can click on any product to open the **Product Batches Modal**, which allows you to: 1. **View existing batches** with purchase price, quantity, and date 2. **Create new batches** to record COGS for accurate profit calculation 3. **Edit batch details** if purchase costs change 4. **Delete batches** that were entered in error ### Per-Unit Cost Breakdown A batch does not just carry a single price - you can record the full **per-unit cost breakdown**, so profit reflects everything a unit really costs to land: | Field | What it captures | | ------------------------ | --------------------------------------- | | **Unit net cost** | Base purchase price per unit (required) | | **Unit tax cost** | Tax paid per unit | | **Unit shipping cost** | Inbound shipping per unit | | **Unit payment fee** | Payment-processing fee per unit | | **Unit customs cost** | Import duty/customs per unit | | **Unit additional cost** | Any other per-unit cost | You also set the **arrival date** and a **currency** (per batch), and give the batch a name and total unit count. ### Easy Mode (Flat Cost) If a full breakdown is more than you need, an **easy-mode flat-cost panel** lets you enter a single all-in cost per unit instead. Toggling easy mode collapses the detailed batch fields. ### Apply Costs to Past Orders When creating a batch, an **"Apply these costs to past unlinked orders"** toggle lets you skip recreating historical batches: the per-unit costs are applied to every past order item for that SKU that does not yet have a batch attached, and the batch capacity auto-expands to cover them. Because this recomputes historical accounting figures, SellerMagnet shows a **confirmation modal** first, spelling out the SKU, scope (all past orders without a batch), and that it recalculates **Profit, Margin, and ROI** for those orders. It is reversible - delete the batch from Manage Batches to undo. ### Other Controls * **Sellable returns toggle** (top of the modal) - controls whether returned units are added back to sellable stock * **Currency selector** - set the currency each batch was purchased in * **Shipping-rate association** - link a saved shipping rule to the product so FBM shipping cost is applied automatically ### Stock Forecast The batch modal includes an integrated **Stock Forecast** tool that projects: | Forecast Metric | Description | | ------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------- | | **Current Stock** | Units currently available | | **Days Remaining** | Estimated days until stockout based on average daily sales | | **Daily Usage** | Average units sold per day over the last 30 days | | **Stockout Date** | Projected date when stock will reach zero | {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro Tip:** Set up inventory alert rules (via the gear icon in the batch modal) to receive notifications when stock drops below your defined thresholds. You can configure rules for out-of-stock, low inventory, and restock-needed levels. {% endhint %} *** ## 👣 Step-by-Step: Analyzing Your Daily Performance {% stepper %} {% step %} ### Log in to SellerMagnet. The Dashboard Home loads automatically. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Check the Today card for current-day gross sales, orders, and refunds. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Select your date range in the Statistics panel (e.g., "Last 30 Days") to see trends. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Choose a marketplace or keep "All Marketplaces" selected for the full picture. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Review the KPI cards pay special attention to margin and ROI trends. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Examine the main chart for any unusual spikes or dips in revenue or profit. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Scroll to the Orders table and search for any product you want to investigate. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Open the Breakdown panel by clicking the pie chart icon to see the financial decomposition. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Switch to the Products tab for a product-level aggregation of the same data. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Check the Refunds tab to monitor returns and their financial impact. {% endstep %} {% endstepper %} *** ## 🎯 Real-World Scenario: Diagnosing a Profit Drop **Situation:** Your gross sales increased by 15% this month, but net profit dropped by 8%. **Step-by-step diagnosis on the Dashboard:** 1. Set the date range to **This Month** and compare against **Last Month** (note the margin and ROI values). 2. Open the **Breakdown panel** and review the Amazon fees total: did FBA fees increase? 3. Switch to the **Products tab** and sort by **Margin** ascending to find the lowest-margin products. 4. Check if any high-volume product has a margin below 10%: this is likely the cause. 5. Open the **Product Batches** for that product to verify COGS data is current. 6. Navigate to **Expenses** to check if any new recurring expense was added this month. | Before Investigation | After Investigation | | ------------------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | "Sales are up, profit is down" | "Product X has 4% margin due to a COGS increase of EUR 2.30/unit that was not updated in batches" | ***
⚠️ Common Mistakes to Avoid | Mistake | Why It Matters | What to Do Instead | | ----------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------- | | Ignoring the Margin/ROI cards | Revenue alone does not indicate business health | Always check margin and ROI alongside sales | | Not setting up product batches | Without COGS data, profit calculations are inaccurate | Enter batch/COGS data for every product | | Using only "Today" date range | Single-day data is noisy and unreliable for trends | Use 7-day or 30-day ranges for trend analysis | | Forgetting to check refunds | Returns silently erode profitability | Monitor the Refunds tab weekly | | Ignoring seller performance metrics | Account health issues can lead to suspension | Check seller performance at least weekly |
\## ✅ Best Practices 1. **Morning routine:** Check the Today card and compare against your 30-day daily average. 2. **Weekly review:** Switch to "Last 7 Days" and compare margin/ROI against the previous week. 3. **Monthly detailed analysis:** Use "This Month" to identify your top and bottom performers by margin. 4. **Keep COGS updated:** Whenever you reorder inventory, create a new batch with the current purchase price. 5. **Use Privacy Mode** when sharing your screen with VAs or service providers. 6. **Set inventory alert rules** for your top 20% of products by revenue. *** ## ❓ FAQ
How often does the Dashboard data update? The Dashboard pulls data from Amazon's SP-API (Selling Partner API). Orders typically appear within 15-30 minutes of being placed. Financial data (fees, settlements) may take up to 24 hours to fully reconcile.
Why does my "Profit" show as zero or negative? This usually means you have not entered COGS (Cost of Goods Sold) data for your products. Open the Product Batches modal for any product and add your purchase price. Profit is calculated as: Net Sales - Amazon Fees - COGS - Expenses.
Can I view data for a single marketplace only? Yes. Use the **Marketplace Selector** dropdown at the top of the Statistics panel to filter all charts, KPIs, and tables to a specific marketplace.
What is the Breakdown panel and how do I open it? The Breakdown panel is a slide-out panel on the right side of the Orders table. Click the **pie chart icon** in the table header row to toggle it. It shows a detailed financial decomposition of the selected order or all orders in the current view.
Does Privacy Mode affect the underlying data? No. Privacy Mode only applies a visual blur to sensitive numbers on your screen. The data remains unchanged and all calculations continue to work normally. Toggle it off to see your actual values again.
How do I export my dashboard data? The Home orders table has no export button of its own. To export, navigate to the **Reports** section and generate a downloadable report for any date range and marketplace.
What do the different chart colors represent? The main chart is a stacked cost-decomposition bar chart. **Blue** is your **Sales Volume (Net)** - the income the bar starts from - and each cost stacked on top has its own colour: dark blue **VAT Due**, orange **Cost of Goods (COG)**, purple **Amazon Fees**, teal **PPC / Ad Spend**, brown **FBM Shipping** (and light-brown **FBM Return Shipping**), **gray General Expenses**, and red **Amount Refunded** / dark-red **VAT Refunded**. **Net Profit** is what remains after the cost blocks - it is shown in the tooltip footer when you hover a bar. Click a series in the legend to toggle it on or off.
*** ## ➡️ What's Next? {% content-ref url="/pages/nyA0VpPgo3x5qsCLMF26" %} [Orders Overview](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview/orders-overview) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/yWniwYR2YpKfuBE4gaNy" %} [Products Management](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview/products-management) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/5vsXtaqLonaWayeTIHV6" %} [Reports](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview/reports) {% endcontent-ref %} # Orders Overview Monitor, filter, and analyze every Amazon order across all marketplaces. View order details, fulfillment insights, country breakdowns, B2B metrics, and export data for accounting or further analysis. {% hint style="info" %} **Difficulty:** 🟢 Beginner · **Reading time:** \~10 min {% endhint %} {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Open this page in your dashboard:** [**Go to Orders Overview →**](https://dashboard.sellermagnet.com/dashboard/orders) {% endhint %} The **Orders Overview** page gives you complete visibility into every order and ordered product across all your connected Amazon marketplaces. It combines the Orders table with advanced filtering, an insights panel, and a detailed breakdown side panel, everything you need to manage and analyze your order flow. {% hint style="info" %} This page covers both the **Orders** view (`Dashboard > Orders`) and the **Ordered Products** view (`Dashboard > Ordered Products`). They share the same filtering and breakdown capabilities but present data at different granularity levels. {% endhint %} ![SellerMagnet Orders Overview](https://4139654583-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Fih2knSvVpBcq5rIeXVjM%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-57ad78c40927748cc47b897407781af12323a2f9%2Forders-overview.png?alt=media) *** ## 🎥 Video Walkthrough {% hint style="info" %} **Video tutorial coming soon.** A full guided walkthrough of this feature will be available here shortly. {% endhint %} *** ## 🗂️ Page Structure The Orders page is organized into these key sections: | Section | Purpose | | -------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Insights Panel** | Three cards showing fulfillment split, B2B metrics, and country distribution | | **Filter Bar** | Date range, marketplace, search, status filters, destination filter, and tag filters | | **Orders Table** | Paginated table with sortable columns for every order | | **Breakdown Panel** | Slide-out financial decomposition (toggle via the breakdown button) | | **Ordered Products Table** | Product-level aggregation with per-SKU (Stock Keeping Unit) metrics, tags, and comparison | *** ## Order Insights Panel At the top of the page, three insight cards provide a quick visual summary of your orders: ### Fulfillment Split Card | Metric | Description | | ------- | ------------------------------------------------------ | | **FBA** | Percentage and count of orders fulfilled by Amazon | | **FBM** | Percentage and count of orders fulfilled by the seller | A horizontal bar chart visually represents the FBA/FBM ratio. ### B2B Breakdown Card | Metric | Description | | -------------- | --------------------------------------------------- | | **B2B Orders** | Percentage and count of business-to-business orders | | **B2C Orders** | Percentage and count of standard consumer orders | {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro Tip:** If B2B orders represent a significant share (>15%) of your volume, consider enabling Amazon Business pricing and quantity discounts to attract more corporate buyers. {% endhint %} ### Country Distribution Card Shows a scrollable list of countries with: * Country flag * Country name * Percentage bar * Order count This helps you identify which marketplaces or regions drive the most volume. ### Repricer Card When you have an active Repricer, an additional **Repricer** insight card appears. It splits your orders into **Repriced** and **Not repriced** with a count and percentage for each, plus a horizontal bar visualizing the share. When available, it also surfaces the revenue attributed to repriced orders. {% hint style="info" %} **What "Repriced" means (point-in-time):** An order counts as **Repriced** when your Repricer was actively managing the price of one of its products on that marketplace **at the moment the order was placed**. This is reconstructed from the Repricer's own activation history, so it reflects the state at purchase time, not whether the product is repriced today. {% endhint %} {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro Tip:** If you use the Repricer, watch this card and the **Repriced** filter (below) to measure how much of your volume the Repricer is actually touching. A low repriced share usually means a Repricer is paused, mis-scoped, or not assigned to your high-velocity SKUs. {% endhint %} *** ## 🔍 Filter Bar The filter bar provides multiple ways to narrow down your order view: ### Date Range Selector | Option | Period | | -------------- | ----------------------------------------------- | | Today | Current calendar day | | Yesterday | Previous calendar day | | Last 7 Days | Rolling 7-day window | | Last 30 Days | Rolling 30-day window | | This Month | 1st of current month to today | | This Year | January 1st to today | | Last 6 Months | Rolling 6-month window | | Last 12 Months | Rolling 12-month window | | Last Year | Full previous calendar year | | Custom | Opens date picker for arbitrary start/end dates | ### Marketplace Selector Filter orders by a specific Amazon marketplace or view all marketplaces combined. ### Search Type any of the following to instantly filter the table: * Product name or title * ASIN (Amazon Standard Identification Number) * SKU * Order ID ### Status Filter (Filter Icon) Click the **filter icon** button to open a dropdown with status-based filters: | Filter Group | Options | | ---------------- | -------------------------------------- | | **Order Status** | Shipped, Pending, Cancelled, Unshipped | | **Fulfillment** | FBA, FBM | | **Financial** | Profitable, Unprofitable | | **Repricer** | Repriced, Not repriced | {% hint style="info" %} The **Repricer** filter group only appears when you have a Repricer set up. **Repriced** narrows the table to orders that were point-in-time repriced (see the Repricer insight card above); **Not repriced** shows the rest. {% endhint %} Active filters are indicated by a red badge on the filter icon button. Use the **Clear** button at the bottom of the dropdown to reset all filters. {% hint style="warning" %} Multiple filters are combined with AND logic. For example, selecting "FBA" and "Shipped" shows only FBA orders that have been shipped. Be mindful that overly narrow filters may return zero results. {% endhint %} ### Destination Filter (Location Icon) Next to the status filter is a separate **destination** button (location-pin icon) that filters the table by **shipping-destination country**, independent of the status filters. Click it to open a scrollable dropdown that starts with **All Destinations** and lists the countries your orders actually ship to. {% hint style="info" %} The destination filter matches the **actual shipping-destination country**, not the marketplace. An order placed on Amazon.de but shipped to Austria is filtered under **AT**, the same logic used by the Country Distribution insight card. Use it together with the Marketplace selector to separate "where I sell" from "where I ship." {% endhint %} An active destination selection shows its own red badge on the location button, separate from the status filter badge. *** ## Orders Table The main orders table displays one row per order with the following columns: | Column | Description | Sortable | | ----------------------------- | --------------------------------------------- | -------- | | **Product** | Product image, title, ASIN, and SKU | Yes | | **Fulfillment** | FBA or FBM badge | Yes | | **Date** | Order purchase date and time | Yes | | **Status** | Current order status (Shipped, Pending, etc.) | Yes | | **Qty** | Quantity of units ordered | Yes | | **Unit Price** | Per-unit selling price | Yes | | **Amazon Fees** | Total Amazon fees (referral, FBA, etc.) | Yes | | **Refunded** | Refund amount if applicable | Yes | | **COGS (Cost of Goods Sold)** | Cost of Goods Sold from batch data | Yes | | **Total** | Net revenue after all deductions | Yes | | **Profit** | Calculated profit | Yes | | **Margin %** | Profit margin as a percentage | Yes | | **ROI %** | Return on investment as a percentage | Yes | {% hint style="info" %} **ROI %** = Net Profit ÷ COGS, shown as a percentage. It reads **n/a** when the product has no cost (COGS) on record, because there is nothing to divide by (the cell tooltip says *"Set COG to calculate ROI"*). {% endhint %} ### Sorting Click any column header to sort. Click again to reverse the sort direction. A sort arrow indicator shows the current sort column and direction. ### Pagination The table supports pagination with configurable page sizes. Navigation controls appear at the bottom of the table. ### Repriced Tag Orders that were point-in-time repriced display a green **Repricer** pill in their row. Hover the pill for the explanation: > *Your Repricer was actively managing the price of this product on this marketplace when this order was placed (reconstructed from the repricer activation history).* When the activation date is known, the tooltip also notes since when the Repricer has been active on that product. ### Copy SKU / Copy ASIN Each product line includes small **copy** buttons next to its SKU and ASIN. Click one to copy that value straight to your clipboard (a confirmation toast shows what was copied), so you can paste it into Seller Central, a supplier email, or a spreadsheet without retyping. The ASIN copy button only appears when an ASIN is present. *** ## Order Row Badges & Status Pills Order rows carry small badges and pills that add context **at a glance**, so you can read why an order matters without opening it: whether an ad touched it, whether the Repricer was running, whether it was placed in a foreign currency, how it was fulfilled, and where it sits in the refund/return lifecycle. {% hint style="info" %} **Why it matters:** These badges turn a flat list of orders into a context-rich view. A blue **Ads** pill, a green **Repricer** pill, an amber **currency** chip, or a colored return-status pill each answer a specific "what happened here?" question right in the row. {% endhint %} | Badge | Appears when | Meaning | | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | 🔵 **Ads** (blue pill, rectangle-ad icon) | The order was matched to attributed ad conversions of its product | An ASIN-level **estimate** that this order was assigned to Amazon's attributed ad conversions for its product on this marketplace (14-day attribution window). See confidence tiers below. | | 🟢 **Repricer** (emerald pill, tags icon) | Your Repricer was actively managing this product's price when the order was placed | A **point-in-time fact** reconstructed from the Repricer's activation history, not whether the product is repriced today. The tooltip adds *"Active since {date}"* when the activation date is known. | | 🟡 **Currency / FX** (amber pill showing a currency code such as `EUR`, with a left-right-arrow icon) | The order was placed in a currency other than your default | Amounts in the row are converted at the **order-date FX rate**. The tooltip quotes the rate, e.g. *"1 USD = 0.9210 EUR (rate at order date)."* | | ℹ️ **B2B / Business order** (small info icon, *not* a pill) | The order is an Amazon Business (B2B) order | Tooltip: *"This is a business order. VAT treatment may differ."* | | 🔵 **FBA** / 🟣 **FBM** (Fulfillment column tag) | Every order | **FBA** (blue) = Fulfilled by Amazon · **FBM** (purple) = Fulfilled by Merchant. | ### Ads badge confidence tiers The **Ads** badge is an estimate, never order-level truth - Amazon only reports attributed-order *counts* per product, marketplace, and day. SellerMagnet reconciles those counts against your actual orders so the badges **never exceed Amazon's own attributed-order totals**, and attaches a confidence tier so you don't over-read the signal. Hover the pill to see which tier applies: | Tier | Confidence | What it means | | ---------- | ---------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **exact** | Very high | The Amazon-reported attributed-order count covers every order of this product in the period. | | **high** | High | Ordered within **1 day** of attributed ad activity. | | **medium** | Medium | Ordered within **7 days** of attributed ad activity. | | **low** | Low | Ordered **8-14 days** after attributed ad activity. | {% hint style="info" %} The Ads badge is an **ASIN-level estimate**. It tells you the order's product saw attributed ad conversions in this window - not that this exact unit was the click. Treat **low**-tier badges as a soft signal, not proof. {% endhint %} ### Return-status pills (Status column) When an order is refunded or a return is in progress, the **Status** column shows a colored pill describing exactly where the order sits in the refund/return lifecycle: | Pill | Color | Icon | Meaning | | ---------------------- | --------- | ------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Refunded** | 🔴 Red | rotate-left | A completed full refund was posted to the buyer. | | **Partially Refunded** | 🟠 Orange | circle-half-stroke | Only part of the order's units/value was refunded. | | **Incoming Refund** | 🔵 Cyan | arrow-rotate-left | A return shipment is tracked and on its way, but no refund has posted yet. Tooltip: *"We have detected an incoming refund: {carrier} - {tracking}."* | | **Return Started** | 🟣 Purple | tag | The earliest stage: the buyer created a return label, but the return shipment has not been scanned by the carrier yet and no refund has been posted. Tooltip: *"The buyer created a return label on {date}. The return shipment has not been scanned by the carrier yet and no refund has been posted."* | {% hint style="info" %} On an **Incoming Refund** row that has a tracking number, a small indigo **Track** button (satellite-dish icon) appears next to the pill. Click it to open **live carrier tracking** for that return label in the shared tracking modal. {% endhint %} The green **Repricer** pill described above is the same one covered by the [Repricer insight card](#repricer-card) and the **Repriced** [status filter](#status-filter-filter-icon) earlier on this page - use those to measure how much of your volume the Repricer is actually touching. *** ## Breakdown Panel The Breakdown Panel is a slide-out side panel that provides a detailed financial decomposition. ### How to Open It Click the **pie chart icon** (breakdown button) in the table header to toggle the panel open/closed. {% hint style="info" %} The Breakdown Panel is hidden by default on screens narrower than 1400px to preserve table readability. On smaller screens, use the product click interaction to view individual breakdowns. {% endhint %} ### What the Breakdown Shows | Section | Details | | --------------- | ------------------------------------------------- | | **Revenue** | Gross sales, item price, shipping price | | **Amazon Fees** | Referral fee, FBA fee, variable closing fee, etc. | | **Promotions** | Discounts, coupons, and promotional deductions | | **COGS** | Cost of goods from batch data | | **Expenses** | Allocated general expenses per order | | **Net Profit** | Final profit after all deductions | The line items always sum down to **Net Profit** - each row is either money in (revenue) or money out (fees, promotions, COGS, expenses). {% hint style="info" %} **Worked example (illustrative euros):** An order brings in **EUR 40.00** revenue. Subtract **EUR 6.00** Amazon fees, **EUR 12.00** COGS, **EUR 3.00** shipping, and **EUR 6.40** VAT, and you are left with **EUR 12.60** net profit. That EUR 12.60 is the number the Breakdown Panel shows at the bottom. {% endhint %} You can view the breakdown for: * **A specific order** by clicking on a row in the table * **All orders** in the current filtered view (aggregated breakdown) *** ## Ordered Products View ![Ordered Products view: per-SKU aggregation with profit and margin](https://4139654583-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Fih2knSvVpBcq5rIeXVjM%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-868e4fe71b677490f597a4c80057f54f2a7147f7%2Fordered-products.png?alt=media) The Ordered Products page (`Dashboard > Ordered Products`) presents data aggregated at the product level rather than the order level. ### Table Columns | Column | Description | | --------------- | ----------------------------------------------- | | **Product** | Product image, title, ASIN, SKU (sticky column) | | **Units Sold** | Total quantity sold in the selected period | | **Revenue** | Total gross revenue from this product | | **Amazon Fees** | Total fees charged for this product | | **COGS** | Total cost of goods sold | | **Profit** | Total net profit | | **Margin %** | Average profit margin | | **ROI %** | Average return on investment | | **Tags** | Product tags/categories assigned by the user | ### Tag Filtering The Ordered Products view includes a **tag filter** system: 1. Click the **tag filter button** next to the search bar 2. A dropdown appears showing all available tags grouped by category 3. Select one or more tags to filter the table 4. Active tag filters appear as colored chips above the table 5. Click the **X** on any chip to remove that filter 6. Use **Clear All** at the bottom of the dropdown to reset {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro Tip:** Use tags to create product categories like "Private Label," "Wholesale," or "Q4 Seasonal" to quickly segment your analysis. Tags are managed in the Products Management section. {% endhint %} ### Product Comparison The Ordered Products view supports a **Compare** feature: 1. Select two or more products using the comparison selector 2. A comparison modal opens showing side-by-side metrics 3. Compare revenue, profit, margin, ROI, and units sold 4. Useful for A/B testing product variations or evaluating sourcing decisions ### Inline Breakdown Rows Click on any product row to expand an inline **breakdown card** showing the detailed financial decomposition for that specific product, including: * Revenue breakdown * Fee breakdown by type * COGS and expense allocation * Net profit calculation *** ## 👣 Step-by-Step: Finding Your Most Profitable Orders 1. Navigate to **Dashboard > Orders**. 2. Set the date range to **Last 30 Days**. 3. Click the **Margin %** column header to sort descending (highest margin first). 4. Review the top 10 orders: these are your most profitable transactions. 5. Open the **Breakdown Panel** to see what makes these orders profitable. 6. Switch to the **Ordered Products** tab to see the same data aggregated by product. 7. Sort by **Profit** descending to identify your top profit-generating products. *** ## 📤 Step-by-Step: Exporting Order Data 1. Set your desired **date range** and **marketplace** filters. 2. Apply any additional **status filters** as needed. 3. Click the **Export** button (file export icon) in the filter bar to open the export menu. 4. Choose a format: | Format | Icon | When to use it | | --------- | ---------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **CSV** | File-CSV | Universal plain-text format. Best for importing into accounting tools, other software, or scripting/automation. | | **Excel** | File-Excel | Native `.xlsx` workbook. Best when you want to open straight into Microsoft Excel with formatting preserved. | 5. The file is generated for all orders matching your current filters and downloads automatically. A confirmation toast appears when the download is ready. {% hint style="info" %} The export menu is the same unified CSV/Excel control used across the SellerMagnet dashboard, so the experience is identical on other pages. {% endhint %} {% hint style="warning" %} Export files contain all columns visible in the table, including financial data. Handle exported files securely, especially if they contain COGS or profit information. {% endhint %} *** ## 🎯 Real-World Scenario: Investigating High Refund Rates ![Refunded Orders sub-view: diagnose return reasons and recovery](https://4139654583-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Fih2knSvVpBcq5rIeXVjM%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-af4c48e356fac1481b6b4465e7a2b411e36d7e8f%2Frefunded-orders.png?alt=media) **Situation:** You notice your refund count has increased by 40% this month. | Step | Action | What to Look For | | ---- | ----------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------- | | 1 | Set date range to **This Month** | Overall refund count in the insights panel | | 2 | Click the filter icon and select **Refunded** status | Only refunded orders visible | | 3 | Sort by **Date** descending | Check if refunds cluster around a specific date | | 4 | Sort by **Product** to group | Identify if one product drives most refunds | | 5 | Switch to **Ordered Products** and sort by units sold vs. refunds | Calculate per-product refund rate | | 6 | Check **Country Distribution** in insights | See if refunds come from a specific region | **Before:** "Refunds are up 40%, I do not know why." **After:** "Product X (ASIN B08XXXXX) has a 22% refund rate from Amazon.co.uk due to size issues reported in 8 of 12 returns." ***
⚠️ Common Mistakes to Avoid | Mistake | Impact | Better Approach | | --------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------- | | Not using date filters | Viewing all-time data is slow and hard to analyze | Always set a relevant date range | | Ignoring the Insights Panel | Missing fulfillment and geographic trends | Check the three insight cards before diving into the table | | Sorting only by revenue | High-revenue products may have low margins | Sort by Margin % or ROI % for profitability insights | | Not using tags on products | Cannot segment or categorize product analysis | Create and assign tags for all product lines | | Forgetting to update COGS | Profit, margin, and ROI columns show inaccurate data | Update batches whenever you receive new inventory |
\## ✅ Best Practices 1. **Daily check:** Review today's orders each morning to catch anomalies early (wrong prices, unexpected cancellations). 2. **Weekly analysis:** Use the 7-day view to identify trends in order volume, refund rates, and margin shifts. 3. **Use filters aggressively:** Combine date range + marketplace + status to answer specific questions. 4. **Use tags:** Tag products by supplier, category, season, or margin tier for segmented analysis. 5. **Export regularly:** Download monthly order data for your accountant or for offline analysis. 6. **Compare products:** Use the comparison feature to evaluate product performance side by side. *** ## ❓ FAQ
How quickly do new orders appear in the table? Orders typically appear within 15-30 minutes of being placed on Amazon. The exact timing depends on Amazon's SP-API (Selling Partner API) data propagation.
Can I filter orders by multiple statuses at once? Yes. Open the filter dropdown and select multiple status options. They are combined with OR logic within the same filter group (e.g., "Shipped OR Pending") and AND logic across groups (e.g., "FBA AND Shipped").
Why do some orders show EUR 0.00 for COGS? This means no product batch has been created for that product. Navigate to Products Management and add a batch with your purchase price to see accurate COGS and profit calculations.
Can I search by Amazon Order ID? Yes. Paste the full Amazon Order ID into the search bar and it will filter to that specific order.
How does the Country Distribution work for multi-marketplace sellers? The country distribution shows the actual shipping destination country, not the marketplace. An order on Amazon.de shipping to Austria will appear under "AT" in the country distribution.
What is the difference between the Orders tab and the Ordered Products tab? The **Orders** tab shows one row per order transaction. The **Ordered Products** tab aggregates data by product SKU/ASIN, showing totals for units sold, revenue, and profit per product across all orders.
Can I customize which columns are visible in the table? The table displays all standard columns. You can resize columns by dragging the column borders in the Ordered Products table. Column visibility customization is on the product roadmap.
*** ## ➡️ What's Next? {% content-ref url="/pages/0edov7P7zB9nAFkgZ1WO" %} [Ordered Products](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview/ordered-products) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/nXtCVcpldqI1cfeA606R" %} [Orders Analytics](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview/orders-analytics) {% endcontent-ref %} # Ordered Products Per-product sales performance for every product you've sold, units, refunds, COG, fees, net profit, and margin. The fastest way to spot your best earners and your hidden money-losers. {% hint style="info" %} **Difficulty:** 🟡 Intermediate · **Reading time:** \~7 min {% endhint %} {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Open this page in your dashboard:** [**Go to Ordered Products →**](https://dashboard.sellermagnet.com/dashboard/ordered-products) {% endhint %} ![Ordered Products - Per-product sales performance dashboard](https://4139654583-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Fih2knSvVpBcq5rIeXVjM%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-868e4fe71b677490f597a4c80057f54f2a7147f7%2Fordered-products.png?alt=media) ## 📋 Overview The **Ordered Products** page aggregates every order in your selected date range into a per-product view. Where the **Orders Overview** shows individual transactions, this page shows you the *bigger picture*: how each SKU (Stock Keeping Unit) is actually performing, units sold, refund rate, fees, and the all-important **net profit** and **margin** columns. {% hint style="success" %} **Use this page to:** Identify your top revenue earners, spot low-margin products eating into profit, find products with abnormally high refund rates, and make data-driven keep/kill decisions. {% endhint %} {% hint style="info" %} **Per-product, not per-order.** A single product that sold 412 units across 380 orders appears as **one row**. Click the row to see a per-product breakdown over time, charts, and a comparison view. {% endhint %} *** ## 🎯 The Filter Bar Five controls let you slice the data exactly the way you need it:
FilterWhat it does
🛒 MarketplaceShow data for one specific Amazon marketplace, or "All marketplaces" combined.
📅 Date rangeQuick pills: TD Today, YD Yesterday, L7D Last 7 days, L30D Last 30 days (default), MTD Month-to-date, YTD Year-to-date, L6M Last 6 months, L12M Last 12 months, LY Last year, or Custom for a date picker.
🔍 SearchFilter by product name, SKU, or ASIN (Amazon Standard Identification Number). Live as you type.
🏷️ TagsMulti-select by Product Tag (Bestsellers, Brand A, Slow Movers, etc.). Active tags appear as colored chips above the search bar.
🔄 CompareOpens the Compare Products modal, pick 2-5 products to see them side by side with charts.
📈 Compare pillA "Trends" toggle in the filter bar that turns period comparison on for the whole table. See below.
### 📈 Period-Compare Pill Separate from the multi-product **Compare** modal above, the filter bar carries a small **compare pill**, a **Trends** toggle with a **"vs Previous Period"** selector next to it. Flip the toggle on (it turns green) and every row in the table gains a trend indicator that measures the current date range against the previous comparable period, so you can see at a glance which products are moving up or down without opening any modal. The pill's config menu lets you choose what to compare against (a previous time period, or another marketplace). It compares the entire table at once, whereas the **Compare** modal is for benchmarking a handful of hand-picked SKUs side by side. *** ## 📊 The 13-Column Table This is the heart of the page. Every column is **sortable** (click the header).
ColumnTypeWhat it shows
ProductImage + textProduct image, name, and SKU. Sticky-left so you can always see which row you're reading. Includes a Copy ASIN button (see below).
Units SoldIntegerTotal units shipped in the date range (excluding refunded units).
RefundsIntegerNumber of units refunded in the date range.
COG€Cost of Goods per unit (from your Products page). If empty here, profit will be wrong.
Avg Net Sale Price€Average price you actually received per unit (after promo discounts, before fees).
Net Sales Volume€Total revenue collected (Units × Avg Net Price). Your top-line number.
Net Sales Refunded€Revenue paid back to customers as refunds (shown in red as a negative).
Refund Rate (Units)%Refunds ÷ Units. A bar visualizes the rate (green < 5%, red >= 5%).
Refund Rate (Revenue)%Refunded revenue ÷ Net Sales Volume. Often differs from unit rate when refunded items are higher- or lower-priced than average.
Shipping€Total shipping costs paid (FBM) or charged (FBA inbound).
Fees€Total Amazon fees: referral, FBA fulfillment, storage, and other deductions.
Net Profit€The big one. Net Sales - Refunds - Shipping - Fees - (COG × Units). Green = positive, red = negative.
Margin%Net Profit ÷ Net Sales Volume. Your healthy-business early-warning system.
DetailsActionOpens the per-product breakdown modal with charts, daily volume, and a comparison view.
### Which column should I sort by? Not sure where to start? Sort by the column that answers your question: | I want to find... | Sort this column | Direction | | ---------------------------- | ----------------------- | -------------------------- | | My best earners | **Net Profit** | Descending (highest first) | | My worst margins | **Margin** | Ascending (lowest first) | | Products with quality issues | **Refund Rate (Units)** | Descending (highest first) | {% hint style="warning" %} **COG missing? Profit numbers lie.** If a product has no Cost of Goods entered, the Net Profit column will overstate reality (it only subtracts Amazon's fees). The quickest fix is right here: click the blue **COG missing** badge on that product's row to open the batch entry and record your cost. You can also manage costs in bulk on the **Products** page. Once a cost is set, return here for accurate numbers. {% endhint %} ### 📋 Copy ASIN The **Product** column includes a small **Copy ASIN** button (tooltip: *Copy ASIN to clipboard*). Click it to copy the product's ASIN straight to your clipboard, the button briefly turns into a green checkmark to confirm. This is handy for pasting an ASIN into Seller Central, a competitor lookup, or a supplier message without leaving the page. *** ## 🔬 Product Details Modal Click any row (or the **Details** icon) to open the per-product detail view: {% stepper %} {% step %} ### Summary cards A 3-card row at the top showing key totals for that single product over the chosen date range: **Total Units**, **Net Profit**, and **Margin**. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Performance chart A 500px-tall chart plotting Units, Revenue, and Profit over time so you can spot trends, seasonal spikes, and post-promo dips summary view. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Daily breakdown table Day-by-day numbers below the chart for granular auditing, useful when investigating a specific bad day. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Compare button Opens the Compare Products modal pre-filled with this product. Add up to 4 more SKUs to benchmark side-by-side. {% endstep %} {% endstepper %} *** ## ⚖️ Compare Products The **Compare** button (top-right of the filter bar, or inside any product detail) opens a side-by-side view for up to **5 products**: * **Charts grid:** Units, Revenue, Profit, and Margin lines overlaid for every selected product * **Comparison table:** KPI rows so you can scan totals quickly * **Tag filter:** narrow comparison candidates to one tag group (e.g. compare all "Bestsellers") * **Empty state:** friendly icon + message until you've selected at least 2 products {% hint style="info" %} **When to use Compare:** A/B-style decisions like "should I keep the cheap variant or the premium variant?", "which two SKUs are cannibalizing each other?", or "is my new launch outperforming the old one yet?". {% endhint %} *** ## 💡 Pro Tips {% hint style="success" %} **Sort by Margin ascending** to find your worst-performing products. Anything below 15% margin needs investigation, usually it's a fee structure problem or a missing COG entry. {% endhint %} {% hint style="success" %} **Sort by Refund Rate (Units) descending** to find quality issues. A product above 8% refund rate is hurting your account health and your margins simultaneously, fix the listing or kill the SKU. {% endhint %} {% hint style="success" %} **Use the L12M range monthly** for an annual product audit. Identify which 20% of your SKUs generate 80% of profit (Pareto), then double down on them with PPC and Inventory Planner. {% endhint %} *** ## 🎯 Real-World Scenario: A Best-Seller Quietly Losing Ground **Situation:** One of your core SKUs *feels* fine, it still sells every day, but your overall profit is down and you cannot pin the cause. Use this page to isolate it in a few clicks. | Step | Action | What to Look For | | ---- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------- | | 1 | Set the **Date range** to `L30D`, then note the numbers, and switch to the prior month with `Custom` | Month-over-month movement per product | | 2 | **Search** the product name or SKU to isolate the single row | One clean row to read | | 3 | Read **Units Sold**, **Net Sales Volume**, and **Net Profit** for each period | Where the drop actually lands | | 4 | Sort by **Refund Rate (Units)** descending | Whether returns are eating the units | | 5 | Check the **Margin** column against last month | A shrinking margin points at fees or COG, not just volume | | 6 | Click **Details** to open the per-product breakdown and read the daily chart | The exact day the trend turned | **Before (last month):** 412 Units Sold, €8,240 Net Sales Volume, €1,690 Net Profit, 20.5% Margin, 3.1% Refund Rate (Units). **After (this month, L30D):** 358 Units Sold, €7,160 Net Sales Volume, €760 Net Profit, 10.6% Margin, 7.8% Refund Rate (Units). **Reading it:** Units fell only 13%, but Net Profit nearly halved. The **Margin** column collapsed from 20.5% to 10.6% while the **Refund Rate (Units)** more than doubled to 7.8%. The problem is not demand, it is returns and their knock-on **Fees**. The **Details** daily breakdown shows the refunds clustering after a mid-month price promotion. **Action:** review the listing and promo that triggered the returns, confirm the **COG** on the row is current, and re-check the **Margin** next week before deciding to keep or kill the SKU. *** ## ⚠️ Common Mistakes to Avoid
Click to expand the mistakes table | Mistake | Why It Hurts | | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Sorting only by **Net Sales Volume** | A high top-line number can hide a thin or negative **Margin**, you end up celebrating a product that loses money on every unit. | | Leaving **COG** blank | **Net Profit** and **Margin** only subtract Amazon's fees, so both columns overstate reality and every keep/kill decision is built on a false number. | | Ignoring the gap between **Refund Rate (Units)** and **Refund Rate (Revenue)** | When the two diverge, your high-priced variant is often the one being returned, reading only the unit rate masks the real revenue damage. | | Judging a product on the default `L30D` window alone | A slow-moving SKU with seasonal or **FBA** storage costs looks fine short-term, only a `L12M` view reveals the true annual picture. | | Reading **Net Profit** without checking **Fees** and **Shipping** | Rising fulfillment or referral costs can quietly erode profit even when Units and revenue hold steady. | | Comparing products by eye across scattered rows | Guesswork invites the wrong conclusion, the **Compare** modal overlays them on the same axis so the difference is unambiguous. |
*** ## ✅ Best Practices 1. **Lead with Net Profit and Margin, not revenue.** Sort by **Net Profit** descending to find true earners, then sort **Margin** ascending to expose the ones quietly losing money. 2. **Fix every COG-missing badge first.** Before you trust any profit read, click the blue **COG missing** badge on affected rows so **Net Profit** and **Margin** reflect reality. 3. **Read both refund columns together.** Compare **Refund Rate (Units)** against **Refund Rate (Revenue)**, the gap tells you whether your expensive variants are the ones coming back. 4. **Match the date range to the question.** Use `L30D` for recent trends, `MTD` for the current month in progress, and `L12M` monthly for a full annual Pareto audit. 5. **Use Details before deciding.** Open the per-product modal to read the daily chart and confirm exactly when a trend turned, rather than acting on a single aggregate number. *** ## ❓ FAQ
Why don't I see all my products in the list? Only products that had **at least one order** in the selected date range appear here. To see all products in your catalog (including never-sold ones), visit **Products** in the sidebar.
Why is my Net Profit negative on a product I'm "selling well"? Most common cause: **missing or wrong COG**. Second most common: **high refund rate** combined with restocking fees. Third: **FBA storage fees** silently eating into low-velocity items. Click the row to see the daily breakdown, that usually reveals the cause.
How accurate is Net Sales Volume? Very. SellerMagnet pulls from Amazon's **Settlement Reports**, which are the same numbers Amazon uses to pay you. The page reconciles to within €0.01 of your settlements after the relevant period closes.
Why do the Refund Rate (Units) and Refund Rate (Revenue) columns differ? Because refunded items are not always priced at the average. If your high-priced variant has a higher refund rate than your low-priced variant, the revenue rate will be HIGHER than the units rate. Use both numbers, the gap between them is itself diagnostic.
Is the data live? Settlement-grade data lags Amazon's reporting by a few hours. Order-level data (Today, Yesterday) is typically updated within minutes via the Orders API. The page header shows a counter and a refresh button to pull the latest snapshot.
*** ## ➡️ What's Next? {% content-ref url="/pages/nXtCVcpldqI1cfeA606R" %} [Orders Analytics](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview/orders-analytics) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/QUfddxcjTGMwmLVQVH0o" %} [Refunded Orders](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview/refunded-orders) {% endcontent-ref %} # Orders Analytics Visualize your Amazon sales performance with interactive charts, revenue trends, order heatmaps, marketplace breakdowns, and top-product rankings. {% hint style="info" %} **Difficulty:** 🟡 Intermediate · **Reading time:** \~15 min {% endhint %} {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Open this page in your dashboard:** [**Go to Orders Analytics →**](https://dashboard.sellermagnet.com/dashboard/orders/analytics) {% endhint %} ## 📋 Overview The **Orders Analytics** page provides a complete visual overview of your Amazon sales performance. Combining KPI cards, trend charts, geographic breakdowns, and heatmaps, it gives you actionable insights into when, where, and how your products sell. Whether you are running a single-marketplace storefront or managing a pan-European portfolio, this page is your command center for understanding revenue patterns, spotting anomalies early, and making data-driven decisions about inventory, advertising, and pricing. *** ## 📊 Key Performance Indicators ![SellerMagnet Orders Analytics](https://4139654583-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Fih2knSvVpBcq5rIeXVjM%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-f1618b6fb6b1566338fd4cb901b0b74bfedf4b2d%2Forders-analytics.png?alt=media) At the top of the page, seven KPI cards give you an instant pulse check on your business health. | KPI | Description | Why It Matters | | ------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------ | | **Total Orders** | Number of orders in the selected period | Tracks demand volume independently of revenue | | **Total Revenue** | Combined revenue across all marketplaces | Your top-line number for the period | | **Profit** | Net profit after Amazon fees, shipping, and product costs (where set) | Shows what you actually keep, not just what you sell | | **Margin** | Net profit divided by gross revenue (including shipping) | Signals whether each euro of sales is worth keeping | | **Avg Order Value** | Average revenue per order (AOV) | Signals pricing health and cross-sell effectiveness | | **Total Units** | Total units sold | Reveals whether revenue growth comes from volume or price | | **Refund Rate** | Percentage of orders that were refunded | Early warning for product quality or listing accuracy issues | {% hint style="info" %} **Profit scope on this page:** The **Profit** and **Margin** cards are a full net figure. They deduct Amazon fees, refunds, shipping, product costs (COGS where you have set them), **and** advertising plus account-level costs - storage, subscriptions, service fees, and your own general expenses. Margin is measured against gross revenue (including shipping): **Good: 15% or more · Watch: 8-15% · Low: under 8%.** Note that the profit line in the **Revenue & Profit Trend** chart below shows direct margin only and can read higher than this card. {% endhint %} > **Pro tip:** Compare your AOV across different date ranges. A rising AOV with stable order count often means your upselling or bundling strategy is working. A falling AOV alongside rising order count may indicate you are discounting too aggressively. ### How to Read KPI Cards Effectively Each KPI card displays: * **Current value** for the selected date range * **Percentage change** compared to the previous equivalent period (e.g., last 30 days vs. the 30 days before that) * **Trend arrow:** green for improvement, red for decline {% hint style="info" %} **How the change is calculated:** Change % = (Current − Previous) ÷ Previous × 100. Up / green means better - **except for Refund Rate, where up means worse** (see the warning below). {% endhint %} {% hint style="danger" %} **Warning:** A green arrow on Refund Rate means the rate went **up**, which is actually bad. Always read this KPI in context, for Refund Rate, lower is better. {% endhint %} #### Refund Rate Health Bands The **Refund Rate** KPI is shown as a tiered pill that color-codes the value so you can judge it at a glance (lower is better): | 🟢 Good | 🟡 Watch | 🔴 High | | ---------- | -------- | -------- | | 3% or less | 3-6% | above 6% | A green pill means a healthy refund rate; a red pill flags a refund rate above 6% that deserves immediate investigation. {% hint style="info" %} **Why it is worth watching weekly:** A high refund rate (above 6%) can affect your account health and, in turn, how well your listings place in search. Catching a climbing rate early - before it becomes a pattern - is much cheaper than fixing it after reviews and rankings slip. {% endhint %} ### Period Comparison (Trends) A **Trends** pill near the filters toggles period comparison on and off. When enabled, the page compares your selected range against a comparison window (the previous equivalent period by default, with same-period-last-year and custom-range options) and surfaces the percentage change. {% hint style="info" %} Use the **same period last year** comparison around major events (Prime Day, Q4) for a fair benchmark, the default previous-period comparison can mislead when a sale event lands in only one of the two windows. {% endhint %} ### Marketplace vs. Marketplace Compare Matrix When you turn the **Trends** pill on and set its comparison to **another marketplace** (rather than a previous period), a **Marketplace comparison** matrix appears just below the KPI cards. It puts your baseline marketplace side by side with the marketplaces you are comparing against, one column each, across: * **Orders** * **Gross** (gross sales) * **Marketplace profit** * **Marketplace margin** * **Refund rate** This is the fastest way to see, at a glance, which market is pulling its weight and where margin or refund rates diverge between countries. {% hint style="info" %} **Per-marketplace profit note:** The **Marketplace profit** and **Marketplace margin** columns in this matrix exclude general expenses (overhead is not yet allocated per marketplace). For your total project profit including overheads, read the **Profit** KPI card above instead. {% endhint %} ### Forecast Toggle Next to the Trends pill sits a small **Forecast** pill. Flip it on and the **Revenue & Profit Trend** chart extends the current month with a projected month-end line, so you can see where you are likely to land if the current pace holds. The forecast applies to the **month-to-date (MTD)** view - it is the "where will this month finish?" overlay, and stays off for the other date ranges. *** ## 📈 Charts & Visualizations ### 1. Revenue & Profit Trend A **full-width line chart** showing revenue and profit over time for the selected period. Hover over data points to see daily/weekly values. **What to look for:** * **Consistent gap between revenue and profit lines:** healthy margin stability * **Narrowing gap:** rising costs (COGS, shipping, FBA fees) eating into profit * **Sudden drops:** stockouts, listing suppressions, or Buy Box losses * **Weekly patterns:** most Amazon categories see weekend dips; if yours does not, your niche may behave differently > **Pro tip:** If you see a sharp revenue drop on a specific day, cross-reference it with Amazon Seller Central notifications. Common causes include listing deactivations, inventory receipt delays, or category-wide Buy Box suppressions during Prime events. ### 2. Orders Heatmap A **7x24 grid** showing order volume by **day of week** and **hour of day**. Darker cells indicate higher order volume. Use this to identify peak selling times. {% hint style="info" %} **How to read the shading:** The **darkest** cell is your single busiest hour/day - your peak. Every other cell is shaded relative to it, so lighter cells are quieter windows. Read it as a relative map, not absolute counts. {% endhint %} **How to use the heatmap strategically:** 1. **PPC dayparting:** Increase ad bids during your darkest cells (peak hours) and reduce spend during light cells 2. **Lightning Deals timing:** Schedule deals to start just before your peak hours 3. **Customer service staffing:** Align support hours with peak order windows 4. **Inventory planning:** High-volume days help predict when stock levels will drop fastest #### Scenario: You Notice a Revenue Dip on Tuesdays You open the Orders Analytics page and notice that Tuesdays consistently show 20-30% lower revenue than other weekdays. Here is how to investigate: {% stepper %} {% step %} ### Check the heatmap Is Tuesday uniformly low, or is there a specific time block (e.g., morning hours) dragging it down? {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Compare marketplaces Use the marketplace filter to check each market individually. Maybe your DE marketplace is fine but UK drops on Tuesdays. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Cross-reference with PPC Are your ad campaigns pausing or reducing budget on Tuesdays? Check your dayparting rules. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Look at competitor activity Competitors may be running Tuesday-specific promotions that steal Buy Box share. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Review historical data Switch to L6M or L12M to confirm this is a consistent pattern, not a one-time anomaly. {% endstep %} {% endstepper %} **Action plan if confirmed:** * Increase PPC bids by 15-20% on Tuesday mornings * Schedule a Lightning Deal or coupon for Tuesdays * Test a Tuesday-specific promotion ("Tuesday Deal") for 4 weeks and measure impact {% hint style="info" %} **Quick win:** Even a 10% improvement on your weakest day can translate to significant monthly revenue. If Tuesdays average EUR 800 instead of your daily average of EUR 1,100, closing that gap by half adds roughly EUR 600/month. {% endhint %} ### 3. Revenue by Marketplace A **pie/donut chart** breaking down total revenue by Amazon marketplace (DE, US, UK, FR, IT, ES, etc.). **What healthy marketplace distribution looks like:** * If one marketplace accounts for more than 80% of revenue, you have concentration risk * Ideally, your top marketplace is under 60% with meaningful contribution from at least 2-3 others * Watch for marketplaces where revenue is declining quarter-over-quarter {% hint style="success" icon="circle-check" %} **Best practice:** If a marketplace contributes less than 5% of revenue but consumes significant management time, evaluate whether the ROI justifies the effort, or whether those resources could grow a mid-tier marketplace instead. {% endhint %} ### 4. Top Products by Revenue A **horizontal bar chart** showing your best-selling products ranked by revenue. **Strategic uses:** * Identify your "vital few": typically 20% of products drive 80% of revenue (Pareto principle) * Spot products dropping out of the top ranks over time * Compare against your profit data: top revenue products are not always top profit products ### 5. Revenue by Country A **bar chart** displaying revenue split by country for geographic performance analysis. Use this to: * Track expansion into new markets * Identify countries where you may need localized listings or translations * Spot geographic trends (e.g., Southern European markets growing faster in summer) ### 6. Order Value Distribution A **bar chart** grouping your orders into order-value bands so you can see how many orders fall into each price tier, rather than a single blended Average Order Value. **What to look for:** * **A tight cluster around your AOV:** consistent basket sizes, predictable pricing * **A long tail of high-value orders:** bundles, multi-unit purchases, or B2B buyers worth nurturing * **A spike of low-value orders:** single-unit or heavily discounted purchases that may drag margin down {% hint style="info" %} Read this chart alongside the **Avg Order Value** KPI. A healthy-looking AOV can hide a bimodal split, many small orders and a few large ones, that a single average smooths over. The distribution shows you the real shape. {% endhint %} *** ## 🔍 Filters | Filter | Options | Default | | --------------- | ----------------------------------------- | ------------ | | **Marketplace** | All Marketplaces, or select specific ones | All | | **Date Range** | L7D, L30D, MTD, YTD, L6M, L12M, Last Year | Last 30 days | ### Date Range Guide | Shortcode | Meaning | Best For | | ------------- | ---------------------- | ------------------------------------------------ | | **L7D** | Last 7 days | Quick pulse check, spotting immediate issues | | **L30D** | Last 30 days | Standard performance review | | **MTD** | Month to date | Tracking monthly targets | | **YTD** | Year to date | Annual trend analysis, year-over-year comparison | | **L6M** | Last 6 months | Medium-term trend identification | | **L12M** | Last 12 months | Seasonality analysis, long-term growth tracking | | **Last Year** | Previous calendar year | Year-over-year benchmarking | {% hint style="info" icon="lightbulb" %} **Tip:** When comparing periods, remember that L30D compares against the **previous** 30 days (days 31-60 ago). If a major sale event (e.g., Prime Day) falls in one period but not the other, the comparison may be misleading. {% endhint %} *** ## Weekly Analytics Review Checklist Use this template every Monday to stay on top of your numbers: * [ ] **Check Total Revenue vs. last week**: Are you trending up or down? * [ ] **Review Refund Rate**: Any spike above your 30-day average? * [ ] **Scan the heatmap**: Any new patterns or anomalies? * [ ] **Check Top Products**: Did any product drop out of the top 10? * [ ] **Review marketplace split**: Is any market growing or shrinking unexpectedly? * [ ] **Compare AOV**: Has average order value shifted? * [ ] **Cross-reference with PPC spend**: Is increased spend translating to proportional revenue? * [ ] **Note any external factors**: Holidays, competitor launches, Amazon policy changes {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro tip:** Screenshot your KPI cards every Monday and paste them into a shared team document or Slack channel. Over time, this creates a visual history that makes quarterly reviews much faster. {% endhint %} *** ## 🔄 Before & After: Using Analytics to Drive Decisions ### Before (No Analytics Review) > A seller notices revenue is "down" but cannot pinpoint why. They increase PPC spend across all campaigns by 20%, burning an additional EUR 1,200/month with no clear improvement. After 3 months, they have spent EUR 3,600 extra with marginal results. ### After (Weekly Analytics Review) > The same seller uses Orders Analytics and discovers: > > * Revenue dip is isolated to **one marketplace** (IT) where a competitor launched a similar product at a lower price > * The heatmap shows their peak hours shifted from 8 PM to 10 PM after a Prime Day algorithm update > * Their #3 top product dropped to #7 due to a stockout two weeks ago > > **Actions taken:** Adjusted IT pricing by 8%, shifted PPC dayparting to match new peak hours, expedited restock for the #3 product. Result: Revenue recovered within 2 weeks with no additional ad spend. ***
⚠️ Common Mistakes to Avoid
MistakeWhy it matters & what to do
Mistake 1: Reacting to daily noise instead of weekly trendsA single bad day does not make a trend. Always look at L7D or L30D before making pricing or advertising changes. One-day dips are normal and can be caused by Amazon search algorithm updates, CDN issues, or simply natural variance.
Mistake 2: Ignoring the Refund Rate KPIA refund rate climbing from 3% to 5% may not look dramatic, but on EUR 50,000/month revenue, that is an additional EUR 1,000 lost. Monitor this weekly and investigate any increase above 1 percentage point.
Mistake 3: Over-indexing on revenue without checking profitRevenue growth is meaningless if profit margins are shrinking. Always view the Revenue & Profit Trend chart together, not just the revenue line. A seller growing revenue 20% while profit drops 10% is heading for trouble.
Mistake 4: Not segmenting by marketplaceAggregate numbers can hide marketplace-specific problems. A 5% overall growth could mean DE grew 15% while UK declined 10%. Always check the marketplace breakdown.
Mistake 5: Comparing unequal periodsComparing a 30-day period that includes Prime Day against a normal 30-day period will show a misleading decline. Use YTD or L12M for fair comparisons around major events.
\## Use Case Scenarios ### Scenario: Seasonal Product Performance You sell both evergreen products and seasonal items (e.g., garden furniture and Christmas decorations). Here is how to use Orders Analytics: 1. Filter by **L12M** to see the full annual cycle 2. Note which months show revenue peaks: these correspond to your seasonal products ramping up 3. Use **Top Products by Revenue** to confirm which products drive the seasonal spikes 4. Tag these products (see [Product Tags](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview/product-tags)) as "Seasonal - Q4" or "Seasonal - Summer" 5. Next year, use this data to time your inventory shipments 6-8 weeks before the expected ramp-up ### Scenario: New Marketplace Launch Assessment You expanded into Amazon FR two months ago. Here is how to evaluate performance: 1. Set the date range to match your launch period 2. Filter to **FR marketplace only** 3. Check if your order count is growing week-over-week (even small growth is positive in month 1-2) 4. Compare your FR AOV against your DE or UK AOV: if it is significantly lower, your pricing may need adjustment for the French market 5. Use the heatmap to identify when French customers shop: it may differ from your home market *** ## 🔧 Troubleshooting | Issue | Possible Cause | Solution | | ------------------------------------ | ------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------- | | KPI cards show zero | No orders in selected period/marketplace | Expand the date range or check marketplace filter | | Revenue chart shows flat line | Single day selected or very narrow range | Switch to L7D or L30D for meaningful trends | | Heatmap appears mostly empty | Low order volume in selected period | Use a longer date range (L6M or L12M) to accumulate data | | Marketplace chart missing a market | No sales in that marketplace for the period | Confirm your listings are active in that marketplace | | Numbers do not match Seller Central | Data sync delay (typically 2-4 hours) | Wait for the next sync cycle; check your last sync timestamp | | Profit line missing from trend chart | Cost data not yet configured | Ensure you have entered COGS (Cost of Goods Sold) for your products | *** ## ❓ FAQ
How often is the data updated? Order data syncs from Amazon every 2-4 hours. KPIs and charts refresh automatically when new data arrives. You can see your last sync timestamp in the account settings.
Can I export the charts? Currently, chart export is not available directly. You can take screenshots or use the Orders table export for raw data. Chart export functionality is on the roadmap.
Why does my revenue here differ from Amazon Seller Central? Small discrepancies (under 2%) are normal and typically caused by timing differences in data sync, currency conversion rounding, or pending orders that have not yet settled. If the discrepancy is larger, check that all your marketplaces are connected.
Can I see data for a specific product only? The Orders Analytics page shows aggregate data. To analyze a specific product, use the Product Tags feature to tag it and then filter your Orders table by that tag. Product-level analytics are available in the Products section.
What timezone are the heatmap hours in? The heatmap uses the **buyer's local timezone** based on the marketplace. For example, Amazon DE orders show in CET/CEST, while Amazon US orders show in the timezone of the buyer's shipping address.
How far back does historical data go? SellerMagnet stores your complete order history from the moment you connect your Amazon account. The "Last Year" filter shows the previous calendar year. For data before your account connection date, historical import may be available depending on your plan.
*** ## 💡 Tips {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro tip:** Use the heatmap to identify your peak selling hours, then align your PPC dayparting strategy to maximize ad visibility during those windows. Sellers who align ad spend with peak hours report 15-25% better ACoS (Advertising Cost of Sale) on average. {% endhint %} {% hint style="info" %} **Privacy mode:** If you are sharing your screen during team calls or presentations, toggle the privacy mode to blur all numeric values across KPIs and charts. This is especially useful when presenting strategies without revealing exact revenue figures. {% endhint %} {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro tip:** Bookmark the Orders Analytics page with your most-used filter combination (e.g., L30D + DE marketplace). The URL preserves your filter state, so you can jump straight to your preferred view. {% endhint %} {% hint style="info" %} **Team collaboration:** If multiple team members manage different marketplaces, have each person set up their own bookmarked view filtered to their assigned marketplace. This speeds up daily check-ins and ensures accountability. {% endhint %} *** ## ➡️ What's Next? {% content-ref url="/pages/QUfddxcjTGMwmLVQVH0o" %} [Refunded Orders](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview/refunded-orders) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/5vsXtaqLonaWayeTIHV6" %} [Reports](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview/reports) {% endcontent-ref %} # Refunded Orders Track and analyze all refunded orders, monitor incoming returns with carrier tracking, and understand your refund trends with detailed breakdowns. {% hint style="info" %} **Difficulty:** 🟡 Intermediate · **Reading time:** \~15 min {% endhint %} {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Open this page in your dashboard:** [**Go to Refunded Orders →**](https://dashboard.sellermagnet.com/dashboard/orders/refunded) {% endhint %} ## 📋 Overview The **Refunded Orders** page gives you full visibility into every return and refund across your Amazon accounts. Track the financial impact, monitor in-transit returns with carrier tracking, analyze refund reasons, and export data for reporting. Returns are an unavoidable part of selling on Amazon, but they do not have to be a black box. This page transforms raw refund data into actionable intelligence, helping you reduce return rates, recover costs where possible, and catch product or listing issues before they escalate. *** ## 📊 Key Performance Indicators | KPI | Description | Why It Matters | | ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Net Impact** | Total refund cost minus any reimbursements received | Your true bottom-line loss from returns | | **Label Costs** | Shipping and return label expenses | Reveals the hidden cost beyond product refund value | | **Items Refunded** | Total number of items returned | Tracks return volume independently of financial impact | | **Avg Value Per Return** | Average cost per refund transaction | Identifies whether high-value or low-value products drive most returns | ### Reading the KPI Cards Each card shows the **current value** for your selected date range plus a **comparison percentage** against the previous equivalent period. For refund KPIs, remember: * **Net Impact going up** = more money lost to refunds (bad) * **Label Costs going up** = shipping costs for returns are increasing (bad) * **Avg Value Per Return going up** = your more expensive products are being returned more often (investigate immediately) {% hint style="danger" %} **Warning:** Do not look at Net Impact in isolation. A Net Impact increase could simply mean your sales volume grew (more sales = more returns in absolute terms). Always check your **refund rate** alongside Net Impact to distinguish between volume growth and a genuine quality problem. {% endhint %} > **Pro tip:** Set a personal threshold for each KPI. For example: "If Net Impact exceeds 4% of revenue or Avg Value Per Return exceeds EUR 25, I investigate immediately." Having predefined thresholds prevents you from normalizing gradually worsening numbers. ### Period-Compare Pill Next to the marketplace and date-range selectors sits a small **compare pill**. Turn it on to lay a comparison window over the whole page at once - the **previous equivalent period** by default, or **another marketplace**. The comparison flows through the **KPI cards, the Refund Volume Trend chart, the Return Reasons distribution, and the Refunds Table**, so you can see at a glance whether refunds are trending up or down rather than reading a single date range in isolation. {% hint style="info" %} The comparison percentages on the KPI cards come from this pill. When it is off, the cards still show the current-period value; turn the pill on to surface the period-over-period change and the trend arrows. {% endhint %} *** ## 📈 Charts ### Refund Volume Trend A **line/area chart** showing refund volume over time, helping you identify trends, seasonal spikes, or issues with specific products. **What to look for:** * **Gradual upward trend:** May indicate a slow-developing quality issue, or could simply track with sales growth. Check the percentage rate, not just absolute numbers. * **Sudden spikes:** A spike 2-3 weeks after a product launch often points to listing inaccuracy (customer expectations vs. reality mismatch). * **Seasonal patterns:** Returns typically spike in January (post-holiday), and after Prime Day. These are expected and normal. * **Day-of-week patterns:** Some categories see higher Monday returns (customers returning weekend impulse purchases). {% hint style="info" %} **Context matters:** Amazon's return window is typically 30 days. A spike in refunds today may relate to orders placed 2-4 weeks ago. Always look back at your order data for the corresponding period. {% endhint %} ### Return Reasons Distribution A **bar chart** breaking down returns by reason category. Available for **FBM orders** where return reason data is provided by Amazon. **Common return reason categories and what they signal:** | Return Reason | What It Signals | Typical Action | | ----------------------------- | ------------------------------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------- | | **Not as described** | Listing does not match product reality | Audit listing images, bullet points, and A+ content | | **Defective / Does not work** | Product quality issue | Contact supplier, check batch quality, review QC process | | **Wrong item sent** | Fulfillment or labeling error | Audit FNSKU labels and fulfillment workflow | | **No longer needed** | Impulse purchase or buyer's remorse | Generally not actionable; monitor for unusual volume | | **Better price found** | Competitive pricing issue | Review pricing strategy and competitor landscape | | **Arrived too late** | Shipping or delivery delay | Check carrier performance and shipping SLA compliance | | **Unauthorized purchase** | Potential fraud or shared account purchase | Monitor for patterns; may warrant fraud investigation | {% hint style="info" icon="circle-info" %} **Note:** Return reasons are only available for FBM (Fulfilled by Merchant) orders. FBA return reasons are managed by Amazon and visible in Seller Central's FBA returns report. SellerMagnet pulls what Amazon's API makes available. {% endhint %} > **Pro tip:** If "Not as described" accounts for more than 20% of your returns, this is a high-priority fix. Improving listing accuracy is one of the highest-ROI actions you can take, it simultaneously reduces returns, improves reviews, and boosts conversion rate. *** ## Incoming Returns (FBM) For FBM orders, a dedicated **Incoming Returns** section shows returns currently in transit back to your warehouse. Each incoming return card displays: * **Order ID** and date * **Status badge** (Incoming, etc.) * **Product preview:** Image, title, SKU (Stock Keeping Unit) * **Carrier badge:** Branded carrier icon (DHL, UPS, FedEx, DPD, Hermes, GLS, etc.) * **Tracking number** and a **Fetch live status** button (see Live Carrier Status below) ### 📡 Live Carrier Status Live carrier tracking is wired into **three** places on the Refunds surface, and every one of them opens the **same** shared **Live carrier status** modal (marked **Beta**). The button only appears on rows that already carry a **tracking number**; the modal queries the carrier **on demand** (it does not auto-fetch) when you click **Fetch live status**. | Where you find it | What it looks like | | ------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Incoming Returns card** | A full-width **Fetch live status** button on each return parcel in transit | | **Refunds Table row** | A compact **Fetch live status** button in the **Carrier** cell | | **Detail side panel** | A **Fetch live status** button on the **Live status** row inside **Return Shipment Details** | Whichever entry point you use, the modal shows the same live read of the return shipment: | Element | What it shows | | --------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | | **Status badge** | Current carrier status: Delivered, In transit, Out for delivery, Undelivered, Exception, Info received, Pending, Expired, or Not found | | **Delivery verdict** | A plain-language read of on-time-vs-late - **Delivered on time**, **Delivered late** (by N days), **Delivered**, or **Awaiting delivery confirmation** | | **Tracking number** | The tracking ID in monospace | | **Route** | Origin → destination with country flags | | **Date tiles** | Carrier, service, transit days, and shipped / delivered dates when available | | **Tracking timeline** | A chronological checkpoint list (event, date/time, and location) so you can follow the return's journey | {% hint style="info" %} **Coverage:** Live tracking spans **1,600+ couriers worldwide**. If a return has no tracking number yet, the row shows an **Awaiting tracking** placeholder instead - the live status activates as soon as the buyer ships the return. {% endhint %} ### Supported Carriers SellerMagnet automatically detects and displays branded badges for 20+ carriers: | Region | Carriers | | ---------------- | ---------------------------------------------- | | **Pan-European** | DHL, UPS, FedEx, DPD, GLS | | **Germany** | DHL, Hermes, DPD, GLS | | **UK** | Royal Mail, Hermes/Evri, DPD UK, Yodel | | **France** | La Poste, Colissimo, Chronopost, Mondial Relay | | **Italy** | Poste Italiane, BRT, SDA | | **Spain** | Correos, SEUR, MRW | | **Netherlands** | PostNL, DHL Parcel NL | | **Poland** | InPost, Poczta Polska | > **Pro tip:** Check the Incoming Returns section daily if you manage FBM orders. Knowing when a return will arrive lets you plan inspection, restocking, and inventory adjustments. Products returned in sellable condition can be relisted faster, reducing your out-of-stock window. ### Incoming Returns Workflow {% stepper %} {% step %} ### Customer initiates return Status: Return Requested {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Label created SellerMagnet captures the carrier and tracking number {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Package in transit Status: In Transit (click tracking number to follow on carrier site) {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Package delivered Status: Delivered (inspect the item) {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Refund processed The return moves from Incoming Returns to the Refunds Table {% endstep %} {% endstepper %} {% hint style="info" %} **Automation idea:** If you consistently receive returns in non-sellable condition from a specific product, consider tagging it with a "High Return Risk" tag (see [Product Tags](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview/product-tags)) so your team knows to inspect it carefully before restocking. {% endhint %} *** ## Refunds Table ![Refunded Orders - Returns analytics and refund tracking](https://4139654583-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Fih2knSvVpBcq5rIeXVjM%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-af4c48e356fac1481b6b4465e7a2b411e36d7e8f%2Frefunded-orders.png?alt=media) {% hint style="info" %} **Where to focus first:** Sort by **Return Reason**. Reasons like "Not as described" or "Defective" point to listing or product quality issues you can fix. Reasons like "No longer needed" or "Better price found" are normal, every seller gets these. {% endhint %} The main data table provides a detailed, sortable, and filterable view of all processed refunds. | Column | Description | | ----------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Marketplace** | Country flag | | **Refund Date** | When the refund was processed | | **Order ID** | Clickable Amazon order identifier | | **Products** | Number of products in the return | | **Status** | Incoming, Processed, or Label Only | | **Carrier** | Carrier badge with tracking number and a **Fetch live status** button | | **Return Reason** | Reason provided by buyer (FBM) or Amazon (FBA) | | **Net Impact** | Financial impact in your account currency | | **Actions** | View full details in side panel | ### Status Definitions | Status | Color | Meaning | | ------------------------ | ------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | | **Incoming** | Amber | Return is approved/in transit or awaiting delivery: a label exists but no product refund has posted yet | | **Refunded / Processed** | Green | A product refund has posted (the return has been settled) | | **Label Only** | Indigo | Only a return label or adjustment cost exists, with no product refund (the buyer may not send the item back) | {% hint style="info" %} **Quick win:** Filter the table by "Label Only" status periodically. These are cases where the customer requested a return but may not have sent the item back. Amazon may still have issued a refund. If the return window has passed and no shipment was made, you may be eligible for a reimbursement through Amazon's SAFE-T claim process. {% endhint %} *** ## Detail Side Panel Click any row to open a detailed breakdown. The panel stacks several cards, each answering a different question about the refund - from "what shipped back" to "what did this actually cost me." * **Return Shipment Details:** Order ID, date, status, and a **Live status** row with the **Fetch live status** button * **Order Overview:** Original sale vs. refund, line by line (see below) * **Net Impact:** Your real economic loss, with the sellable/damaged split (see below) * **Cash Flow Details:** The full per-item breakdown of every credit and charge (see below) * **Timeline History:** Animated timeline showing each step of the return process (return initiated -> label created -> shipped -> delivered -> refund processed) ### 📦 Items Recovered vs. Items Written Off {% hint style="success" %} **The plain-English version:** A returned unit that comes back **Damaged** can't be sold again, so you lose what you paid for it - its cost (COGS) is written off as a **real loss**. A unit that comes back **Sellable** goes back on the shelf to sell again, so there is **no COGS write-off**. Same refund to the customer either way; the difference is whether you also lost the product. {% endhint %} The heart of the panel is the distinction between units that came back **sellable** (recovered to inventory) and units that came back **damaged** (written off as a loss). SellerMagnet splits each refunded line into: * **Items recovered (sellable):** These units returned to your inventory and can be sold again. Their cost (COGS) is **not** written off. * **Items written off (damaged):** Amazon returned these as damaged. Their cost **is** lost, so it counts against your Net Impact. Each line shows a **source badge** indicating where the sellable/damaged decision came from, resolved in this priority order: | Source badge | What it means | | ------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Manual** | You set the disposition by hand using the override control (below) | | **FBA scan** | Amazon's FBA returns scan reported the unit's condition (e.g. sellable, customer-damaged, carrier-damaged, defective) | | **SKU default** | A per-SKU "returns sellable" default you configured on the product | | **Project default** | Your project-wide default, used when nothing more specific applies | ### Override control (Auto / Sellable / Damaged) Each refunded line that has a linked cost batch carries an **Override sellable / damaged** control with three options: | Option | Behavior | | ------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Auto** | Follows the automatic resolution (FBA scan → per-SKU default → project default). The currently active source is shown in parentheses next to the option, e.g. *Auto (FBA scan)* | | **Sellable** | Forces all refunded units on this line to count as recovered - COGS is **not** written off | | **Damaged** | Forces all refunded units to count as written off - COGS **is** lost | {% hint style="info" %} **Why set an override?** The override changes the refund's **Net Impact** - but only when the project setting **"Include COGS in refund Net Impact"** is on. With that setting on, units marked **Damaged** add their cost to your loss, while units marked **Sellable** do not. Use the override when you know better than the automatic source: for example, Amazon's scan flagged a unit as damaged but you inspected it and it is perfectly resellable (set it **Sellable** to stop overstating your loss), or a unit was returned "sellable" but arrived broken (set it **Damaged** to capture the real loss). {% endhint %} {% hint style="info" icon="circle-info" %} **No cost batch, no override.** The override only appears on lines that have a cost batch linked on the Products page. Without a linked cost, there is no COGS to write off, so the toggle would have no effect and is hidden. If you see *"Inventory loss not tracked,"* add a cost batch to that product to start counting it. {% endhint %} ### Order Overview card This card lays out the original sale against the refund so you can see exactly what the customer paid, what came back, and what they kept. It is a four-column table (**Original**, **Refunded**, **Kept**) with these rows: | Row | What it shows | | ------------------- | ----------------------------- | | **Items (net)** | Item price excluding VAT | | **VAT on items** | VAT charged on the items | | **Shipping (net)** | Shipping charge excluding VAT | | **VAT on shipping** | VAT charged on shipping | | **Gross total** | Sum of the above | A coverage pill below the table summarizes whether this was a **Full refund**, **Partial refund**, or **No refund yet**, alongside how many units of the order were refunded. ### Net Impact card This card is the headline summary - *your real economic loss from this refund*. It walks through each component so you can trace the math: | Row | What it shows | | ------------------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Items written off** | COGS of the damaged units (carries the source badge). Shows a zero/placeholder when COGS is excluded by your project settings or no cost batch is linked | | **Amazon's net fees** | The net of Amazon's fee adjustments on the refund (labelled *"Amazon's net fees (gross)"* when a VAT-reclaim line is present) | | **VAT reclaim on Amazon fees** | The reclaimable VAT portion of Amazon's gross fees, shown only when applicable - it is not a real P\&L cost, so it offsets on your VAT return | | **Other adjustments** | Any remaining credits or charges | | **Total Net Impact** | The bottom-line figure | {% hint style="info" %} **Why the cash refund is excluded:** A discreet **"Customer refund (cash only)"** line shows the cash paid back to the buyer, but it is *excluded* from Net Impact. It reverses the original sale revenue and the VAT pass-through (which offsets on your VAT return), so only your real out-of-pocket losses are counted in the total. {% endhint %} ### Cash Flow Details card The final card is the full per-item breakdown - every credit and charge that makes up the refund, humanized into plain labels (for example, *Items refunded (net)*, *VAT / Tax refunded*, *Referral fee refund*, *Return label postage*). Each refunded line shows its **Items recovered (sellable)** and/or **Items written off (damaged)** split with the COGS write-off, the override control, and a **Return label & adjustments** section for shipping and label charges. Use this card when you need to reconcile the Net Impact figure down to the individual line items. ### Using the Detail Panel for Investigations When investigating a specific return: {% stepper %} {% step %} ### Check the product breakdown Multi-item returns often have one problematic item that triggers the entire order return {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Review the timeline A long gap between "label created" and "shipped" may indicate a reluctant returner (potential for non-return) {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Note the return reason Cross-reference with other returns for the same SKU to identify patterns {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Check the net impact Compare against the product's profit margin to understand the true loss {% endstep %} {% endstepper %} *** ## 🔍 Filters | Filter | Options | Default | | ---------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------ | | **Marketplace** | All Marketplaces, or multi-select specific ones | All | | **Date Range** | Today, Yesterday, L7D, L30D, MTD, YTD, L6M, L12M, Last Year, Custom | Last 30 days | | **Custom Dates** | Calendar picker with range selection | : | > **Pro tip:** Use the **Custom Dates** filter to isolate refunds from a specific product launch window. For example, if you launched a new product on March 1st, set the date range to March 1-31 to see the first-month return profile. A return rate above 8% in the first month is a red flag worth investigating. *** ## 📤 Export Click **Export CSV** to download all refund data matching your current filters, including marketplace, dates, products, reasons, carrier info, and financial impact. **The export includes these columns:** * Marketplace, Refund Date, Order ID * Product Name, SKU, ASIN (Amazon Standard Identification Number), Quantity * Return Reason, Status, Carrier, Tracking Number * Refund Amount, Label Cost, Net Impact {% hint style="info" %} **Use case:** Export your refund data monthly and import it into a spreadsheet to build a rolling 12-month return analysis. This makes quarterly business reviews and supplier negotiations much more data-driven. {% endhint %} *** ## Scenario: Your Return Rate Suddenly Jumped 15% You open the Refunded Orders page and notice your refund rate has increased from 4% to 4.6% (a 15% relative increase). Here is a systematic investigation workflow: ### Step 1: Determine the Scope * **Filter by marketplace:** Is the spike across all markets or isolated to one? * **Check the date range:** When did the spike start? Narrow down to the exact week. ### Step 2: Identify the Cause Products * **Sort the Refunds Table by product:** Are 1-2 products responsible for most of the increase? * **Check the Return Reasons chart:** Has a specific reason category grown? ### Step 3: Investigate Root Cause | If you find... | Likely cause | Action | | -------------------------------------- | -------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------ | | One product drives 70%+ of new returns | Product quality or listing issue | Pull the listing, inspect inventory, fix listing | | "Not as described" spiked | Recent listing change | Revert listing changes made in the past 2 weeks | | "Defective" spiked | Bad batch from supplier | Quarantine current inventory, contact supplier | | Returns spread across many products | Shipping/fulfillment issue | Check carrier delays, packaging quality | | Spike only in one marketplace | Market-specific issue | Check local reviews, competitor activity | ### Step 4: Take Action and Monitor * Implement the fix * Set a calendar reminder to check the refund rate again in 7 and 14 days * If the rate has not returned to baseline within 2 weeks, escalate the investigation {% hint style="danger" %} **Warning:** Do not ignore a 15%+ refund rate increase even if absolute numbers seem small. Amazon monitors return rates at the ASIN level, and a high return rate can lead to listing suppression, removal of the "Fulfilled by Amazon" badge, or in extreme cases, ASIN deactivation. {% endhint %} *** ## Weekly Refund Review Process Follow this template every week to stay proactive about returns: ### Monday Review (15 minutes) 1. **Open Refunded Orders, set filter to L7D** 2. **Check KPI cards:** Compare Net Impact and Items Refunded against last week 3. **Scan the Refund Volume Trend:** Any unusual spikes mid-week? 4. **Review Return Reasons chart:** Any category growing disproportionately? 5. **Check Incoming Returns:** Are there deliveries expected this week? ### Monthly Detailed Analysis (30 minutes) 1. **Set filter to L30D** 2. **Export CSV** and calculate refund rate per SKU 3. **Rank products by return rate:** Flag anything above 5% 4. **Cross-reference top returners with customer reviews:** Are reviews mentioning the same issues as return reasons? 5. **Calculate label cost trends:** Are shipping costs per return increasing? 6. **Update product tags:** Tag products with "High Return Rate" if above threshold (see [Product Tags](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview/product-tags)) ### Quarterly Business Review Data * Total refund Net Impact as a percentage of revenue * Top 5 returned products with root cause analysis * Return reason distribution trend (quarter over quarter) * Label cost trend * Actions taken and their impact *** ## 🔄 Before & After: Systematic Refund Management ### Before (Reactive Approach) > A seller checks refunds only when they notice a cash flow issue. By the time they investigate, a defective product batch has been selling for 6 weeks. Result: 340 returns, EUR 8,500 in refund costs, 47 one-star reviews, and a listing health warning from Amazon. ### After (Proactive Weekly Review) > The same seller implements a weekly Monday review using SellerMagnet's Refunded Orders page. In week 2 of the same scenario, they spot a "Defective" return reason spike for one ASIN. They immediately: > > * Pull 120 remaining units from FBA inventory for inspection > * Contact the supplier with defect evidence > * Pause PPC for the affected ASIN > > Result: 45 returns (vs. 340), EUR 1,100 in refund costs (vs. EUR 8,500), 8 negative reviews (vs. 47), and no listing health warning. The supplier covered the defective batch cost. ***
⚠️ Common Mistakes to Avoid
MistakeWhy it matters & what to do
Mistake 1: Ignoring "Label Only" refundsWhen Amazon issues a returnless refund or the customer gets a label but never ships, you lose the product AND the money. Regularly filter for "Label Only" status and file SAFE-T claims for items never returned after the return window closes.
Mistake 2: Not tracking label costs separatelyLabel costs add up quickly, especially for heavy or oversized items. A EUR 15 product with a EUR 6 return label effectively has a 40% return cost overhead. Factor label costs into your product profitability calculations.
Mistake 3: Treating all returns as equalA return for "no longer needed" is fundamentally different from "defective." The first is normal buyer behavior; the second is a quality alert. Separate your analysis by return reason to avoid false alarms or missed real problems.
Mistake 4: Not correlating returns with listing changesIf you updated product images, titles, or bullet points recently and returns spike with "not as described," the listing change likely created a mismatch between customer expectations and reality. Always note listing change dates and check returns 2-4 weeks later.
Mistake 5: Forgetting FBA reimbursement claimsAmazon sometimes damages returned inventory or loses it in the warehouse. Check your FBA reimbursement reports regularly. SellerMagnet's Net Impact calculation accounts for reimbursements, so if your Net Impact seems high relative to refund volume, you may have unreimbursed losses.
\## 🔧 Troubleshooting | Issue | Possible Cause | Solution | | ------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------ | | No refunds showing in the table | No refunds in selected period or marketplace | Expand date range; check marketplace filter | | Carrier badge shows "Unknown" | Carrier not recognized from tracking number format | The tracking link still works; badge is cosmetic only | | Return reason shows blank | FBA order (reasons managed by Amazon) | Check Amazon Seller Central FBA Returns report | | Net Impact seems too high | Reimbursements not yet processed by Amazon | Wait 5-7 business days; Amazon processes reimbursements in batches | | Incoming Returns count does not match table | Incoming section shows FBM only | FBA returns are managed by Amazon and may not show as "incoming" | | Export CSV is empty | Filters too restrictive | Reset filters to All Marketplaces + L30D and try again | | Timeline in side panel is incomplete | Return still in progress | Check back later; timeline updates as events occur | *** ## ❓ FAQ
How quickly do refunds appear after Amazon processes them? Refund data typically appears within 2-4 hours of Amazon processing the refund. The Incoming Returns section updates more frequently as carrier tracking data changes.
Can I dispute a return through SellerMagnet? SellerMagnet is an analytics and tracking tool. To dispute a return or file a SAFE-T claim, you need to do so through Amazon Seller Central. However, SellerMagnet provides all the data you need to build your case (order details, tracking info, timeline).
Why does my refund rate differ from Amazon Seller Central? SellerMagnet calculates refund rate as (refunded orders / total orders) for the selected period. Amazon may use different calculation methods or timeframes. Small differences (under 1 percentage point) are normal.
Are partial refunds included? Yes. Partial refunds appear in the table with the actual refunded amount. The Net Impact KPI reflects the true financial impact including partial refunds.
Can I see which warehouse received the return? For FBM returns, the return destination is your configured return address. For FBA returns, Amazon manages warehouse routing and this information is available in Seller Central's FBA inventory reports.
How do I track refunds for multi-pack or bundle products? Refunds are tracked at the order item level. If a customer returns one item from a bundle, it shows as a partial return with the corresponding refund amount. The product breakdown in the side panel shows exactly which items were returned.
Is there a way to get alerts for high refund rates? Automated alerts are on the roadmap. In the meantime, we recommend the weekly Monday review process described above. You can also tag high-risk products using Product Tags for easy filtering.
*** ## 💡 Tips > **Pro tip:** Monitor your **refund rate** KPI closely. A sudden increase may indicate a product quality issue, listing inaccuracy, or shipping problem that needs immediate attention. Set your personal red-flag threshold at a 10% relative increase week-over-week. > Use the **Return Reasons** chart to identify the most common reason for returns. If "Not as described" is high, review your product listings for accuracy. This single action can reduce returns by 20-40% for affected products. > **Pro tip:** When negotiating with suppliers, export your refund data for their products and present the defect return rate. Concrete data strengthens your position for quality improvement demands, cost credits, or improved QC processes. {% hint style="info" %} **Seasonal awareness:** Return rates naturally increase in January (post-holiday returns) and after Prime Day. Do not panic if your January refund rate is 1-2 percentage points above normal. Compare against the same period last year for a fair benchmark. {% endhint %} *** ## ➡️ What's Next? {% content-ref url="/pages/nXtCVcpldqI1cfeA606R" %} [Orders Analytics](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview/orders-analytics) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/yWniwYR2YpKfuBE4gaNy" %} [Products Management](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview/products-management) {% endcontent-ref %} # Returned Orders See every FBA return with the condition Amazon's warehouse graded it in and the reason the buyer gave - so you know how many units went back into stock, how many came back damaged or defective, and wh {% hint style="info" %} **Difficulty:** 🟢 Beginner · **Reading time:** \~8 min {% endhint %} {% hint style="warning" %} **Early access:** Returned Orders is a newer module that is still rolling out. If it is not switched on for your account yet, the page opens **blurred** behind a **join-the-waitlist** card - add yourself there and we will enable it. Demo accounts can explore it with sample data. Everything below describes the page once it is unlocked. {% endhint %} ![Returned Orders](https://4139654583-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Fih2knSvVpBcq5rIeXVjM%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-f62ff85f468ee654754ab1b4ca325d6ce832e450%2Freturned-orders.png?alt=media) ## 📋 Overview The **Returned Orders** page shows your **FBA returns** the way Amazon's warehouse sees them: for each returned unit, the **condition** Amazon graded it in when it arrived back, and the **reason** the customer gave for returning it. That tells you two things a refund total never can - how much of what came back is **sellable again**, and **why** customers are returning in the first place. {% hint style="warning" %} **FBA only.** Amazon inspects and grades returns for FBA orders in its warehouses. It does **not** inspect merchant-fulfilled (FBM) returns, so there is no equivalent condition or reason data for them - and this page covers FBA only. For FBM returns and the financial side of refunds, use [Refunded Orders](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview/refunded-orders). {% endhint %} {% hint style="info" %} **Where the data comes from:** Amazon's **FBA Customer Returns report**, which SellerMagnet syncs for you. Amazon can split one return across several disposition rows, so unit counts are summed by **quantity**, not by row. {% endhint %} ## 🔍 Where to find it Returned Orders is the **second tab of the Refunded Orders page**. Open **Refunded Orders** from the sidebar (under the orders group), then switch to the **Returned Orders** tab (rotate-left icon) in the tab strip at the top. While the module is in early access, that tab carries an **hourglass** badge. The two tabs are complementary: * **Refunded Orders** - the money: refund cost, label costs, net impact, and FBM incoming returns with carrier tracking. * **Returned Orders** - the goods: what physically came back on FBA, in what condition, and why. ## 🎛️ Filters | Control | What it does | | --------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Marketplace** | All Marketplaces or a specific one. | | **Period** | **Last 7 Days**, **Last 30 Days** (default), **This Month**, **Last Month**, **Last 6 Months**, or **Last 12 Months**. | | **Condition** | Filter by disposition: All Conditions, Sellable, Customer Damaged, Defective, Carrier Damaged, Warehouse Damaged. | An **Updated HH:MM** timestamp shows when the figures last loaded. The table pages at 100 rows per page. ## 📊 Key metrics Four tiles summarize the period: | Tile | What it shows | | ------------------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Returned Units** | FBA units back at the warehouse in this period, with an "across {n} orders" note. | | **Back in Stock** | Sellable units and their share - the units Amazon graded **Sellable** and restocked. | | **Damaged or Defective** | Units that did **not** go back into stock. These are the ones worth checking for reimbursement. | | **Top Return Reason** | The most frequent return reason in the period, with an "of {n} units" note. | ## 🏷️ Return condition (disposition) The **Condition** column is Amazon's own warehouse verdict on each returned unit - the single most important field on this page, because it tells you whether you got the unit back to sell again. It is shown as a coloured chip: | Chip | Meaning | | ----------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------- | | **Sellable** (green) | Graded good and put back into your sellable stock. | | **Customer Damaged** (orange) | Returned damaged by the customer; not resellable as-is. | | **Defective** (red) | Graded defective. | | **Carrier Damaged** (blue) | Damaged in transit by the carrier. | | **Warehouse Damaged** (red) | Damaged in Amazon's warehouse handling. | | **Unknown** (grey) | Amazon sent no disposition, or a blank one. | {% hint style="success" %} **Why condition matters:** a **Sellable** return costs you far less than a damaged one - the unit is back in stock and can be sold again. Anything **not** Sellable is a candidate for a reimbursement claim, especially **Carrier Damaged** and **Warehouse Damaged**, where Amazon or the carrier - not you - caused the loss. {% endhint %} ## 📝 Return reason The **Reason** column is the reason the **buyer** selected when returning, straight from Amazon (for example `DEFECTIVE`, `NO_LONGER_NEEDED`, `UNWANTED_ITEM`, `NOT_AS_DESCRIBED`). SellerMagnet tidies the raw code into readable words; there is **no fixed list**, so whatever reason Amazon sends is what you see. An empty reason shows as `-`. The most common reason across the period is surfaced as the **Top Return Reason** tile. {% hint style="info" %} **Reason vs Condition - two different questions.** The **Reason** is what the buyer *said* ("not as described", "no longer needed"). The **Condition** is what Amazon's warehouse *found* when the unit arrived. A buyer can claim "defective" on a unit that comes back **Sellable**, or return something "unwanted" that arrives **Customer Damaged**. Reading them together is where the insight is. {% endhint %} ## 📋 The returns table | Column | What it shows | | -------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Returned** | The return date and time. | | **Product** | Thumbnail, product name, and SKU (falls back to the ASIN). | | **Order** | The order ID, linked into Seller Central when the marketplace domain validates as an `amazon.*` host. | | **Marketplace** | Country flag and marketplace name. | | **Qty** | Quantity returned (defaults to 1). | | **Condition** | The disposition chip (see above). | | **Reason** | The buyer's return reason (see above). | | **Customer Comment** | Any free-text comment the buyer left (`-` if none). | {% hint style="info" %} **Reimbursements are not linked from this table.** The tiles point you toward reimbursements in words ("check reimbursements"), but there is no clickable reimbursement column here. To actually file or track claims for damaged returns, use the [Reimbursements (Lost & Found)](/inventory-and-operations/reimbursements) page. {% endhint %} ## 🧭 A weekly returns check {% stepper %} {% step %} ### Read the Back-in-Stock share If most of your returned units come back **Sellable**, your return cost is mostly the handling - not lost inventory. A low sellable share means returns are quietly eating stock. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Filter to the damaged conditions Set the **Condition** filter to **Carrier Damaged** and **Warehouse Damaged** in turn. These are losses Amazon or the carrier caused - take them to [Reimbursements](/inventory-and-operations/reimbursements). {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Check the Top Return Reason A dominant reason like **Not As Described** points at a listing problem (wrong images, unclear sizing); **Defective** points at product quality. Fix the cause, not just the symptom. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Cross-read reason against condition "Defective" reasons landing as **Sellable** conditions can mean buyers are returning good units - sometimes a listing-expectation issue rather than a real defect. {% endstep %} {% endstepper %} ## ❓ FAQ
Why don't I see my FBM returns here? Amazon only inspects and grades returns it handles in its own warehouses - that is, FBA. It never inspects merchant-fulfilled returns, so there is no condition or reason data to show for FBM. FBM returns and all refund finances live on the [Refunded Orders](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview/refunded-orders) tab.
What is the difference between "Condition" and "Reason"? **Condition** is Amazon's warehouse grading of the physical unit (Sellable, Customer Damaged, Defective, and so on). **Reason** is what the buyer selected when starting the return. One is what was found; the other is what was claimed.
A unit came back "Carrier Damaged" - can I recover the cost? Often yes. Carrier- and warehouse-damaged units are losses you did not cause, which makes them strong reimbursement candidates. This page flags them; file and track the claim on the [Reimbursements (Lost & Found)](/inventory-and-operations/reimbursements) page.
The page says "This is an FBA feature" - why? Your connected account had no FBA returns in scope. Returned Orders is FBA-only; an account that sells only FBM sees this message instead of an empty table.
Why is a return reason blank or oddly worded? The reason comes straight from Amazon's return data. If the buyer's reason was empty, it shows as a dash. SellerMagnet only tidies the wording; it does not invent or map reasons to a fixed list.
## 💡 Tips * Track your **Back in Stock** percentage over time - a falling sellable share is an early warning that returns are costing you real inventory. * Use the **Condition** filter to isolate **Carrier Damaged** and **Warehouse Damaged** units and route them straight to reimbursement claims. * Pair the **Top Return Reason** with the **Condition** breakdown before acting - the fix for a listing problem is very different from the fix for a quality problem. ## ➡️ What's Next? * [Refunded Orders](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview/refunded-orders) - the financial side of returns and FBM incoming returns. * [Reimbursements (Lost & Found)](/inventory-and-operations/reimbursements) - recover money for damaged and lost units. * [Cancel Orders](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview/cancel-orders) - orders cancelled before they ever shipped. # Cancel Orders See every order Amazon reported as cancelled, the share of your orders it represents, which SKUs cancel most, and an estimated value for cancellations Amazon zeroed out - all in one read-only page. {% hint style="info" %} **Difficulty:** 🟢 Beginner · **Reading time:** \~8 min {% endhint %} {% hint style="warning" %} **Early access:** Cancel Orders is a newer module that is still rolling out. If it is not switched on for your account yet, the page opens **blurred** behind a **join-the-waitlist** card - add yourself there and we will enable it for you. Demo accounts can explore it with sample data. Everything below describes the page once it is unlocked. {% endhint %} ![Cancel Orders](https://4139654583-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Fih2knSvVpBcq5rIeXVjM%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-e595a75de747c838e9a241f027476d41bd55fd18%2Fcancel-orders.png?alt=media) ## 📋 Overview The **Cancel Orders** page gives you a clear view of the orders Amazon reported as **cancelled** - how many there were, what share of your orders they represent, which products cancel most often, and roughly what each cancelled order was worth. It counts **all** cancellations in the period, whether the **buyer** cancelled, **you** cancelled, or Amazon cancelled on your behalf. {% hint style="warning" %} **This is not Amazon's official pre-fulfilment cancel rate.** Amazon measures your account against a **pre-fulfilment cancellation rate** (seller-caused, seller-fulfilled orders only, rolling 7 days, policy target below 2.5%). The Cancel Orders page is a broader, seller-side view of **every** cancellation across all fulfilment channels. Use it to spot trends and problem SKUs - not as the number Amazon grades your account health on. {% endhint %} {% hint style="info" %} **Where the data comes from:** Amazon notifies SellerMagnet whenever an order's status changes to Canceled. We record each cancellation (date, marketplace, fulfilment channel, items, and any value Amazon still reports) at the moment it happens. Recording began on a fixed start date - see the [recording-since caveat](#recording-since-and-early-periods) below - so periods before that date show no history. {% endhint %} ## 🔍 Where to find it **Cancel Orders** lives in the left sidebar under the **Orders Overview** group, alongside Orders, Ordered Products, Refunded Orders, and Analytics. Its icon is a **circle-slash** (🚫). While the module is still in early access, the menu item shows an **hourglass** badge and a **(Waitlist)** tooltip. ## 🎛️ Filters A filter bar sits above the numbers: | Control | What it does | | -------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Marketplace** | Defaults to **All Marketplaces**. The list is narrowed to only the marketplaces your project actually sells on. | | **Period** | **Last 7 Days**, **Last 30 Days** (default), **This Month**, **Last Month**, **Last 6 Months**, or **Last 12 Months**. | | **Updated HH:MM:SS** | A timestamp on the right showing when the figures last refreshed. | ## 📊 Key metrics Four tiles summarize the selected period: | Tile | What it shows | | ---------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Cancel Rate** | The share of orders **placed in the period** that were cancelled, for example `2.34%`. Shows `-` until there is enough data (see below). | | **Cancelled Orders** | The number of cancellations that **happened** in the period. | | **Fulfilment** | Two badges - **FBA {n}** and **FBM {n}** - splitting cancellations by fulfilment channel. | | **Most Cancelled SKU** | Your single most-cancelled SKU, with a "{n} cancelled orders" note. | {% hint style="info" %} **Cancel Rate vs Cancelled Orders - why the two can differ.** The **Cancelled Orders** tile counts cancellations by **when they happened**. The **Cancel Rate** is a cohort figure: of the orders **placed** in the window, how many were later cancelled. An order placed just before the window but cancelled inside it counts toward "Cancelled Orders" but not toward the rate's denominator, so the two numbers do not always line up. When they differ, the rate note reads "{c} of {n} orders placed in this period". {% endhint %} ### When the rate shows a dash {% hint style="warning" %} **"Not enough data yet."** A percentage is only trustworthy over a real sample and a real window, so the Cancel Rate stays **`-`** until **both** conditions are met: at least **50 orders** in the period **and** a window of at least **7 days**. Until then the note reads "Not enough data yet - {n} orders since {date}". The counts are still shown; only the percentage is withheld. This is expected on new accounts and short periods - it is not a bug. {% endhint %} ## 📋 The cancellations table Each cancelled order is one row: | Column | What it shows | | ----------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Cancelled** | The date and time Amazon cancelled the order. | | **Product** | Thumbnail and title of the item (with "+N more" when the order had several items). Reads "Not in your catalogue" if the product has since left your catalogue. | | **Order** | The Amazon order ID. It deep-links to the order in Seller Central when the marketplace domain is a validated `amazon.*` host. | | **Marketplace** | The marketplace the order was placed on. | | **SKU / ASIN** | The SKU, with the ASIN beneath it, per item. | | **Status Before** | The order's status just before it was cancelled. Reads "Cancelled before import" when the order was never stored locally as a live order. | | **Fulfilment** | An **FBA** or **FBM** badge, or `-` when unknown. | | **Order Value** | What the order was worth - see [Order value and estimates](#order-value-and-estimates) below. | The table is server-side paged, with a **rows-per-page** control (25 / 50 / 100 / 250, default 50) and "Showing {from}-{to} of {total}". {% hint style="info" %} **Two things you will not see, on purpose:** cancelled orders show **no quantity** (Amazon zeroes the quantity on cancellation, so any number would be misleading), and order values are **never summed** into a total (your cancellations can span several currencies). {% endhint %} ### Order value and estimates Amazon **zeroes the order total** when an order is cancelled - and on FBA, where Amazon does the cancelling, the value is almost always gone. So the **Order Value** column shows one of three things: * **A reported value** - `{amount} {currency}` - when Amazon still reported one (most common on merchant-fulfilled orders). * **An estimate** - `~ {amount} {currency}` with a small **est.** tag - when Amazon reported nothing. The estimate is the **current listing price** of the items still in your catalogue, treated as quantity 1. Hover it for the full explanation: it is the current listing price, an estimate, **not** what the buyer was charged. If only some items are still priced, the tooltip notes the estimate covers only those items and the real order was worth at least that much. * **A dash (`-`)** when nothing is known. {% hint style="warning" %} **An "est." value is a current-listing-price estimate, never the amount charged.** It exists so a cancelled FBA order is not blank, not to report revenue. Do not treat it as a real sale figure. {% endhint %} ## 📅 Recording-since and early periods Cancellation history starts on a fixed **recording-since** date (the day this capture went live). Two things follow from that: * When your selected period reaches back before that date, a blue banner reads **"Cancellations recorded since {date}."** and, if the period reaches even further back, adds "The selected period reaches further back, so these figures cover {date} onwards." * When a period ends **entirely before** the recording-since date, every tile shows `-` with a **"Not recorded yet"** note and the table shows "Before cancellation recording started" - this is a genuine no-history state, not zero cancellations. ## 🧭 Reading the page {% stepper %} {% step %} ### Pick a period and marketplace Start with **Last 30 Days**, All Marketplaces. Note the **Cancelled Orders** count and, if available, the **Cancel Rate**. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Check the fulfilment split A cancellation spike that is almost all **FBM** points at your own fulfilment or stock; an **FBA**-heavy spike is usually buyer-side or Amazon-side. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Open the Most Cancelled SKU If one SKU dominates, filter your thinking around it - a listing, pricing, or availability problem on a single product is the most fixable cause. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Scan the table for patterns Sort through the rows for repeated products, marketplaces, or "Status Before" values. A cluster of the same "Status Before" can reveal where in the flow orders drop out. {% endstep %} {% endstepper %} ## ❓ FAQ
Is this the cancel rate Amazon uses for account health? No. Amazon's official metric is the **pre-fulfilment cancellation rate** - seller-caused cancellations on seller-fulfilled orders only, over a rolling 7 days, with a policy target below 2.5%. That figure is measured by Amazon and shown on your account health surfaces. The Cancel Orders page is a broader seller-side view of **all** cancellations (buyer, seller, and Amazon; FBA and FBM). The two will not match, and that is expected.
Why is my Cancel Rate showing a dash? Because there is not yet enough data for a meaningful percentage. The rate appears only once the period has at least **50 orders** and spans at least **7 days**. Until then you still see the raw counts, and the note explains how many orders have been recorded so far.
Why do older periods show no cancellations? Cancellation recording began on a fixed start date. Any period that ends before that date has no history to show - it reads "Before cancellation recording started", which is different from "zero cancellations".
Why is the order value marked "est." or missing? Amazon zeroes an order's total when it is cancelled, so for most cancellations (especially FBA) there is no reported value left. When we can, we show an estimate based on the item's **current listing price** (tagged **est.**); otherwise the value is a dash. An estimate is not the amount the buyer paid.
Where are the quantities? Amazon zeroes the quantity on a cancelled order, so showing a number would be misleading. The page deliberately omits quantity for cancelled orders.
## 💡 Tips * Watch the **fulfilment split**, not just the total - FBM and FBA spikes usually have very different causes. * Treat a dominant **Most Cancelled SKU** as your first investigation target; single-product problems are the quickest wins. * Remember the **est.** tag when reading order values - it is a listing-price estimate, useful for rough scale but never a real sales figure. ## ➡️ What's Next? * [Refunded Orders](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview/refunded-orders) - refunds and FBM incoming returns, with financial impact. * [Returned Orders](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview/returned-orders) - FBA returns with warehouse condition and return reason. * [Orders Analytics](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview/orders-analytics) - trends and comparisons across your whole order book. # Products Management Manage your complete product catalog with COG (Cost of Goods) tracking, batch management, easy-mode flat costs, shipping-rate assignment, variant grouping, and inventory alert rules. The foundation fo {% hint style="info" %} **Difficulty:** 🟡 Intermediate · **Reading time:** \~10 min {% endhint %} {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Open this page in your dashboard:** [**Go to Products Management →**](https://dashboard.sellermagnet.com/dashboard/products) {% endhint %} The **Products Management** page is where you manage your entire product catalog, track Cost of Goods (COG) through the batch system, monitor stock levels, and configure inventory alerts. Accurate product data here is the foundation for every profit, margin, and ROI calculation throughout SellerMagnet. > Every profit number you see on the Dashboard, Orders, and Reports pages depends on the COG data entered here. If your profit figures look wrong, this is the first place to check. {% hint style="warning" %} **Critical First Step:** Before analysing any profit data, add cost data for your top 10 revenue-generating SKUs. This takes about 15 minutes and unlocks accurate profit calculations across the entire platform. {% endhint %} *** ## 🎥 Video Walkthrough {% hint style="info" %} **Video tutorial coming soon.** A full guided walkthrough of this feature will be available here shortly. {% endhint %} *** ## 🗂️ Page Structure | Section | Purpose | | ------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Products Table** | Full catalog with search, filters, column presets, sort, and pagination | | **Product Batches Modal** | COG management, batch creation/editing, and easy-mode flat cost per SKU | | **Bulk Actions** | Set costs, add batches, assign a shipping rate, or assign tags across many SKUs at once | | **Inventory Rules** | A toolbar button opening account-wide out-of-stock, low-inventory, and auto-restock rules | {% hint style="info" %} **Stock forecasting lives on a separate page.** Projected stockout dates, daily usage, and reorder timing are on the **Inventory Planner**, opened from a product's **Manage** row menu -> **Open in Inventory Planner**. See [Managing Multiple Batches](#managing-multiple-batches) for how batch data feeds those forecasts. {% endhint %} *** ## Products Table ![SellerMagnet Products Management](https://4139654583-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Fih2knSvVpBcq5rIeXVjM%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-6ec3325dbdf37658a59e55a7c05c8af4b6baaf93%2Fproducts-management.png?alt=media) The main products table lists every product in your connected Amazon catalog. ### Table Columns The default **Essential** preset shows the columns below. The visible header text is deliberately short; the description explains what each column means. | Column | Description | Sortable | | --------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | -------- | | **Product** | Product image, title, ASIN (Amazon Standard Identification Number), and SKU (Stock Keeping Unit). Also carries data-quality badges (No batch / No COG / Easy mode) and a clickable **BSR** rank box | No | | **Fulfillment** | FBA or FBM indicator | No | | **Condition** | Item condition - **New**, or a used grade such as **Used - Very Good**, **Collectible**, or **Refurbished** | No | | **Status** | Listing status - **Active** or **No Stock** (other states such as Inactive, Incomplete, or Expired can also appear) | No | | **Price** | Current listing price | Yes | | **Batch stock** | Units still attributed to your cost **batches** (your own tracked inventory lots) | Yes | | **Cost** | Average **COG** (Cost of Goods) per unit, from batch data or an easy-mode flat cost | Yes | | **Stock** | Live available stock quantity as **Amazon** reports it | Yes | | **Manage** | The **⋮** row menu (batches, deep-links, and quick actions) | No | {% hint style="info" %} **Batch stock vs. Stock** are two different numbers. **Batch stock** counts the units still covered by the cost batches you entered, so SellerMagnet knows which per-unit cost to apply. **Stock** is the live quantity Amazon reports for the listing. They can legitimately differ - for example when Amazon stock changes but you have not recorded a matching batch. {% endhint %} Only the four numeric columns - **Price**, **Batch stock**, **Cost**, and **Stock** - are sortable. Click a header to sort. {% hint style="info" %} **Fewer columns than you expected?** The default **Essential** preset hides **Fulfillment** and **Condition** and relocates their values into the meta line under the product name, so no data is lost - only its position changes. Switch to the **Full** preset or use the column customizer (see [Choosing Columns](#choosing-columns-view-presets)) to show every column. {% endhint %} ### Choosing Columns (View presets) The **View** button (columns icon) in the toolbar opens a small menu to control which columns are shown: * **Essential** - a compact preset (Fulfillment and Condition hidden, their values moved under the product name). * **Full** - shows every column. * **Columns** - a per-column checklist to switch individual columns on or off. A **"Saved on this device"** note confirms your choice is remembered locally - the preset and column selection persist in this browser across reloads. ### Search and Filtering * **Search bar:** Filter by product name, ASIN, or SKU. * **Marketplace filter:** Select a specific marketplace or view all. Marketplace is a **filter only** - it is not a table column. * **Only active products:** A toggle to hide inactive/closed listings. Your choice is remembered. * **Fulfillment filter:** Click the funnel icon in the toolbar to filter by **FBA Only** or **FBM Only** (use **Clear All** to reset). An active filter shows a small badge on the funnel. * **Tag filter:** Filter the catalog by the tags you have assigned to products. * **Pagination:** Navigate through your product catalog with configurable page sizes. {% hint style="warning" %} Products with no batch data will show COG as EUR 0.00, which means profit calculations are overstated. Look for products with a **No COG** badge or suspiciously high margins - they likely need cost data. {% endhint %} ### Group by Parent ASIN (Variant Grouping) Products that share a parent ASIN (sizes, colours, and other variations) can be rolled up into a single parent row. Use the **Variants** button (layer-group icon) in the toolbar to toggle grouping: * **Default view** lists every child SKU on its own row. * **Grouped view** (button highlighted, icon switches to the grouped state) collapses child SKUs under their **parent ASIN** so you can read catalog performance at the variation-family level. Your choice is remembered - the toggle state persists across page reloads. ### BSR (Best Sellers Rank) History Each product tile carries a small **BSR** rank box. Click it to open the **Best Seller Rank** history modal: * A **Category / Subcategory** toggle switches between the primary and secondary rank. * Time-range buttons - **30D**, **90D**, **6M**, **1Y**, and **All** - set the window. * A chart plots the rank over time. Lower is better; Best Seller Rank is captured once per day. ### The Manage row menu The **⋮** menu in the **Manage** column collects per-product actions and deep-links, including: * **Manage Batches** - open the Product Batches modal (COG management) for this SKU. * **Open in Repricer** - jump to the Repricer for this SKU/ASIN. * **Open in Inventory Planner** - open this SKU's stock forecast (stockout date, daily usage, reorder timing). * **Select Shipping Rate** - assign an FBM shipping rule to this product. * Plus quick links such as Open in Listing Optimizer, Open in Sourcer, Listing Performance, Request Review, View Orders/Refunds/Analytics, Open on Amazon (Buyer view), Open in Seller Central, and Copy ASIN / Copy SKU. *** ## Product Batches (COG Management) The batch system is SellerMagnet's approach to tracking the Cost of Goods for your products. Each "batch" represents a purchase of inventory at a specific price. ### Why Batches Matter | Without Batches | With Batches | | ------------------------------------------------ | ------------------------------------------------ | | Profit shows as "Revenue minus Amazon Fees" only | Profit accurately reflects true COG | | Margin appears artificially high | Margin reflects actual profitability | | ROI calculation is meaningless | ROI shows true return on your investment | | Inventory Planner has no cost basis to project | Batch stock feeds the Inventory Planner forecast | | Cannot track purchase price changes over time | Full history of procurement costs | ### Opening the Batches Modal 1. Navigate to **Dashboard > Products**. 2. Find the product you want to manage. 3. Click the **⋮** menu in the **Manage** column and choose **Manage Batches**. 4. The Product Batches modal opens. ### Batch Modal Layout The modal is organized into these sections: | Section | Description | | ------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Product Header** | Product image, name, SKU, total units sold, and the **Add returns back** toggle | | **Easy-mode panel** | An optional flat cost per unit (feature-flagged - see [Easy Mode](#easy-mode-flat-cost-per-unit)) | | **Batch Sidebar** | A list of all existing batches for this product, with a **New Batch** button | | **Batch Form** | Create or edit a batch with fields for total units, the six per-unit costs (net, tax, shipping, payment fee, customs, additional), arrival date, and currency | *** ## Easy Mode: Flat Cost per Unit {% hint style="info" %} **Easy mode is feature-flagged.** It is enabled per account, so the toggle and the bulk **Set cost** action described below may not appear for every account. If you do not see them, batches are your cost source. {% endhint %} Near the top of the batch modal is an **"Easy mode: flat cost per unit"** toggle. Turn it **on** to skip inventory batches entirely and enter a **single flat cost per unit** that is used for **all** profit, margin, and ROI calculations for that SKU. * **Turning it ON** collapses the batch fields and shows one **Cost per unit** input plus a currency selector. While active, this flat cost **overrides any batches** for that SKU. * **Turning it OFF** (or clicking **New Batch** / an existing batch) returns you to full batch management. In the products table, an **"Easy mode"** badge marks any SKU using a flat cost, and the flat value appears in the **Cost** column. ### Flat Cost vs. Batches - Which Should I Use? | Use **flat cost** (Easy mode) | Use **batches** | | ------------------------------------------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------- | | Simplest option - one cost per unit, no stock tracking | Track cost per purchase lot and FIFO allocation | | Your buy price rarely changes | Your buy price changes between reorders | | You do not need per-lot cost history | You want per-lot cost history and returns-back-to-stock | {% hint style="info" %} Start with **Easy mode** if you just want correct profit numbers fast. Switch to **batches** later when you need FIFO cost tracking - no data is lost, the toggle simply changes which cost source is active. {% endhint %} ### Bulk cost actions for many products You do not have to open the batch modal one SKU at a time. Tick the row **checkboxes** in the table (or the header checkbox to select the whole page) and a floating **bulk-actions bar** appears with **Set cost**, **Bulk Add Batches**, **Shipping rate**, **Assign tags**, and **Export**. There are **two distinct flat-cost paths**, and it is worth knowing the difference: {% hint style="info" %} * **Set cost** (easy mode, per product) - opens *"Easy mode for selected products"*. Each selected SKU **keeps its own cost per unit**; you type a separate cost for each row and leave a field blank to skip it. Use this when the products cost different amounts. * **Bulk Add Batches** (easy mode, shared cost) - the bulk batch modal has an **"Easy mode: flat cost for all selected"** toggle that writes **one shared flat cost** to every selected SKU at once. Use this when the whole selection costs the same per unit. {% endhint %} The same **Bulk Add Batches** modal also lets you create a full **inventory batch** across all selected products (name, units, and the per-unit cost breakdown) when you leave Easy mode off - handy when you received the same lot across several SKUs. *** ## 👣 Step-by-Step: Creating a New Batch 1. Open the **Product Batches modal** for your product. 2. Click the **"New Batch"** button in the modal sidebar. 3. Fill in the batch form. Fields marked **\*** are required; every cost field is **per unit** and combines into the batch's landed COG (a running **Total Cost per Unit** is shown as you type): | Field | Description | Example | | ------------------------ | ------------------------------------------------ | ----------------- | | **Batch Name \*** | A descriptive label for this purchase lot | "Q2 Main Reorder" | | **Total Units \*** | Number of units purchased | 500 | | **Unit Net Cost \*** | Net purchase price per unit (ex-tax) | EUR 4.75 | | **Unit Tax Cost** | Tax per unit (VAT, sales tax) | EUR 0.90 | | **Unit Shipping Cost** | Inbound/freight shipping allocated per unit | EUR 0.35 | | **Unit Payment Fee** | Payment-processing fee per unit (if applicable) | EUR 0.10 | | **Unit Customs Cost** | Import duties / customs per unit | EUR 0.20 | | **Unit Additional Cost** | Any other per-unit cost (inspection, prep, etc.) | EUR 0.15 | | **Arrival Date** | Date the inventory was received | 2026-03-15 | | **Currency** | Currency of the purchase prices | EUR | > **Batch names** are unique within a product and are how you tell purchase lots apart (e.g. "Q2 Main Reorder" vs. "Q3 Restock"). Reusing an existing name for the same SKU updates that lot rather than creating a second one. 4. *(Optional)* Tick **"Apply these costs to past unlinked orders"** - see below. 5. Click **"Create"** to save the batch. 6. The batch appears in the list, and COG calculations update across all dashboards. {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro Tip:** Create a new batch every time your purchase price changes, even if it is from the same supplier. This maintains an accurate historical record of COG and lets you see how procurement cost changes affect your margins over time. {% endhint %} ### Applying a Batch to Past Orders By default a new batch only covers orders going forward (via FIFO). If you are entering a batch for inventory you have **already been selling**, tick **"Apply these costs to past unlinked orders"** in the create form. SellerMagnet then: * Applies the batch's per-unit costs to **every past order item that does not yet have a batch attached**, and * **Auto-expands the batch capacity** so it covers all those linked past orders. A confirmation dialog ("Apply costs to historical orders?") spells out the scope (SKU, "All past orders without a batch") and warns that it **recomputes historical Profit, Margin, and ROI** for that SKU. {% hint style="info" %} This action is **reversible**: deleting the batch from the Manage Batches modal undoes the historical changes. It is the fastest way to back-fill COG for a SKU you started selling before you began tracking batches. {% endhint %} ### Returns Back to Stock The batch modal header has an **"Add returns back"** toggle. When **on**, units that customers return are added back to this product's **batch** stock (so the same per-unit cost is re-used for future sales of those units). Leave it off if returns are not resold. The account-wide default for this is set in **Settings > General → Default returns sellable**. ### Editing a Batch 1. Click the **edit button** on an existing batch in the sidebar. 2. Modify any field (total units, per-unit costs, arrival date, or currency). 3. Click **"Edit"** to save changes. 4. All profit calculations that reference this batch update automatically. ### Deleting a Batch 1. Click the **delete button** on the batch you want to remove. 2. A confirmation dialog appears asking you to confirm the deletion. 3. Click **"Delete"** to confirm. {% hint style="danger" %} Deleting a batch removes its COG data from all historical profit calculations. Only delete batches that were entered in error. If you need to correct a batch, use the Edit function instead. {% endhint %} *** ## Inventory Rules Inventory Rules let you configure automatic email notifications when stock levels reach critical thresholds, and an optional auto-restock behaviour. ### Accessing Inventory Rules Click the **Inventory Rules** button (box icon) in the **top toolbar** of the Products page. The *Inventory Rules & Notifications* modal opens. {% hint style="info" %} These rules are **account-wide** - they are **not** scoped per marketplace. There is no marketplace selector in this modal. {% endhint %} ### Configurable Rules | Rule | Description | Recommended Setting | | -------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Notify when product is Out of Stock** | Sends an email when a product's stock reaches zero | Enable for all products | | **Notify when stock is below:** | Sends an email when stock drops below a threshold. Pick **5**, **10**, **20**, or a **Custom** value | Set to your average 14-day sales volume | | **Automatically Restock Inventory** (Auto Restock) | When stock hits 0, automatically raises the stock level by a **Restock Amount** so the listing stays available on Amazon. Includes an **exclusion list** to leave discontinued products out | Set an amount that covers your supplier lead time; exclude discontinued SKUs | {% hint style="info" %} Auto Restock is not a low-stock reorder-point alert - it maintains availability by topping stock back up when it reaches zero. Use the **exclusion list** ("Exclude specific products") so discontinued items are never auto-restocked. {% endhint %} ### Setting Up a Rule 1. Open the **Inventory Rules** modal from the toolbar. 2. Toggle each rule **on/off**. 3. For **low inventory**, set the **Threshold** (5 / 10 / 20 / Custom). 4. For **Auto Restock**, enter a **Restock Amount** and add any products to the **exclusion list**. 5. Click **Save Settings** to activate. {% hint style="info" %} Inventory alerts are delivered by email. Make sure your notification preferences are configured in **Settings > Notifications** so you receive them. {% endhint %} *** ## Shipping Rates (FBM) For FBM products, outbound delivery cost belongs in your profit. Assign a **shipping rule** to a product so that cost is included. Open the shipping-rate modal from a product's **⋮** menu (**Select Shipping Rate**) or via the bulk **Shipping rate** action. The modal has two tabs: * **Apply one rule** - pick a single shipping rule (from those you created under **Settings → Shipping Rules**) and save it to the selected product(s). * **Bulk map via CSV** - **Download current mapping (CSV)** of your FBM products, edit the **`new_rule`** column in a spreadsheet, then **Upload edited CSV** to preview and apply. Rules are matched by name; leave `new_rule` unchanged or empty to keep the current rule, or enter **REMOVE** to unassign the rule from a SKU. A preview shows exactly which SKUs will be assigned, changed, cleared, or left unchanged before anything is saved. {% hint style="info" %} Create the shipping rules themselves under **Settings → Shipping Rules**. If no rules exist, the modal tells you so and links you there. {% endhint %} *** ## Tags Use the bulk **Assign tags** action (visible when you select products) to tag many SKUs at once. Tags can then be used to **filter** the catalog and to slice performance elsewhere in SellerMagnet. *** ## 🎯 Real-World Scenario: Managing a Product Launch **Situation:** You are launching a new product with 1,000 units of initial inventory at EUR 3.20 per unit. | Step | Action | | ---- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | 1 | Navigate to **Products Management** and locate the new product (it appears automatically once listed on Amazon) | | 2 | Open the **Product Batches modal** (⋮ -> Manage Batches) for the product | | 3 | Create a new batch: Total Units = 1000, Unit Net Cost = EUR 3.20, plus any tax/shipping/customs costs, Arrival Date = launch date | | 4 | Open **Inventory Rules** from the toolbar: enable Out-of-Stock and set the low-inventory threshold | | 5 | After 2 weeks, open **⋮ -> Open in Inventory Planner** to see daily usage trends and the projected stockout date | | 6 | If daily usage is 15 units/day and supplier lead time is 30 days, plan to reorder when stock hits 450 units (15 x 30) | **Before batches:** Dashboard shows EUR 12,480 profit on the product (misleading, just revenue minus fees). **After batches:** Dashboard shows EUR 5,280 real profit (revenue minus fees minus EUR 3,200 COG). *** ## Managing Multiple Batches When you reorder inventory at different prices, you accumulate multiple batches per product. SellerMagnet handles this using a **FIFO (First In, First Out)** approach by default. You can also assign an average price across all batches for orders not covered by a specific batch's time period: | Batch | Qty | Price/Unit | Date | | ------- | --- | ---------- | ---------- | | Batch 1 | 500 | EUR 3.20 | 2026-01-10 | | Batch 2 | 300 | EUR 3.45 | 2026-03-05 | | Batch 3 | 700 | EUR 2.95 | 2026-04-01 | As orders come in, COG is allocated from the earliest batch first. Once Batch 1's 500 units are depleted, COG automatically shift to Batch 2's price. This same batch stock is what the **Inventory Planner** uses to project depletion. {% hint style="warning" %} If you delete an earlier batch, the COG allocation shifts to the next available batch. This can retroactively change profit calculations for historical orders. Always use Edit instead of Delete when correcting batch data. {% endhint %} ***
⚠️ Common Mistakes to Avoid | Mistake | Impact | Better Approach | | ----------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Not entering any cost for a product | All profit numbers are wrong across the entire platform | Add a batch (or an easy-mode flat cost) as part of your receiving workflow | | Using one batch for all inventory | Cannot track price changes or calculate accurate FIFO COG | Create a new batch for each purchase order | | Entering COG in the wrong currency | Over/understated costs | Always enter prices in the correct purchase currency | | Ignoring the Inventory Planner | Running out of stock leads to lost sales and ranking drops | Check the planner weekly for your top products | | Setting alert thresholds too low | Alerts arrive after it is too late to reorder | Set thresholds that account for supplier lead time + safety stock | | Deleting batches to "fix" data | Destroys historical COG records | Edit the batch instead of deleting and recreating |
## ✅ Best Practices 1. **Enter costs immediately** when inventory is received, not when it starts selling. 2. **Record all cost components** per unit: net cost, tax, shipping, payment fees, and customs/import duties. This ensures your COG reflects true landed cost. 3. **Name each batch clearly** (e.g. supplier + reorder, "ACME Q2 Reorder") so purchase lots stay easy to tell apart. 4. **Review the Inventory Planner weekly** for your top 20 revenue-generating products. 5. **Set inventory rules** for every product with meaningful sales velocity, and exclude discontinued SKUs from Auto Restock. 6. **Audit COG quarterly** by comparing your batch records against supplier invoices. *** ## Exporting Products The **Export** button (download icon) in the table toolbar downloads your catalog for use in spreadsheets or for editing and re-importing. Click it to choose a format: | Format | Use it for | | --------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------- | | **CSV** | Editing in any spreadsheet tool, or preparing a file to re-import | | **Excel** | A ready-to-open `.xlsx` workbook | * If **no products are selected**, the export covers your **whole catalog** (respecting the current view). * If you have **selected rows** with the checkboxes, a small dialog asks whether to export **all products** or **only the selected ones**. {% hint style="info" %} The export uses the **same column layout as the import template**, so the fastest way to bulk-edit COG is: export -> edit the cost columns in a spreadsheet -> re-import. {% endhint %} *** ## Bulk Import (CSV) Instead of entering batches one product at a time, you can update many SKUs at once with the **Import** button (upload icon) in the toolbar. It opens a guided **3-step wizard**. {% stepper %} {% step %} ### Upload Drop a **CSV file** onto the upload area (or click to browse). Two helpers sit above it: * **Download Template** - a blank CSV with the correct headers. * **Export Current Products** - exports your existing catalog so you can edit real values and re-upload. The wizard lists the **expected headers**. Products are matched by **`sku` + `amazon_marketplace`**, and the file can carry the latest batch and shipping data per SKU: | Column | Meaning | | ------------------------------------------------------------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | `sku` | Your seller SKU (required for matching) | | `amazon_marketplace` | Marketplace the SKU belongs to (required for matching) | | `returns_sellable` | Whether returns go back into sellable stock | | `shipping_country_pricing_net_cost_in_cents` / `shipping_currency` | Per-unit shipping cost and its currency | | `latest_batch_name` | Name of the batch to create/update | | `latest_batch_total_units` | Units in the batch | | `latest_batch_unit_net_cost_in_cents` | Net cost per unit (in **whole cents**, e.g. `475` = 4.75) | | `latest_batch_unit_tax_cost_in_cents` | Tax per unit (cents) | | `latest_batch_unit_shipping_cost_in_cents` | Inbound shipping per unit (cents) | | `latest_batch_unit_payment_cost_in_cents` | Payment fee per unit (cents) | | `latest_batch_unit_customs_cost_in_cents` | Customs/duty per unit (cents) | | `latest_batch_unit_additional_cost_in_cents` | Any other per-unit cost (cents) | | `latest_batch_currency` | Currency of the batch costs | | `latest_batch_arrival_date` | Date the inventory arrived | | `simple_unit_cost_in_cents` | *Optional.* Sets an **Easy-mode flat cost per unit** (whole cents, e.g. `800` = 8.00) that overrides inventory batches for that SKU | | `simple_cost_currency` | *Optional.* Currency for the flat cost; defaults to the marketplace currency | {% hint style="warning" %} The `simple_unit_cost_in_cents` / `simple_cost_currency` columns only apply on accounts where **Easy mode** is enabled. All cost columns are in **whole cents**, not decimal currency - enter `800` for a cost of 8.00. Make sure your date format matches the format shown in the wizard. {% endhint %} {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Validation Every row is checked and tagged **Valid**, **Warning**, or **Error**. From this screen you can: * Filter to **Errors**, **Warnings**, or **Valid** rows. * **Edit** cells inline, or **bulk-edit** a value across selected rows. * **Delete** rows you do not want to import. * **Export error rows** to fix them in a spreadsheet and re-upload. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Import A final review shows totals (ready to import, warnings, errors that will be skipped) and a marketplace breakdown. Confirm to apply the changes. {% endstep %} {% endstepper %} {% hint style="info" %} Import **updates existing products** (matched by SKU + marketplace) with new batch, flat-cost, and shipping data. It does **not create new products** - listings appear in SellerMagnet automatically once they are live on Amazon. {% endhint %} ### Loading several batches for the same product You are not limited to one batch per SKU. To import **multiple purchase lots for the same product in a single file, add one row per batch**: repeat the same `sku` + `amazon_marketplace` on each row and give every row a **different `latest_batch_name`** with its own units, costs, and arrival date. Each unique batch name becomes its own lot, so a SKU with three restocks is simply three rows. {% hint style="warning" %} Two details matter when you do this: * **The batch name is the key.** Reusing an existing `latest_batch_name` for a SKU **updates that lot** instead of adding a new one. Leaving the name blank falls back to a default (`SM Batch `), so several blank-named rows on the same day collapse into one lot - always give each batch a distinct name when loading more than one. * **Expect a duplicate warning.** The Validation step tags repeated `sku` + `amazon_marketplace` rows with a **"Duplicate SKU + Marketplace"** warning. When you are intentionally loading several batches this is expected - it is a heads-up, not an error, and the rows still import. {% endhint %} *** ## Comparison: Products Table vs. Ordered Products | Feature | Products Management | Ordered Products (Orders section) | | ---------------------------- | ----------------------- | --------------------------------- | | **Focus** | Full catalog management | Sales performance analysis | | **Includes unsold products** | Yes | No (only products with orders) | | **Batch/COG management** | Yes (primary purpose) | No (read-only COG display) | | **Inventory Rules** | Yes | No | | **Tag filtering** | Yes | Yes | | **Financial breakdown** | Basic P\&L per product | Detailed per-order breakdown | *** ## ❓ FAQ
How does SellerMagnet calculate COG when I have multiple batches? SellerMagnet uses FIFO (First In, First Out) allocation by default. The oldest batch's cost is used first. When that batch is fully depleted, it moves to the next batch chronologically. For orders not covered by any batch's time period, you can also assign an average cost across all batches.
Can I import batch data in bulk? Yes. Use the **Import** button in the products toolbar to run the **3-step CSV wizard** (Upload -> Validation -> Import). Download the template (or export your current products), fill in the batch and cost columns, and re-upload. On accounts with Easy mode, you can also set a flat cost per SKU via the optional `simple_unit_cost_in_cents` column. To load **several batches for one SKU**, add one row per batch with the same SKU + marketplace and a different `latest_batch_name` - see [Loading several batches for the same product](#loading-several-batches-for-the-same-product). Products are matched by SKU + marketplace and updated in place; import does not create new products.
What if I sell the same product on multiple marketplaces? Create batches at the product level (per SKU). The batch data applies to that SKU. Inventory Rules are account-wide, not per marketplace.
Where did the Stock Forecast go? Stock forecasting now lives on its own **Inventory Planner** page rather than inside the batch modal. Open it from a product's **⋮ Manage** menu -> **Open in Inventory Planner** to see the projected stockout date, daily usage, and reorder timing. It uses a rolling average of daily sales, so accuracy depends on how consistent your sales are.
Can I set different alert thresholds per marketplace? No. Inventory Rules are configured once and apply account-wide - the rules modal does not scope thresholds by marketplace.
What happens if I forget to add a cost for a product? The product will show EUR 0.00 for COG (and a **No COG** badge), which means all revenue minus Amazon fees appears as "profit." This overstates your actual profitability. We recommend adding a batch or an easy-mode flat cost for all products.
Does the stock level update in real time? The **Stock** column is synced from Amazon's API and typically updates multiple times per day. There may be a delay of a few hours between an actual stock change in Amazon and the reflected value in SellerMagnet. (**Batch stock** is separate - it reflects the units still covered by the cost batches you entered.)
*** ## ➡️ What's Next? {% content-ref url="/pages/xy8uixvNORGWL0LqDzwf" %} [Product Tags](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview/product-tags) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/3gqW20LoOHjYA4o7jTeF" %} [Listing Performance](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview/listing-performance) {% endcontent-ref %} # Listing Performance Track listing-level performance metrics including impressions, sessions, units ordered, orders, Buy Box percentage, conversion rate, average order value, and refunds. Diagnose traffic and conversion i {% hint style="info" %} **Difficulty:** 🟢 Beginner · **Reading time:** \~10 min {% endhint %} {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Open this page in your dashboard:** [**Go to Listing Performance →**](https://dashboard.sellermagnet.com/dashboard/listing-performance) {% endhint %} The **Listing Performance** page provides detailed traffic and conversion analytics for your Amazon product listings. This data comes from Amazon's Brand Analytics and Business Reports APIs, giving you the same metrics available in Seller Central but presented with SellerMagnet's enhanced visualization and filtering capabilities. > Listing Performance data requires that your Amazon account has access to Brand Analytics or Business Reports. Data availability may vary by marketplace and account type. *** ## 🎥 Video Walkthrough {% hint style="info" %} **Video tutorial coming soon.** A full guided walkthrough of this feature will be available here shortly. {% endhint %} *** ## 🗂️ Page Structure | Section | Purpose | | --------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Sync Notice** | Informational banner about data sync status and delays | | **Filter Bar** | Marketplace, timeframe, and ASIN (Amazon Standard Identification Number) selection, plus a **More filters** expander (search, fulfilment, tags), **Apply**, and **Export** | | **KPI Summary Cards** | Eight metric cards showing aggregate performance | | **Trend Chart** | Multi-metric line chart showing performance over time, with a metric selector | | **Traffic Split** | Donut chart splitting traffic between browser and the Amazon mobile app | | **Performance Table** | One row per report date and ASIN, with metric columns that follow the metric selector | *** ## Data Sync Notice A notice banner appears at the top when: * Your Amazon connection is new and data is still syncing * There is a delay in data availability (Amazon's Brand Analytics data typically lags by a couple of days) {% hint style="warning" %} A **new Amazon connection can take up to 72 hours** to sync before listing performance data appears. After the initial sync, Amazon's own reporting still lags by roughly 2-3 days, so the most recent day you see may be a few days old. This is an Amazon limitation, not a SellerMagnet issue. {% endhint %} *** ## 🔍 Filter Bar The filter bar provides granular control over which data you analyze: ### Primary Filters These sit on the filter bar and are visible at all times: | Filter | Description | Type | | --------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------ | | **Marketplace** | Select a specific Amazon marketplace | Single-select dropdown | | **Timeframe** | Preset ranges (Last 7 / 30 / 90 / 180 Days, All Time) or **Custom** | Single-select dropdown | | **Custom Date Range** | Start and end date pickers, shown only when Timeframe is set to **Custom** | Date pickers | | **ASIN** | Choose specific ASINs to analyze | Multi-select with search | | **Apply** | Applies all selected filters and refreshes data | Action button | | **Export** | Downloads the current results (see below) | Menu button | ### More Filters Click **More filters** (the sliders button) to expand an extra panel with: | Control | Description | | ---------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Search** | Free-text search by ASIN, SKU (Stock Keeping Unit), or product name | | **Fulfilment** | Filter by fulfilment method: **All fulfilment**, **FBA only**, or **FBM only** | | **Product tags** | Filter to products carrying specific tags (shown only when your project has tags) | | **Clear all** | Resets the advanced filters | A small counter on the **More filters** button shows how many advanced filters are currently active. ### Export The **Export** button opens a small menu with two formats: | Format | Output | | --------- | ---------------------------------------------------------- | | **CSV** | Comma-separated values, ideal for spreadsheets and scripts | | **Excel** | An `.xlsx` workbook | The export respects your current marketplace, timeframe, ASIN, and advanced filters, so you download exactly what you see on screen. ### ASIN Multi-Select The ASIN selector uses a searchable multi-select component: * Type to search by ASIN, SKU, or product title * Each option shows the product image, name, ASIN, SKU, marketplace, and fulfilment method * Select multiple ASINs to compare their performance * Selected ASINs appear as removable chips * Click the **X** on any chip to deselect that ASIN * Leave empty to view all products {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro Tip:** Select 3-5 competing ASINs in the same category to compare their sessions, conversion rates, and Buy Box percentages side by side. This helps identify which listings need optimization. {% endhint %} *** ## KPI Summary Cards Eight KPI cards provide an aggregate overview of your listing performance: | KPI Card | Metric | Icon | What It Measures | | ----------------------- | ---------------------------- | ------------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------ | | **Total Impressions** | Total listing impressions | Cyan eye icon | How many times your listings were shown in search and browse | | **Total Sessions** | Unique visitor sessions | Amber arrow-pointer icon | How many unique shoppers visited your listings | | **Total Units Ordered** | Total units purchased | Green open-box icon | Volume of units that resulted in an order | | **Total Orders** | Total order count | Blue cart icon | Number of orders placed for your listings | | **Avg Buy Box %** | Average Buy Box win rate | Purple trophy icon | Percentage of time you held the Buy Box | | **Conversion Rate** | Session-to-order ratio | Cyan bullseye icon | Percentage of sessions that converted to orders | | **Avg Order Value** | Revenue per order | Green coins icon | Average revenue per transaction | | **Refund Rate** | Percentage of units refunded | Red return icon | Return rate as a percentage of units ordered | {% hint style="info" %} There is **no revenue KPI card**. Card 4 counts **orders**, not sales value. If you need ordered product sales, add it from the metric selector on the trend chart or open a row's detail modal. {% endhint %} ### Trend Indicators Each KPI card includes a trend comparison: * **Green up arrow:** Metric improved vs. previous period * **Red down arrow:** Metric declined vs. previous period * **Gray flat indicator:** No significant change ### Understanding the Metrics {% hint style="info" %} **Quick Health Check:** Conversion Rate above 10% = strong listings. Buy Box above 90% = healthy. Refund Rate below 5% = normal. If any metric is in the red, the table below explains what to check. {% endhint %} | Metric | Calculation | Healthy Benchmark | | ------------------- | ------------------------------------- | ---------------------------- | | **Conversion Rate** | (Units Ordered / Sessions) x 100 | 10-15% for most categories | | **Buy Box %** | Time with Buy Box / Total time listed | > 90% for own-brand products | | **Avg Order Value** | Ordered Product Sales / Total Orders | Varies by category | | **Refund Rate** | Units Refunded / Units Ordered x 100 | < 5% for most categories | {% hint style="danger" %} **Buy Box % target:** aim for **90% or higher**. **85-90%** is a watch zone, review your pricing and fulfillment. Below **85%**, investigate actively: you are losing meaningful sales to competitors or Amazon. Below **70%** is serious, check pricing, fulfillment method, and account health metrics immediately. {% endhint %} *** ## Trend Chart The trend chart visualizes your selected metrics over time with an interactive multi-metric display. ### Chart Features | Feature | Description | | ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Multi-metric overlay** | Display multiple metrics on the same chart for correlation analysis | | **Metric selector** | Choose which metrics to display using the dropdown/selector below the chart | | **Hover tooltips** | Hover over any data point to see exact values and dates | | **Time granularity** | Automatically adjusts (daily/weekly/monthly) based on selected date range | | **Responsive layout** | Chart adapts to screen size with proper scaling | ### Metric Selection Use the **Select Metrics** picker below the chart to choose which data series to plot. It offers around two dozen metrics, grouped roughly as traffic, sales, and device split. You can overlay several at once: | Group | Selectable Metrics | | --------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | | **Traffic (per ASIN)** | Page Views, Sessions, Buy Box Percentage, Session Percentage, Page Views Percentage, Unit Session Percentage | | **Sales (per ASIN)** | Units Ordered, Total Order Items, Ordered Product Sales | | **Sales (by date)** | Units Refunded, Refund Rate, Shipped Product Sales, Units Shipped, Orders Shipped | | **Device split (by date)** | Browser Page Views, Mobile App Page Views, Browser Sessions, Mobile App Sessions, Unit Session Percentage | | **Device split (per ASIN)** | Browser Sessions, Mobile App Sessions, Browser Page Views, Mobile App Page Views | {% hint style="info" %} **Conversion Rate** and **Avg Order Value** are KPI cards only, they are not offered in the chart metric selector. {% endhint %} {% hint style="info" %} The **device split** series separate **browser** from **mobile app** traffic for both sessions and page views. Comparing the two shows where your shoppers actually are; mobile-app traffic often converts differently from desktop browser traffic. {% endhint %} {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro Tip:** Plot **Sessions** and **Conversion Rate** together on the same chart. If sessions are stable but conversion rate is dropping, the issue is your listing (images, pricing, reviews). If conversion is stable but sessions are dropping, the issue is traffic (PPC, SEO, ranking). {% endhint %} *** ## Traffic Split Next to the trend chart, a **Traffic Split** donut breaks your traffic down by where shoppers viewed your listings: * **Browser** - shoppers on a desktop or mobile web browser * **Mobile app** - shoppers using the Amazon shopping app Seeing the split helps you decide where to focus. If most of your demand is mobile-app driven, mobile-first images and concise titles matter more; a browser-heavy split leaves more room for detailed content and A+ modules. *** ## Performance Table ![Listing Performance - Sessions, Buy Box, and conversion metrics](https://4139654583-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Fih2knSvVpBcq5rIeXVjM%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-0ad908d15edf757b4fa7d7a521b85e8673034e27%2Flisting-performance.png?alt=media) Below the chart, a detailed table breaks performance down over time. There is **one row per report date and ASIN**, so the same ASIN appears once for each day in the range. ### Table Columns The table always leads with four fixed columns, then adds one column for each **per-ASIN metric** you selected in the metric picker, so the metric columns are **dynamic** and follow your selection rather than being a fixed set. | Column | Description | Sortable | | ------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | -------- | | **Date** | The Amazon report date for this row | Yes | | **ASIN** | The ASIN identifier | Yes | | **Product Name** | The product title | Yes | | **SKU** | The seller SKU | Yes | | **Metric columns** | One column per selected per-ASIN metric (for example Page Views, Sessions, Units Ordered, Buy Box Percentage) | Yes | {% hint style="info" %} Because the metric columns follow the metric selector, adjusting your selection above changes which columns appear here. **Conversion Rate** and **Avg Order Value** are not table columns. {% endhint %} {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Tip:** Click any row in the table to open a **per-ASIN detail modal** with that product's full metric breakdown, including its **browser vs mobile app** traffic split. {% endhint %} *** ## 👣 Step-by-Step: Diagnosing a Sales Decline 1. Navigate to **Dashboard > Listing Performance**. 2. Set the date range to the **last 30 days**. 3. Review the **KPI cards**: identify which metrics declined. 4. Use the decision tree below: | Symptom | Likely Cause | Action | | ----------------------------------- | ---------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Sessions dropped, conversion stable | Traffic/visibility problem | Check PPC campaigns, organic ranking, and search term relevance | | Sessions stable, conversion dropped | Listing quality problem | Review images, price competitiveness, bullet points, and A+ content | | Buy Box % dropped significantly | Pricing or competition issue | Check if a new competitor entered or if your price drifted above the Buy Box | | All metrics dropped | Account or listing issue | Check for listing suppression, policy warnings, or inventory stockout | 5. Select the specific affected ASIN in the filter to isolate its data. 6. Plot **Sessions** and **Conversion Rate** on the trend chart to pinpoint when the decline started. 7. Cross-reference the date with any changes you made (price adjustments, listing edits, PPC changes). *** ## 🎯 Real-World Scenario: Optimizing a Low-Converting Listing **Situation:** Product Y (ASIN B09YYYYYY) receives 1,200 sessions/month but only converts at 4.2% (category average is 11%). | Step | Analysis | Finding | | ---- | -------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------ | | 1 | Filter to ASIN B09YYYYYY | Confirmed: 1,200 sessions, 50 units ordered, 4.2% conversion | | 2 | Check Buy Box % | 96%: not a Buy Box issue | | 3 | Compare with top-performing ASIN | Top product has 14.8% conversion with similar sessions | | 4 | Review listing externally | Main image is low quality; bullet points are generic | | 5 | Implement changes | New main image, enhanced bullet points, added A+ content | | 6 | Re-check after 2 weeks | Conversion improved to 9.1% (+117%), units ordered doubled | **Before:** 1,200 sessions x 4.2% = 50 units/month x EUR 24.99 = EUR 1,249.50 revenue **After:** 1,200 sessions x 9.1% = 109 units/month x EUR 24.99 = EUR 2,723.91 revenue **Impact:** +EUR 1,474/month from the same traffic, zero additional ad spend. *** ## Key Metric Benchmarks | Metric | Poor | Average | Good | Excellent | | ----------------------------- | ----- | ------- | ------- | --------- | | **Conversion Rate** | < 5% | 5-10% | 10-15% | > 15% | | **Buy Box %** | < 70% | 70-85% | 85-90% | > 90% | | **Refund Rate** | > 10% | 5-10% | 3-5% | < 3% | | **Session-to-PageView Ratio** | > 3.0 | 2.0-3.0 | 1.5-2.0 | < 1.5 | {% hint style="info" %} These benchmarks vary significantly by product category. Electronics and apparel typically have lower conversion rates than consumables and household goods. Use your own historical data as the primary benchmark. {% endhint %} ***
⚠️ Common Mistakes to Avoid | Mistake | Impact | Better Approach | | -------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | | Checking data daily | Day-to-day fluctuations create noise | Analyze 7-day or 30-day trends | | Ignoring Buy Box % | Lost Buy Box = lost sales, even with high traffic | Monitor Buy Box weekly for all ASINs | | Focusing only on sessions | High traffic with low conversion wastes ad spend | Optimize conversion before increasing traffic | | Not filtering by ASIN | Aggregate data hides per-product issues | Analyze top products individually | | Expecting real-time data | Frustration with "missing" recent data | Remember Amazon's reporting lag, and that a new connection can take up to 72 hours to sync | | Comparing different marketplaces | Conversion norms differ by country | Compare within the same marketplace |
\## ✅ Best Practices 1. **Weekly review:** Check the KPI cards and trend chart every Monday for the previous week's data. 2. **Focus on conversion first:** A 1% improvement in conversion rate often has more impact than a 20% increase in sessions. 3. **Track Buy Box continuously:** Set up a weekly reminder to check Buy Box percentages for your top 10 revenue products. 4. **Correlate with PPC:** When you increase ad spend, monitor whether sessions increase proportionally and whether conversion holds steady. 5. **Seasonal awareness:** Note seasonal patterns in your data. Session counts naturally increase during Q4 and dip in January. 6. **A/B test listings:** Change one element at a time (main image, title, price) and measure the conversion impact over 2 weeks. 7. **Multi-ASIN comparison:** Select your top 5 ASINs and compare their metrics to identify which listing strategies work best. *** ## ❓ FAQ
Why is my listing performance data delayed? Amazon provides Brand Analytics and Business Reports data with a delay of roughly 2-3 days, and a newly connected account can take up to 72 hours to sync before any data appears. This is standard across all tools that use Amazon's API, it is not specific to SellerMagnet.
Can I see listing performance for all marketplaces at once? No. Amazon provides performance data per marketplace. Select the marketplace you want to analyze from the filter bar. You can switch between marketplaces to compare performance across regions.
What is the difference between "Sessions" and "Page Views"? A **session** is a unique visitor to your listing (one person = one session, even if they view the page multiple times). **Page views** count every individual view, including repeat visits by the same person. One session can generate multiple page views.
Why does my Buy Box percentage show 0%? This typically means the product is out of stock, the listing is suppressed, or you do not currently hold the Buy Box for that ASIN. Check your inventory status and pricing competitiveness.
Can I export listing performance data? Yes. Use the **Export** button on the filter bar to download the current view directly as **CSV** or **Excel**. The export respects your active marketplace, timeframe, ASIN, and advanced filters. You can also generate scheduled listing performance reports from the **Reports** section.
How is conversion rate calculated? Conversion Rate = (Units Ordered / Sessions) x 100. Note that this is based on sessions, not page views. If a shopper visits your listing 3 times (3 page views, 1 session) and buys on the third visit, that counts as one conversion from one session.
Does the data include organic and paid traffic separately? The Amazon Business Reports data combines organic and paid (PPC) traffic. To isolate PPC performance, use Amazon's Advertising Console or SellerMagnet's PPC analytics (if available).
*** ## ➡️ What's Next? {% content-ref url="/pages/5vsXtaqLonaWayeTIHV6" %} [Reports](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview/reports) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/gEHjN0IlyP0zjQ7jBbK4" %} [Dashboard Overview](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview) {% endcontent-ref %} # Expenses Track every business expense to achieve true net profit visibility. Add one-time or recurring expenses, categorize spending, visualize cash flow trends, and export data for tax preparation. {% hint style="info" %} **Difficulty:** 🟢 Beginner · **Reading time:** \~10 min {% endhint %} {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Open this page in your dashboard:** [**Go to Expenses →**](https://dashboard.sellermagnet.com/dashboard/expenses) {% endhint %} The **Expenses** page lets you record and manage all business costs that fall outside of Amazon fees and COGS (Cost of Goods Sold). This includes advertising costs, software subscriptions, shipping supplies, warehouse rent, VA salaries, and any other operational expense. By tracking these costs in SellerMagnet, your profit calculations reflect your true net profitability. > Amazon fees and COGS are tracked automatically through the Transactions and Product Batches systems. The Expenses page is specifically for **non-Amazon costs** that you enter manually. *** ## 🎥 Video Walkthrough {% hint style="info" %} **Video tutorial coming soon.** A full guided walkthrough of this feature will be available here shortly. {% endhint %} *** ## 🗂️ Page Structure | Section | Purpose | | --------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Analytics Chart** | Distribution donut and Cash Flow timeline, with a history/forecast range toggle and an insight banner | | **KPI Cards** | Six key metrics - four of them clickable to drill into the expenses behind the number | | **Toolbar & Banners** | Date-range toolbar and presets, mixed-currency and one-time notices, and the burn-reconciliation checksum bar | | **Expense Table** | Full list of all expenses with filters, search, header actions, and bulk delete | | **Add/Edit Modal** | Form for creating or modifying expense records | | **Import Modal** | Bulk CSV import for expense data | | **Export Modal** | Download expense data as CSV or Excel | *** ## Analytics Chart The top section features an interactive chart with two visualization modes: ### Distribution View A **donut/pie chart** showing your expense breakdown by category. Hover over any segment to see: * Category name * Total amount spent * Percentage of total expenses ### Cash Flow View A **timeline chart** of your monthly spend across both **past and projected** months, so recurring costs, amortised spend, and flat fees are plotted forward as well as back. This helps you: * Identify months with unusually high spending * Track whether total expenses are trending up or down * Plan budgets based on historical patterns and forward projections Toggle between views using the **Distribution** and **Cash Flow** buttons above the chart. #### Cash Flow range toggle When the **Cash Flow** view is active, a second toggle appears next to the view switcher to control how far the timeline reaches: | Range | Shows | | --------------------- | ------------------------------------------------- | | **-6 / +6** (default) | Six months of history plus six months of forecast | | **History** | The last 12 months only | | **Forecast** | The next 12 months only | ### Insight banner Above the chart, a light-bulb **insight banner** may appear with an automatically generated observation about your spend (for example, a category that dominates the period or a month that stands out). It is contextual and only shows when there is something worth flagging. {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro Tip:** Check the Cash Flow view monthly to compare actual expenses against your budget. If you see a sudden spike in a specific month, click into that month's expenses in the table to identify the cause. {% endhint %} *** ## KPI Cards Six KPI cards provide a quick overview of your expense data. **Four of them are clickable** (wallet, recurring, burn, and yearly) and open a **KPI drill-down modal** listing every expense contributing to that number. | KPI Card | Description | Clickable | | --------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------- | | **Active** | Count of active (non-ended) expenses | Yes - lists active expenses | | **Recurring** | Count of recurring expenses (weekly, monthly, or yearly cadence) | Yes - lists recurring expenses | | **Monthly Burn** | Total of all active expenses for the current month, with weekly and yearly costs converted to their monthly equivalent | Yes - lists this month's contributors | | **Yearly Proj.** | Projected spend over the next 12 months | Yes - lists projected contributors | | **OpEx % of revenue** | Normalized monthly operating spend as a percentage of net revenue | No | | **Top Category** | The category with the highest spend in the period | No | ### KPI drill-down modal Clicking **Active**, **Recurring**, **Monthly Burn**, or **Yearly Proj.** opens a modal titled **Contributing expenses**. It lists each expense behind that KPI with its **Name**, **Category**, **Duration Type**, and **Contribution**, plus a total row - so you can see exactly which records drive the headline number. {% hint style="info" %} **Monthly Burn** normalizes everything to a monthly figure: a EUR 1,164/year subscription is counted as EUR 97/month, and a weekly cost is multiplied up to its monthly equivalent. The same monthly-equivalent logic feeds the **OpEx % of revenue** card. {% endhint %} *** ## Toolbar, Date Range & Banners Between the KPI cards and the table sits a toolbar and a set of contextual banners. ### Date-range toolbar Set a **From** and **To** date (with a clear button) or use a preset: | Preset | Range | | ------------ | ------------------ | | **Last 30d** | The last 30 days | | **MTD** | Month to date | | **Last 6m** | The last 6 months | | **Last 12m** | The last 12 months | | **YTD** | Year to date | The same toolbar carries the **Hide SellerMagnet subscription** checkbox (see [Your SellerMagnet Subscription](#your-sellermagnet-subscription) below). ### Contextual banners | Banner | When it appears | What it tells you | | ------------------------------------ | ----------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | | **Mixed-currency notice** | Your expenses span more than one currency | Totals on this page are **face-value sums per currency, not FX-converted** - a EUR row and a USD row are added as-is | | **One-time analytics note** | You have one-time expenses | One-time costs can be excluded from run-rate analytics unless they are amortised | | **Burn-reconciliation checksum bar** | The current-month ledger loads | A **scale** status line that reconciles the JS-computed Monthly Burn against the server ledger, showing **In sync** or the exact **Drift** amount if they disagree | *** ## Expense Table ![SellerMagnet Expenses](https://4139654583-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Fih2knSvVpBcq5rIeXVjM%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-385ade66418df4591dfc5212b2e6978048f28670%2Fexpenses.png?alt=media) The main table lists all expense records with the following columns: | Column | Description | | ----------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **(checkbox)** | Select the row for bulk delete; the header checkbox selects every visible row | | **Name** | Name of the expense | | **Category** | Expense category (one of the nine below) | | **Marketplace** | Associated marketplace (if scoped to one) | | **Duration** | The expense's duration type (one-time, recurring, or flat fee) | | **Starting Date** | The date the expense starts | | **Amount** | Expense amount in its own currency | | **Action** | Edit and delete buttons | ### Header actions The table header carries the page's action buttons: | Button | What it does | | ------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | | **+ Add Expense** | Opens the Add Expense modal | | **Import** | Opens the CSV bulk-import modal | | **Export** | Opens the CSV / Excel export menu | | **Refresh** | Re-fetches the expense ledger | | **View in P\&L** | Jumps to Reports with these expenses aggregated into your P\&L | | **Analytics** | Opens the Analytics dashboard to see net profit with these expenses applied | | **Manage Plan** | Opens your plan page (your plan price is auto-imported as a recurring expense) | | **Delete Selected** | Appears in red once one or more rows are checked | ### Filtering Options | Filter | Description | | --------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Category Dropdown** | Filter by a specific expense category (All Categories by default) | | **Search Bar** | Search by expense name | | **Date Range** | Set from the date-range toolbar above the table | ### Export Click the **Export** button (file export icon) in the table header to open a menu with two formats, then download all expenses matching your current filters: | Format | Best For | | --------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **CSV** | Importing into accounting software or re-importing via the Import modal | | **Excel** | Opening directly in a spreadsheet with formatting preserved | {% hint style="info" %} The export includes all table columns plus any additional metadata. The CSV file is formatted for easy import into accounting software like Xero, QuickBooks, or DATEV. {% endhint %} ### Bulk Actions Each row in the table has a checkbox, and the header checkbox selects every visible row at once. When one or more rows are selected, a red **Delete Selected** button appears in the table header. | Action | How To | | --------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Select rows** | Tick individual row checkboxes, or the header checkbox to select all | | **Bulk delete** | With rows selected, click **Delete Selected** and confirm in the dialog | {% hint style="danger" %} Bulk delete permanently removes every selected expense. A confirmation dialog shows how many records will be deleted - review the count before confirming, as there is no undo. {% endhint %} *** ## 👣 Step-by-Step: Adding a New Expense 1. Click the **"+ Add Expense"** button (blue button in the table header area). 2. The **Add Expense modal** opens. 3. Fill in the form fields: | Field | Required | Description | Example | | ------------------------- | -------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------- | | **Name** | Yes | What this expense is for | "SellerMagnet Monthly Subscription" | | **Category** | Yes | Select from the nine predefined categories | Software & Subscriptions | | **Duration Type** | Yes | How the cost repeats: one-time, recurring (weekly/monthly/yearly), or flat fee (per order / per unit) | recurring-monthly | | **Amount** | Yes | The cost (a per-unit/per-order rate for flat fees) | 97.00 | | **Currency** | Yes | Currency of the expense | EUR | | **Starting Date** | Yes | The date the expense starts | 2026-04-01 | | **Ending Date** | No | Optional date the expense stops | 2027-03-31 | | **Amortisation** | No | Spread a one-time cost over months: None, over 12 months from start, or a custom number of months (1-600) | Custom - 32 | | **Allocation target** | No | Where the expense is counted (see below - **not yet applied**) | Reports only | | **Marketplace scope** | No | All marketplaces, a specific marketplace, split by revenue, or split equally | All marketplaces | | **Connection** | Yes | The Amazon connection this expense belongs to | (your seller account) | | **Amazon Marketplace ID** | Yes | The marketplace this expense is tied to | Amazon.de | 4. Click **"Save"** to create the expense. 5. The expense appears in the table, and profit calculations update across all dashboards. {% hint style="warning" %} For a **recurring** expense, enter the amount for a **single cycle**, not the annual total. For example, a EUR 1,164/year subscription should be entered as EUR 97 with a **recurring-monthly** duration type (or EUR 1,164 with **recurring-yearly**). {% endhint %} {% hint style="info" %} Some advanced controls (such as the allocation target and any "easy mode" shortcuts) may be **flag-gated** and only appear on accounts where the feature is enabled. {% endhint %} *** ## 👣 Step-by-Step: Bulk Importing Expenses For sellers migrating from spreadsheets or other tools, the CSV import feature allows bulk data entry: 1. Click the **"Import"** button in the table header. 2. The Import Expenses modal opens. 3. **Download the template** CSV file to see the required column format. 4. Fill in your expense data in the template: | Column | Format | Required | | ----------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------- | -------- | | expense\_starting\_date | YYYY-MM-DD | Yes | | expense\_name | Text | Yes | | expense\_amount | Decimal number | Yes | | expense\_category | Must match one of the nine categories | Yes | | expense\_duration\_type | one-time, recurring-weekly, recurring-monthly, recurring-yearly | Yes | | amazon\_marketplace\_id | Marketplace identifier (optional) | No | 5. Upload the completed CSV file. 6. Review the import preview - each row shows its **Date**, **Name**, **Amount**, **Category**, **Duration**, and a validity **Status**. Click a row to edit it, or select rows to **bulk-edit** or delete them. Duplicate rows are skipped automatically. 7. Click **"Import Expenses"** to create all valid records. {% hint style="danger" %} The import process creates all records immediately. There is no bulk undo. Carefully review the import preview before confirming. If you make a mistake, you will need to delete individual records manually. {% endhint %} *** ## Expense Categories SellerMagnet provides **nine** predefined expense categories to help organize your spending. The same nine are used everywhere - the add/edit modal, the category filter, bulk edit, and the CSV import: | Category | Typical Expenses | | ---------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Advertising** | PPC campaigns, sponsored display, external ads, product photos | | **FBA Fees** | Non-automated FBA-related costs you enter by hand | | **Shipping & Fulfillment** | Inbound shipping, prep center fees, packaging | | **Storage Fees** | Warehouse rent, 3PL storage, off-Amazon storage | | **Software & Subscriptions** | SellerMagnet, keyword tools, analytics platforms, repricers | | **Office Expenses** | Office supplies, internet, phone, insurance | | **Travel & Entertainment** | Trade shows, travel, client entertainment | | **Utilities & Rent** | Electricity, water, office or warehouse rent | | **Miscellaneous** | Any expense not fitting the categories above | *** ## Expense Duration Types Besides a category, every expense has a **duration type** that controls how its cost is spread over time and how it flows into your profit numbers: | Duration Type | How it is counted | | ----------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **One-Time** | The full amount lands in its start month (unless you amortise it, see below) | | **Weekly / Monthly / Yearly** | Recurring: repeats automatically on that cycle | | **Flat fee / order** | A rate multiplied by the number of orders in the period | | **Flat fee / unit** | A rate multiplied by the number of units sold in the period | ### Flat fees (per-order and per-unit) A **flat fee** is not a fixed monthly figure, it is a **rate x volume** cost. SellerMagnet's server ledger computes each month's value as your rate multiplied by that month's order or unit count. {% hint style="info" %} Flat fees are inherently per-order costs, so they are **always counted in both Orders and Reports** (you cannot switch them to Reports-only). Because they depend on real order and unit counts, they cannot be projected into future months, only months with actual volume show a flat-fee amount. {% endhint %} For example, a EUR 0.30 "flat fee / unit" prep cost across a month with 400 units sold contributes EUR 120 that month. ### Amortising a one-time cost A large one-time cost (for example, a year of software paid upfront, or product photography) can be **amortised**, spread evenly across several months instead of hitting a single month. The monthly figure is simply: ``` Monthly amount = Total amount / Number of months ``` You can amortise across **12 months from the start month** or a **custom number of months** (1 to 600). Example: a EUR 2,000 license amortised over 32 months shows as EUR 62.50/month of burn. ### Allocation target Each expense also has an **allocation target** that is *intended* to decide where it is counted: | Allocation target | Intended effect | | -------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Reports only** (default) | Counted in Reports and P\&L, but leaves your per-order breakdown untouched | | **Per-order AND reports** | Counted in Reports and P\&L *and* spread across orders (lowers per-order profit) | | **Per-order only** | Spread across orders, but excluded from Reports and P\&L | {% hint style="warning" %} **Not applied yet.** Your choice here is **saved with the expense but does not change any number today**. All expenses currently follow **Settings > General costs per order**. This control will take effect with the upcoming per-category allocation update - the modal itself notes this on the field. {% endhint %} *** ## Recurring Expenses **Recurring is a Duration Type, not a toggle.** In the Add/Edit modal you set an expense's **Duration Type** to one of three recurring cadences - **recurring-weekly**, **recurring-monthly**, or **recurring-yearly** - and SellerMagnet keeps counting it on that cycle until you set an ending date or delete it. There is no separate "Recurring" switch and no "Recurring" column in the table; the cadence is shown in the **Duration** column. This is ideal for: * Weekly, monthly, or yearly software subscriptions * Warehouse rent * VA salaries * Fixed advertising budgets {% hint style="info" %} **Mid-month starts are pro-rated.** A monthly recurring expense is charged by **active days**, so if it starts (or ends) partway through a month, that month shows only the partial amount. Example: a EUR 300/month expense starting on the 16th of a 30-day month counts EUR 150 that first month, then the full EUR 300 each month after. {% endhint %} ### Managing Recurring Expenses | Action | How To | | -------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Create** | Pick a recurring Duration Type (weekly, monthly, or yearly) when adding an expense | | **Change amount** | Edit the expense; the new amount applies going forward | | **Stop on a date** | Edit the expense and set an **Ending Date** | | **Stop permanently** | Delete the expense | {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro Tip:** At the start of each month, review the **Recurring** and **Monthly Burn** KPI cards. Monthly Burn is your fixed monthly cost baseline. Subtract it from your expected monthly profit to see your minimum required margin. {% endhint %} *** ## Your SellerMagnet Subscription Your SellerMagnet plan price is **automatically added as a recurring expense** so your operating costs reflect the true cost of running your business, not just the costs you enter by hand. You do not need to create this entry yourself, and its amount stays in sync with your current plan. Use the **Manage Plan** button in the table header to review or change the plan that drives this figure. ### Hiding the subscription from analytics Some sellers prefer to measure only the operational spend they control and exclude the software cost of SellerMagnet itself. The toolbar includes a **"Hide SellerMagnet subscription"** checkbox for exactly this: * When ticked, the auto-imported subscription is removed from the analytics totals, the chart, and the **OpEx % of revenue** stat, so it does not skew your real operating-cost ratio. * The expense still exists and is still counted in Reports and P\&L - the toggle only affects how the analytics on this page are displayed. {% hint style="info" %} The **OpEx % of revenue** stat uses the same monthly-equivalent logic as the analytics cards, so a yearly plan is normalized to its monthly cost - and is included unless you hide it with this toggle. {% endhint %} *** ## 🎯 Real-World Scenario: Monthly Expense Audit **Situation:** Your monthly profit dropped from EUR 5,200 to EUR 3,800 despite stable sales. You suspect expenses increased. | Step | Action | Finding | | ---- | -------------------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------- | | 1 | Check the **Monthly Burn** KPI card, then click it to drill in | EUR 1,420 (up from EUR 780 last month) | | 2 | Switch the chart to **Cash Flow** view | Clear spike in the current month | | 3 | Switch chart to **Distribution** view | "Advertising" category dominates at 55% | | 4 | Filter the table by **Advertising** category | New PPC campaign added at EUR 500/month | | 5 | Filter by **Software & Subscriptions** | New tool subscription at EUR 140/month | | 6 | Calculate total new expenses | EUR 640/month in new recurring costs | **Before:** "Profit dropped by EUR 1,400 and I do not know why." **After:** "EUR 640 comes from two new recurring expenses. The remaining EUR 760 drop requires investigation in COGS or Amazon fees." *** ## How Expenses Affect Profit Calculations Expenses are factored into profit at the **per-order level** across the dashboard: ``` Profit = Revenue - Amazon Fees - COGS - (General Expenses / Total Orders) ``` The "General Expense per Order" metric distributes your total expenses evenly across all orders in the period. This means: | Monthly Expenses | Monthly Orders | Expense per Order | | ---------------- | -------------- | ----------------- | | EUR 600 | 300 | EUR 2.00 | | EUR 600 | 150 | EUR 4.00 | | EUR 1,200 | 300 | EUR 4.00 | {% hint style="warning" %} If your order volume drops significantly (e.g., during a slow season), the per-order expense allocation increases, which can dramatically reduce per-order profit even if individual order economics remain the same. {% endhint %} ***
⚠️ Common Mistakes to Avoid | Mistake | Impact | Better Approach | | -------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Not tracking any expenses | Profit numbers are overstated by the full expense amount | Enter at least your major recurring costs | | Double-counting Amazon fees | Amazon fees are already tracked in Transactions | Only add non-Amazon expenses here | | Mismatching amount and cadence | Over- or under-stated monthly burn | Match the amount to the Duration Type - a monthly amount with recurring-monthly, or the full yearly amount with recurring-yearly | | Forgetting to update recurring amounts | Old prices persist indefinitely | Audit recurring expenses quarterly | | Not categorizing expenses | Analytics chart and reports are useless | Always select the correct category | | Entering amounts in wrong currency | Expense calculations use wrong conversion rates | Always verify the currency matches your base currency |
\## ✅ Best Practices 1. **Enter expenses within 48 hours** of incurring them to maintain accurate monthly records. 2. **Use recurring for all subscriptions** so they are automatically tracked each month. 3. **Review the Distribution chart monthly** to understand your cost structure. 4. **Compare Cash Flow** trends quarter-over-quarter to identify cost creep. 5. **Export data quarterly** for your accountant and for tax preparation. 6. **Categorize accurately:** this makes tax deduction categorization much easier. 7. **Include marketplace association** when an expense is specific to one market (e.g., UK VAT compliance service). *** ## ❓ FAQ
Are Amazon fees automatically tracked as expenses? No. Amazon fees (referral fees, FBA fees, etc.) are tracked separately in the **Transactions** section. The Expenses page is only for costs you manually enter, business expenses outside of Amazon's fee structure.
Can I set up different recurring frequencies (weekly, quarterly)? Recurring expenses support **weekly, monthly, and yearly** cadences - pick the one you need in the **Duration Type** field. There is no dedicated quarterly cadence: for a quarterly cost, enter the quarterly amount divided by three as a monthly recurring expense, or add individual one-time entries each quarter.
How are expenses allocated to individual orders? Expenses are distributed evenly across all orders in the selected time period. SellerMagnet divides total expenses by total order count to calculate the "general expense per order" value shown on the dashboard.
Can I import expenses from my bank statement? You can import expenses via CSV using the Import function. You would need to format your bank statement data into the template format first. Direct bank integration is not currently available.
What happens if I delete a recurring expense? Deleting the expense removes it entirely, so it no longer counts in any past or future month. If you only want it to stop counting from a certain point onward, edit it and set an **Ending Date** instead of deleting it.
Can multiple team members add expenses? Expense management follows your account's user permission settings. Check **Settings > Team** to configure which team members have access to add, edit, or delete expenses.
Is there a limit to how many expenses I can track? There is no hard limit on the number of expense records. However, for optimal performance, we recommend keeping the active table view filtered to a manageable date range (e.g., the current month or quarter).
*** ## ➡️ What's Next? {% content-ref url="/pages/zVciZq911YoXpD1fuUp0" %} [Transactions](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview/transactions) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/gEHjN0IlyP0zjQ7jBbK4" %} [Dashboard Overview](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview) {% endcontent-ref %} # Transactions View every Amazon fee, adjustment, and financial transaction in one place. Analyze expense breakdowns, compare periods, and understand exactly where Amazon charges eat into your margins. {% hint style="info" %} **Difficulty:** 🟢 Beginner · **Reading time:** \~10 min {% endhint %} {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Open this page in your dashboard:** [**Go to Transactions →**](https://dashboard.sellermagnet.com/dashboard/transactions) {% endhint %} The **Transactions** page provides a complete view of all financial transactions between your Amazon Seller account and Amazon. This includes referral fees, FBA fees, advertising charges, subscription fees, adjustments, reimbursements, and every other charge that Amazon deducts from your account. Understanding these transactions is critical for identifying hidden costs and optimizing your fee structure. {% hint style="info" %} Transactions are pulled directly from Amazon's SP-API (Selling Partner API) financial data. This is the same data you would find in your Seller Central "Payments" reports, but organized and visualized for faster analysis. {% endhint %} *** ## 🎥 Video Walkthrough {% hint style="info" %} **Video tutorial coming soon.** A full guided walkthrough of this feature will be available here shortly. {% endhint %} *** ## 🗂️ Page Structure The Transactions page features a **tabbed interface** with two main views: | Tab | Purpose | | -------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | | **Overview** | KPI summary, expense breakdown chart, summary list, and full transaction table | | **Comparison** | Side-by-side period comparison for identifying fee trends and anomalies | *** ## 📋 Overview Tab ![SellerMagnet Transactions](https://4139654583-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Fih2knSvVpBcq5rIeXVjM%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-3ce7d35e9e48b6f1eaac92cbd905b106fb1ac3ea%2Ftransactions.png?alt=media) ### KPI Cards Three KPI cards at the top provide an at-a-glance summary: | KPI Card | Metric | Icon | Description | | ---------------------- | ---------------------------------------- | -------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Total Expenses** | Net cash flow, split into Out / In / Net | Red trend-down arrow | The headline is the net figure; below it a small breakdown splits **money-Out** (outflows, red), **money-In** (inflows, green), and **Net** | | **Total Transactions** | Count of individual finance events | Blue receipt icon | Number of line items in the period | | **Top Expenses** | Highest-cost fee categories | Yellow ranking star | Quick list of the 2-3 largest outflow types | **Total Expenses** breaks the period into three lines: * **Out** - the sum of all outflow events (service fees, ad spend, removals, chargebacks, ...) * **In** - the sum of all inflow events (refunds, debt recovery, reimbursement adjustments, ...) * **Net** - Out minus In Each of the two numeric cards - **Total Expenses** and **Total Transactions** - also includes: * A **trend indicator** showing percentage change versus the previous period (the Total Expenses trend compares gross outflow) * A **sparkline chart** showing the metric's trend over recent periods {% hint style="info" %} Only **Total Expenses** and **Total Transactions** carry a sparkline. The **Top Expenses** card is a ranked list, not a trended metric, so it has no sparkline. {% endhint %} {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro Tip:** A red upward arrow on "Total Expenses" is not always bad. If your sales volume increased proportionally, your fee-to-revenue ratio may be stable. Always compare expenses against revenue growth, not just in absolute terms. {% endhint %} ### Expense Breakdown Chart (Donut) A donut chart shows the distribution of expenses by category. **The categories are not a hand-written list** - they come straight from Amazon's own **finance event types** (`feeType`) and, for adjustments, the **`AdjustmentType`** on each event. So you see the exact buckets Amazon reports, for example: | Category (from Amazon) | What it is | | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Service Fee** (`ServiceFeeEventList`) | Account and service charges Amazon bills | | **Product Ads** (`ProductAdsPaymentEventList`) | Sponsored ads / PPC charges | | **Debt Recovery** (`DebtRecoveryEventList`) | Amazon recovering an outstanding balance | | **Commingling** (`NetworkComminglingTransactionEventList`) - incl. **Commingling VAT** | Commingled-inventory and tax adjustments | | **Removal** (`RemovalShipmentEventList`) | Removal-order shipment fees | | **Retrocharge** (`RetrochargeEventList`) | Retroactive tax charges, shown per marketplace | | **Adjustments** (`AdjustmentEventList`) | Split by `AdjustmentType` - e.g. **FBAInventoryReimbursement** | {% hint style="info" %} The exact set of categories you see depends on which events Amazon posted in the period, so your donut may show more or fewer buckets than the examples above. {% endhint %} {% hint style="info" %} **Adjustments are not one bucket.** SellerMagnet splits the **Adjustments** event into its `AdjustmentType` sub-types so you can see the direction at a glance. **Reimbursements** (for example, **FBAInventoryReimbursement**) are **inflows**, shown positive and in green. **Billing** items (for example, return postage billing, warehouse lost or damaged) are **outflows**, shown negative. In the donut, Period Summary, and grouped table, each sub-type appears as its own row. {% endhint %} {% hint style="info" %} **In plain English:** Every time you sell, Amazon takes multiple cuts. **Referral Fee** = their sales commission. **FBA Fees** = shipping and warehouse handling. **Advertising** = your PPC spend. Understanding these helps you see where your money goes. {% endhint %} ### Summary Detail List Next to the donut chart, a detailed summary list shows each expense category with: * Category name * Total amount for the period * Percentage of total expenses This provides the exact numbers behind the donut chart visualization. *** ### Currency Conversion Notice If you sell on multiple marketplaces with different base currencies, a notice appears: {% hint style="info" %} All amounts are converted to your base currency (**EUR**) using the exchange rates at the time of each transaction. Slight variations may occur due to exchange rate fluctuations between Amazon's rate and the displayed rate. {% endhint %} *** ### Transaction Table The full transaction table lists every individual Amazon finance event. It is a **grouped, expandable table**: rows are grouped by fee type (and, for adjustments, by sub-type), so you can collapse a whole category or expand it to see the individual events inside. #### Table Columns The table shows **three** columns: | Column | Description | | ------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Posted Date** | The date the event is posted | | **Adjustment Type** | The fee or adjustment type (e.g. "FBAPerUnitFulfillmentFee"), grouped by category | | **Charged Amount** | Amount deducted (negative) or credited (positive) | {% hint style="info" %} The CSV/Excel **export** carries extra date columns (the fetch date and the fee date) that are **not shown in the on-screen table**. Use the export when you need to reconcile each charge against the exact day Amazon booked it. {% endhint %} #### Row detail (raw fee JSON) **Click any row** to open a modal showing the **raw fee detail exactly as Amazon reported it** - the underlying JSON for that finance event. This is the fastest way to see every field behind a single charge without leaving the page. #### Lost & Found badges Rows tied to an order (typically **Adjustment** and **Retrocharge** events) can carry a violet **Lost & Found** badge. It deep-links into [Lost & Found](/inventory-and-operations/reimbursements) so you can open a recoverable reimbursement claim, or jump to the related order or product. When a claim already exists for that row, the badge shows a **tracked** state. #### Table Footer The table includes a **totals row** at the bottom showing the aggregate sum of all charged amounts in the current filtered view. #### Filter Bar | Filter | Description | | ------------------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Date Range** | Select from presets (Today, Yesterday, Last 7/30 Days, This Month, Last Month, This Year, Last 6/12 Months, Last Year) or a custom range | | **Marketplace** | Filter to a single marketplace, or leave on "All marketplaces" | | **Include zero-amount events** | Toggle to include/exclude events whose net amount is zero (hidden by default) | | **Search** | Search by adjustment type or description text | | **Export** | Open the export menu and download filtered transactions as **CSV** or **Excel** | | **Refresh** | Re-fetch data from Amazon's API | {% hint style="info" %} Amazon posts some finance events with a net amount of **zero** (for example, tax-only Commingling entries where VAT collected equals VAT refunded). They are hidden by default because they add noise to the totals row - turn **Include zero-amount events** on to audit the underlying events. {% endhint %} {% hint style="info" %} The **Export** button opens the same unified CSV/Excel menu used across the dashboard. Choose **CSV** for accounting imports and automation, or **Excel** for a ready-to-open `.xlsx` workbook. The export respects your current date range, marketplace, search, and zero-amount filter. {% endhint %} *** ## Arriving from the Payouts Widget You can jump straight here from the **Amazon Payouts** widget on the [Dashboard Overview](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview). A payout's breakdown includes a **View in Transactions** link that opens this page with the date range **pre-filtered to that payout's window** (passed via the `?from=…&to=…` URL parameters). When you arrive this way, the date range automatically switches to **Custom** and loads the matching transactions, so you land directly on the fees and charges behind that specific payout. {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro Tip:** When a payout looks smaller than expected, use **View in Transactions** from the payout breakdown to see exactly which fees, refunds, and adjustments reduced it, no manual date entry required. {% endhint %} *** ## Comparison Tab The Comparison tab lets you compare transaction data between **two months** side by side. ### How to Use 1. Switch to the **Comparison** tab. 2. Pick the first month from the left dropdown (e.g., March 2026). 3. Pick the second month from the right dropdown (e.g., February 2026). 4. Click **Compare**. The page then shows: * A **comparison chart** of the two months (see the chart-type switcher below) * **Two grouped tables side by side** - one per month - each grouped by fee type and each with its own **total** row {% hint style="info" %} The comparison shows the two months next to each other so you can read the difference directly; there is **no separate per-category "% change" column**. Compare the matching rows and the total rows between the two tables, or use the chart to see the shift at a glance. {% endhint %} ### Comparison Chart & Chart-Type Switcher The Comparison tab is not just two tables side by side, it also renders a **comparison chart** so the fee differences are visible at a glance. Above the chart, a **chart-type switcher** lets you redraw the same data in whichever form reads best: | Chart Type | Best For | | --------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Stacked** | Seeing total expenses per period with each category stacked on top | | **By type (grouped)** | Comparing each category's bars for the first month next to the second | | **Lines** | Tracking the trend line of each category across the two periods | | **Area** | Emphasizing the filled magnitude of each category over the periods | | **Horizontal** | A horizontal bar layout, handy when you have many categories to label | The category-by-category tables still appear below the chart, so you get both the visual and the exact numbers. ### Comparison Use Cases | Comparison | Purpose | | ------------------------------------------ | ------------------------------------------ | | This month vs. last month | Identify month-over-month fee trends | | This month vs. the same month last year | Year-over-year comparison for one month | | Month before vs. month after a fee change | Measure the impact of an Amazon fee change | | Pre-PPC-launch month vs. post-launch month | Measure advertising cost impact | {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro Tip:** Use the Comparison tab after Amazon announces fee changes (typically effective annually in January/February and mid-year). Compare the month before and after to quantify the actual impact on your account. {% endhint %} *** ## 👣 Step-by-Step: Analyzing Your Amazon Fee Structure 1. Navigate to **Dashboard > Transactions**. 2. Set the date range to **Last 30 Days** in the filter bar. 3. Review the **KPI cards** for total expense amount and transaction count. 4. Study the **donut chart** to see which fee categories consume the most money. 5. Scroll through the **summary detail list** for exact amounts per category. 6. If a category looks unusually high, use the **Search** bar to filter the table to that adjustment type. 7. Expand the largest fee-type group in the table to see the individual events behind it, and click a row to inspect its raw fee detail. 8. **Export** the filtered data (CSV or Excel) for further analysis in a spreadsheet. *** ## 👣 Step-by-Step: Period Comparison 1. Switch to the **Comparison** tab. 2. Set the first month to the current month. 3. Set the second month to the same month last year (or last month). 4. Click **Compare** and read the two total rows to see the overall change. 5. Look at individual categories in the two grouped tables: which ones increased the most? 6. If FBA fees increased disproportionately, investigate whether Amazon changed fee rates or your product sizes changed. 7. If advertising costs spiked, cross-reference with your PPC dashboard. *** ## 🎯 Real-World Scenario: Identifying Unexpected Fee Increases **Situation:** Your Amazon fees jumped from EUR 3,200 to EUR 4,100 this month (a 28% increase) while order volume only grew 8%. | Step | Action | Finding | | ---- | ------------------------------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | 1 | Open **Transactions > Overview** | Total Expenses: EUR 4,100 (trend arrow: red, +28%) | | 2 | Check the **donut chart** | FBA Fees segment grew from 42% to 51% of total | | 3 | Filter table to "FBAPerUnitFulfillmentFee" | 340 transactions totaling EUR 1,870 | | 4 | Switch to **Comparison** tab | FBA fees: EUR 1,344 (last month) vs. EUR 1,870 (this month) = +39% | | 5 | Investigate product changes | Two products moved from "Small Standard" to "Large Standard" size tier | | 6 | Calculate impact | Size tier upgrade added EUR 0.85/unit x 620 units = EUR 527 in extra fees | **Before:** "Fees jumped 28% and I do not know why." **After:** "Two products were reclassified to a larger size tier, costing an extra EUR 527/month. Packaging optimization could move them back to the smaller tier." *** ## Understanding Amazon Fee Types | Fee Type | What It Covers | Typical Range | | ------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------ | | **Referral Fee** | Amazon's commission on each sale | 8-15% of sale price | | **FBA Per-Unit Fee** | Pick, pack, and ship each unit | EUR 2.50 - EUR 5.50 per unit | | **FBA Storage Fee** | Monthly inventory storage in Amazon warehouses | EUR 0.75 - EUR 2.40 per cubic foot | | **FBA Long-Term Storage** | Surcharge for inventory stored > 365 days | EUR 6.90 per cubic foot (or EUR 0.15/unit) | | **Advertising Fee** | PPC and sponsored ad campaign charges | Variable (your budget) | | **Subscription Fee** | Professional seller account | EUR 39.00/month | | **Variable Closing Fee** | Media category items (books, music, etc.) | EUR 0.50 - EUR 1.00 per item | | **Refund Admin Fee** | Fee retained by Amazon when processing a refund | Lesser of EUR 5.00 or 20% of referral fee | {% hint style="danger" %} **Long-Term Storage Fees** can be devastating. If you have slow-moving inventory that has been in Amazon's warehouse for over 365 days, you may be charged up to EUR 6.90 per cubic foot. Monitor your inventory age in Seller Central and remove stale stock before the annual cleanup deadline. {% endhint %} ***
⚠️ Common Mistakes to Avoid | Mistake | Impact | Better Approach | | ------------------------------------ | ---------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------- | | Ignoring transaction data entirely | Hidden fees erode margins silently | Review transactions at least monthly | | Only looking at total expenses | Missing category-level shifts | Always check the donut chart breakdown | | Not using the Comparison tab | Cannot identify trends or anomalies | Compare month-over-month and year-over-year | | Confusing transactions with expenses | Double-counting costs | Transactions = Amazon fees; Expenses = your manual entries | | Not exporting data for accounting | Tax preparation becomes painful | Export quarterly for your accountant | | Ignoring zero-amount events | Missing tax-only entries that still move money | Toggle "Include zero-amount events" on periodically |
\## ✅ Best Practices 1. **Monthly review:** Check the Overview tab on the 1st of each month to compare against the previous month. 2. **Quarterly comparison:** Use the Comparison tab to track fee trends quarter-over-quarter. 3. **After fee announcements:** Compare pre- and post-change periods to quantify the impact. 4. **Export for tax season:** Download full-year transaction data for your tax accountant. 5. **Monitor advertising separately:** Cross-reference the advertising fee total here with your PPC dashboard for consistency. 6. **Watch for reimbursements:** Positive amounts in the transaction table may be reimbursements, ensure they match your claims. *** ## ❓ FAQ
How often is transaction data updated? Transaction data is synced from Amazon's SP-API. Most transactions appear within 24-48 hours of being charged. Settlement data (final payouts) may take up to 14 days after a settlement period closes.
Why do I see transactions with zero amounts? Some Amazon finance events net to zero (e.g., tax-only Commingling entries where VAT collected equals VAT refunded) or are offsetting entries. They are hidden by default; turn **Include zero-amount events** off again to focus on actual charges.
Can I see transactions per product? The Transactions page shows account-level transactions. For per-product fee breakdowns, use the **Order Breakdown panel** on the Orders page, which shows the fee decomposition for each individual order.
Are currency conversions accurate? SellerMagnet converts all amounts to your base currency using the exchange rate recorded at the time of each transaction. Small differences from Amazon's displayed amounts may occur due to rounding or timing differences.
What is the difference between "Date Fetched" and "Fee Date"? **Date Fetched** is when SellerMagnet pulled the transaction from Amazon's API; **Fee Date** is when Amazon actually applied the fee. These may differ by 1-3 days. Both dates are included in the CSV/Excel **export** for reconciliation - the on-screen table shows a single **Posted Date** column to keep it readable.
Can I dispute a transaction from this page? No. Transaction disputes must be handled through Amazon Seller Central's case management system. SellerMagnet provides visibility and analysis, but cannot modify Amazon's financial records.
How does this data relate to the Expenses page? The **Transactions** page shows Amazon-side fees pulled automatically from the API. The **Expenses** page tracks non-Amazon costs you enter manually. Together, they provide complete cost visibility. They are never double-counted in profit calculations.
*** ## ➡️ What's Next? {% content-ref url="/pages/nw54VTDfb3V8CGNeqo5r" %} [Expenses](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview/expenses) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/5vsXtaqLonaWayeTIHV6" %} [Reports](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview/reports) {% endcontent-ref %} # Reports Generate, schedule, and download custom reports for your Amazon business. Choose from multiple report types, filter by marketplace and date range, and set up automated recurring reports for your team. {% hint style="info" %} **Difficulty:** 🟢 Beginner · **Reading time:** \~15 min {% endhint %} {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Open this page in your dashboard:** [**Go to Reports →**](https://dashboard.sellermagnet.com/dashboard/reports) {% endhint %} The **Reports** page is your hub for generating, managing, and downloading custom data exports from SellerMagnet. Whether you need a one-time financial report for your accountant, a weekly sales summary for your team, or a monthly performance export for stakeholders, the Reports module handles it all with flexible report types, scheduling, and delivery options. {% hint style="info" %} Reports pull data from all other SellerMagnet modules, orders, products, transactions, expenses, and listing performance. They provide a snapshot of your data at the time of generation, formatted for easy consumption outside SellerMagnet. {% endhint %} *** ## 🎥 Video Walkthrough {% hint style="info" %} **Video tutorial coming soon.** A full guided walkthrough of this feature will be available here shortly. {% endhint %} *** ## 🗂️ Page Structure | Section | Purpose | | ----------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Stats Overview** | Four stat cards showing total, completed, pending, and failed report counts | | **Quick Actions Bar** | Buttons for generating, scheduling, and refreshing reports | | **Status Filter Tabs** | Filter the reports table by status (All, Completed, Pending, Failed) | | **Search Bar** | Search reports by type or name | | **Reports Table** | Full list of all generated reports with status, download, and actions | | **Scheduled Reports Section** | Table of recurring report schedules with status and next run info | *** ## 📋 Stats Overview Four stat cards at the top provide a quick summary of your report activity: | Stat Card | Description | Color Indicator | | ----------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------- | --------------- | | **Total Reports** | Total number of reports ever generated | Blue | | **Completed** | Reports that finished successfully and are ready for download | Green | | **Pending** | Reports currently being generated or queued | Yellow/Amber | | **Failed** | Reports that encountered an error during generation | Red | Each card is **clickable**, clicking a stat card filters the table to show only reports with that status. {% hint style="info" %} Pending reports typically complete within 1-5 minutes depending on the data volume and date range. Very large reports (12+ months across multiple marketplaces) may take up to 15 minutes. {% endhint %} *** ## Quick Actions Bar The actions bar provides primary controls: | Button | Action | Description | | ----------------------------------- | --------------------------------- | ------------------------------------- | | **Generate Report** (blue, primary) | Opens the report generation modal | Create a new one-time report | | **Schedule Report** | Opens the scheduling modal | Set up an automated recurring report | | **Refresh** | Re-fetches the report list | Update the table with latest statuses | *** ## 🔍 Status Filter Tabs Below the action buttons, filter tabs let you narrow the report list: | Tab | Shows | Badge | | ------------- | ----------------------------------- | --------------- | | **All** | Every report regardless of status | Total count | | **Completed** | Only successfully generated reports | Completed count | | **Pending** | Reports currently processing | Pending count | | **Failed** | Reports that encountered errors | Failed count | *** ## 📤 Reports Table ![SellerMagnet Reports](https://4139654583-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Fih2knSvVpBcq5rIeXVjM%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-d460cd614ad36b55d7c0d0fbcc7599b7c046ab85%2Freports.png?alt=media) The main table displays all your generated reports. ### Table Columns | Column | Description | | ---------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | | **Report Type** | Type of report (e.g., Orders, Product COGS, General Fees, Listing Performance) | | **Connection** | Amazon Seller account/connection the report was generated from | | **Marketplaces** | Which marketplace(s) the report covers | | **Time Range** | Date range covered by the report | | **Requested At** | Date and time the report was requested | | **Format** | File format (CSV, XLSX, JSON) | | **Records** | Number of data rows in the report | | **Status** | Current status: Initial, Pending, Processing, Completed, Failed | | **Action** | Download or retry buttons | ### Status Badges | Status | Appearance | Meaning | | -------------- | ------------------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Initial** | Yellow/amber (counted under Pending) | Report was just submitted and is waiting for the worker to pick it up | | **Completed** | Green badge with checkmark | Report is ready for download | | **Pending** | Yellow/amber badge with clock | Report is queued or processing | | **Processing** | Blue badge with spinner | Report is actively being generated | | **Failed** | Red badge with exclamation | Report generation encountered an error | ### Actions | Action | Icon | Description | | ------------ | --------------------- | ----------------------------------------- | | **Download** | Download icon (green) | Download the completed report file | | **Retry** | Retry icon | Re-attempt generation for a failed report | | **Delete** | Trash icon | Remove the report record | *** ## 📤 Step-by-Step: Generating a One-Time Report 1. Click the **"Generate Report"** button in the Quick Actions bar. 2. The report generation modal opens. 3. Choose a **Delivery** mode with the segmented control at the top of the modal. This decides how the report is produced and which list of report types the dropdown shows: | Delivery mode | What it does | Format options | | ------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ---------------- | | **Instant export** | Downloads right away from data SellerMagnet already holds. No queue, no waiting. | CSV, Excel | | **Amazon report** | Requested from Amazon and built by a background worker. It appears in the reports list below and you download it once it is Completed. | CSV, Excel, JSON | 4. Fill in the report parameters: | Field | Description | Example | | ------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------- | | **Report Type** | Select the type of data you want (the list depends on the Delivery mode) | Orders | | **Report Options** | For some Amazon report types, tick the optional checkboxes to include extra data | (varies by type) | | **Connection** | Choose which Amazon account to pull from | My Amazon EU Account | | **Marketplace(s)** | Select one or more marketplaces, or leave on "All Marketplaces" | Amazon.de, Amazon.fr | | **Start Date** | Beginning of the report period | 2026-01-01 | | **End Date** | End of the report period | 2026-03-31 | | **Format** | Choose the output file format | CSV | {% hint style="info" %} **Quick date presets:** Instead of picking dates by hand, use the buttons above the date fields, **Last 7 Days**, **Last 30 Days**, **Last 90 Days**, **This Month**, and **This Year**, to fill the Start Date and End Date in one click. {% endhint %} 5. Click **"Generate Report"** to submit. 6. For an **Instant export**, the file downloads immediately in your browser and the modal closes. For an **Amazon report**, the report appears in the table with a "Pending" status. 7. For Amazon reports, wait for the status to change to "Completed" (typically 1-5 minutes), then click the **Download** button to save the file. {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro Tip:** Generate quarterly reports on the first business day of each new quarter. This builds a consistent archive of your Amazon business data for trend analysis and tax preparation. {% endhint %} *** ## ⚡ Delivery: Instant Export vs. Amazon Report The report-type dropdown does not mix every type into one long list. A **Delivery** segmented control at the top of the Generate modal swaps the dropdown between two kinds of report: | Delivery mode | Icon | Behaviour | | ------------------ | -------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | | **Instant export** | Lightning bolt | Generated synchronously from the data SellerMagnet already stores. The file **downloads immediately**, there is no "Pending" row to wait on. CSV or Excel only. | | **Amazon report** | Amazon logo | Requested from Amazon and built by a background worker. It is **queued** and lands in the reports list with a status you refresh until "Completed". CSV, Excel, or JSON. | {% hint style="info" %} There used to be a single dropdown where instant exports were flagged only with a lightning-bolt emoji. That is gone, the Delivery control now makes the choice explicit and keeps each list short. {% endhint %} ### Instant export sources Selecting **Instant export** switches the dropdown to these registry-backed sources (CSV/XLSX): Orders, Refunded Orders, Products & COGS, Expenses, Listing Performance, Transactions / Payouts, Review Requests Sent, Financial Summary, Sourcer Lookup History, PPC Campaigns, and PPC Keywords. ### Snapshots (no date range) A few instant-export sources are **point-in-time snapshots** of your current data, so they need no date range. When you select one, the Start Date and End Date fields disappear. | Snapshot source | What it captures | | -------------------------- | ------------------------------ | | **Products & COGS** | Current catalog and cost state | | **Expenses** | Full expense ledger | | **Sourcer Lookup History** | Everything you have looked up | | **PPC Campaigns** | Current campaign list | | **PPC Keywords** | Current keyword list | The remaining instant-export sources (Orders, Refunded Orders, Transactions / Payouts, Listing Performance, Review Requests Sent, Financial Summary) still require a Start and End date. ### Preview before you generate For **Instant export** sources only, a **Preview** button appears in the generation modal. Click it to load a small **sample of rows and columns** so you can confirm you picked the right source, marketplace, and date range before downloading the full file. {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro Tip:** Use **Preview** to sanity-check the columns and a few rows first. If the sample comes back empty, your marketplace or date range probably has no data, adjust the filters before generating the full export. {% endhint %} *** ## 📤 Available Report Types (Amazon Reports) The **Amazon report** list is driven by your data and can change over time, so treat the following as **indicative** rather than a fixed menu. Typical types include: | Report Type | Data Included | Best For | | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------- | | **Orders** | Order records with products and financials | Accounting, revenue reconciliation | | **Sales Summary** | Aggregated sales figures for the period | Quick performance snapshots | | **Inventory** / **Inventory Snapshot** / **Inventory Report** / **Inventory Forecast** | Stock levels, current-state snapshots, and forward-looking demand estimates | Reorder planning, warehouse management | | **FBA Returns** | Returns for FBA (Fulfilled by Amazon) orders | Return-rate and quality analysis | | **FBM Returns** | Returns for FBM (Fulfilled by Merchant) orders | Return-rate and quality analysis | | **Expenses** | Manually tracked business expenses | Tax deductions, budget review | | **Product COGS** | Product catalog with cost of goods per unit | Margin and profitability review | | **General Fees** | Amazon fees and adjustments | Fee analysis, cost optimization | | **Listing Performance** | Sessions, page views, conversion, Buy Box % | Marketing analysis, listing optimization | | **Repricing Log** | History of automated price changes | Repricer auditing | | **Review Request Log** | Review requests that were sent | Review-outreach tracking | | **Reimbursement Claims** | Lost & Found reimbursement claim records | Recovery tracking | | **Alerts History** | Past alert events | Operational review | | **Seller Performance** | Account health and performance metrics | Compliance monitoring | {% hint style="info" %} Some Amazon report types, such as Inventory Snapshot, Inventory Forecast, and Seller Performance, are current-state **snapshots** and hide the date range when selected. Others expose extra **Report Options** checkboxes below the type dropdown, tick these to include additional data in the file. {% endhint %} *** ## 📤 Scheduled Reports The Scheduled Reports section allows you to automate recurring report generation. {% hint style="info" %} Scheduling covers the **Amazon report** (queued) types. Instant exports run on demand, so they are not scheduled. {% endhint %} ### Scheduled Reports Table Columns | Column | Description | | --------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Report Type** | Type of report being generated | | **Frequency** | How often the report runs (Daily, Weekly, Every 2 Weeks, Monthly), with the chosen day shown in brackets | | **Delivery** | How the report is delivered (Email, Webhook, or Email + Webhook) | | **Format** | File format (CSV, XLSX, JSON) | | **Next Run** | Date and time of the next scheduled generation | | **Last Run** | Date and time of the most recent generation | | **Status** | Active or Paused | | **Action** | Pause/resume toggle, or delete the schedule | ### Step-by-Step: Creating a Scheduled Report 1. Click the **"Schedule Report"** button in the Quick Actions bar. 2. The scheduling modal opens. 3. Configure the schedule: | Field | Description | Example | | ------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------- | | **Connection** | Amazon account | My Amazon EU Account | | **Report Type** | Type of report | Orders | | **Marketplace(s)** | Target marketplaces, or "All Marketplaces" | All Marketplaces | | **Frequency** | How often to generate: Daily, Weekly, Every 2 Weeks, or Monthly | Weekly | | **Day of Week** | Shown for Weekly and Every 2 Weeks, which day the report runs on | Monday | | **Day of Month** | Shown for Monthly, a day from 1 to 28 | 1 | | **Send via** | Delivery method: Email, Webhook, or Email + Webhook | Email + Webhook | | **Webhook URL** | Shown when Webhook or Email + Webhook is selected, the URL that receives the finished report | | | **Format** | Output format: CSV, Excel, or JSON | CSV | 4. Click **"Create Schedule"** to activate. 5. The schedule appears in the Scheduled Reports table with "Active" status. {% hint style="info" %} The **Day of Month** picker stops at **28** on purpose, so a monthly schedule always has a valid day in every month, including February. {% endhint %} {% hint style="warning" %} Scheduled reports generate automatically at the configured time. Ensure your email address is correct in Settings if you selected email delivery, and that your Webhook URL is reachable if you selected webhook delivery. If you choose Webhook or Email + Webhook, a Webhook URL is required before the schedule can be saved. {% endhint %} ### Managing Scheduled Reports | Action | How To | | --------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------- | | **Pause a schedule** | Switch off the toggle on the schedule row | | **Resume a schedule** | Switch the toggle back on | | **Delete a schedule** | Click the trash icon to permanently remove the schedule | *** ## 📤 Real-World Scenario: Monthly Reporting Workflow **Situation:** You manage an Amazon business and need to provide your accountant with monthly financial data. | Report | Schedule | Purpose | | ---------------- | ----------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------- | | **Orders** | Monthly, 1st of each month, previous month data | Complete order records for revenue reconciliation | | **General Fees** | Monthly, 1st of each month, previous month data | Amazon fee breakdown for expense categorization | | **Expenses** | Monthly, 1st of each month, previous month data | Manual business expenses for deduction tracking | Set up these three schedules once, and your accountant receives clean data every month without any manual effort. {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro Tip:** Create a "Q4 Performance" scheduled report that runs weekly during October through December. During your busiest season, weekly data helps you make faster decisions on inventory, pricing, and advertising. {% endhint %} *** ## 📊 Reading Your Results {% hint style="info" %} The **Records** column counts the number of data rows written to the file, not a currency amount. For a per-order export that is the number of order lines. A **Completed** report showing **0** records means the query ran fine but your marketplace and date range held no data - re-check the filters rather than retrying. {% endhint %} {% hint style="warning" %} **Retry vs. fresh run for a failed scheduled report:** If a scheduled instance ends in **Failed**, the schedule itself is unaffected - it still fires at its next interval and generates fresh for the new relative window. Clicking **Retry** on the failed row instead re-attempts that same instance for its original period. Use **Retry** to recover the specific report you missed; wait for the next run if you only need the current period. {% endhint %} *** ## 📤 Report File Formats | Format | Best For | Advantages | Limitations | | -------- | ----------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------- | | **CSV** | Accounting software import, data analysis | Universal compatibility, small file size | No formatting, no multiple sheets | | **XLSX** | Manual review, sharing with stakeholders | Formatted tables, multiple sheets possible | Larger file size, requires Excel | | **JSON** | Feeding data into scripts or integrations | Machine-readable, preserves nested structure | Not meant for spreadsheets; **Amazon reports only** | {% hint style="info" %} **JSON is available for Amazon (queued) report types only.** Instant exports produce CSV or Excel, if you pick JSON for an instant export, SellerMagnet shows an error telling you the type supports CSV and Excel only. {% endhint %} *** ## 🔧 Troubleshooting Failed Reports When a report fails, check these common causes: | Cause | Symptom | Solution | | --------------------------- | ------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------ | | Date range too large | Report times out | Reduce the date range or split into smaller periods | | Amazon API rate limit | Intermittent failures | Wait 10 minutes and retry | | No data for selected period | Report completes with 0 records | Verify the marketplace and date range have actual data | | Connection expired | Authentication error | Re-authenticate your Amazon connection in Settings | | Server processing error | Unexpected failure | Click Retry; if it persists, contact support | {% hint style="danger" %} If a report fails repeatedly, do not create dozens of retry attempts. This can queue up redundant processing jobs. Try once or twice, then contact SellerMagnet support with the report ID. {% endhint %} ***
⚠️ Common Mistakes to Avoid | Mistake | Impact | Better Approach | | -------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------ | | Generating duplicate reports | Wastes processing resources and clutters the table | Check existing reports before generating a new one | | Setting date ranges that are too broad | Slow generation, massive files | Use monthly or quarterly ranges instead of full-year | | Not downloading completed reports | Reports may be cleaned up after a retention period | Download promptly or set up email delivery | | Ignoring failed reports | Missing data for accounting or analysis | Investigate failures and retry | | No scheduled reports | Relying on manual generation each month | Automate recurring reports with the scheduling feature | | Wrong marketplace selection | Report data does not match expectations | Double-check marketplace selection before generating |
\## ✅ Best Practices 1. **Automate monthly reports:** Set up schedules for your core reports (Orders, General Fees, Expenses) on the 1st of each month. 2. **Use CSV for data processing:** If you plan to import data into accounting software, always choose CSV format. 3. **Use XLSX for human review:** If the report will be read by a person, XLSX provides better formatting. 4. **Keep date ranges manageable:** Monthly reports are ideal. Quarterly is acceptable. Annual reports should be split by quarter. 5. **Monitor the Pending queue:** If you see reports stuck in Pending for more than 15 minutes, check your connection status. 6. **Archive important reports:** Download and store critical reports in your cloud storage for long-term record keeping. 7. **Quarterly clean-up:** Delete old, no-longer-needed reports to keep your Reports page organized. *** ## 📤 Comparison: One-Time vs. Scheduled Reports | Feature | One-Time Report | Scheduled Report | | -------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------- | | **Generation** | Manual trigger | Automatic on schedule | | **Date range** | Any custom range | Relative to run date (e.g., "previous 7 days") | | **Delivery** | Instant exports download immediately; Amazon reports appear in the list to download | Email, Webhook, or Email + Webhook | | **Frequency** | One-time | Daily, weekly, every 2 weeks, or monthly | | **Use case** | Ad hoc analysis, specific investigations | Recurring reporting, stakeholder updates | | **Management** | Delete when no longer needed | Pause, resume, or delete the schedule | *** ## ❓ FAQ
How long do completed reports remain available for download? Completed reports are retained for 90 days. After that, the report record may be cleaned up. Download important reports promptly or set up email delivery for automatic archiving.
Can I generate reports for multiple marketplaces in one file? Yes. When creating a report, you can select multiple marketplaces. The generated file will contain data from all selected marketplaces with a marketplace identifier column.
What time zone are report dates based on? Reports use UTC as the base time zone for date calculations. The "Requested At" column shows the time in your local time zone. Date range filters (Start Date/End Date) are interpreted in the marketplace local time zone.
Can I customize which columns appear in a report? Report formats are standardized to include all relevant columns for the selected report type. Column customization is not currently available. You can remove unwanted columns after downloading the file.
Is there a limit to how many reports I can generate? There is no strict limit, but generating many large reports simultaneously can slow processing. We recommend generating one large report at a time and waiting for it to complete before starting the next.
Can scheduled reports send to multiple email addresses? Currently, scheduled reports deliver to the primary account email. For multi-recipient delivery, forward the email or use shared cloud storage for the downloaded files.
What happens if a scheduled report fails? The schedule continues to run at its next interval. The failed instance appears in the Reports table with "Failed" status. You will receive a notification about the failure. The next scheduled run will attempt generation fresh.
*** ## ➡️ What's Next? {% content-ref url="/pages/gEHjN0IlyP0zjQ7jBbK4" %} [Dashboard Overview](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/nw54VTDfb3V8CGNeqo5r" %} [Expenses](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview/expenses) {% endcontent-ref %} # Product Tags Organize your products and orders with custom tags and tag groups, then filter and analyze your business data by any tag across all SellerMagnet tools. {% hint style="info" %} **Difficulty:** 🟢 Beginner · **Reading time:** \~15 min {% endhint %} {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Open this page in your dashboard:** [**Go to Product Tags →**](https://dashboard.sellermagnet.com/dashboard/tags) {% endhint %} ## 📋 Overview The **Product Tags** feature lets you create a flexible categorization system for your products and orders. Define custom **tags** (e.g., "High Margin," "Seasonal," "Clearance"), organize them into **tag groups** (e.g., "Profitability," "Season," "Status"), and assign them across your catalog. Tags are available as filters throughout the entire SellerMagnet dashboard. Think of tags as your personal layer of business intelligence on top of Amazon's product data. While Amazon gives you ASINs, SKUs, and categories, tags let you slice your catalog by the dimensions that matter to **your** business, margin tiers, sourcing methods, team ownership, lifecycle stage, or anything else you need. *** ## Summary Stats | KPI | Description | Target Benchmark | | ---------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------ | ------------------------------------------- | | **Total Tags** | Number of tags you have created | 10-30 tags for most sellers | | **Tag Groups** | Number of tag groups | 3-7 groups covering key business dimensions | | **Product Tags** | Total product-tag assignments (a product carrying two tags counts twice) | Aim for 100% coverage of active products | | **Order Tags** | Total order-tag assignments | Optional; use for special order tracking | > **Pro tip:** Your goal should be 100% tag coverage on active products. Untagged products are invisible to tag-based filters, meaning they will be excluded from any filtered analysis. Run a periodic audit to catch newly added products that need tagging. *** ## Tag Groups ![Product Tags - Tag management and organization](https://4139654583-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Fih2knSvVpBcq5rIeXVjM%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-383ec020f24605cb2e7c29a14dba61e3a90a8af5%2Fproduct-tags.png?alt=media) Tag groups help you organize related tags together. Each group appears as a card showing: * **Color indicator:** Visual dot matching the group's color * **Group name** and description * **Tag count:** Number of tags in this group * **Tag preview:** Up to 4 tag pills displayed, with a "+N more" indicator for additional tags ### Creating a Tag Group Click **Add Tag Group** and fill in: | Field | Description | Example | | --------------- | ---------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------- | | **Name** | Group name (e.g., "Profitability") | "Margin Tier" | | **Description** | Optional description of the group's purpose | "Categorizes products by profit margin percentage" | | **Color** | Choose from preset colors or use custom picker | Blue for financial, green for status | ### Managing Tag Groups * **Edit:** Update name, description, or color * **Delete:** Remove the group (tags become ungrouped, not deleted) {% hint style="info" icon="lightbulb" %} **Tip:** When you delete a tag group, the tags inside it are preserved, they just become ungrouped. No product or order assignments are affected. You can reassign them to a different group later. {% endhint %} ### Recommended Tag Group Structure Here is a proven structure that works for most Amazon sellers: | Group Name | Purpose | Example Tags | | --------------- | --------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------- | | **Margin Tier** | Categorize by profitability | High Margin, Medium Margin, Low Margin, Loss Leader | | **Lifecycle** | Track product stage | New Launch, Growth, Mature, Declining, Clearance | | **Season** | Seasonal relevance | Evergreen, Q4 Holiday, Summer, Back to School | | **Source** | Sourcing method | Private Label, Wholesale, Arbitrage, Handmade | | **Priority** | Team attention level | Star Product, Needs Review, On Watch, Deprioritized | | **Brand** | For multi-brand portfolios | Brand A, Brand B, Brand C | > **Best practice:** Keep group names short and noun-based ("Season" not "What season is this product for"). This makes filter dropdowns cleaner and faster to scan. *** ## Tags ### Creating a Tag Click **Add Tag** and configure: | Field | Description | Tips | | ------------- | ----------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------ | | **Name** | Tag name (e.g., "High Margin") | Keep under 20 characters for clean display | | **Color** | Choose from 8+ preset colors or use the custom picker | Use consistent colors within a group | | **Tag Group** | Assign to a tag group (optional) | Always assign to a group for better organization | A **live preview** shows how the tag will appear before you save. {% hint style="info" %} **Quick win:** Use color strategically. For a "Margin Tier" group: green for High Margin, yellow for Medium, orange for Low, red for Loss Leader. This creates an instant visual signal across all SellerMagnet pages where tags appear. {% endhint %} ### Tags Table | Column | Description | | --------------- | --------------------------------------------- | | **Tag** | Color-coded tag pill | | **Tag Group** | The group this tag belongs to | | **Color** | Color swatch preview | | **Products** | Number of products assigned (clickable badge) | | **Orders** | Number of orders assigned (clickable badge) | | **Total Usage** | Combined count (products + orders) | | **Actions** | Assign, Edit, Delete | ### Tag Naming Conventions Consistent naming makes tags more useful over time. Here are recommended conventions: | Pattern | Example | When to Use | | -------------------- | ----------------- | ------------------------------------ | | **Adjective + Noun** | "High Margin" | Descriptive quality-based tags | | **Status prefix** | "Status: Active" | Lifecycle or workflow state tags | | **Season + Year** | "Q4 2026" | Time-bound seasonal tags | | **Brand name** | "Brand: AquaPure" | Multi-brand portfolio identification | | **Action required** | "Needs: Restock" | Workflow and task-oriented tags | {% hint style="danger" %} **Warning:** Avoid creating duplicate or near-duplicate tags like "High margin," "high-margin," and "HighMargin." Establish a naming convention before you start and stick with it. Cleaning up inconsistent tags after they are in use is tedious. {% endhint %} *** ## Assigning Tags The **Assign** action opens a single assignment modal with two tabs - **Products** (by SKU) and **Orders** (by Order ID). The tag's **Assign** button and both the **Products** and **Orders** badge counts all open this same modal; clicking a badge simply opens it on the matching tab. Each tab header also shows how many items are currently assigned. {% hint style="info" %} Assignments are **persistent**. When you reopen the modal, it lists the items currently assigned to that tag, so you can review, add, or remove without starting over. {% endhint %} ### To Products 1. Click the **Assign** button on any tag, or click the **Products** badge count 2. On the **Products** tab, enter SKUs - separate multiple values with a **comma or a new line** for bulk assignment 3. Confirm to apply the tag to selected products **Bulk assignment example:** ``` SKU-001, SKU-002, SKU-003, SKU-004, SKU-005 ``` This assigns the tag to all five products in a single action. The bulk input accepts up to **1,000 characters** per submission - for very large lists, paste in batches. ### To Orders 1. Click the **Orders** badge count on any tag (or switch to the **Orders** tab in the assignment modal) 2. Enter Order IDs - separate multiple values with a **comma or a new line** for bulk assignment 3. Confirm to apply the tag to selected orders **When to tag orders:** * Flagging orders for manual review (e.g., suspected fraud, high-value orders) * Tracking orders from a specific promotion or campaign * Marking orders that required customer service intervention * Grouping orders for a specific business analysis > Tags assigned to products and orders are available as filters across the entire SellerMagnet dashboard, including Orders, Products, Analytics, and Reports. This means you can view your Orders Analytics filtered by "High Margin" products only, or check refund rates for "New Launch" products specifically. > **Pro tip:** After assigning tags in bulk, click the Products badge count to verify the assignment. The modal shows all currently assigned products, letting you confirm everything applied correctly. *** ## 🔍 Search & Filter Use the **search box** at the top of the page to filter tags and groups by name in real time. The search matches against: * Tag names * Tag group names * Tag descriptions (if provided) This is especially useful when you have 20+ tags and need to find a specific one quickly. *** ## Tag Templates for Common Use Cases ### Template 1: Standard E-Commerce Seller For a seller with 50-200 SKUs across 1-2 marketplaces: **Groups and Tags:** | Group: Margin Tier | Group: Lifecycle | Group: Priority | | ---------------------- | ---------------- | --------------- | | High Margin (>30%) | New Launch | Star Product | | Medium Margin (15-30%) | Growth | Needs Review | | Low Margin (<15%) | Mature | On Watch | | Loss Leader | Declining | Deprioritized | | | Clearance | | **Setup time:** 15 minutes **Tags needed:** 13 ### Template 2: Multi-Brand Portfolio For a seller managing 3+ brands with 200-1000 SKUs: **Groups and Tags:** | Group: Brand | Group: Source | Group: Season | Group: Margin | Group: Status | | ------------ | ------------- | ----------------- | --------------- | ------------- | | Brand A | Private Label | Evergreen | Tier 1 (>40%) | Active | | Brand B | Wholesale | Q1 Spring | Tier 2 (20-40%) | Paused | | Brand C | Arbitrage | Q2 Summer | Tier 3 (10-20%) | Under Review | | | | Q3 Back to School | Tier 4 (<10%) | Discontinuing | | | | Q4 Holiday | | New Launch | **Setup time:** 30 minutes **Tags needed:** 18 ### Template 3: Wholesale/Arbitrage Seller For a seller focused on sourcing deals with high SKU turnover: **Groups and Tags:** | Group: Source Deal | Group: ROI Tier | Group: Velocity | Group: Risk | | ------------------ | ------------------- | --------------- | ----------- | | Wholesale Deal | Excellent (>50%) | Fast Mover | Low Risk | | Clearance Find | Good (25-50%) | Steady | Medium Risk | | Arbitrage | Acceptable (10-25%) | Slow Mover | High Risk | | Liquidation | Marginal (<10%) | Dead Stock | IP Risk | **Setup time:** 20 minutes **Tags needed:** 16 > **Pro tip:** Start with Template 1 even if you think you need Template 2. You can always add groups and tags later. Starting too complex leads to incomplete tagging and abandoned systems. A simple system used consistently beats a complex system used partially. *** ## Scenario: You Manage 500 SKUs Across 3 Brands You run a multi-brand Amazon business with 500 SKUs across Brand A (premium kitchen), Brand B (budget home), and Brand C (seasonal outdoor). Here is how to set up and use tags effectively: ### Phase 1: Initial Setup (Day 1, \~45 minutes) 1. **Create Tag Groups:** * "Brand": for brand identification * "Margin Tier": for profitability segmentation * "Lifecycle": for product stage tracking * "Season": for seasonal products (primarily Brand C) 2. **Create Tags within each group** (see Template 2 above) 3. **Bulk assign Brand tags first:** This is the easiest starting point since you already know which SKUs belong to which brand. Export your SKU list from Products, separate by brand, and paste comma-separated SKUs into each brand tag. ### Phase 2: Margin Classification (Day 2, \~30 minutes) 1. Open the Products page and sort by profit margin 2. Copy SKUs in batches by margin range 3. Assign to "Tier 1," "Tier 2," etc. tags ### Phase 3: Lifecycle and Season Tags (Week 1, ongoing) 1. Tag products launched in the last 90 days as "New Launch" 2. Tag seasonal Brand C products with appropriate season tags 3. Tag any products you plan to discontinue as "Discontinuing" ### Phase 4: Use Tags Across the Dashboard (Ongoing) Now your tags power filtered analysis everywhere: * **Orders Analytics** filtered by "Brand A": See Brand A revenue trends independently * **Refunded Orders** filtered by "New Launch": Monitor return rates for new products specifically * **Products** filtered by "Tier 4 (<10%)": Review all low-margin products for pricing or discontinuation decisions {% hint style="info" %} **Real-world impact:** A multi-brand seller using this exact setup discovered that Brand B's "Medium Margin" products had a 12% return rate (vs. 3% average for Brand A). Investigation revealed a packaging quality issue specific to Brand B's supplier. After switching packaging suppliers, Brand B's return rate dropped to 4% within 6 weeks, saving an estimated EUR 2,400/month. {% endhint %} *** ## Best Practice Guide: Setting Up Tags for a Multi-Brand Portfolio ### Step 1: Define Your Dimensions Before creating any tags, list the business questions you want to answer: * "How is Brand A performing vs. Brand B?" -> Need a **Brand** group * "Which products are most profitable?" -> Need a **Margin Tier** group * "Which products are seasonal?" -> Need a **Season** group * "What is the sourcing method?" -> Need a **Source** group {% hint style="danger" %} **Common mistake:** Creating tags for questions you will never actually ask. Every tag requires maintenance (assigning to new products, updating as products change). Only create tags you will actively use for filtering and analysis. {% endhint %} ### Step 2: Establish Naming Conventions Pick one convention and document it for your team: * **Consistent case:** All Title Case, or all lowercase * **Consistent delimiters:** Spaces or hyphens, not both * **Consistent prefixes:** If using prefixes, use them for all tags in a group ### Step 3: Create Groups Before Tags Always create the tag group first, then create tags within it. This ensures every tag is organized from the start. Ungrouped tags tend to stay ungrouped and create clutter. ### Step 4: Assign in Bulk by Dimension The fastest approach: 1. Export your full product list 2. Sort/filter in a spreadsheet by the dimension you are tagging (e.g., brand) 3. Copy the SKU column 4. Paste into the tag assignment modal ### Step 5: Schedule Regular Tag Maintenance * **Weekly:** Tag any newly added products * **Monthly:** Review "Lifecycle" tags: has any "New Launch" product matured? * **Quarterly:** Audit unused tags (zero products assigned) and delete them *** ## 🔄 Before & After: Tag-Driven Business Analysis ### Before (No Tags) > A seller with 300 SKUs wants to know which product category is most profitable. They export order data, manually match SKUs to categories in a spreadsheet, build pivot tables, and after 3 hours of work, get a basic breakdown. This analysis is outdated within a week as new orders come in. ### After (Tagged Catalog) > The same seller has tagged all products by category, margin tier, and brand. They open Orders Analytics, select the "Brand: Kitchen Pro" tag filter, and instantly see revenue, profit, and trend data for that brand. They switch to "Margin Tier: High" and see which high-margin products are driving the most revenue. Total time: 30 seconds per analysis. The data is always current. ***
⚠️ Common Mistakes to Avoid {% hint style="danger" %} * **Mistake 1: Creating too many tags too soon.** Starting with 50 tags across 10 groups sounds thorough, but most sellers abandon the system within a month because the maintenance burden is too high. Start with 10-15 tags across 3-4 groups. Expand only after you have achieved 100% product coverage with your initial set. * **Mistake 2: Not assigning tags to new products.** Every untagged product is a blind spot in your filtered analysis. If you filter Orders Analytics by "High Margin" but forgot to tag 20 high-margin products, your data is incomplete and misleading. Build tag assignment into your product launch checklist. * **Mistake 3: Using tags for data that changes frequently.** Tags work best for relatively stable attributes (brand, source, category). If you are constantly re-tagging products because their margin changes monthly, you may need too granular a margin classification. Use wider ranges (e.g., "Above 20%" instead of "25-30%"). * **Mistake 4: Duplicate and overlapping tags.** "Clearance," "On Sale," and "Discounted" might all mean the same thing in your business. Pick one term and use it consistently. Before creating a new tag, search existing tags to check for overlap. * **Mistake 5: Not using tag groups.** A flat list of 25 tags is hard to navigate and manage. Groups provide structure that makes the system scalable. Even if you only have 8 tags, organizing them into 2-3 groups creates a clearer mental model for your team. {% endhint %}
\## Use Cases | Use Case | Tags to Create | Business Impact | | ------------------------ | ----------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Profitability tiers** | "High Margin," "Break Even," "Loss Leader" | Focus ad spend on profitable products; identify pricing issues | | **Seasonal tracking** | "Q4 Holiday," "Summer," "Back to School" | Time inventory shipments and PPC campaigns to seasonal demand | | **Inventory status** | "Clearance," "New Launch," "Discontinuing" | Prioritize team attention and marketing budgets | | **Sourcing categories** | "Wholesale," "Private Label," "Arbitrage" | Compare profitability and return rates by sourcing method | | **Team assignment** | "Team A," "Team B," "Needs Review" | Distribute workload and track team-specific performance | | **Supplier tracking** | "Supplier: Chen," "Supplier: Kumar" | Identify supplier-specific quality issues via return analysis | | **Advertising strategy** | "PPC Active," "Organic Only," "Launch Campaign" | Segment products by advertising approach for budget planning | | **Compliance** | "FDA Regulated," "CE Marked," "Age Restricted" | Track compliance requirements across your catalog | *** ## 🔧 Troubleshooting | Issue | Possible Cause | Solution | | ------------------------------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Tag does not appear in filter dropdowns | Tag was just created; page needs refresh | Refresh the page or navigate away and back | | Cannot assign tag to a product | SKU not found in system | Verify the SKU exists in your Products list; check for typos | | Tag count shows 0 after bulk assignment | SKUs may have had spaces or formatting issues | Re-check the SKU list; ensure comma separation with no extra characters | | Deleted tag still shows on some products | Cache delay | Hard refresh the page (Ctrl+Shift+R); tags clear within minutes | | Tag group color not updating | Browser cache | Clear browser cache or try incognito mode | | Cannot delete a tag group | Tags inside will become ungrouped (this is expected) | Confirm the deletion; tags are preserved, just ungrouped | | Filters show tags but no matching products | Products untagged or wrong tag assigned | Check tag assignments in the Tags Table via the Products badge | | Tag search not finding a known tag | Search matches exact characters only | Check for typos; try partial name search | *** ## ❓ FAQ
Is there a limit to how many tags or groups I can create? There is no hard limit. However, for practical usability, we recommend staying under 30 tags and 7 groups. Beyond that, the system becomes harder to maintain and the filter dropdowns become crowded.
Can I assign multiple tags from the same group to one product? Yes. A product can have any combination of tags, even multiple tags from the same group. For example, a product could be tagged both "Q4 Holiday" and "Summer" if it sells in both seasons.
What happens to tag assignments when I delete a tag? When you delete a tag, all assignments (products and orders) are removed. This action cannot be undone. If you want to temporarily stop using a tag without losing assignments, simply stop filtering by it rather than deleting it.
Can I rename a tag without losing assignments? Yes. Editing a tag (name, color, or group) preserves all existing product and order assignments. Only deletion removes assignments.
Do tags sync across team members? Yes. Tags are account-level, not user-level. All team members with access to your SellerMagnet account see the same tags and can assign or filter by them.
Can I import tags in bulk from a spreadsheet? Bulk tag import via CSV is on the roadmap. Currently, you can create tags individually but assign them in bulk using comma-separated SKUs or Order IDs.
How do tags interact with the Orders Analytics and Refunded Orders pages? Tags appear as filter options on those pages. When you filter Orders Analytics by a tag (e.g., "High Margin"), all KPIs, charts, and data reflect only the products with that tag. This is one of the most powerful uses of tags, segmented performance analysis.
Can I tag products across multiple Amazon marketplaces? Yes. Tags are applied at the SKU level, and since a SKU can exist across multiple marketplaces, the tag follows the SKU everywhere. If SKU-001 is tagged "High Margin" and sells in DE, FR, and IT, filtering by "High Margin" shows data from all three marketplaces for that SKU.
*** ## 💡 Tips > **Pro tip:** Create a "Needs Attention" tag and assign it to products with declining sales or rising return rates. Then filter your Dashboard and Reports by this tag for a focused review. Remove the tag once the issue is resolved. This creates a simple but effective task management workflow within SellerMagnet. > Tags support **dark mode** and look great in both light and dark themes. The color-coded pills maintain high contrast and readability regardless of your theme preference. {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro tip:** When onboarding a new team member, walk them through your tag structure first. Tags encode your business logic, understanding them is the fastest way for someone new to grasp how your catalog is organized and what matters most. {% endhint %} {% hint style="info" %} **Naming hack:** If you want tags to sort in a specific order in dropdowns, prefix them with numbers: "1-High Margin," "2-Medium Margin," "3-Low Margin." This forces alphabetical sorting to match your priority order. {% endhint %} {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro tip:** Combine tags with the Refunded Orders page for powerful root cause analysis. Tag products by supplier, then filter refunds by supplier tag. If one supplier's products have a 2x higher return rate, you have a data-backed case for a quality discussion. {% endhint %} *** ## ➡️ What's Next? {% content-ref url="/pages/yWniwYR2YpKfuBE4gaNy" %} [Products Management](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview/products-management) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/nXtCVcpldqI1cfeA606R" %} [Orders Analytics](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview/orders-analytics) {% endcontent-ref %} # Subscribe & Save Track your Amazon Subscribe & Save business - active subscribers, growth, estimated churn, repeat-buyer value, and the revenue you lose to stockouts - in one read-only analytics dashboard. {% hint style="info" %} **Difficulty:** 🟢 Beginner · **Reading time:** \~10 min {% endhint %} {% embed url="" %} {% hint style="warning" %} **Availability:** Subscribe & Save analytics is rolling out and may not yet be switched on for your account or plan. It needs a connected Amazon account on a supported marketplace (see below). If you do not see it in the menu yet, it is on its way. {% endhint %} {% hint style="info" %} **Plan-gated:** This page is part of the analytics plan. If your project is not on a plan that includes it, the page still opens but the content is **blurred** behind an **Upgrade** overlay - click **View options** there to unlock it. Everything below assumes your plan includes analytics. {% endhint %} ## 📋 Overview **Amazon Subscribe & Save** lets shoppers subscribe to replenishable products for recurring, discounted auto-deliveries. Those subscribers are some of your most valuable customers - they reorder automatically, month after month. This page is a **read-only analytics dashboard** over that program: it reads Amazon's own subscription data and turns it into the numbers that actually matter - how many active subscribers you have, whether that base is growing or shrinking, how much more your subscribers are worth, and how much subscription revenue you are losing to stockouts. It does **not** create or edit subscriptions or discounts - you still do that in Seller Central. Think of it as the scoreboard and the to-do list for your subscription business. {% hint style="info" %} **Where the data comes from:** Amazon's **Subscribe & Save program metrics** (the Replenishment API). The page reads a cached copy so it loads instantly; a **Refresh data** button pulls the latest from Amazon on demand. Repeat-order and revenue-per-buyer figures are **trailing 12-month** values that Amazon computes. {% endhint %} {% hint style="success" %} **Supported marketplaces:** Amazon provides Subscribe & Save data for **US, CA, UK, DE, FR, IT, ES, IN, and JP**. If none of your connected marketplaces is supported, the page shows a "No supported marketplace connected" message. {% endhint %} ![SellerMagnet Subscribe & Save screenshot](https://4139654583-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Fih2knSvVpBcq5rIeXVjM%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-272fecd9d2a6644c1b528dd9cb61019f734cc720%2Fsubscribe-save.png?alt=media) *** ## 📊 Key Performance Indicators Eight tiles summarize your subscription business at a glance: | KPI | What it tells you | | ------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | | **Active Subscriptions** | How many live subscriptions you have right now, with the change vs. the previous period | | **S\&S Revenue** | Revenue from Subscribe & Save orders in the selected period | | **Units Shipped** | Subscribe & Save units shipped in the period | | **Revenue Penetration** | The share of your **total** product revenue that comes through Subscribe & Save orders | | **Est. Net Churn** | The **net** drop in active subscriptions last period (see the caveat below) | | **Repeat Orders / Buyer** | How many more times a subscriber reorders vs. a non-subscriber (a multiple, e.g. "2.3x"), trailing 12 months | | **Revenue / Buyer (12m)** | Average revenue per subscriber vs. per non-subscriber over 12 months - your subscription LTV proof | | **Lost Revenue (Out of Stock)** | Subscribe & Save revenue Amazon could **not** deliver because the item was out of stock | {% hint style="warning" %} **"Net churn" is an estimate, not a true churn rate.** Amazon does not report gross cancellations, only the net change in active subscriptions - so new subscribers offset the ones who left. The tile only shows a value when the net movement is negative; in a growing period it reads "net growth - no net churn." Use it as a direction indicator, not an exact cancellation percentage. {% endhint %} > **Quick win:** The **Repeat Orders / Buyer** and **Revenue / Buyer** tiles are your best argument for funding a subscription discount - if a subscriber is worth 2-3x a normal buyer, a few percent off is cheap customer retention. {% hint style="warning" %} **These two tiles are often blank at first.** The **Repeat Orders / Buyer** and **Revenue / Buyer (12m)** figures are computed by Amazon over a **trailing 12-month** window. Until Amazon has accumulated enough history for your account, both tiles show a dash (**"-"**) with the note **"Provided by Amazon once enough history exists"** instead of a value. This is expected for newer stores or recently connected marketplaces - the numbers fill in once the trailing history is there. {% endhint %} *** ## 💡 Insights & Recommendations Below the KPIs, SellerMagnet generates up to **six prioritized insight cards** from your own subscription data, ranked from critical to informational. They turn the numbers into actions, for example: * **Inventory below 30-day subscription demand** - you are about to stock out on subscribed products (critical). * **Suspended products with active subscribers** - a suspended offer stops delivering to people who are still subscribed (critical). * **Out-of-stock already cost you {amount}** - real subscription revenue missed to stockouts (critical). On marketplaces where Amazon does not report the lost amount (for example India), this instead shows the **percentage of subscription deliveries missed**. * **Subscriber churn detected** / **+N net new subscriptions** - the direction of your base last period. * **A large share of subscribers sit on one product** - concentration risk if that listing has a problem. * **Subscribers reorder Nx more / bring Nx the revenue** - proof the program is working. * **Low penetration** or **eligible products with no subscribers yet** - untapped upside. {% hint style="info" %} Every recommendation is acted on **in Seller Central** - this page tells you what to fix; you fix it on Amazon. {% endhint %} *** ## 📈 Charts and the at-risk strip * **Active Subscriptions & Net Change** - a line for active subscriptions over time, with bars for the net change each period (green when you grew, red when you shrank). * **S\&S Revenue & Penetration** - bars for Subscribe & Save revenue and a line for revenue penetration %, so you can see the program's share of your business trending up or down. * **Subscriptions at risk** - a strip of up to eight product chips flagged because they are low on stock, suspended with active subscribers, or already losing revenue to stockouts. This is your restock-first shortlist. *** ## Subscribe & Save Products table A per-product breakdown with search, sort, and **CSV / Excel** export: | Column | Meaning | | ----------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Product** | Image, name, and ASIN · SKU | | **Subscribers** | Active subscription count for that product | | **Revenue (month)** | Latest month's Subscribe & Save revenue | | **Units (month)** | Latest month's units | | **Penetration** | Share of that product's revenue coming via Subscribe & Save | | **Your Discount** | The discount you fund (base, plus any tier) | | **Next 30d (forecast)** | Amazon's forecast of upcoming subscription units (and revenue) | | **Lost (OOS)** | Revenue lost to stockouts on that product | | **Status** | Eligibility - **Eligible**, **Ineligible**, **Suspended**, or **Replenishment only** - plus a stock-risk badge | Sort by **Subscribers** to see your most valuable subscription products, or by **Lost (OOS)** to see where stockouts hurt the most. The table paginates once you have enough products: a **Rows per page** selector offers **10 / 25 / 50 / 100 / All** (default **25**), with a row count and page controls below the table. *** ## Using the page, step by step {% stepper %} {% step %} ### Open it and pick your view Open **Subscribe & Save** from the menu. Choose a **Marketplace** and switch between **Monthly** and **Weekly** (Weekly appears once a marketplace has weekly data). On a first visit or when the data is more than a day old, the page automatically pulls a fresh copy from Amazon. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Read the scoreboard Scan the eight KPI tiles for the state of your subscription base, then read the **Insights** cards top to bottom - they are already sorted by urgency. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Find what needs fixing Check the **Subscriptions at risk** strip and sort the products table by **Lost (OOS)** or by stock risk. These are the products costing you subscription revenue right now. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Act in Seller Central Restock the at-risk subscribed products first, fix any **Suspended** offers, and enroll eligible products that have no subscribers yet (Seller Central → Programs → Subscribe & Save). Use **Refresh data** afterwards to see the impact, and **Export** for offline analysis. {% endstep %} {% endstepper %} *** ## Page states you might see Instead of the dashboard, the page can show one of a few full-page messages depending on your data: | State | When it appears | What it says | | ----------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Let's load your Subscribe & Save data** | First visit for a marketplace, before any data has been fetched | Prompts a first pull from Amazon - it only takes a few seconds (use **Refresh data**) | | **No Subscribe & Save offers found** | Amazon returned no Subscribe & Save offers for the marketplace | You are connected and enrolled-capable, but no products are enrolled yet - enroll replenishable FBA products in Seller Central under Programs -> Subscribe & Save | | **No supported marketplace connected** | None of your connected marketplaces exposes Subscribe & Save data | Amazon only provides this data for US, CA, UK, DE, FR, IT, ES, IN, and JP | {% hint style="info" %} The first two states are normal early in your subscription journey. Once a fetch completes and at least one product is enrolled, the KPI tiles, insights, charts, and products table take over. {% endhint %} *** ## ⚠️ Good to know | Point | Detail | | ------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | | **Read-only** | The page reports and recommends; all changes happen in Seller Central | | **Net churn is estimated** | Amazon reports net change only, not gross cancellations | | **Out-of-stock money vs. rate** | Some marketplaces (e.g. India) do not report a lost-revenue amount, so the tile shows the **undelivered rate %** instead of a currency figure | | **Current period is partial** | The in-progress month or week is shown "to date" and is not compared as a drop, to avoid a false red number | | **Data freshness** | Cached for speed; a fresh pull runs automatically when the data is over a day old, or on demand via **Refresh data**. The "Updated" time shows the last successful fetch | | **Multi-account projects** | Counts and revenue are summed across your connected accounts; percentages are volume-weighted | *** ## ❓ FAQ
Can I create or change subscriptions and discounts here? No. This is a read-only analytics dashboard. You enroll products, set discounts, and manage offers in Seller Central under Programs → Subscribe & Save. SellerMagnet shows you the results and tells you where to act.
Why is "Est. Net Churn" sometimes blank or shows growth? Because it is a net figure. Amazon does not report how many subscriptions were cancelled, only the net change in your active count. When you added more than you lost, the net is positive and the tile shows growth ("no net churn") rather than a cancellation rate.
My out-of-stock tile shows a percentage, not an amount. Why? On some marketplaces (India is the known case) Amazon does not send the lost-revenue amount, only how many deliveries were missed. Rather than show a misleading 0, SellerMagnet shows the **undelivered rate %** so you still know the stockout impact.
Which marketplaces are supported? US, CA, UK, DE, FR, IT, ES, IN, and JP - the marketplaces where Amazon exposes Subscribe & Save program data. If your connected marketplaces are not among these, the page will say so.
How fresh is the data? It is cached so the page loads instantly, and refreshed automatically when it is more than a day old (or whenever you click **Refresh data**). The "Updated" timestamp shows the last successful pull from Amazon.
*** ## ➡️ What's Next? {% content-ref url="/pages/gEHjN0IlyP0zjQ7jBbK4" %} [Dashboard Overview](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/7nzjHrzcKyOjaN4wV9pT" %} [Inventory Planner](/inventory-and-operations/inventory-management) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/yWniwYR2YpKfuBE4gaNy" %} [Products Management](/dashboard-and-analytics/dashboard-overview/products-management) {% endcontent-ref %} # Product Sourcer Search any Amazon product by ASIN (Amazon Standard Identification Number), UPC, EAN, or keyword. Analyze profitability, fees, BSR (Best Seller Rank) history, price trends, competitor offers, and BuyBo {% hint style="info" %} **Difficulty:** 🟡 Intermediate · **Reading time:** \~10 min {% endhint %} {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Open this page in your dashboard:** [**Go to Product Sourcer →**](https://dashboard.sellermagnet.com/sourcer) {% endhint %} ## 📋 Overview The **Product Sourcer** is SellerMagnet's primary product-research tool. Enter any product identifier or keyword, select a target marketplace, and within seconds you receive a complete profitability breakdown, competitive landscape analysis, and historical trend data. Whether you are an online-arbitrage seller scanning hundreds of ASINs a day, a wholesale buyer evaluating a supplier catalog, or a private-label researcher validating demand, the Sourcer gives you every data point you need to make a confident buy/pass decision without ever leaving the SellerMagnet dashboard. {% embed url="" %} ![SellerMagnet Product Sourcer](https://4139654583-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Fih2knSvVpBcq5rIeXVjM%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-76292987eb201d95ff44fa587955b7ec8e8b1e3e%2Fsourcer.png?alt=media) *** ## Accessing the Sourcer 1. Log in to your SellerMagnet dashboard. 2. In the left navigation, click **Sourcer**. 3. The page opens on the **Overview** tab by default. It has three tabs: **Overview** (search and analyze a single product), **Saved** (your watchlist of saved ASINs), and [**Converter**](/selling-tools/product-sourcer-overview/identifier-converter) (bulk identifier conversion). *** ## Search & Marketplace Selection ![Identifier Converter: bulk convert ASINs, EANs, UPCs, and ISBNs](https://4139654583-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Fih2knSvVpBcq5rIeXVjM%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-bf267e4ab86624071e6dafa5a6d02c94f112846b%2Fidentifier-converter.png?alt=media) At the top of the Overview tab you will find: | Element | Description | | ---------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Search bar** | Accepts ASIN, UPC, EAN, ISBN, or product name keywords | | **Marketplace select** | Dropdown of all Amazon marketplaces connected to your Seller Central account | | **Search button** | Triggers the product lookup | | **Info button** | Opens a legend explaining icons and data fields used on the results page | ### Supported Input Formats | Format | Example | Notes | | ---------- | ---------------------- | -------------------------------------------------- | | ASIN | `B09V3KXJPB` | 10-character Amazon Standard Identification Number | | UPC | `012345678905` | 12-digit Universal Product Code | | EAN | `4006381333931` | 13-digit European Article Number | | ISBN-10/13 | `978-0134685991` | Books only | | Keyword | `silicone spatula set` | Returns the best-matching ASIN for the query | {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro tip:** Paste a full Amazon product URL directly into the search bar. SellerMagnet automatically extracts the ASIN from the URL, saving you the step of copying just the identifier. {% endhint %} *** ## Search Quota Depending on your subscription plan, each account has a monthly search quota. A progress bar at the top of the page shows: * **Searches left:** remaining lookups for the current billing cycle * **Total searches:** your plan's monthly allowance * **Progress bar:** visual fill indicating usage percentage {% hint style="danger" %} **Warning:** When your quota reaches zero, searches will be blocked until the next billing cycle or until you upgrade your plan. Plan your bulk research sessions accordingly. {% endhint %} *** ## Product Information Card After a successful search, the **Product Info** card appears on the left side. It contains: ### Product Identity | Field | Description | | ----------------- | ----------------------------------------------- | | **Product image** | Primary listing image from Amazon | | **Product name** | Full listing title (truncated to two lines) | | **Star rating** | Average customer rating with star visualization | | **Review count** | Total number of customer reviews | | **ASIN** | Amazon Standard Identification Number | | **EAN** | European Article Number (when available) | ### KPI Strip Three high-level KPI cards sit below the product identity:
BSRBest Sellers Rank in the product's primary categoryLower BSR = higher sales velocity. Under 50,000 is generally strong.
Est. SalesEstimated monthly unit sales based on BSR modelingValidates demand before you commit capital
Max CostMaximum you can pay per unit and still break even at the current priceYour instant go/no-go number for sourcing
### Detail Grid Below the KPI strip, a two-column grid provides granular product data: | Field | Description | | ------------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------- | | **BuyBox Price** | Current Buy Box winning price | | **Offers** | Total number of active seller offers | | **Amazon's Price** | Price when Amazon Retail is offering the product (if applicable) | | **Total Stock** | Aggregated stock across all offers | | **Lowest FBM** | Cheapest Fulfilled by Merchant price | | **Variations** | Whether the listing has size/color/style variations | | **Lowest FBA** | Cheapest Fulfilled by Amazon price | | **Eligible** | Whether your Seller Central account is eligible to sell this ASIN | | **BuyBox Share** | Whether BuyBox share data is available for analysis | | **Hazmat** | Whether the product is classified as hazardous material | | **Private Label** | Whether the listing appears to be a private-label brand | {% hint style="info" %} **Understanding the icons:** A green checkmark means the condition is favorable (e.g., you are eligible to sell, the product is not hazmat). A red X indicates a potential concern that warrants investigation. {% endhint %} *** ## Profit Calculator The **Profit Calculator** card appears directly below the Product Info card. It lets you model profitability scenarios in real time. ### Input Fields | Field | Default | Description | | -------------------- | -------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------ | | **Cost Price** | Empty | Your per-unit acquisition cost (landed cost) | | **Sale Price** | Current BuyBox | The price at which you plan to sell (pre-filled with BuyBox price) | | **VAT %** | 0.00 | Value-added tax rate for your country | | **Fulfillment Type** | FBA | Toggle between FBA and FBM to compare fee structures | | **FBM Cost** | Hidden | Appears only when FBM is selected: enter your own shipping cost | ### Output Fields {% hint style="success" %} **Most important metrics (in order):** 1. **Estimated Profit** : is there money to be made? 2. **ROI** : is the return worth your capital? 3. **Margin**, is there enough cushion for price drops? If all three show a positive indicator (✅ green), the product is worth investigating further. {% endhint %} | Metric | Description | | ------------------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Max Cost** | Maximum purchase price to break even | | **Total Fees** | Sum of all Amazon fees (expandable to see individual fee lines) | | **VAT Due** | Calculated VAT amount based on your entered rate | | **Breakeven Sale Price** | Minimum sale price needed to cover all costs at your entered cost price | | **Estimated Payout** | What Amazon will deposit to your bank after all deductions | | **Estimated Profit** | Net profit per unit (highlighted in green) | | **Margin** | Profit as a percentage of the sale price | | **ROI** | Return on investment: profit divided by cost price | {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro tip:** Click the **Total Fees** row to expand a detailed breakdown showing the referral fee, FBA fulfillment fee, storage fee, and any other applicable charges. This helps you understand exactly where your money goes. {% endhint %} ### Buy Box Suppression and the MAX COST Fallback The **Max Cost** figure is anchored to a reference sale price. Normally that reference is the current **Buy Box price**. When Amazon suppresses the Buy Box (often because of pricing or eligibility issues), the Buy Box price shows as **N/A** and the calculator falls back through a defined chain so Max Cost still reflects a realistic sale price: **The fallback order at a glance:** Buy Box price → else Lowest FBA → else Lowest FBM → else N/A (Max Cost cannot be calculated). | Priority | Reference Price Used | When It Applies | | -------- | -------------------- | --------------------------------------------- | | 1 | **Buy Box price** | Normal case, a Buy Box winner exists | | 2 | **Lowest FBA price** | Buy Box is suppressed (N/A) | | 3 | **Lowest FBM price** | Buy Box is suppressed and no FBA offer exists | When a fallback is in effect, a warning indicator appears next to the calculator. Hover over it to read which reference price is being used. If none of the three prices is available, Max Cost cannot be calculated and the indicator says so. {% hint style="info" %} **Why this matters:** A suppressed Buy Box is itself a signal worth investigating, it can mean the listing has pricing or compliance problems. Treat a fallback-based Max Cost as an estimate and confirm the real sale price before committing. {% endhint %} ### Realistic Example Suppose you find a kitchen gadget with the following data: | Parameter | Value | | ------------ | --------- | | BuyBox Price | EUR 24.99 | | Cost Price | EUR 8.50 | | VAT Rate | 19% | | Fulfillment | FBA | The calculator returns: | Output | Value | | ---------------- | -------- | | Total Fees | EUR 7.82 | | VAT Due | EUR 3.99 | | Estimated Profit | EUR 4.68 | | Margin | 18.7% | | ROI | 55.1% | With a 55% ROI and nearly 19% margin, this product passes most sourcing criteria. You would then check BSR history and competition before committing. *** ## Offers Table The **Offers** section shows every active seller on the listing, displayed in a sortable table. | Column | Description | | --------------- | ---------------------------------------------------- | | **#** | Offer index (rank by price) | | **Fulfillment** | FBA or FBM badge | | **Seller** | Seller name (Amazon Retail highlighted when present) | | **Price** | Listed price including shipping | | **Stock** | Estimated stock quantity for that seller | {% hint style="info" %} **Why this matters:** If Amazon Retail is on the listing, winning the Buy Box becomes significantly harder. If there are 20+ FBA sellers within a tight price band, margins may erode quickly. Use this table to gauge competitive intensity. {% endhint %} *** ## 📈 Charts & Historical Data Four charts provide trend and competitive intelligence: ### 1. BSR History Chart Displays Best Sellers Rank over time (typically 30-90 days). Click the expand button to view the chart in full-screen mode. **What to look for:** * **Stable low BSR:** consistent demand * **Seasonal spikes:** BSR drops sharply during holidays, then climbs back * **Steadily rising BSR:** declining demand; proceed with caution ### 2. Price History Chart Shows historical pricing trends for the product, including BuyBox price and lowest FBA/FBM offers. **What to look for:** * **Price stability:** healthy market; margins are predictable * **Frequent price wars:** indicates aggressive repricer competition * **Sudden price drops:** may signal liquidation or new aggressive entrant ### 3. Monthly Sold Chart (Sales Estimator) A line chart that plots the **estimated monthly units sold** over time, the same demand signal as the **Est. Sales** KPI, but as a historical trend rather than a single number. Use it to judge whether demand is consistent, seasonal, or fading. **What to look for:** * **A flat, steady line:** reliable, predictable demand * **Recurring peaks:** seasonal product, time your buying to the upswing * **A declining trend:** demand is cooling; weigh against the current price {% hint style="info" %} **Availability:** The estimate is modeled from BSR history, so it needs enough historical data points to plot. New listings or products in low-volume categories may show little or no history. The figure is directional, validate with a test order before scaling. {% endhint %} ### 4. BuyBox Share Chart A **pie chart** breaks down which sellers held the Buy Box over the tracked period and how often each one won it, your own store is highlighted so you can see your share at a glance. Below the pie chart, a **Buy Box history table** lists each competing seller in descending order of win frequency: | Column | Description | | -------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | | **Seller** | Seller name, linked to their Amazon storefront (your own store is highlighted) | | **Avg. Price** | Average price at which that seller won the Buy Box | | **% Won** | Share of the tracked Buy Box events that seller won | | **Last Won** | The most recent date that seller held the Buy Box | {% hint style="info" %} **Why this matters:** A single seller winning the Buy Box most of the time signals a dominant (often the brand owner or Amazon Retail) competitor that is hard to displace. A Buy Box that rotates across many sellers at similar prices signals an open, contested listing, and a likely price war. {% endhint %} {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro tip:** Click the expand icon on any chart to open it in a large modal. This is especially useful for BSR History, where you want to identify seasonal patterns over longer timeframes. {% endhint %} *** ## Search History Below the main results area, a **Search History** table logs every product you have previously looked up. Each row shows: | Column | Description | | ----------------- | ----------------------------- | | **Picture** | Product thumbnail | | **Product Title** | Listing title | | **ASIN** | Amazon identifier | | **Timestamp** | When you performed the search | Click any row to instantly reload that product's data without consuming an additional search credit. {% hint style="info" icon="circle-info" %} **Note:** Search history is saved per account and persists across sessions. Use it to quickly revisit products you are evaluating over multiple days. {% endhint %} *** ## Saving ASINs (Watchlist) {% hint style="info" %} **Search History vs. Watchlist, at a glance:** **Search History** is an automatic log of every ASIN you look up, no action needed. The **Watchlist** is your hand-picked shortlist: you deliberately save the ASINs you want to track, each with a label, note, and target cost. {% endhint %} Search History is automatic and time-ordered, it logs everything you look up. The **Watchlist** is the curated, intentional companion to it: a personal shortlist of the ASINs you actually want to track, each saved with a label, an optional note, and a target buy-cost. ### Why save an ASIN * **Build a shortlist** of products you are evaluating without re-typing identifiers * **Tag intent** by labeling each ASIN as *My Product*, *Competitor*, or *Watch* * **Group related products** into your own named lists (e.g. "Q4 candidates", "Brand X") * **Record a target cost** so you instantly know your buy ceiling next time you revisit * **Compare across marketplaces**, the same ASIN saved on a different marketplace is tracked separately * **Keep a snapshot** of the product's key metrics from the moment you saved it ### Saving from the results card After a successful lookup, a **Save** button appears next to the Product Info card. * Click **Save** to add the ASIN to your watchlist in one click. The button changes to **Saved** and a toast confirms *"Saved to your watchlist."* * Click the **Saved** button again to open the save/edit popover, where you can set the label, list, note, and target cost (see below). ### Quick-saving from Search History Each Search History row has a **bookmark** button. Click it to save that ASIN instantly with the **Watch** label, no popover required. Click it again to remove it. Saving here mirrors the results-card Save, so an ASIN saved in one place shows as saved in the other. ### The save / edit popover Opening the popover (titled **Save to watchlist** for a new entry, or **Edit saved ASIN** when editing) lets you set: | Field | Description | | --------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Label** | One of **My Product**, **Competitor**, or **Watch**, how you intend to track this ASIN | | **List name** | Optional custom list to group the ASIN under (e.g. "Q4 candidates"). Reuse an existing list or type a new one | | **Note** | Optional free-text reminder about why you saved it | | **Target Cost** | Optional buy-cost ceiling you are willing to pay per unit | Confirm with **Save** (or **Update** when editing). A **Remove** action is available when editing an already-saved ASIN. {% hint style="info" %} When the Sourcer recognizes the looked-up ASIN as one of your own products, the popover suggests the **My Product** label automatically. You can override it before saving. {% endhint %} ### The Saved tab A dedicated **Saved** tab lists your watchlist as product cards, with a badge showing how many ASINs you have saved. Each card displays the saved snapshot, BSR, estimated monthly sales, and your target cost, along with the label chip, any custom-list chip, and your note. Controls available on the Saved tab: | Control | What it does | | --------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | | **Label filter tabs** | Filter by **All**, **My Product**, **Competitor**, or **Watch** (each shows a count) | | **List filter** | Narrow the grid to a single custom list | | **Search** | Text search across your saved ASINs | | **Pin / Unpin** | Pin important ASINs to keep them prominent in the grid | | **Edit** | Reopen the popover to change the label, list, note, or target cost | | **Remove** | Delete the ASIN from your watchlist | | **Re-look-up** | Run a fresh Sourcer lookup for the saved ASIN on its marketplace | {% hint style="danger" icon="circle-info" %} **Re-look-up consumes a search credit.** The card stores a snapshot (title, BSR, Buy Box price, estimated sales) captured when you saved it, viewing that snapshot is free. **Re-look-up** fetches live data and counts as one lookup against your monthly quota, just like a normal search. {% endhint %} {% hint style="info" icon="circle-info" %} **Note:** The watchlist is saved per user and per project, and is scoped per marketplace. The same ASIN saved on Amazon.de and Amazon.it is two separate entries, each with its own label, note, and snapshot. {% endhint %} *** ## Chrome Extension Integration ![Sourcer Chrome Extension: instant analysis on Amazon listing pages](https://4139654583-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Fih2knSvVpBcq5rIeXVjM%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-a47b95aec7fcb29bb1fab12924f240dbcbb33b4c%2Fsourcer-chrome-extension.png?alt=media) A badge in the top-right corner of the search section links to the **SellerMagnet Chrome Extension** on the Chrome Web Store. The extension allows you to run Sourcer lookups directly from any Amazon product page without switching to the dashboard. See the dedicated [Chrome Extension Guide](/selling-tools/product-sourcer-overview/chrome-extension) for installation and usage instructions. *** ## Common Sourcing Workflow 1. **Identify candidates:** Use supplier catalogs, wholesale lists, or manual browsing to find potential ASINs. 2. **Paste ASIN into Sourcer:** Select the target marketplace and click Search. 3. **Check BSR and Est. Sales:** Confirm minimum demand (e.g., BSR under 100,000, Est. Sales above 30/month). 4. **Review competition:** Check the Offers table. Avoid listings with 15+ FBA sellers or Amazon Retail presence. 5. **Calculate profit:** Enter your cost price. Require a minimum 30% ROI and 15% margin. 6. **Validate with history:** Confirm BSR and price stability over 90 days. 7. **Decision:** Buy if all criteria pass; skip if any red flags appear. ***
⚠️ Common Mistakes to Avoid | Mistake | Why It Hurts | | ------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Ignoring the number of competing FBA sellers | Even a profitable product loses margin when 20 sellers race to the bottom | | Not checking Amazon Retail presence | Amazon Retail almost always holds the BuyBox; your inventory may sit unsold | | Using BuyBox price without checking price history | A temporarily inflated price gives a false profit picture | | Skipping the Hazmat flag | Hazmat products require special approvals and higher FBA fees | | Not accounting for VAT | Forgetting VAT can turn a "profitable" product into a loss | | Sourcing based on BSR alone without Est. Sales | A low BSR in a tiny category may still mean only 5 units/month |
\## ✅ Best Practices 1. **Set personal sourcing criteria before you start:** Define your minimum ROI, margin, and maximum competitive seller count. Stick to these rules to avoid emotional buying decisions. 2. **Batch your research:** Paste multiple ASINs in sequence and use Search History to compare them later. 3. **Cross-reference marketplaces:** A product with thin margins on Amazon.de may be highly profitable on Amazon.it or Amazon.es. Switch marketplaces in the dropdown and re-run the search. 4. **Use the Chrome Extension for speed:** When scanning retail websites or competitor storefronts, the extension lets you evaluate products without context-switching. 5. **Check seasonality:** Use the BSR History chart to identify whether current demand is sustainable or just a seasonal peak. *** ## ❓ FAQ
What product identifiers can I search for? ASIN, UPC, EAN, ISBN-10, ISBN-13, full Amazon product URLs, or keyword phrases. The Sourcer handles all of these automatically.
Does each search consume one credit from my quota? Yes. Each unique product lookup counts as one search. Reloading a product from Search History does not consume an additional credit.
Why does the calculator show different fees when I toggle between FBA and FBM? FBA fees include pick-and-pack fulfillment, storage, and weight handling charges. FBM fees are limited to the referral fee since you handle shipping yourself (enter your own shipping cost in the FBM Cost field).
Can I search for products on marketplaces where I do not sell? The marketplace dropdown shows all marketplaces connected to your Seller Central account. If you want to research a marketplace you have not yet enrolled in, you will need to add it in Seller Central first.
How accurate are the Estimated Sales figures? Sales estimates are modeled from BSR data using category-specific algorithms. They are directional indicators, accurate enough for sourcing decisions but not exact. Always validate with your own sales data after a test shipment.
What does the "Eligible" field mean? It indicates whether your seller account is approved to list and sell that specific ASIN. Some categories and brands require gating approval from Amazon.
Why do I see a VAT warning icon? The VAT rate could not be auto-detected for the selected marketplace. Enter your applicable VAT rate manually to get an accurate profit calculation.
Does saving an ASIN to my watchlist use a search credit? No. Saving an ASIN, and viewing its saved snapshot on the Saved tab, is free. Only **Re-look-up**, which fetches fresh live data for the saved ASIN, counts as one lookup against your monthly quota.
What is the difference between Search History and the Watchlist? Search History is an automatic, time-ordered log of every lookup you run. The Watchlist (the **Saved** tab) is a curated shortlist you build deliberately, each entry carries a label (My Product / Competitor / Watch), an optional custom list, a note, and a target cost. Use history to revisit recent lookups; use the watchlist to track the ASINs you care about over time.
*** ## ➡️ What's Next? {% content-ref url="/pages/9BLtTr2v8wYs6EWCS7Ll" %} [Chrome Extension](/selling-tools/product-sourcer-overview/chrome-extension) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/vGcfp3NAeI5iI7qpdt6M" %} [Identifier Converter](/selling-tools/product-sourcer-overview/identifier-converter) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/XxiOnXmNvAunjLWPxJPP" %} [Repricer Overview](/selling-tools/repricer-overview) {% endcontent-ref %} # Chrome Extension Install the SellerMagnet Chrome Extension to research Amazon products, search results, brands, and niches directly on Amazon, with a BUY/PASS verdict, BSR, estimated sales, fees, profit, keywords, and {% hint style="info" %} **Difficulty:** 🟡 Intermediate · **Reading time:** \~14 min {% endhint %} {% embed url="" %} ## 📋 Overview The **SellerMagnet Chrome Extension** brings your product research onto Amazon itself. Instead of copying an ASIN, switching to the dashboard, pasting it, and waiting, the extension injects live research widgets directly onto the Amazon pages you are already looking at - **product pages, search results, brand stores, and seller storefronts**. You evaluate a single product or an entire niche without ever leaving the tab. Here is what that looks like in practice. You open a product on `amazon.de`. Above the title, a coloured badge tells you **BUY**, **MARGINAL**, or **PASS** - measured against the buying rules *you* set (your minimum profit, ROI, margin, and maximum BSR). Below it, a compact panel shows the price, the Best Seller Rank, an estimate of how many units sell per month, the fees Amazon will charge, and the profit you would actually keep. On a search-results page, every tile gets its own mini metrics strip, and a banner at the top summarises the whole niche - how saturated it is, the average price, who the top brands are. It is the on-Amazon companion to the SellerMagnet dashboard: most features work with a **free** sign-in, and a few need a connected Amazon account or a paid plan. {% hint style="info" %} **Why research on-page matters.** Sourcing decisions are made in bulk - you might look at 200 products in an evening. Every tab-switch and copy-paste costs seconds and breaks your focus. Seeing the verdict and profit *inline*, as you browse, is what lets you triage a whole category quickly and only slow down for the products that are actually worth it. {% endhint %} {% hint style="warning" %} The extension does **not** run inside Seller Central (`sellercentral.amazon.*` is excluded by design). It works on the **public** Amazon storefront only - the same pages a shopper sees. If a widget is missing, first check you are on a public product or search page, not Seller Central. {% endhint %} *** ## Installation ![Chrome Extension - Amazon product research overlay](https://4139654583-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Fih2knSvVpBcq5rIeXVjM%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-65c936351add497410c6f7b847dc533f118f7200%2Fchrome-extension.png?alt=media) Installing takes about two minutes. You add it from the Chrome Web Store, pin it so it is always one click away, and sign in with your free SellerMagnet account. {% stepper %} {% step %} ### Download from the Chrome Web Store 1. Open Google Chrome (or a Chromium browser such as Edge or Brave). 2. Go to the [SellerMagnet Chrome Extension](https://chromewebstore.google.com/detail/sellermagnet-amazon-fbafb/mcnilekaoddnacjdecmcnhchghbflinn) page. 3. Click **Add to Chrome**, then confirm with **Add Extension**. Chrome will ask you to approve the extension's permissions. It needs access to Amazon pages so it can read the ASIN you are viewing and draw its widgets there - it does not read other sites (see the [FAQ](#faq) on browsing privacy). {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Pin it to your toolbar 1. Click the puzzle-piece (**Extensions**) icon in Chrome's toolbar. 2. Find **SellerMagnet** in the list and click the **pin** icon next to it. Pinning keeps the SellerMagnet icon visible at all times. That icon is your control centre - you will click it to sign in, switch projects, toggle widgets, and set your buying criteria. Without pinning, it hides behind the puzzle-piece and every action takes an extra click. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Sign in - free 1. Click the SellerMagnet icon to open the popup. 2. Click **Sign in or sign up - free** (**No credit card required**). If you would rather look around first, click **Demo session** to explore with sample data. 3. Once signed in, the popup shows your account, active project, connection status, and your monthly lookup quota. Signing in is what unlocks the real research data - BSR, monthly sales estimates, and the BUY/PASS verdict. Signed out, you only get the basic numbers Amazon already shows on the page. {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro tip:** If you keep separate Chrome profiles (personal, work), install and sign in on the profile you actually use for sourcing. The extension's session lives in that profile, so your account, project, and settings stay put. {% endhint %} {% endstep %} {% endstepper %} *** ## Account and connections The extension mirrors your SellerMagnet account, so whatever project and plan you have on the web carries over. Beyond simply signing in, you can authorise **two optional connections** from the popup. Both are secure OAuth handshakes that go through `auth.sellermagnet.com` - you approve them on Amazon's own consent screen, and SellerMagnet never sees your Amazon password. | Connection | Label in the popup | What it unlocks | Why you want it | | -------------------- | ------------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Amazon SP-API** | **Connect Amazon** | Replaces *estimated* fees with your **real** Amazon fees, exact net profit, VAT, and sell-eligibility | Estimated fees can be 15-20% off. Real fees are the difference between a product that looks profitable and one that actually is. | | **Amazon Ads (PPC)** | **Connect Ads** | Live keyword **search volume** and **bid ranges** | Tells you whether a niche has real demand and how expensive it is to advertise into - before you commit. | Each connection shows a live pill: **connected / not connected / checking…**. Multi-account sellers can switch the **active SP-API connection** and the **active project** straight from the popup, so you always research under the right account and your saved products land in the right project. **Worked example.** You sell under two entities - a UK Ltd and a German GmbH. Before checking a product on `amazon.de`, open the popup and switch the active connection to the GmbH. Now the fees, VAT, and eligibility the extension shows are the ones *that* entity would actually face on that marketplace, not a generic estimate. ### How to connect SP-API and Ads Both connections are optional, but SP-API is the single biggest upgrade to the accuracy of your numbers. You authorise each one once, from the popup, and it stays connected until you revoke it. {% stepper %} {% step %} ### Open the popup and find the Connections row Click the SellerMagnet icon. Under **Account** you will see two pills - **Amazon SP-API** and **Amazon Ads (PPC)** - each showing **connected**, **not connected**, or **checking…**. If a connection is missing, a **Connect Amazon** or **Connect Ads** button appears just below the pills. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Click Connect Amazon (SP-API) **Connect Amazon** opens `auth.sellermagnet.com` in a new tab and hands you to Amazon's own consent screen. Approve it there. SellerMagnet never sees your Amazon password - it receives only the SP-API authorisation. When you return to the popup, the SP-API pill flips to **connected** (and, for multi-account sellers, shows how many sellers are linked). This unlocks **real Amazon fees, exact net profit, VAT, FBA prep, and sell-eligibility** for your account. Every profit figure that was labelled *Estimated* now recalculates against your real fee schedule. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Click Connect Ads (PPC) - optional **Connect Ads** runs the same OAuth handshake for Amazon Advertising. Once connected, the keyword widgets show **live search volume and bid ranges** instead of bids-only. If you have SP-API connected but not Ads, the popup shows an **"Unlock keyword research"** notice with a one-click **Connect Amazon Ads** link. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Pick the active connection (multi-account only) If your SP-API login covers more than one seller account, an **Active SP-API connection** dropdown appears. Choose a specific seller, or **All connections (combined)**, so fees, VAT, and eligibility are computed for the right entity on the marketplace you are viewing. {% endstep %} {% endstepper %} {% hint style="info" %} You can also start either flow from the **Options** page (Connections card, **Open Connections**) or from the command palette (**Connect Amazon (SP-API)** / **Connect Amazon Ads (PPC)**). They all lead to the same `auth.sellermagnet.com` consent screen. {% endhint %} *** ## The toolbar popup Clicking the SellerMagnet icon opens the control popup - the single place you configure everything the extension does. It is worth setting this up once, carefully, because the numbers you enter here (especially under **Settings**) drive every verdict you will see afterwards. * **Today at a glance** - counters for **Products** looked at, **Searches** run, **Pro saved** items, and your usage **streak**. A quick pulse on how much research you have done today. * **Account** - your email, a **Dashboard** button that opens the web app, a **Display language** switcher (8 languages), and a **Project** switcher. Switch projects here to keep research for different stores or clients separate. * **Sourcer lookups this month** - a quota meter with a progress bar. As you approach your plan's allowance it warns **"Approaching plan limit - upgrade"** so a big sourcing session never surprises you by running dry. * **Connections** - the **Amazon SP-API** and **Amazon Ads (PPC)** pills, plus the **Connect Amazon** / **Connect Ads** buttons described above. * **Widgets** - toggle which side-panel widgets appear: **Quick Info, Profit Calculator, Offers Table, Price History, Monthly Sold, BSR History, Buy Box Share**, plus a **Chart Timeframe** (30 / 90 / 180 days / 1 year). Turn off the ones you do not use so the panel stays focused. * **Layout** - **Density** (Comfortable / Compact), **Theme** (Auto / Light / Dark), and on/off switches for each on-Amazon surface (niche card, tile hover popup, inline tile strips, storefront analyzer, keyword widget, sponsored badges, auto-fetch BSR on results, and more). A red **Pause SellerMagnet on Amazon** kill-switch turns everything off in one click - handy when you just want to shop. **Export my data** downloads your saved ideas, competitors, and recently-viewed items as JSON. * **Settings** - your **VAT Rate (%)** and your **Buying Criteria**: **Max BSR, Min Profit, Min ROI, Min Margin, Min Sales/mo, FBM Cost**. These are the rules the verdict is measured against. {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Set your Buying Criteria first, before you research anything.** The BUY/PASS verdict is only as meaningful as the thresholds behind it. If you leave them at defaults, "BUY" just means "the defaults passed" - not "this fits *my* business." Enter your real minimum profit, ROI, margin, and the highest BSR you are willing to touch, and the verdict becomes a genuine filter. {% endhint %} {% hint style="info" %} Turn on **Auto-fetch BSR for visible results** only if you want it - it spends **one lookup from your monthly quota per fetched product**. On a busy search page that adds up fast, so most sellers leave it off and click **Get BSR** on the specific tiles they care about. {% endhint %} ### How to set your Buying Criteria The **Buying Criteria** live in the **Settings** section at the bottom of the popup. They are the rules the BUY/MARGINAL/PASS verdict is measured against, so set them once to match your business before you research anything. {% stepper %} {% step %} ### Open the popup and scroll to Settings Click the SellerMagnet icon and scroll to the **Settings** section (the gear icon). At the top is **VAT Rate (%)**; below it, under the **Buying Criteria** subheading, are the six threshold fields. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Enter each threshold Type your own numbers into each field. They save automatically as you leave each box, and they apply to every marketplace you browse. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Enter a Cost Price so the verdict can compute The verdict needs a cost of goods to work out profit, ROI, and margin. Enter your landed cost once in the side panel's **Profit Calculator** (**Cost Price**) - the extension remembers it per ASIN. Until a cost is set, the badge reads **SET COGS** instead of a verdict. {% endstep %} {% endstepper %} Each Buying Criteria field controls one check in the verdict: | Field | What it controls | Example | | ---------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------- | | **Max BSR** | The highest Best Seller Rank you will accept. A lower BSR means the item sells faster; anything above your ceiling fails. | `50000` | | **Min Profit** | The lowest net profit per unit (in the marketplace currency) you are willing to make. | `5.00` | | **Min ROI** | The lowest return on investment (profit divided by your cost) you will accept. | `30` | | **Min Margin** | The lowest profit margin (profit divided by the sale price) you will accept. | `20` | | **Min Sales/mo** | The lowest estimated monthly unit sales the product must show, so you skip dead listings. | `10` | | **FBM Cost** | Your own per-unit fulfilment cost when you ship yourself (FBM). It feeds the Profit Calculator so FBM profit is realistic. | `3.00` | {% hint style="info" %} **If you leave the Buying Criteria blank**, the verdict falls back to sensible defaults (Max BSR 50000, Min Profit 5, Min ROI 30, Min Margin 20, Min Sales 10) and adds **"(defaults - tune in Settings)"** to its rationale, so you always know whether a verdict is judging against your rules or the built-in ones. {% endhint %} **How the verdict is computed.** Once a Cost Price is set, each criterion you filled in becomes a check, and each check lands in one of three states: * **Pass** - the metric clears your threshold. * **Near-miss** (soft fail) - the metric is close but under: BSR within 20% above your Max BSR, or Profit / ROI / Margin / Sales within about 85% of your minimum. * **Hard fail** - the metric misses by more than that. The overall verdict then follows: | Verdict | Condition | | ------------ | ------------------------------------------ | | **BUY** | Every check passes. | | **MARGINAL** | No hard fails, but at least one near-miss. | | **PASS** | At least one hard fail. | Because the checks use *your* numbers, the same product can read **BUY** for a seller who accepts 20% ROI and **PASS** for one who demands 40%. ### How to set your VAT Rate Still in **Settings**, the **VAT Rate (%)** field sits above the Buying Criteria. Enter the standard VAT rate for the marketplace you sell on (for example `19` for Germany, `20` for the UK, `0` if you are not VAT-registered). The rate is deducted in every profit figure and shown as **VAT Due** in the Profit Calculator, so profit is never overstated. {% hint style="info" %} If your SellerMagnet account already has a firm VAT percentage on file, the extension syncs that value into this field automatically - you only need to set it manually if you want to override it. {% endhint %} ### How to configure the side-panel widgets The **Widgets** section decides which cards appear inside the on-page side panel. Flip each switch on or off; the panel updates on the next page load, so you can strip it down to only the cards you actually read. | Widget toggle | What it shows in the side panel | | --------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------ | | **Quick Info** | The headline metric block (price, BSR, sales, profit). | | **Profit Calculator** | The interactive FBA/FBM cost-to-profit calculator. | | **Offers Table** | Competing sellers and their prices. | | **Price History** | The price chart over time. | | **Monthly Sold** | The estimated-units-sold chart. | | **BSR History** | The Best Seller Rank chart. | | **BuyBox Share** | The Buy Box ownership chart. | Below the switches, **Chart Timeframe** sets the window for every history chart - **30 Days / 90 Days / 180 Days / 1 Year** (the default is 180 Days). Pick a shorter window to spot recent moves, or 1 Year to judge seasonality. ### How to configure the Layout The **Layout** section controls the extension's appearance and every surface it draws directly onto Amazon. Two dropdowns set the look: * **Density** - **Comfortable** (default) or **Compact** to fit more on screen. * **Theme** - **Auto (match Amazon)** (default), **Light**, or **Dark**. The switches below turn each on-Amazon surface on or off. Turn off anything you do not use so Amazon stays uncluttered: | Layout toggle | Default | What it controls | | ------------------------------------------------------------ | ------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Niche overview card (browse pages)** | On | The niche summary banner above search results. | | **Search-bar augmentation (toolbar)** | On | The extras added next to Amazon's search box. | | **Keyword volume widget (search bar)** | On | The monthly-searches widget by the search bar. | | **Tile SM Pulse hover popup** | On | The quick-preview popover when you hover a result tile. | | **Inline tile SM Pulse strips** | On | The metric strips drawn under each result tile. | | **Storefront Analyzer (seller pages)** | On | The seller-storefront deep dive. | | **SM Pulse + Keywords widget** | On | The SM Pulse block and keyword table on product pages. | | **Auto-fetch BSR for visible SERP tiles (uses quota)** | Off | Whether BSR is fetched automatically for every visible tile. Spends a lookup per product. | | **Sponsored-listing badges** | On | The Sponsored / Prime / Coupon / Choice badges on tiles. | | **Search tile SM Pulse strips (sponsored / Prime / coupon)** | On | The per-tile SM Pulse overlays on search results. | | **Reduce motion (animations)** | Off | Suppresses the extension's animations. | | **Pause SellerMagnet on Amazon** | Off | The red kill-switch. Turns every on-Amazon surface off in one click. | Three buttons sit at the bottom of the Layout section: * **Reset layout to defaults** - restores every toggle, density, and theme to its default value. * **Export my data** - downloads your saved ideas, tracked competitors, saved keywords, and recently-viewed ASINs as a single JSON file. * **Shortcuts ⌘/** - opens the keyboard-shortcut cheat sheet (on an Amazon tab). *** ## On an Amazon product page This is where you will spend most of your time. Open any product on a supported Amazon marketplace and the extension layers three things onto the page: a one-glance **verdict**, a compact **SM Pulse** metric strip, and a fuller **side panel** you open when you want the detail. ### The verdict Directly above the product title, the extension shows a single word that answers "should I even look closer?" - judged against the Buying Criteria you set in the popup: | Verdict | Meaning | What to do | | ------------ | --------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **BUY** | Every one of your criteria passes | Worth a proper look - open the side panel and check the numbers | | **MARGINAL** | Borderline on one or more metrics | Investigate - it may work with a better supplier price or lower FBM cost | | **PASS** | Hard-fails at least one criterion | Move on, unless you have a specific angle | | **SET COGS** | No cost of goods entered yet | Open the Profit Calculator and enter your **Cost Price** - profit, ROI, and margin cannot be computed without it | | **NO DATA** | Not enough information yet | Usually means: sign in, or click to fetch BSR | Because the verdict uses *your* thresholds, the same product can read **BUY** for a seller who accepts 20% ROI and **PASS** for one who demands 40%. That is the point - it filters to your business, not a generic benchmark. ### SM Pulse Just below, the **SM Pulse** widget shows the headline metrics as tiles: **Price**, **Rating** and review count, **BSR**, **Est. profit** (calculated at roughly 30% fees until you connect SP-API, after which it becomes **Profit (real fees)**), number of **Images**, and **Listing age**. When you are signed out, the gated tiles (BSR, monthly sales, listing age) invite you to **"Sign in to unlock - free account."** A row of action buttons sits with it: * **Save ASIN** - stores the product to your project so you can review it later in the dashboard Watchlist. * **Compare** - pins this ASIN to the Compare tray (up to 4 products side by side). * **Copy ASIN** - copies the identifier to your clipboard. * **Open in dashboard** - jumps to the full product view on the web app. * **Find on Alibaba** - opens a supplier search for the product, to start costing a source. There is also a **Top keywords** mini-table (Keyword / Vol per month / Bid range / Match) with a **View all** link that opens the full keyword modal, where you can export to CSV. ### The side panel When a tile is not enough, open the side panel - a fuller research surface with tabs **Sourcer / History / Keywords / Settings**: * **Sourcer tab** - **Quick Information, Product Details, Categories, Offers**, and the full metric set: Buy Box price, Amazon's price, Lowest FBA/FBM price, Estimated Sales, Total Stock, Best Seller Rank, Variations, Buy Box Share, Private Label, Eligible, Total Reviews, Review Average. * **Profit Calculator** - set Fulfillment (**FBA/FBM**), your **FBM cost**, and **VAT**, and it returns **Maximum Cost, Total Fees, VAT Due, Estimated Profit, Profit Margin, Breakeven Price, Est. Payout, and ROI**. This is the tool you use to answer "what is the most I can pay a supplier and still hit my margin?" * **History tab** - Price, BSR, Monthly Sold, and Buy Box Share charts over **30 / 90 / 180 / 365 days**, so you can tell a steady seller from a one-off spike. * **Offers / Buy Box share** - tables of the competing sellers, their average price, the share of the Buy Box each won, and when they last won it. **How to open it:** click **Open SellerMagnet** on the SM Pulse block, press the **Toggle Panel** button in the popup, or run **Open Sourcer panel** from the command palette (Ctrl / ⌘ + K). You can place the panel where it suits you - **anchored under the buy box, docked left or right, or floating** - and resize it from a mini strip to the full view. To set the *default* placement, use **Options > Widget positions > PDP Pulse** (Top of page / Sidebar / Bottom of page / Floating panel). **Worked example - can I afford this product?** You are looking at a kitchen gadget selling for €24.99. Open the side panel, go to the Profit Calculator, set FBA, enter your 19% German VAT, and read **Maximum Cost**. Say it shows €6.10 at your target 35% margin. Now you know your supplier ceiling: anything above €6.10 landed cost and this product fails your rule. You have your answer in seconds, before you ever message a supplier. {% hint style="warning" %} **Always know which fees you are seeing.** The panel labels every profit figure as **Real fees (your SP-API)**, **Standard fees (public)**, or **Estimated fees**. Estimates can differ from Amazon's real charges by roughly 15-20%, which is easily the whole margin on a thin product. [Connect SP-API](#account-and-connections) before you commit real money. {% endhint %} *** ## On Amazon search results (SERP) Search results are where the extension shines for *niche* research - judging a whole category at once instead of one product at a time. * **Niche summary banner** sits above the results and characterises the entire page: ASIN count, sponsored count, average price, average rating, **median reviews** (a high median means an entrenched, saturated niche; a low one hints at opportunity), average BSR, search volume per month, an opportunity score, the sponsored-vs-organic split, the price range, and the top brands competing. Buttons let you **Grab** (open the Niche Mapper), **Copy** the ASIN list, or open the dashboard. * **Per-tile SM Pulse strips** appear on each result: price, rating, reviews, BSR/Sales, an estimated profit, and badges (**Sponsored / Prime / Coupon / Choice / #1 Bestseller**), each with a **Get BSR** button so you fetch data only for the tiles worth it. * **Tile hover popover** - hovering a result gives a quick preview with **Get full details** / **Open in SellerMagnet panel**. * **Niche Mapper** - a filterable, sortable table of the top ASINs on the page (**All / Organic / Sponsored**), with **Copy ASINs**, **Copy CSV**, and **Download CSV** so you can pull the whole niche into a spreadsheet. * **Search-bar keyword widget** (Beta) - next to Amazon's search box, showing monthly searches, competing products, estimated revenue per month, and top brands, with **Save keyword** and **Open Keyword Research**. **Worked example - read a niche in 30 seconds.** Search "bamboo cutlery set" on `amazon.co.uk`. The banner shows an average price of £12, a **median review count of 40**, and a sponsored split of 8 of 20 tiles. Low median reviews plus a manageable sponsored share suggests a niche you could still enter. Click **Grab** to open the Niche Mapper, **Download CSV**, and you have the top 20 competitors and their metrics ready for a deeper look - all without opening a single product. {% hint style="info" %} **How to configure the SERP surfaces.** Every surface above has its own switch in the popup's **Layout** section - **Niche overview card**, **Inline tile SM Pulse strips**, **Tile SM Pulse hover popup**, **Search tile SM Pulse strips**, **Sponsored-listing badges**, and **Keyword volume widget**. Turn off any you do not want. The niche banner is cached so revisiting a search does not re-spend lookups; set how long it is kept in **Options > Data & Refresh > Niche overview cache** (1 hour / 6 hours / 24 hours / 72 hours). {% endhint %} *** ### Keyword tools A Keywords widget and table listing keywords with search volume, bid range, and match type, exportable to CSV. **How to open and configure:** the keyword table lives in the side panel's **Keywords** tab and in the **SM Pulse + Keywords widget** on the product page (toggle it under **Layout**). The search-bar keyword widget has its own **Keyword volume widget (search bar)** switch. Full live **volume** needs a connected **Amazon Ads** account - see [How to connect SP-API and Ads](#how-to-connect-sp-api-and-ads); when Amazon returns bids but not volume, the widget says so plainly rather than showing a blank. ### Brand Lens On brand-store and search-by-brand pages, a card that aggregates the brand's visible catalogue: product count, estimated 30-day revenue, average price and rating, BSR distribution, and the top 5 products by estimated revenue. Use it to size up a competitor's whole operation at a glance. **How to open:** navigate to any Amazon **brand store** or a **search filtered by brand** and the Brand Lens card appears automatically. **Export brand** is available on a paid plan. ### Compare Pin up to **4 ASINs** across different pages and view them side by side on price, BSR, rating, and reviews, with copy-as-CSV. Ideal for choosing between a few finalists. **How to use:** on any product, click **Compare** in the SM Pulse action row to pin the ASIN to the tray. Open the Compare tray with **Ctrl / ⌘ + Shift + C**, or from the command palette. Pinned ASINs persist as you browse to other products. ### Command palette Press **Ctrl / ⌘ + K** for a fuzzy command bar - the fastest way to drive the extension once you know it. Start typing a command, an ASIN, or a marketplace name. **Shortcuts:** | Shortcut | Opens | | ------------------------ | --------------------------------- | | **Ctrl / ⌘ + K** | The command palette | | **Ctrl / ⌘ + /** | The keyboard-shortcut cheat sheet | | **Ctrl / ⌘ + Shift + C** | The Compare tray | Commands are grouped into **Navigation, Tools, Layout, Marketplaces, Account,** and **Recent**, and include: **Open Sourcer panel**, **Open History**, **Open Keywords / PPC tab**, **Open Settings**, **Open Sales Estimator**, **Copy ASIN**, **Open this ASIN in SellerMagnet dashboard**, **Refresh data for this ASIN**, **Refresh tile overlays**, theme and density switches, **Connect Amazon (SP-API)** / **Connect Amazon Ads (PPC)**, and **Open on** another marketplace. {% hint style="info" %} Most commands act on a product or search page. On other pages the palette shows a reminder to open a product page for SM Pulse, a search for the Niche Banner, or a brand store for Brand Lens. {% endhint %} *** ## Settings (options page) Beyond the popup, the extension has a full **Options** page (opens in its own tab) for the settings you set once and forget. **How to open it:** right-click the SellerMagnet icon and choose **Options**, or open `chrome://extensions`, find SellerMagnet, and click **Details > Extension options**. Every change here saves instantly - a small **Saved** flash confirms it - and applies across all your open Amazon tabs. ### Display | Setting | Options | Why it matters | | -------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Theme** | **System** (default), **Light**, **Dark** | Sets the extension's colour scheme independently of Amazon. **System** follows your OS setting. | | **Display currency** | **Native (per marketplace)** (default), or a fixed currency (USD, EUR, GBP, JPY, and more) | **Native** shows each marketplace's own currency. Pick a **fixed** currency to convert every price into it, so prices from `amazon.de` and `amazon.co.uk` line up in one unit for cross-market comparison. | | **Language** | English, Deutsch, Français, Italiano, Español, Português, Svenska, Polski | The interface language. Mirrors the popup's language switcher. | | **Reduce motion** | On / Off (default Off) | Suppresses the extension's animations. Handy on slower machines or if motion distracts you. | ### Notifications | Setting | Default | What it does | | ------------------------------------------------------------ | ------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Show toasts on save / copy** | On | Small confirmation toasts when you save an ASIN or copy something. Turn off for a silent workflow. | | **Desktop notifications for tracked-competitor price drops** | Off | Sends an OS-level notification when a competitor you track lowers their price. | ### Data & Refresh | Setting | Options | What it does | | -------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **BSR auto-fetch on SERP tiles** | On / Off (default Off) | The same auto-fetch control as the popup's Layout switch. Leave off to avoid spending a lookup on every visible tile. | | **Niche overview cache** | **1 hour / 6 hours / 24 hours (default) / 72 hours** | How long a niche banner's data is reused before it is re-fetched. A longer cache saves lookups on niches you revisit; a shorter one keeps data fresher. | ### Widget positions Set the default on-page placement for the three main surfaces. You can still drag or re-dock them per page; this is the starting position. | Surface | Options | Default | | ------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------- | ----------- | | **PDP Pulse** | Top of page / Sidebar / Bottom of page / Floating panel | Sidebar | | **Product Summary** | Top of page / Sidebar / Bottom of page / Floating panel | Top of page | | **Search Banner** | Top of page / Bottom of page / Floating panel | Top of page | ### Connections **Open Connections** launches the same `auth.sellermagnet.com` flow as the popup's Connect buttons, where you authorise or revoke **SP-API** (real fees, FBA prep, exact net profit) and **Ads** (live keyword volume and bid ranges). See [How to connect SP-API and Ads](#how-to-connect-sp-api-and-ads). ### About Shows the installed **version** and links to **Help & Documentation**, **Pricing**, and **Privacy**. **Reset** clears every extension setting back to its default (it asks you to confirm first, since it cannot be undone) - use it for a clean slate if your configuration ever gets tangled. *** ## Supported marketplaces and languages The extension runs on **22 Amazon marketplaces**: | Region | Domains | | ------------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **North America** | amazon.com, amazon.ca, amazon.com.mx | | **South America** | amazon.com.br | | **Europe** | amazon.co.uk, amazon.de, amazon.fr, amazon.it, amazon.es, amazon.nl, amazon.pl, amazon.se, amazon.com.be, amazon.ie | | **Asia-Pacific** | amazon.co.jp, amazon.com.au, amazon.sg, amazon.in | | **Middle East / Africa** | amazon.ae, amazon.sa, amazon.eg, amazon.com.tr | The interface itself is available in **8 languages**: English, German, Spanish, French, Italian, Polish, Portuguese, and Swedish (selectable in both the popup and the options page). {% hint style="info" %} Some niche metrics depend on how deeply a marketplace is covered. Where a market is not covered, the extension tells you honestly - **"Niche metrics not available on this marketplace."** - instead of showing partial or misleading data. {% endhint %} *** ## What needs login, a connection, or a plan The extension is deliberately layered so you can start free and only pay when you need the deeper data. Here is exactly what each tier gives you: | Tier | What you get | | ----------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | | **Not signed in** | Basic on-page data scraped from the page (tile prices, ratings, reviews, and the niche banner). BSR, monthly sales, listing age, keyword volume, and history are locked. | | **Free account** | Unlocks BSR and monthly sales, the BUY/PASS verdict, and estimated fees/profit - subject to your monthly Sourcer-lookup quota. | | **+ Amazon SP-API connected** | Real Amazon fees, exact net profit, VAT, and sell-eligibility for your account. | | **+ Amazon Ads connected** | Live keyword search volume and bid ranges. | | **Paid plan** | Sales estimates, Buy Box analytics, seller offers, history charts, private-label detection, brand export, and higher or unlimited lookups. | The practical path for a new seller: sign in free, set your buying criteria, and research with estimates to build a shortlist; connect SP-API before you spend money so the final numbers are real; add a paid plan once you are sourcing at volume and need the analytics and higher limits. ***
⚠️ Common Mistakes to Avoid | Mistake | Why It Hurts | | ------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Sourcing on **estimated** fees | Estimates can be 15-20% off. Connect SP-API for real fees before you buy. | | Not setting your buying criteria | The BUY/PASS verdict is only as good as the Max BSR / Min Profit / ROI / Margin values you enter. | | Forgetting your VAT rate | Profit is overstated because VAT is not deducted. | | Leaving auto-fetch BSR on everywhere | It spends a lookup per product; turn it on only when you need it. | | Ignoring seller count / Buy Box share | A great ROI means little if many sellers already compete for the box. | | Judging a niche by one product | Use the search banner and Niche Mapper - a single good ASIN can sit in a brutal niche. |
## ✅ Best Practices 1. **Connect SP-API early** so every profit number uses your real fees, not estimates. 2. **Set your buying criteria and VAT once** so the verdict and calculator are accurate from day one. 3. **Use the Niche Mapper on search pages** to grab the top ASINs and export them for deeper analysis. 4. **Use the Profit Calculator to find your supplier ceiling** (Maximum Cost) before you ever contact a supplier. 5. **Jump to the dashboard** (Open in dashboard) when you need full history, Buy Box trends, or to save products to your Watchlist. 6. **Keep the extension updated** via Chrome so fee tables and data stay current. *** ## 🔧 Troubleshooting | Issue | Solution | | ------------------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Panel does not appear | Make sure you are on an Amazon product/search page (not Seller Central). Refresh the page. | | BSR / sales show "Sign in to unlock" | Click the icon and sign in - a free account unlocks them. | | Fees look off | Check the fee-source label. **Estimated** fees are approximate; connect SP-API for real fees. | | Keyword volume is empty | Connect an Amazon Ads account; without it you may see bids only. | | Nothing loads | Check your connection and that SellerMagnet is not paused (red kill-switch in the popup). | | Verdict says NO DATA | Sign in and click **Get BSR** for that product so it has enough to judge. | *** ## ❓ FAQ
Do I need a paid subscription to use the extension? No. You can sign in for **free** (no credit card) and even try a demo session. A free account unlocks BSR, monthly sales, the verdict, and estimated profit. A paid plan adds sales estimates, analytics, history charts, and higher lookup limits.
What is the difference between "estimated" and "real" fees? Estimated fees are approximated from public data and can differ from Amazon's real fees by roughly 15-20%. Once you **Connect Amazon (SP-API)**, the extension shows **Real fees (your SP-API)** and exact net profit for your account.
Does the extension work in Firefox or Edge? It is built for Google Chrome. Chromium browsers like Edge and Brave can usually install it from the Chrome Web Store, but official support is Chrome only.
Does the extension use my Sourcer lookup quota? Fetching data (for example, pulling BSR for a product or a results tile) counts against your monthly Sourcer-lookup quota shown in the popup. Auto-fetch options spend quota automatically, so leave them off unless you want them.
Does it work inside Seller Central? No. The extension is intentionally excluded from `sellercentral.amazon.*`. It runs on the public Amazon storefront (product pages, search, brand stores, seller storefronts).
Does the extension track my browsing? It only activates on Amazon domains and sends the ASIN/keyword you are viewing to SellerMagnet to return data. It does not track other browsing.
*** ## ➡️ What's Next? {% content-ref url="/pages/YtBP2GSz5q83gTVW9tOI" %} [Product Sourcer](/selling-tools/product-sourcer-overview) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/vGcfp3NAeI5iI7qpdt6M" %} [Identifier Converter](/selling-tools/product-sourcer-overview/identifier-converter) {% endcontent-ref %} # Bulk Sourcer Analyze a whole list of products at once. Upload a CSV (or paste ASIN, EAN, UPC or ISBN codes) and run the full sourcer analysis over hundreds of products in a single background job, with buying verdi {% hint style="info" %} **Difficulty:** 🟡 Intermediate · **Reading time:** \~12 min {% endhint %} {% hint style="warning" %} **Availability:** The Bulk Sourcer is rolling out on higher sourcing plans and may still be in early access for your account. You reach it directly from the [Product Sourcer](/selling-tools/product-sourcer-overview) and from the [Chrome Extension](/selling-tools/product-sourcer-overview/chrome-extension) (the "Analyze in bulk" hand-off), rather than from a fixed sidebar link. If you see an early-access prompt, your plan does not include it yet - contact support to get switched on. {% endhint %} ## 📋 Overview The single-product [Sourcer](/selling-tools/product-sourcer-overview) and the [Chrome Extension](/selling-tools/product-sourcer-overview/chrome-extension) analyze one ASIN at a time. The **Bulk Sourcer** runs that exact same analysis over a **whole list at once** - paste or upload up to **1,000 products** (ASIN, EAN, UPC or ISBN), and SellerMagnet works through them in a background job while you keep using the dashboard. The result is a single sortable, filterable table with a **BUY / MARGINAL / PASS verdict** on every product, plus ROI, margin, net profit, demand and competition signals - everything you need to triage a big supplier list, wholesale price sheet, or brand catalog in one pass instead of hundreds of manual lookups. {% hint style="success" %} **When to use it:** a wholesale price list from a distributor, a competitor's catalog, a spreadsheet of ASINs you scraped or exported, or a saved watchlist you want to re-score against fresh data. Anywhere you would otherwise paste ASINs into the Sourcer one by one, the Bulk Sourcer does the whole list in a single job. {% endhint %} ![SellerMagnet Bulk Sourcer screenshot](https://4139654583-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Fih2knSvVpBcq5rIeXVjM%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-ce05419a3766705ecfab42cf9465ed65b5adca47%2Fbulk-sourcer.png?alt=media) *** ## 🚀 Two analysis depths You choose how deep each run goes: | Depth | What it computes | Needs cost (COGS)? | | ---------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------ | | **Preliminary (fast)** | Product and demand metrics only - price, BSR, estimated monthly units and revenue, reviews, rating, FBA, offers, buy-box holder, competition and trend signals | No | | **Detailed (profit)** | Everything in Preliminary **plus** referral fee, fulfilment fee, VAT, total fees, net profit, margin %, ROI %, and the full **BUY verdict** | Yes (per product) | **Preliminary** is the fast triage pass - use it to cut a 1,000-row list down to the products that actually sell. **Detailed** adds the money math and the buy decision, so run it once you have costs to work with. You do not have to re-upload to go deeper: you can type a cost per row in the results afterwards, or click **Re-run in Detailed**. {% hint style="info" %} **Fees basis:** In Detailed mode, if your Amazon seller account is connected, fees are pulled at your **real per-account rates**. Without a connection, the tool falls back to Amazon's **public estimated fee schedule** and flags those rows as estimated. A banner at the top of the results tells you whether the run used real, estimated, or mixed fees. {% endhint %} *** ## Running a bulk analysis {% stepper %} {% step %} ### Choose a marketplace and depth Pick the **marketplace** you are sourcing for (it defaults to your project's default marketplace), then choose **Preliminary (fast)** or **Detailed (profit)**. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Provide your products Two ways to get a list in: * **Upload a CSV or text file** - drag it onto the drop zone or click to browse. A header row is optional, and the delimiter is auto-detected, so comma, semicolon, and tab-separated files (including European supplier exports) all parse. SellerMagnet auto-detects which column holds the identifier and which holds the cost, and shows a **column-mapping** panel so you can override either one. * **Paste a list** - one identifier per line in the text box (commas, semicolons, and tabs also work as separators). Identifiers can be **ASIN, EAN, UPC or ISBN** - barcodes are resolved to the matching ASIN automatically. An optional **cost / COGS** column (or the `cogs` header) feeds the Detailed profit math; cost cells tolerate currency symbols and both decimal styles (`€4,50` and `1.234,56` both parse correctly). {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Analyze the list Click **Analyze list**. The job is queued and the page shows a **progress bar** with live "ok / failed / total" counts as each product is processed. You can leave the page and come back - the job keeps running, and appears under **Recent jobs**. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Read and refine the results When the job finishes, the results table fills in. Sort by any column, switch **lenses**, filter by verdict or score, search, and open any row for a full detail drawer. Fill in missing costs inline to unlock profit and the verdict without re-running. {% endstep %} {% endstepper %} *** ## 📊 The results table ### Verdict Every product gets a plain-English buying verdict, driven by your [sourcing criteria](#sourcing-criteria-the-buy-decision): | Verdict | Meaning | | -------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **BUY** | Meets **every** applicable criterion - a strong candidate | | **MARGINAL** | Falls just short on one or more criteria (within \~15%) - worth a closer look | | **PASS** | Misses at least one criterion badly - skip it | | **Needs COGS** | A Detailed row with no cost yet - add a cost to get a real verdict | Alongside the verdict, each row carries a **Score (0-100)** badge - green for strong (70+), amber for average (40-69), red for weak (under 40) - with a confidence dot indicating how solid the underlying estimates are. ### Lenses (column views) The same rows can be viewed through different **lenses** (a segmented "View" control), so the table stays readable instead of scrolling through 30 columns: | Lens | Focuses on | | --------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Overview** | Price, BSR, estimated units and revenue, reviews, rating, FBA, offers | | **Competition** | Offer count, buy-box holder, Amazon-on-listing, variations, brand concentration | | **Trend** | BSR trend, price trend, price volatility, listing age | | **Profit** | COGS, fees breakdown, VAT, net profit, margin %, ROI % *(Detailed only)* | | **Advertising** | Break-even ACoS and suggested max bid per product *(Detailed only)* | The **Profit** and **Advertising** lenses stay locked until you run a Detailed analysis. ### Filtering, search and selection * **Search** by ASIN, title, or brand. * **Filter** by status (OK only / not found), by **verdict** (BUY / MARGINAL / PASS / Needs COGS), and by a **minimum score** slider. * Toggle **Favorites only** and **Show hidden** to focus the view. * **Select** rows to act on several at once - **Compare** (2-5 products side by side), **Set COGS**, **Tag**, **Favorite**, or **Hide**. {% hint style="info" %} **Inline COGS:** In the Profit and Advertising lenses, the COGS cell is an editable input. Type a cost and the net profit, margin, ROI and verdict recompute instantly for that row - no re-run, no credit spent. {% endhint %} *** ## ⚙️ Sourcing criteria (the BUY decision) Open the **Sourcing criteria** panel to set the thresholds that decide each verdict. A product earns **BUY** only when it meets every applicable threshold, **MARGINAL** when it falls just short (within \~15%), and **PASS** otherwise. | Criterion | Default | Applies to | | --------------------- | ------- | -------------------------------------------------- | | **Max BSR** | 50,000 | Both depths | | **Min sales / month** | 10 | Both depths | | **Min net profit** | 5 | Detailed only | | **Min ROI %** | 30 | Detailed only | | **Min margin %** | 20 | Detailed only | | **Assumed CVR %** | 10 | Advertising max-bid math (not part of the verdict) | Your tuned criteria are remembered in your browser, and a **Reset defaults** button restores them. Because the verdict is recomputed live, changing a threshold instantly re-colors every row - no re-run required. {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro tip:** Run a **Preliminary** pass first with just **Max BSR** and **Min sales/month** to strip out the dead products, favorite the survivors, then re-run only those in **Detailed** with your real costs. You spend your analysis budget on products that already clear the demand bar. {% endhint %} *** ## ⭐ Saving, watchlist and exports * **Favorite (star) a product** and it is saved to your shared **Sourcer watchlist** - the same saved store used by the single-product Sourcer and the Chrome Extension. Revisit saved items in the **Saved** tab of the [Product Sourcer](/selling-tools/product-sourcer-overview). * Saved products remember a **target cost**, and future Detailed bulk jobs reuse it to auto-fill missing COGS (a cost in your CSV always wins). * Open any row's drawer and click **Open in Sourcer** to jump to the full single-product view for that ASIN. * **Export** from a split menu: **CSV**, **Excel (.xlsx)**, or **JSON (full job)**. CSV and Excel contain exactly the rows you have filtered to, with the live verdict applied - so you can export "just the BUYs" in one click - while JSON dumps the raw, unfiltered job. {% hint style="info" %} **Tags and hidden rows** are stored per browser, so they help you organize a working session but do not sync across devices or to your teammates. Favorites (the watchlist) and job history **do** persist on your account. {% endhint %} *** ## 🎯 Realistic example **Scenario:** A distributor sends you a price list of **420 products** as an Excel export, with an EAN column and a wholesale-cost column. 1. Save it as CSV, drop it on the Bulk Sourcer, confirm the **Identifier** column is the EAN and the **Cost** column is the wholesale price. 2. Run a **Detailed** analysis on **Amazon.de**. SellerMagnet resolves each EAN to its ASIN and works through the list. 3. Filter to **verdict = BUY** and sort by **ROI %**. 38 products clear your 30% ROI and 20% margin thresholds. 4. **Favorite** the top 38 (they land in your watchlist), **export the filtered CSV** to send to your buyer, and **Open in Sourcer** on the three most promising to double-check demand and competition. What would have been 420 manual lookups becomes one upload and a two-minute review. *** ## 💳 Credits Bulk analysis runs on **credits** from a **monthly allowance** that comes with your plan. The same wallet also powers the AI features in the [Listing Manager AI](/selling-tools/listing-optimizer-overview) suite, so a credit spent here is a credit not spent there - one shared pool. | What | Cost | | -------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Analyzing one product (ASIN)** | **5 credits** - so a full 1,000-product run costs about 5,000 credits | | **Re-opening a saved job** | **Free** - it is just a stored snapshot | | **Editing COGS inline** | **Free** - recomputes profit and the verdict at no cost | | **Refresh / Re-run in Detailed** | Charged again, because it fetches fresh data | Your monthly allowance depends on your plan and is refilled every billing cycle: | Plan | Monthly credits | | -------------- | --------------- | | **Lite** | 10,000 | | **Standard** | 25,000 | | **Premium** | 50,000 | | **Enterprise** | 120,000 | {% hint style="info" %} **How spending works:** credits are drawn from your **monthly allowance first**; if you run out, any **top-up credits** you have purchased are used next. Because the wallet is shared with the Listing AI tools, a heavy image-generation week leaves fewer credits for bulk runs, and vice versa. See [Plans & Billing](/resources/plans-and-billing) for the current allowances and top-up options. {% endhint %} ## ⚠️ Limits and good-to-know | Limit | Detail | | --------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Products per job** | Up to 1,000 identifiers; extra rows beyond that are dropped | | **One job at a time** | One bulk job runs per project at once - wait for it to finish before starting another | | **Monthly volume** | Bulk analysis draws on your shared monthly credit allowance (see above) | | **Data freshness** | Results are a snapshot. Jobs older than 30 days expire; the input is kept so you can re-run. Results older than a day show a "Data as of" note with a Refresh option | | **Duplicates** | Repeated identifiers collapse to one product (reported as "Duplicates removed") | | **Large runs** | Very large lists can take a while - the analyzer politely yields to live traffic so single-product lookups stay fast | {% hint style="info" %} **Re-running vs. re-opening:** Opening a finished job again is **free** - it is just a saved snapshot. **Refresh** and **Re-run in Detailed** fetch fresh data and count against your allowance. Fill in COGS inline whenever you can; it never costs anything. {% endhint %} *** ## ❓ FAQ
What can I put in the list - ASINs only? ASIN, EAN, UPC, or ISBN. Barcodes are resolved to the matching ASIN automatically. You can mix them in one list.
Do I need to connect my Amazon account? No - you can run the Bulk Sourcer without connecting. Connecting only improves the **Detailed** fee accuracy: with a connection, fees use your real per-account rates; without one, they use Amazon's public estimated schedule (clearly flagged).
I ran a fast job but now want profit numbers. Do I re-upload? No. Type a cost in the inline COGS cell for the rows you care about, or click **Re-run in Detailed** to compute profit for the whole job at once.
Where do favorited products go? To your shared Sourcer watchlist, visible in the **Saved** tab of the Product Sourcer. It is the same store the Chrome Extension and single-product Sourcer use, so a product saved anywhere shows up everywhere.
How is the BUY / MARGINAL / PASS verdict decided? By your **Sourcing criteria**. BUY means every applicable threshold is met, MARGINAL means it falls within about 15% of a threshold, PASS means it misses at least one badly. A Detailed row with no cost shows "Needs COGS" until you add a cost.
Can I export only the good products? Yes. Filter to verdict = BUY (and set a minimum score if you like), then export to **CSV** or **Excel** - both contain exactly the rows currently shown. (The **JSON** option instead dumps the full, unfiltered job.)
*** ## ➡️ What's Next? {% content-ref url="/pages/YtBP2GSz5q83gTVW9tOI" %} [Product Sourcer](/selling-tools/product-sourcer-overview) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/9BLtTr2v8wYs6EWCS7Ll" %} [Chrome Extension](/selling-tools/product-sourcer-overview/chrome-extension) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/vGcfp3NAeI5iI7qpdt6M" %} [Identifier Converter](/selling-tools/product-sourcer-overview/identifier-converter) {% endcontent-ref %} # Identifier Converter Bulk-convert between ASIN (Amazon Standard Identification Number), UPC, EAN, and ISBN identifiers across Amazon marketplaces. Paste a list or upload a file and download the mapped results. {% hint style="info" %} **Difficulty:** 🟡 Intermediate · **Reading time:** \~7 min {% endhint %} {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Open this page in your dashboard:** [**Go to Identifier Converter →**](https://dashboard.sellermagnet.com/sourcer/converter) {% endhint %} ## 📋 Overview A supplier sends you a wholesale list of 200 products, each one identified only by its UPC. To evaluate any of them you need the matching ASINs so you can pull them up on Amazon, but hand-searching 200 barcodes one at a time is a lost afternoon. The **Identifier Converter** turns that list into ASINs in a single pass. The Converter is a bulk-conversion tool built into the Sourcer page. It lets you convert between Amazon product identifiers. ASIN, UPC, EAN, and ISBN, in large batches. Whether you have a supplier spreadsheet full of EAN codes and need the matching ASINs for a specific marketplace, or you need to reverse-lookup UPCs from a list of ASINs, the Converter handles it in seconds. *** ## Accessing the Converter 1. Log in to your SellerMagnet dashboard. 2. Navigate to **Sourcer** in the left menu. 3. Click the **Converter** tab at the top of the page. *** ## Input Methods ![SellerMagnet Identifier Converter](https://4139654583-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Fih2knSvVpBcq5rIeXVjM%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-bf267e4ab86624071e6dafa5a6d02c94f112846b%2Fidentifier-converter.png?alt=media) The Converter accepts identifiers through two channels, displayed side by side: ### Text Input | Feature | Details | | -------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Input field** | Multi-line textarea with monospace font | | **Accepted formats** | One identifier per line | | **Accepted types** | ASIN, UPC, EAN, ISBN-10, ISBN-13 | | **Max per batch** | Up to 50 identifiers per conversion (extra lines are ignored) | Paste your list directly. Each line should contain a single identifier. The system auto-detects the identifier type. ### File Upload | Feature | Details | | -------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------- | | **Drop zone** | Drag-and-drop area or click to browse | | **Accepted formats** | `.csv`, `.xlsx`, `.xls` | | **Column detection** | Automatically identifies the column containing identifiers | {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro tip:** When using a CSV file, ensure the identifier column has a clear header like "ASIN", "EAN", or "UPC". This helps the auto-detection work reliably even in multi-column files. {% endhint %} {% hint style="info" icon="circle-info" %} **Which marketplace does it use?** There is nothing to configure. The Converter looks identifiers up against your project's **default marketplace** (and falls back to Amazon.com if none is set), so a code that resolves there returns its match. To convert against a different marketplace, switch your project's default first. {% endhint %} *** ## Running a Conversion 1. Paste identifiers into the text field **or** upload a file. 2. Click the **Convert** button. 3. A progress indicator shows the conversion status. 4. Results appear in a table below the input section. *** ## Results Table The results table displays one row per input identifier: | Column | Description | | ---------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Input** | The original identifier you provided | | **Type** | Auto-detected identifier type, shown as a colored badge (ASIN, EAN, UPC, or ISBN) | | **ASIN** | Amazon Standard Identification Number (links to the Amazon listing) | | **EAN** | European Article Number(s) mapped to the ASIN | | **Title** | Listing title. Always shown, and the cell is editable so you can tidy a label before exporting | | **Status** | Success or Failed | *** ## Statistics Bar Above the results, a statistics bar summarizes: | Stat | Description | | --------------- | ------------------------------------------------- | | **Total input** | Number of identifiers submitted | | **Converted** | Successfully converted identifiers | | **Failed** | Identifiers with no matching Amazon catalog entry | *** ## 📤 Exporting Results The **Export** button is a split menu. Pick **CSV** or **Excel** to download the results, including every column from the table, ready to import into your inventory management system, supplier negotiation spreadsheet, or listing tool. {% hint style="info" icon="lightbulb" %} **Tip:** The exported CSV uses UTF-8 encoding, which preserves special characters in product titles across all languages and marketplaces. {% endhint %} ### 🚀 Analyze in Bulk Sourcer Next to Export, an **Analyze in Bulk Sourcer** button hands the converted ASINs straight to the [Bulk Sourcer](/selling-tools/product-sourcer-overview/bulk-sourcer) so you can run the full profitability analysis over them in one job, no re-typing. It opens the Bulk Sourcer pre-loaded with the ASINs the conversion resolved (`/tools/bulk-sourcer?source=converter&asins=...`). Duplicate and unresolved rows are dropped automatically, so only the clean, unique ASINs are carried over. {% hint style="info" icon="circle-info" %} **Availability:** The Bulk Sourcer is a paid feature. If your plan does not include it yet, the hand-off still opens the tool and you land on the upgrade prompt. {% endhint %} *** ## 🎯 Realistic Example **Scenario:** You receive a wholesale price list from a European distributor with EAN codes (with your project's default marketplace set to Amazon.de). You need to find the matching ASINs to evaluate profitability. 1. Open the **Converter** tab. 2. Copy the EAN codes from the spreadsheet and paste them into the text area (up to 50 per batch). 3. Click **Convert**. 4. In a few seconds, the results table populates. Most EANs match an ASIN; a handful return "Failed" (meaning the product is not yet listed on your default marketplace). 5. Click **Analyze in Bulk Sourcer** to push the matched ASINs into the Bulk Sourcer for a full profitability run, or **Export** the results as CSV or Excel and paste the ASINs into the Sourcer's **Overview** tab one at a time. ***
⚠️ Common Mistakes to Avoid | Mistake | Why It Hurts | | ------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Mixing multiple identifier types in one batch without headers | The auto-detection may misclassify some identifiers | | Uploading a file with merged cells | Parsing fails on merged-cell spreadsheets; flatten them first | | Expecting a marketplace you have not set as default | Lookups run against your project's default marketplace; switch it first if the codes belong to a different region | | Including leading zeros in a text file opened in Excel | Excel strips leading zeros from UPC/EAN numbers, use `.csv` format | | Submitting duplicates | Wastes processing time; deduplicate your list before converting |
\## ✅ Best Practices 1. **Deduplicate your list before uploading:** Remove duplicate identifiers to speed up conversion and avoid wasted lookups. 2. **Mind your default marketplace:** Identifier mappings are marketplace-specific. A UPC may map to different ASINs on Amazon.com vs. Amazon.de, so set your project's default marketplace to the region the codes belong to before converting. 3. **Combine with the Sourcer:** After converting, use **Analyze in Bulk Sourcer** to score the whole batch at once, or paste matched ASINs into the Sourcer's Overview search to analyze them individually. 4. **Save exports for future reference:** Keep converted files organized by supplier and date for easy re-evaluation when prices change. 5. **Handle "Failed" results:** Products with no ASIN match may represent listing opportunities. Consider creating a new listing for those EANs. *** ## 🔧 Troubleshooting If a conversion does not behave as expected, work through the situations below before re-running the batch. ### Mixed-identifier batches The Converter auto-detects the type of each line, so a batch that mixes ASINs, EANs, and UPCs is allowed. The risk is misclassification: a bare 12- or 13-digit number can look like more than one code type, and a value with a stripped leading zero can be read as the wrong length. If some rows come back with an unexpected type or a "Not Found" you cannot explain, split the list so each batch holds one identifier type, or upload a file where the identifier column carries a clear header ("ASIN", "EAN", "UPC") so detection has a hint. Keeping types separate also makes the results table easier to read. ### Partial file-parse failures When a file uploads but only some rows convert, the parser usually skipped cells it could not read cleanly. The common causes are merged cells, the identifier column not being detected (missing or ambiguous header), stray text or notes in the identifier column, and blank lines. Flatten any merged cells, give the identifier column a single clear header, remove non-identifier text from that column, and re-upload. If a spreadsheet keeps failing, export it to `.csv` first. CSV is the most predictable format for the parser. ### Identifiers that will not resolve on your default marketplace A code that is valid but returns "Failed" is almost always a marketplace mismatch, not a bad identifier. Amazon catalog entries and their identifier mappings are marketplace-specific, so a UPC that resolves on Amazon.com may have no entry on Amazon.de, and the same product can carry different ASINs per region. Lookups run against your **project's default marketplace** (Amazon.com if none is set), so confirm that default matches where the products are actually listed, then re-run. If the item genuinely is not listed on that marketplace, the "Failed" is correct. Treat those rows as listing opportunities rather than errors. Also re-check for typos and stripped leading zeros before assuming the catalog is at fault. ### File format issues Uploads must be `.csv`, `.xlsx`, or `.xls`. A file that is rejected on upload is usually the wrong extension (for example, `.txt` or `.numbers`). Re-save in a supported format, and remove unused columns and extra sheets so only the identifier data remains. Remember the per-batch cap as well: only the first 50 identifiers in any input are processed, so a large file will convert its first 50 rows and ignore the rest. Split long lists into batches of 50 and run them in sequence. *** ## ❓ FAQ
How many identifiers can I convert at once? Up to 50 identifiers per conversion. If you paste or upload more, only the first 50 are processed. Split larger lists into batches of 50 and run them in sequence.
Which marketplace does the converter use? Your project's **default marketplace** (and Amazon.com if none is set). There is no marketplace selector on the Converter, so to convert against a different region, change your project's default marketplace first.
Why do some identifiers return "Failed"? "Failed" means the identifier has no matching Amazon catalog entry on your default marketplace. Common reasons: the product is new or not yet listed, it was delisted, or it exists only on a different regional marketplace. Verify by searching the identifier directly on Amazon; if it appears there, switch your default marketplace to match or re-check the identifier for typos.
Does each conversion consume search credits or quota? No. The Identifier Converter is free to use, it does not draw on your Sourcer search quota or any credit balance. The only cap is **50 identifiers per batch**.
Can I convert ASINs to EANs (reverse lookup)? Yes. The converter works bidirectionally. Enter ASINs and the results will include the mapped EAN, UPC, and ISBN where available.
What file formats are supported for upload? CSV, XLSX, and XLS files. Ensure identifiers are in a single column with a clear header row.
*** ## ➡️ What's Next? {% content-ref url="/pages/YtBP2GSz5q83gTVW9tOI" %} [Product Sourcer](/selling-tools/product-sourcer-overview) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/9BLtTr2v8wYs6EWCS7Ll" %} [Chrome Extension](/selling-tools/product-sourcer-overview/chrome-extension) {% endcontent-ref %} # Repricer Overview Automate your Amazon pricing with SellerMagnet's intelligent Repricer. Win the Buy Box, protect margins, and react to competitor changes in real time across all marketplaces. {% hint style="info" %} **Difficulty:** 🟡 Intermediate · **Reading time:** \~10 min {% endhint %} {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Open this page in your dashboard:** [**Go to Repricer Overview →**](https://dashboard.sellermagnet.com/repricer) {% endhint %} ## 📋 Overview Imagine you sell dozens of listings and cannot sit and watch competitor prices all day. A rival drops their price at 2 a.m., steals the Buy Box, and you lose sales until you notice the next morning. With the Repricer running, you wake up to find it already reacted overnight: it undercut the competitor within the limits you set, won the Buy Box back, and then nudged your price back up once the coast was clear. The **SellerMagnet Repricer** automatically adjusts your Amazon listing prices based on competitor activity, Buy Box status, and the strategy rules you define. It monitors your products continuously and reprices them within the boundaries you set, ensuring you win the Buy Box when possible while never selling below your minimum profitable price. The Repricer supports two distinct use cases with purpose-built strategies: * **Reseller strategies:** Compete for the Buy Box against other sellers on shared listings * **Brand Owner / Private Label strategies:** Protect your brand's pricing integrity and enforce MAP (Minimum Advertised Price) policies {% hint style="info" %} **Is this for you?** If you compete with other sellers on shared listings, the Repricer saves hours of manual price monitoring. If you sell your own brand exclusively, use Brand Owner strategies to protect pricing. Expected time savings: **3-4 hours/week**. {% endhint %} {% hint style="info" icon="layer-group" %} **Two dashboards, one engine.** The Repricer ships with two front ends that read the same rules and the same live engine: * The **classic v1 dashboard** at `/repricer` - the original all-in-one page where you **create, import, and manage** rules. Documented in [Repricer Dashboard (classic v1)](#repricer-dashboard-classic-v1) below. * The redesigned **v2 Overview** at `/repricer-v2` - a monitoring-first command centre with KPI tiles, a diagnostics panel, and richer filtering. Documented in [The v2 Overview dashboard](#the-v2-overview-dashboard) below. The v2 Overview is read-and-triage focused: **New Repricer, Import CSV, and each row's Manage button all deep-link back to the classic v1 page**, because the create and manage modals live in v1. {% endhint %} {% embed url="" %} ![SellerMagnet Repricer Overview](https://4139654583-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Fih2knSvVpBcq5rIeXVjM%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-6690db3258fede23cd8b9369d818277c0d199b0d%2Frepricer-overview.png?alt=media) *** ## ⭐ Key Benefits | Benefit | Description | | ---------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **24/7 automated repricing** | Prices update around the clock, even when you are offline | | **Buy Box optimization** | Algorithms designed specifically to maximize Buy Box share | | **Margin protection** | Min/Max price guards prevent selling below your profitability threshold | | **Real-time monitoring** | Dashboard shows live status, win rates, and diagnostics | | **Multi-marketplace** | One dashboard for all your Amazon marketplaces | | **Bulk operations** | Start, stop, or delete repricers in bulk with a single action | | **Activity logging** | Full audit trail of every price change with timestamps | *** ## Real-World Scenario Here is one rule from creation to winning the Buy Box. The numbers below are illustrative example values, not fixed defaults. **1. Create the rule (Inactive).** You sell a wireless keyboard on a shared listing. Your landed cost plus fees is 18.00 EUR, so you set the **Min** to 22.00 EUR (your breakeven plus a small margin buffer) and the **Max** to 34.90 EUR. You pick a reseller BuyBox strategy and save. The rule appears in the **Inactive** tab because it has not started yet. **2. Start the rule (Running (Not Won)).** You start the rule. Your current price is 29.90 EUR, but a competitor is selling at 27.50 EUR and holds the Buy Box. The rule moves into the **Running (Not Won)** tab: it is actively repricing, but you are not winning yet. **3. The rule reacts within bounds.** The engine sees the 27.50 EUR competitor and lowers your price to just under it, for example 27.45 EUR. That is above your 22.00 EUR **Min**, so the move is allowed. The **Latest Activity** panel logs a green price-update event with the affected ASIN. **4. Buy Box Secured.** With the lower price, Amazon awards you the Buy Box. The rule moves into the **Buy Box Secured** tab and its Status badge turns green. You are winning without touching your minimum price. **5. Nudge the price back up.** Later, the competitor goes out of stock or raises their price. With no one undercutting you, the rule steps your price back up toward the **Max** (for example 31.90 EUR) while keeping the Buy Box, recovering margin you would have left on the table with a static price. {% hint style="info" icon="lightbulb" %} If the competitor had dropped to 21.00 EUR, below your 22.00 EUR **Min**, the rule would hold at 22.00 EUR rather than sell at a loss. It would stay in **Running (Not Won)** and the [Health Strip](#repricer-health-strip) would flag it as a threshold hold or a "price below min" issue, so you can decide whether to widen the band. {% endhint %} *** ## Repricer Dashboard (classic v1) {% hint style="info" %} This section describes the **classic v1 dashboard** at `/repricer`. For the redesigned overview at `/repricer-v2`, jump to [The v2 Overview dashboard](#the-v2-overview-dashboard). {% endhint %} ![Create Repricer modal: strategy, cost basis, and live price preview](https://4139654583-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Fih2knSvVpBcq5rIeXVjM%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-cc1dd41dff70daf85dd7b1481609790ac8a5a8e3%2Frepricer-create-modal.png?alt=media) The Repricer Dashboard is your single source of truth for every rule you have created. In the summary view, you see how many products are managed, how many are currently winning the Buy Box, and which items still need attention. Everything updates in real time as the engine runs in the background. ### 1. KPI Cards Four cards across the top of the dashboard summarise your repricing footprint and live performance: | KPI | Description | Color | | ---------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | --------- | | **Total Repricers** | Total number of repricer rules created across all of your connected marketplaces | 🔵 Blue | | **Brand-PL Repricers** | Subset of rules using Brand Owner / Private Label strategies (MAP enforcement, etc.) | 🟣 Purple | | **Running** | Rules that are actively repricing right now but have not yet secured the Buy Box | 🟠 Amber | | **Buy Box** | Rules currently holding the Buy Box for their listing | 🟢 Green | {% hint style="info" icon="lightbulb" %} **Tip:** "Total Repricers" is the master count. Brand-PL, Running, and Buy Box are subsets that always add up to (or fit inside) the total, useful for quickly spotting where most of your portfolio sits. {% endhint %} ### 2. Status Breakdown Below the KPI row, a horizontal bar chart visualises how your rules are distributed across the four lifecycle states: | Status | What it means | | --------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Inactive** | Rules that have been created but are not currently running | | **Brand-PL** | Brand Owner / Private Label rules enforcing your own pricing | | **Running (Not Won)** | Rules actively repricing, but a competitor currently holds the Buy Box | | **Buy Box Secured** | Rules currently winning and holding the Buy Box | Use this chart to spot imbalances, for example, a tall "Running (Not Won)" bar means many rules are competing without success and may need a strategy review. ### 3. Latest Activity To the right of the chart, the **Latest Activity** panel shows a colour-coded timeline of the most recent events from the repricing engine: * 🟢 **Green**: Successful Buy Box wins and price updates * 🟡 **Amber**: Warnings such as "at min price" or "cannot lower" * 🔵 **Blue**: Informational events such as a rule being started Each entry shows the affected ASIN (Amazon Standard Identification Number), what changed, and how long ago the event occurred. This is the fastest way to confirm that the engine is doing its job. ### 4. Status Tabs Directly above the items table, four tabs let you slice your portfolio by lifecycle state. Each tab shows a count badge so you can immediately see how many rules sit in each bucket. {% tabs %} {% tab title="Inactive" %} Rules that have been created but are not currently active. Use this tab to bulk-start newly imported repricers, or to clean up rules you no longer need. {% endtab %} {% tab title="Brand-PL" %} Brand Owner / Private Label rules. These enforce MAP, hold a fixed price, or protect your own brand listings. They are listed separately because they do not compete for the Buy Box in the traditional sense. {% endtab %} {% tab title="Running (Not Won)" %} Rules that are actively repricing but a competitor currently holds the Buy Box. This is the tab to monitor most closely, it surfaces opportunities to tweak strategies, lower min prices, or investigate why you are not winning. {% endtab %} {% tab title="Buy Box Secured" %} Rules currently winning the Buy Box. These are the rules generating sales right now. You generally do not need to touch them, but it is healthy to check that the win is not happening at your minimum price. {% endtab %} {% endtabs %} ### 5. Items Table The main table lists every rule in the selected tab. It exposes 13 columns so you can see all the critical information without opening individual rules: | Column | Description | | ---------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Checkbox** | Bulk-select rows for batch actions (start, stop, delete, export) | | **SKU (Stock Keeping Unit)** | Your seller SKU for the listing | | **ASIN** | Amazon Standard Identification Number | | **FUL.** | Fulfillment channel : **FBA** (blue) or **FBM** (amber) | | **Product** | Product image and title | | **Price** | Current live price on Amazon | | **Min** | Minimum price boundary: the absolute floor the rule will never go below | | **Max** | Maximum price boundary: the ceiling the rule will never exceed | | **Status** | Lifecycle badge (Running, At Min, Paused, Error, etc.) | | **Strategy** | Repricing strategy applied to the rule (e.g. BuyBox, Competitive, MAP) | | **Last Update** | Description of the most recent action taken on the rule | | **Timestamp** | Relative time of the last action (e.g. "2 min ago") | | **Manage** | Action menu: edit, pause, restart, or delete the individual rule | {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro tip:** Click any column header to sort. Sorting by **Last Update** is the fastest way to find rules the engine just touched. {% endhint %} *** ## 🩺 Repricer Health Strip When one or more of your **active** repricers has silently stopped changing price, a **health strip** appears as a banner directly above the items table. It is your at-a-glance answer to the question *"why isn't this rule moving the price?"*, surfacing the two situations where a repricer is running but not actually adjusting anything. The strip only counts **active** rules (paused rules are ignored) and stays hidden when everything is healthy. It can flag two distinct states: ### 1. Issues (red, "needs attention") Hard problems that prevent a rule from repricing at all. A red exclamation icon summarises how many active repricers are affected. These cover: | Issue | What it means | | ------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Out of stock** | The listing has no inventory, so there is nothing to reprice. | | **Expired** | The rule passed its Expiry Date and auto-stopped. | | **Invalid seller** | The seller identifier the strategy depends on can't be resolved. | | **Invalid ASIN** | The product can't be matched on the marketplace (delisted, suppressed, or wrong region). | | **Strategy error** | The strategy hit an error and couldn't produce a price this cycle. | | **Price below min** | The competitive price the rule wants is below your Minimum Price floor, so the engine holds rather than sell at a loss. | ### 2. Threshold holds (amber) An amber hand icon summarises repricers that are **holding at their min/max threshold**. These aren't broken, the rule wants to move the price further but is pinned at the floor or ceiling you set. **Widening the price band (lower the Minimum Price or raise the Maximum Price) usually lets repricing resume.** {% hint style="info" icon="circle-info" %} **Why it matters.** A repricer can look "Running" while doing nothing, either because something is wrong (an issue) or because it has hit the edge of the band you gave it (a threshold hold). The health strip tells you which, so you know whether to fix a listing problem or simply give the rule more room. Click into the affected rules (use the [Status tabs](#4-status-tabs) and the Status column) to see exactly which products are involved. {% endhint %} {% hint style="info" %} **Dismissible.** Click the **×** on the strip to hide it for **24 hours**. It reappears after that if any active repricer is still in an issue or threshold-hold state, so a real problem won't stay buried. {% endhint %} *** ## 🔍 Search and Filters A toolbar above the items table lets you narrow the view further, on top of the active tab: | Filter | Options | | ------------- | ----------------------------------------------- | | **Search** | Free-text search by SKU, ASIN, or product title | | **Condition** | All conditions, New, Used | *** ## Bulk Operations Select multiple rows using checkboxes, then use the toolbar actions to operate on them in bulk: | Action | Description | | -------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------- | | **Bulk Import** | Import a CSV of repricer rules in one go | | **Export** | Download the current view as a CSV for offline analysis | | **Add New Repricer** | Create a new rule for a single ASIN | | **Delete All** | Remove every repricer rule (requires confirmation) | {% hint style="danger" %} **Warning:** Deleting a repricer rule is permanent. The rule's pricing boundaries, strategy, and history are removed. You will need to recreate it from the beginning. {% endhint %} *** ## Quota System Your subscription plan determines the number of products you can actively reprice. The dashboard surfaces: * Current usage versus your plan limit * An **Upgrade** link when you approach or exceed the quota *** ## 🆕 The v2 Overview dashboard {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Open this page in your dashboard:** [**Go to Repricer v2 Overview →**](https://dashboard.sellermagnet.com/repricer-v2) {% endhint %} The **v2 Overview** at `/repricer-v2` is a redesigned, monitoring-first command centre for the same repricers. It reads the same rules and the same live engine as the [classic v1 dashboard](#repricer-dashboard-classic-v1), but reorganises everything around one question: *who is winning the Buy Box, who needs attention, and why?* Creating, importing, and managing rules still happens on v1 - the v2 page deep-links you there when you need it. ### 1. Quota bar A slim quota bar sits at the very top. It shows a label with your current usage against your plan limit and a visual **track and fill** that grows as you use more of your allowance. When you approach or exceed the quota, an **Upgrade** call to action appears and links to your plan options. ### 2. Win-rate advisory strip When resellers are actively repricing but not winning the Buy Box, an amber **advisory strip** appears with a short summary and a **Review them** button. Clicking it filters the table down to exactly those rules so you can act on them immediately. The strip stays hidden when there is nothing to flag. ### 3. Strategy tabs Three tabs sit above the KPI tiles and split your fleet by strategy type. Each tab carries a live count badge: {% tabs %} {% tab title="All" %} Every repricer, regardless of strategy type. {% endtab %} {% tab title="Resellers" %} Rules using reseller strategies that compete for the Buy Box on shared listings. {% endtab %} {% tab title="Brand / PL" %} Brand Owner / Private Label rules that enforce your own pricing and do not compete for the Buy Box in the traditional sense. {% endtab %} {% endtabs %} {% hint style="info" icon="circle-info" %} **Active vs. Inactive is not a tab here.** Unlike v1, whether you are viewing Active or Inactive rules is a separate **State** toggle in the filter bar (see [Filter bar](#6-filter-bar)), not one of the tabs. {% endhint %} ### 4. KPI tiles Four clickable KPI tiles summarise live performance. **Each tile is a toggle: click it to filter the table below to just those rules** (click again to clear). | KPI tile | What it shows | Color | | ---------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------- | --------- | | **BuyBox Win Rate** | Share of competing rules currently winning the Buy Box | 🟢 Green | | **Not Winning BuyBox** | Rules actively repricing but a competitor holds the Buy Box | 🔴 Red | | **Needs Attention** | Rules with a blocking status or that have gone stale and need a look | 🟠 Amber | | **Brand / PL Active** | Active Brand Owner / Private Label rules | 🟣 Purple | ### 5. Insights & Diagnostics panel A collapsible **Insights & Diagnostics** panel gives you the "why" behind the KPI numbers. It has three parts: * **BuyBox Status Overview** - a donut chart with your overall **Win Rate** shown in the centre, plus a legend breaking down the Buy Box states. * **Strategy Breakdown** - a grid listing each strategy in use alongside its individual win rate, so you can see which strategies are pulling their weight. * **Diagnosis Panel** - a list of **12 clickable reason categories** that group your losing or stalled items by root cause. **Click a reason to filter the table to exactly those items.** The 12 diagnosis categories are: | Diagnosis | What it means | | ------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Outcompeted** | Losing on price to competitors | | **At Price Floor** | Cannot go lower - pinned at the min threshold | | **Out of Stock** | Product unavailable - repricing paused | | **Stale Data** | No update for 30+ days | | **Expired** | Past its expiry date - repricing stopped | | **No BuyBox** | BuyBox not available on the listing | | **Fee Error** | Price below minimum - review FBA fees | | **Zero Price** | Current price is zero - check fee settings | | **Amazon has the BuyBox** | Amazon sells this item, so the repricer holds instead of starting a price war | | **Non-Price Loss** | Lost for a non-price reason - lowering the price will not win it back | | **BuyBox Suppressed** | Amazon shows no BuyBox on this listing | | **Position Out of Reach** | Fewer competing offers than your target position | {% hint style="info" icon="lightbulb" %} **Tip:** Click a diagnosis item to filter the table by that reason. {% endhint %} ### 6. Filter bar A dedicated filter bar sits above the items table, on top of the active tab and any KPI or diagnosis filter: | Control | Options | | ----------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Search** | Free-text search by ASIN, SKU, or product name | | **Buy Box** pills | **Won**, **No BuyBox**, **Attention**, **Brand/PL** (each with a live count) | | **Fulfilment** | **All**, **FBA**, **FBM** | | **Condition** | **All**, **New**, **Used** | | **Marketplace** | A select listing only the marketplaces present in your data | | **State** | **Active** / **Inactive** toggle | Below the bar, a result summary shows how many items match, with a **removable chip for every active filter** and a **Clear filters** button to reset them all at once. ### 7. Bulk toolbar and table controls Select rows with the checkboxes to reveal the bulk toolbar: | Action | Description | | ---------------- | ----------------------------- | | **Start** | Start the selected repricers | | **Stop** | Stop the selected repricers | | **Delete** | Delete the selected repricers | | **Deselect All** | Clear your current selection | Alongside the toolbar, the table header carries a **Delete All** control (remove every rule, with confirmation), the **Export** and **Import CSV** buttons, a **New Repricer** button, and a **report-settings** control for repricer report delivery. The table footer offers **pagination** with a page-size selector (**10 / 25 / 50 / 100** per page), and several columns are **sortable** - click a column header to sort. {% hint style="danger" %} **Live actions.** Start, Stop, Delete, and Delete All run immediately against the live engine - there is no dry-run on this page. Deleting is permanent. {% endhint %} ### 8. Recent Activity A collapsible **Recent Activity** panel shows the latest engine events - price moves up or down, holds, and alerts, each tied to a SKU - so you can confirm the engine is actually working. A **refresh button** in the panel header reloads the feed on demand. ### 9. Items table The v2 table is streamlined to about **10 columns** - it drops the separate SKU, fulfilment, and timestamp columns from v1 in favour of a tighter layout: | Column | Description | | --------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Checkbox** | Bulk-select rows for batch actions | | **Product** | Product image and title | | **Marketplace** | The marketplace the rule runs in | | **Price** | Current live price (flagged when pinned at your floor or ceiling) | | **Min** | Minimum price boundary | | **Max** | Maximum price boundary | | **Strategy** | Repricing strategy applied to the rule | | **Status** | Live lifecycle status badge | | **Last Update** | Most recent engine update | | **Actions** | Row actions, including **Manage** | {% hint style="info" icon="arrow-up-right-from-square" %} **Create and manage still live in v1.** The **New Repricer** button, the **Import CSV** button, and each row's **Manage** action all open the [classic v1 page](#repricer-dashboard-classic-v1) with the right item preloaded - strategies, thresholds, and simulations are edited there. {% endhint %} ***
⚠️ Common Mistakes to Avoid | Mistake | Why It Hurts | | ----------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Setting min price below your breakeven cost | You sell at a loss every time the repricer hits the floor | | Setting min and max too close together | The repricer has no room to maneuver and effectively becomes static | | Ignoring the **Running (Not Won)** tab | Opportunities to win the Buy Box go unnoticed | | Never checking the Latest Activity log | You miss patterns like repeated price-floor hits that signal margin erosion | | Running reseller strategies on private-label products | Reseller strategies compete on price; brand owners should protect price |
\## ✅ Best Practices 1. **Check the Running (Not Won) tab daily:** This is where the highest-impact opportunities live. If a rule has been stuck here for days, revisit its strategy or min price. 2. **Set meaningful price boundaries:** Your min price should be your breakeven point plus a target margin buffer. Your max price should be the highest realistic selling price for the product. 3. **Use the correct strategy type:** Reseller strategies for arbitrage/wholesale items; Brand-PL strategies for your own brands. 4. **Monitor the Buy Box Secured count over time:** A steadily declining count means competitors are becoming more aggressive. Consider adjusting strategy parameters. 5. **Use bulk operations:** When onboarding a new product batch, use bulk import and bulk start to activate all repricers simultaneously rather than one by one. *** ## ❓ FAQ
How often does the repricer adjust prices? The repricer checks for competitor changes continuously and can adjust prices multiple times per hour, depending on market activity and your subscription plan.
Will the repricer ever price below my minimum? No. The minimum price is an absolute floor. The repricer will never set a price below this value, even if it means losing the Buy Box.
Can I reprice items on multiple marketplaces simultaneously? Yes. Each marketplace-ASIN combination is treated as a separate repricer rule. You can set different strategies and price boundaries for the same product on different marketplaces.
What happens when I pause a repricer? The price freezes at its current value. No further adjustments are made until you restart the repricer.
Does the repricer work for used-condition items? Yes. You can filter by condition (New or Used) and apply strategies to either condition type.
How do I know if a repricer rule has an issue? Open the **Running (Not Won)** tab and sort by Last Update, or scan the Latest Activity log for amber and red events. The Status column also shows badges like "At Min" or "Error" directly on each row.
*** ## ➡️ What's Next? {% content-ref url="/pages/6sVGaSbwf2ZlveqmyIv8" %} [Repricing Strategies Overview](/selling-tools/repricer-overview/repricing-strategies-overview) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/OeeKq8tIohsSPfiBCG9n" %} [Create & Manage Repricer Rules](/selling-tools/repricer-overview/create-manage-repricer) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/zJrCphqOzHu0nrPPPgg8" %} [Brand Owner Strategies](/selling-tools/repricer-overview/brand-owner-strategies) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/NvEtzIFWDQ7SVD8PBWWz" %} [Reseller Strategies](/selling-tools/repricer-overview/reseller-strategies) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/ah4LUECyGIwK6TWsSp4u" %} [Bulk Import & Export](/selling-tools/repricer-overview/bulk-import-export) {% endcontent-ref %} # Repricing Strategies Overview Understand every repricing strategy available in SellerMagnet, how each one works, when to use it, and how to choose the right strategy for your business model. {% hint style="info" %} **Difficulty:** 🟡 Intermediate · **Reading time:** \~10 min {% endhint %} ## 📋 Overview A **repricing strategy** defines the logic the SellerMagnet Repricer uses to calculate your optimal price. Different business models require different approaches, a wholesale reseller competing for the Buy Box has fundamentally different needs than a brand owner protecting MAP (Minimum Advertised Price) pricing. SellerMagnet offers two categories of strategies, each containing multiple presets. This guide explains every strategy, its parameters, and when to use it. *** ## Strategy Categories {% hint style="success" %} **Not sure which strategy?** Brand owners → use **BrandGuard** or **Competitor ASIN-BuyBox Sync**. Resellers → start with **BuyBox** for a balanced default. Only use **Lowest Price** for clearance inventory. {% endhint %} | Category | Target Seller Type | Primary Goal | | -------------- | ------------------------------------------ | ------------------------------------------------- | | **Reseller** | Wholesale, arbitrage, and dropship sellers | Win the Buy Box at the highest profitable price | | **Brand / PL** | Brand owners, private-label sellers | Protect brand value and control pricing stability | *** ## How the Repricer Chooses a Price Regardless of strategy, the repricer follows this flow: {% stepper %} {% step %} ### Fetch competitor data Current Buy Box holder, all active offers, fulfillment types {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Apply strategy logic Calculate the target price based on the chosen strategy's rules {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Enforce boundaries Clamp the target price between your min and max price {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Submit price update Push the new price to Amazon via the Selling Partner API {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Log the action Record the price change, reason, and timestamp in the Activity Log {% endstep %} {% endstepper %} {% hint style="info" %} **Key principle:** The repricer will never set a price outside your min/max boundaries, regardless of what the strategy logic calculates. Your price boundaries are the ultimate safeguard. {% endhint %} {% hint style="info" %} **Min Margin vs Minimum Price.** Both act as a price floor, and the repricer always enforces **whichever one is higher** - margins take priority. Example: if your Min Margin works out to EUR 42.00 but your Minimum Price is EUR 39.90, the effective floor is **EUR 42.00**. {% endhint %} *** ## Worked Example: How a Price Is Calculated The five steps above are easier to follow with concrete numbers. This walkthrough uses the **BuyBox** strategy. All figures are **illustrative examples**, not live data, they simply show how one repricing cycle flows from competitor data to a submitted price. **Setup for this example:** | Input | Example value | | ---------------------------------- | ------------- | | Competitor Buy Box price | EUR 24.50 | | Your current price | EUR 27.00 | | Your Minimum Price (floor) | EUR 21.00 | | Your Maximum Price (ceiling) | EUR 29.90 | | Do you currently hold the Buy Box? | No | {% stepper %} {% step %} ### Fetch competitor data The repricer reads the listing and finds the current Buy Box holder at **EUR 24.50**, plus all other active offers and their fulfillment types. It also sees that you do **not** currently hold the Buy Box at your EUR 27.00 price. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Apply strategy logic Because the Buy Box is not won, the BuyBox strategy **gradually lowers** your price to become competitive (once you win it, the same strategy would carefully raise your price instead). It computes a target just below the current Buy Box price: **EUR 24.49**. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Enforce boundaries The repricer clamps the target between your Min and Max. **EUR 24.49** sits inside your EUR 21.00 - EUR 29.90 range, so no clamp is needed and the target passes through unchanged. The clamp only engages at the edges. For example, if the competitor had instead dropped to EUR 20.40, the computed target of EUR 20.39 would fall **below** your EUR 21.00 floor, so the repricer would clamp it up to **EUR 21.00** and stop lowering, your boundaries always win over the strategy logic. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Submit price update The repricer pushes the final price, **EUR 24.49**, to Amazon via the Selling Partner API. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Log the action The change from EUR 27.00 to EUR 24.49 is recorded in the Activity Log with its reason (Buy Box not held, lowering to compete) and a timestamp, so you can audit every move later. {% endstep %} {% endstepper %} {% hint style="info" %} **Read the numbers as an example only.** Your real target depends on your live competitor prices, your configured Min/Max, and any Min Margin floor. The flow, compute target then clamp to your boundaries, is always the same. {% endhint %} *** ## Reseller Strategies These strategies are designed for sellers competing on shared listings where multiple sellers offer the same product. ### 1. Lowest Price | Parameter | Value | | -------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Goal** | Always be the cheapest offer on the listing | | **Logic** | Scans all active offers, identifies the lowest competitor price, and sets yours just below it within your min/max boundaries | | **Best for** | Clearance inventory, seasonal products, or fast-moving commodity items where volume matters most | | **Risk level** | High: can trigger price wars. SellerMagnet's guardrails ensure you never drop below your minimum profit margin | ### 2. BuyBox | Parameter | Value | | -------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Goal** | Win and hold the Buy Box at the highest profitable price | | **Logic** | If BuyBox not won, gradually lowers price. Once secured, carefully increases price to improve margins while maintaining BuyBox ownership | | **Best for** | FBA sellers or sellers with strong performance metrics where BuyBox share drives the majority of sales | | **Risk level** | Medium: balanced approach between competitiveness and margin protection | ### 3. Position | Parameter | Value | | -------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | | **Goal** | Maintain a specific price ranking position (e.g., 2nd or 3rd lowest) among all sellers | | **Logic** | Monitors all competitor prices and dynamically adjusts to stay in your chosen position | | **Best for** | Listings where Amazon or major sellers dominate. Position 2 ensures you win BuyBox once their stock depletes | | **Risk level** | Low: maintains healthy margins while being strategically positioned | ### 4. Same Price | Parameter | Value | | -------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Goal** | Mirror a specific competitor's price exactly | | **Logic** | You select a competitor's Seller ID. The repricer monitors their price and automatically matches it, within your safety limits | | **Best for** | Enforcing MAP or maintaining partner price consistency. When your seller metrics are superior, you win BuyBox at identical pricing | | **Risk level** | Low: price stability with strategic advantage from better seller metrics | *** ## Brand Owner / Private Label Strategies These strategies are designed for sellers who own the brand or listing and want to control pricing rather than compete on it. ### 5. BrandGuard | Parameter | Value | | -------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Goal** | Protect brand pricing by adjusting dynamically based on sales velocity, inventory levels, and competitor ASINs | | **Logic** | Low inventory + healthy demand: increase price. High inventory + weak demand: decrease price. Competitor median available: align near median. Per-cycle change cap prevents sharp swings | | **Best for** | Brand owners who are the only authorized seller on a listing and want pricing responsive to demand/stock signals | | **Risk level** | Very low: controlled, data-driven adjustments within min/max guardrails | ### 6. Competitor ASIN-BuyBox Sync | Parameter | Value | | -------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Goal** | Synchronize your price with the BuyBox price of a target competitor ASIN, adjusted by a multiplier | | **Logic** | Fetches competitor BuyBox price, applies your price\_adjustment\_factor (e.g., 0.99 = just below, 1.00 = match, 1.05 = above), respects min/max guardrails | | **Best for** | Aligning with a market reference price across similar ASINs, managing bundles or variations tied to a leading offer | | **Risk level** | Low: predictable, formula-based pricing | ### 7. Velocity Balance | Parameter | Value | | -------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Goal** | Find the best price/velocity balance from your own demand signal, with no competitor required | | **Logic** | Measures recent sales velocity (units/day) over your window. Velocity above the upper threshold → raise price by one step; below the lower threshold → lower price by one step; inside the band → hold. All moves stay within min/max | | **Best for** | Brand owners with no clear competitor ASIN who want gradual, predictable, demand-driven pricing | | **Risk level** | Low: small, capped step changes within your guardrails | *** ## Strategy Comparison Table | Strategy | Buy Box Focus | Margin Priority | Price Stability | Best For | | --------------------------- | ------------- | --------------- | --------------- | ---------------------------------------- | | Lowest Price | Medium | Low | Low | Liquidation, clearance | | BuyBox | High | Medium | Low | Volume resellers | | Position | Medium | High | Medium | Strategic positioning | | Same Price | Medium | High | High | MAP enforcement, price parity | | BrandGuard | Low | High | High | Brand owners, demand-driven pricing | | Competitor ASIN-BuyBox Sync | Low | High | High | Market reference alignment | | Velocity Balance | Low | High | High | Demand-driven pricing with no competitor | *** ## Choosing the Right Strategy Use this decision tree: 1. **Are you the brand owner?** * Yes -> Use a Brand / PL strategy * Want demand-driven pricing based on velocity and stock? -> **BrandGuard** * Want to sync with a competitor ASIN's BuyBox? -> **Competitor ASIN-BuyBox Sync** * Have no competitor ASIN and want pricing driven purely by your own sales rate? -> **Velocity Balance** * No -> Use a Reseller strategy * Need maximum Buy Box share? -> **BuyBox** * Want to hold a specific price position? -> **Position** * Need to match a specific seller's price? -> **Same Price** * Need to clear inventory fast? -> **Lowest Price** {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro tip:** You can assign different strategies to different products in your catalog. Use BuyBox for your top sellers where volume matters, and Position for your long-tail products where margin matters more. {% endhint %} *** ## Strategy Performance Metrics After activating a strategy, monitor its effectiveness using the dashboard: | Metric | Where to Find It | What It Tells You | | ------------------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Win Rate** | BuyBox Win Rate KPI tile + Insights donut (v2 Overview) | Percentage of time you hold the Buy Box | | **Strategy Breakdown** | Insights & Diagnostics panel, win rate per strategy (v2 Overview) | Win rate broken down by strategy type | | **Diagnosis categories** | Diagnosis Panel (v2 Overview) | Groups every item that is not winning into 12 reason categories (e.g. At Price Floor, Outcompeted, Out of Stock, No BuyBox), so you can see why | | **Average Price Change** | Activity Log analysis | Magnitude of typical price adjustments | The Insights donut, per-strategy win rate, and Diagnosis Panel all live on the **v2 Overview dashboard**, not the classic v1 page, see [The v2 Overview dashboard](/selling-tools/repricer-overview#the-v2-overview-dashboard) for where they sit. The **Diagnosis Panel groups the items that are not winning into 12 reason categories** (Outcompeted, At Price Floor, Out of Stock, Stale Data, and so on), where **At Price Floor** is the category for items pinned at your minimum threshold. There is no separate floor-hit or ceiling-hit counter, click any diagnosis row to filter the table to exactly those items. ***
⚠️ Common Mistakes to Avoid | Mistake | Why It Hurts | | ------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Using BuyBox on a listing where you are the only seller | You unnecessarily lower your own price | | Using BrandGuard on listings with many unauthorized resellers | BrandGuard adjusts based on your stock/velocity; it cannot fight unauthorized sellers | | Never switching strategies when market conditions change | A strategy that worked at launch may not work 6 months later | | Using Lowest Price as your default strategy | You race to the bottom and erode margins across your catalog | | Ignoring the Strategy Breakdown in Insights | You miss underperforming strategies that need adjustment |
\## ✅ Best Practices 1. **Start with BuyBox for most products:** It balances Buy Box competitiveness with margin protection. Use Lowest Price only for products where you need to clear inventory quickly. 2. **Review strategy performance weekly:** The Strategy Breakdown grid shows win rates by strategy. Switch underperformers. 3. **Align strategy with product lifecycle:** New launches may need aggressive pricing (Lowest Price), established products can shift to BuyBox, and end-of-life inventory should use Lowest Price for liquidation. 4. **Use Brand strategies for your own products:** Even if you are the only seller now, Brand strategies protect you when unauthorized sellers appear. 5. **Document your strategy choices:** Keep a spreadsheet mapping each ASIN (Amazon Standard Identification Number) to its strategy and the rationale. This helps team members understand decisions and speeds up quarterly reviews. *** ## ❓ FAQ
Can I switch strategies without deleting the repricer? Yes. Edit the repricer rule and select a different strategy. The change takes effect immediately.
Do different strategies have different speeds? All strategies operate on the same repricing cycle. The difference is in the logic used to calculate the target price, not the frequency of checks.
Can I customize the parameters within a strategy (e.g., undercut amount)? Yes. Most strategies accept configuration parameters like undercut amount, position number, or price adjustment factor. These are set during rule creation in the wizard.
What happens if two of my own ASINs compete with each other? If you have multiple SKUs on the same listing (e.g., different conditions), each repricer rule operates independently. They may compete against each other. To avoid this, coordinate your min/max prices.
Is there an "automatic" strategy that chooses the best approach? Not currently. Strategy selection is manual because the optimal approach depends on business context that only you know, margins, inventory levels, brand positioning, and competitive dynamics.
*** ## ➡️ What's Next? {% content-ref url="/pages/NvEtzIFWDQ7SVD8PBWWz" %} [Reseller Strategies](/selling-tools/repricer-overview/reseller-strategies) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/zJrCphqOzHu0nrPPPgg8" %} [Brand Owner Strategies](/selling-tools/repricer-overview/brand-owner-strategies) {% endcontent-ref %} # Reseller Strategies Master repricing strategies for Amazon resellers. Buy Box winning, competitive Position, Same Price, and liquidation tactics with real-world examples. {% hint style="info" %} **Difficulty:** 🟡 Intermediate · **Reading time:** \~10 min {% endhint %} ## 📋 Overview Reseller strategies are designed for sellers who compete on shared Amazon listings, wholesale sellers, online-arbitrage sellers, and dropshippers who do not own the brand. The primary goal is to win the Buy Box as often as possible while maintaining profitable margins. This guide covers each reseller strategy in depth, with configuration advice, realistic scenarios, and performance benchmarks. *** ## The Buy Box: Why It Matters Over **80% of Amazon sales** go through the Buy Box (the "Add to Cart" button). If you are not the Buy Box winner, your sales drop dramatically. Factors Amazon considers for Buy Box eligibility: | Factor | Impact | Notes | | ---------------------- | --------- | -------------------------------------------------------- | | **Price** | Very High | Competitive price is the strongest single factor | | **Fulfillment method** | High | FBA sellers get a significant advantage over FBM | | **Seller metrics** | High | Order Defect Rate, Late Shipment Rate, Cancellation Rate | | **Stock availability** | Medium | Consistent stock improves Buy Box allocation | | **Seller account age** | Low | Minor advantage for established sellers | {% hint style="info" %} **Key insight:** Price is necessary but not sufficient. A seller with excellent metrics at a slightly higher price often beats a lower-priced seller with poor metrics. The repricer optimizes price; you must maintain your seller health metrics separately. {% endhint %} *** {% tabs %} {% tab title="Lowest Price" %} ### How It Works The Lowest Price strategy ensures your price is always the cheapest offer on the listing. It scans all active offers, identifies the lowest competitor price, and sets yours just below it. **Algorithm logic:** 1. Find the absolute lowest price across all active offers (FBA and FBM) 2. Undercut by the configured amount (respecting min/max boundaries) 3. If you are already the cheapest -> hold position 4. If you are the only seller -> price at your max price ### Configuration Parameters Lowest Price has **no strategy-specific fields of its own** in the create modal. It is driven entirely by the **Min/Max price and margins** you set on the Pricing Rules card. The engine undercuts the current lowest offer by a small increment and, once you are the cheapest, eases your price back up within your boundaries, that undercut-and-climb behaviour is built into the engine, not a value you enter. {% hint style="danger" %} **Warning:** Competing head-to-head with Amazon Retail is rarely successful. Amazon holds the Buy Box over 90% of the time when present. On listings where Amazon is the featured seller, expect little Buy Box time no matter how low you price. {% endhint %} ### Realistic Example **Product:** Wireless Bluetooth earbuds (ASIN: B08XYZ1234) on Amazon.de **Your cost:** EUR 18.00 | **Min price:** EUR 26.99 | **Max price:** EUR 39.99 | Time | Buy Box Holder | Buy Box Price | Your Price | Action | | ----- | -------------- | ------------- | ---------- | --------------------------- | | 09:00 | Competitor A | EUR 32.99 | EUR 34.99 | Undercut to EUR 32.98 | | 09:15 | You | EUR 32.98 | EUR 32.98 | Win! Increment to EUR 33.08 | | 09:30 | You | EUR 33.08 | EUR 33.08 | Win! Increment to EUR 33.18 | | 10:00 | Competitor B | EUR 31.50 | EUR 33.18 | Undercut to EUR 31.49 | | 10:15 | You | EUR 31.49 | EUR 31.49 | Win! Begin incrementing | The strategy continuously fights for the Buy Box while slowly raising your price when you are winning, maximizing profit per unit. ### When to Use * High-volume products (50+ units/month) * Listings with 3-10 competing sellers * Products where you have competitive landed costs * Products where Buy Box share directly correlates with sales volume ### When to Avoid * Listings with Amazon Retail as a seller * Products with very thin margins (under 10%) * Your own brand's products (use Brand strategies instead) {% endtab %} {% tab title="BuyBox" %} ### How It Works The BuyBox strategy focuses on winning and holding the Buy Box at the highest profitable price. It analyses all competitor metrics and dynamically adjusts pricing based on whether you currently hold the Buy Box. **Algorithm logic:** 1. If you do not hold the Buy Box -> gradually lower price to become competitive 2. If you hold the Buy Box -> carefully increase price to improve margins while retaining BuyBox 3. Monitor competitor count and fulfillment type 4. If you are the only seller -> price at your max price ### Configuration Parameters BuyBox has **no strategy-specific fields of its own** in the create modal. It competes using the **Min/Max price and margins** you set on the Pricing Rules card. The behaviours below are **engine behavior, not settings** you enter: | Behaviour | Engine behavior, not a setting | | ---------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Staying near the Buy Box | The engine keeps your price close to the Buy Box rather than undercutting deeply | | Not lowering past your floor | The engine stops lowering at your Min Margin / Minimum Price, whichever is higher | | Not chasing fleeting moves | The engine holds briefly before reacting to a competitor's price change, rather than chasing every micro-move | The one exception is the suppressed-Buy-Box handling below, which **does** expose a real choice, and a **Step size per check (%)** field, when you pick the "step price down" option. ### Realistic Example **Product:** Stainless steel water bottle on Amazon.co.uk **Your cost:** GBP 6.00 | **Min price:** GBP 12.99 | **Max price:** GBP 19.99 Current Buy Box: GBP 15.49. Competitive zone (2%): GBP 15.18 - GBP 15.80. The repricer sets your price at GBP 15.75 (upper end of the competitive zone). You win the Buy Box about 30% of the time, but your per-unit profit is GBP 1.26 higher than if you had used Lowest Price. Over 100 units: Lowest Price might sell 70 units at lower margin; BuyBox might sell 45 units at higher margin. The total profit could be similar, but with less risk of margin erosion. ### When to Use * Products with moderate competition (5-15 sellers) * Long-tail products where steady sales matter more than volume * When your seller metrics give you a Buy Box advantage at slightly higher prices * Products you plan to sell over a long period (12+ months) ### Handling a suppressed Buy Box Sometimes Amazon shows **no Buy Box at all** on a listing - the page reads "See All Buying Options" instead of a featured offer. This usually happens when the featured price is above the price Amazon expects for the product. The BuyBox strategy lets you choose how the repricer reacts, under **Strategy options → When the Buy Box is suppressed**: | Option | What the repricer does | | --------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Hold price (default)** | Keep your price and simply report the suppressed state. Nothing is changed. | | **Step price down until the Buy Box returns** | Lower your price by a small step on each repricer check until the Buy Box reappears. Choosing this reveals a **Step size per check (%)** field (0.1-10%, default 1%). | | **Match the lowest competitor offer** | Move your price to the current lowest offer on the listing. | | **Go straight to minimum price** | Drop to your minimum price in a single move. | {% hint style="warning" %} Every suppressed-Buy-Box action stops at **your minimum price** - the repricer never prices below the floor you set, even while chasing the Buy Box back. If you're unsure, leave it on **Hold price**: you'll still see the suppressed state reported in the activity log, with no automatic price change. {% endhint %} {% endtab %} {% tab title="Position" %} ### How It Works The Position strategy maintains your price at a specific ranking position (e.g., 2nd or 3rd lowest) among all sellers on the listing. **Algorithm logic:** 1. Scan all active offers and rank them by price 2. Identify the price at your target position (e.g., position 2) 3. Set your price at or just below that position's price 4. If competitors change, automatically re-rank and re-adjust ### Configuration Parameters | Parameter | Default | Description | | ------------ | ------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Position** | 1 | The price ranking position to hold (1 = cheapest). Integer, minimum 1 | Position is the strategy's **only** field. There is no separate FBM toggle, how the engine ranks the offers is engine behavior, not a setting. {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Pro tip:** Position 2 is a popular choice. Amazon or major sellers often dominate Position 1, but their stock runs out regularly. When it does, Position 2 automatically wins the BuyBox. {% endhint %} ### When to Use * Listings where Amazon Retail or major resellers dominate Position 1 * Products where being 2nd or 3rd cheapest still wins BuyBox due to your seller metrics * Long-tail products where steady presence matters more than being the cheapest * Listings with many sellers where holding a specific position is more strategic ### When to Avoid * Products with very few competitors (Position strategy has limited benefit) * Listings where all sellers are within a narrow price range * Products where you must be the absolute cheapest to sell {% endtab %} {% tab title="Same Price" %} ### How It Works The Same Price strategy mirrors the price of a specific competitor you select by their Seller ID. This is ideal when your seller metrics or fulfillment advantage means you win the BuyBox at equal pricing. **Algorithm logic:** 1. Monitor the target competitor's price (identified by Seller ID) 2. Match their price exactly (within your min/max boundaries) 3. Rely on your superior seller metrics or FBA advantage to win the BuyBox ### Configuration Parameters | Parameter | Default | Description | | ------------- | -------- | ------------------------------------------------ | | **Seller ID** | Required | The Amazon Seller ID of the competitor to mirror | Seller ID is the strategy's **only** field. When the target seller is out of stock the engine falls back within your Min/Max boundaries, that fallback is engine behavior, not a setting you enter. ### Realistic Example **Product:** Yoga mat on Amazon.de **Target Seller ID:** A1B2C3D4E5F6G7 (your main competitor) | Time | Target Seller Price | Your Price | Action | | ----- | ------------------- | ---------- | ------------------------------------- | | 09:00 | EUR 24.99 | EUR 24.99 | Matched | | 12:00 | EUR 22.99 | EUR 22.99 | Matched (above your min of EUR 19.00) | | 15:00 | EUR 17.99 | EUR 19.00 | Held at min (target below your floor) | | 18:00 | Out of stock | EUR 29.99 | Fallback to max price | Because you have better seller metrics (higher feedback score, FBA fulfillment), you win the Buy Box at the same price as your competitor. ### When to Use * You want to enforce MAP directly by matching a known authorized seller * Your seller metrics or FBA status give you a BuyBox advantage at equal pricing * You want predictable, stable pricing tied to a specific reference seller {% endtab %} {% endtabs %} *** ## Choosing the Right Strategy | If you need... | Use... | | ---------------------------------------------- | ---------------- | | Absolute cheapest price to move inventory fast | **Lowest Price** | | Win and hold Buy Box at the best margin | **BuyBox** | | Strategic positioning (e.g., 2nd cheapest) | **Position** | | Match a specific competitor's price | **Same Price** | {% hint style="info" icon="circle-info" %} **Note:** Your actual results depend on your product mix, competition level, seller metrics, and pricing boundaries. Monitor the Insights panel regularly to evaluate strategy performance. {% endhint %} ***
⚠️ Common Mistakes to Avoid | Mistake | Why It Hurts | | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Using Lowest Price on every product | Not every product needs aggressive pricing; some need margin focus | | Trying to out-price Amazon Retail on listings where it is the featured seller | You waste effort fighting a battle you almost never win | | Never reviewing performance by strategy | You miss that a specific strategy is underperforming | | Using Lowest Price for your entire catalog | Catastrophic margin erosion across the board | | Not using Same Price when a single competitor dominates | You miss the advantage of price parity combined with superior seller metrics |
\## ✅ Best Practices 1. **Segment your catalog by strategy:** Group products by competitive dynamics and assign the appropriate strategy to each group. 2. **Use BuyBox for your top 20% of products:** These drive the most revenue and benefit most from maximum Buy Box share. 3. **Use Position or Same Price for the remaining 80%:** Protect margins on long-tail products where strategic positioning matters more than being the cheapest. 4. **Reserve Lowest Price for time-sensitive inventory:** Only use it when you have a deadline to clear stock. 5. **Monitor the Insights panel weekly:** The Strategy Breakdown grid tells you which strategies are delivering and which need adjustment. *** ## ❓ FAQ
Can I use different strategies for the same product on different marketplaces? Yes. Each marketplace has its own repricer rule with independent strategy selection.
How does the repricer handle sellers who change price rapidly? The repricer detects changes on each cycle and responds accordingly. It does not chase every micro-change, the engine's built-in patience before reacting prevents unnecessary adjustments.
What if all competitors go out of stock? Most strategies price at your maximum price when no competitors exist. This maximizes profit while stock is scarce.
Does the repricer consider shipping costs in competitor prices? Yes. The repricer compares total landed prices (item price + shipping) for FBM offers, and item prices for FBA offers (where shipping is included).
Can the repricer handle price wars automatically? Yes, within your boundaries. If competitors keep undercutting, the repricer follows until it hits your minimum price. At that point, it stops and logs a "Price at minimum" diagnosis.
*** ## ➡️ What's Next? {% content-ref url="/pages/zJrCphqOzHu0nrPPPgg8" %} [Brand Owner Strategies](/selling-tools/repricer-overview/brand-owner-strategies) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/OeeKq8tIohsSPfiBCG9n" %} [Create & Manage Repricer Rules](/selling-tools/repricer-overview/create-manage-repricer) {% endcontent-ref %} # Brand Owner Strategies Protect your brand's pricing integrity on Amazon with BrandGuard, Competitor ASIN-BuyBox Sync, and Velocity Balance strategies designed for brand owners and private-label sellers. {% hint style="info" %} **Difficulty:** 🟡 Intermediate · **Reading time:** \~10 min {% endhint %} ## 📋 Overview Brand Owner strategies are purpose-built for sellers who own the product brand or sell under a private label. Unlike reseller strategies that optimize for Buy Box competitiveness, brand owner strategies prioritize **pricing stability, brand perception, and policy enforcement**. If you sell products under your own brand name, these strategies help you control how your products are priced on Amazon, even when unauthorized third-party sellers appear on your listings. *** ## Why Brand Owners Need Different Strategies {% columns %} {% column %} #### Reseller Concern * Win the Buy Box at the lowest price * Beat competitor prices * Maximize sales volume * React to price changes quickly {% endcolumn %} {% column %} #### Brand Owner Concern * Maintain price consistency across all channels * Prevent unauthorized sellers from undercutting * Protect brand perception and perceived value * Minimize price fluctuations that confuse customers {% endcolumn %} {% endcolumns %} Brand owners face unique challenges: * **Unauthorized sellers** listing your product at discounted prices * **Channel conflict** when Amazon prices undercut your retail partners * **Brand erosion** from frequent price changes that make your product look cheap * **MAP violations** by third-party sellers who break your pricing agreements *** {% tabs %} {% tab title="BrandGuard" %} ### How It Works **BrandGuard** protects your brand pricing by adjusting dynamically based on sales velocity, inventory levels, and competitor ASINs, while always respecting your min/max thresholds. **Algorithm logic:** 1. Fetch current status and confirm listing is active 2. Calculate sales velocity (units/day over your defined lookback period) 3. Read available stock for the marketplace 4. Retrieve lowest offers for up to 5 competitor ASINs and compute median competitor price 5. Apply target price logic: low inventory + healthy demand → increase price; high inventory + weak demand → decrease price; competitor median available → align near median 6. Per-cycle price change is constrained to avoid sharp swings 7. Validate and apply within min/max thresholds ### Configuration Parameters | Parameter | Default | Description | | --------------------------------------------- | -------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Competitor ASINs** | None | Up to 5 similar products to use as market reference | | **Sales velocity period** | 7 days | Lookback period for calculating units/day | | **Low Stock** | 10 | Editable numeric field. Stock at or below this level counts as low, low stock plus healthy demand pushes the price up | | **High Stock** | 50 | Editable numeric field. Stock at or above this level counts as high, high stock plus weak demand eases the price down | | **Reduce price when the item is not selling** | Off | Per-rule checkbox. When ON and no competitor ASIN is set, the price steps down toward your minimum if the item has had zero sales over the sales velocity period. Leave it off and BrandGuard only marks down to undercut a competitor ASIN or to clear overstock. Enable it when you are the brand owner with no competitor ASIN and still want slow-moving stock to ease down toward your floor. | | **Min/Max price** | Required | Hard guardrails the repricer never breaches | ### Realistic Example **Product:** Premium organic face cream (your brand) on Amazon.de **Min:** EUR 29.99 | **Max:** EUR 34.99 | **Velocity period:** 7 days | Scenario | Stock | Sales Velocity | Competitor Median | Action | | ----------------------------- | --------- | -------------- | ----------------- | --------------------------------- | | High demand, low stock | 50 units | 12/day | EUR 31.50 | Increase price toward max | | Moderate demand, normal stock | 200 units | 5/day | EUR 31.50 | Align near competitor median | | Low demand, excess stock | 500 units | 2/day | EUR 30.00 | Decrease price toward min | | No competitors tracked | 200 units | 5/day | N/A | Adjust based on demand/stock only | {% hint style="danger" icon="shield" %} **Note:** BrandGuard protects your pricing but does not remove unauthorized sellers. Combine this strategy with Amazon Brand Registry enforcement actions to address unauthorized sellers at the source. {% endhint %} ### When to Use * You are the brand owner and sole authorized seller on your listings * You want pricing that responds automatically to demand and stock levels * You sell products where market reference pricing from competitor ASINs is helpful * You want controlled, data-driven price adjustments rather than competitor-reactive repricing {% endtab %} {% tab title="Competitor ASIN-BuyBox Sync" %} ### How It Works The **Competitor ASIN-BuyBox Sync** strategy synchronizes your price with the BuyBox price of a target competitor ASIN, adjusted by a multiplier you control. Ideal for mirroring market-leading offers on comparable products. **Algorithm logic:** 1. Fetch your current price and confirm listing is active 2. Get the BuyBox price for the competitor ASIN you provided 3. Compute target price: competitor BuyBox × price\_adjustment\_factor (e.g., 0.99 for just below, 1.00 to match, 1.05 to go above) 4. Change sensitivity: if the target price differs by less than EUR 0.01, no change is applied 5. Guardrails: new price must stay between your min/max thresholds ### Configuration Parameters | Parameter | Default | Description | | --------------------------- | -------- | ------------------------------------------------------------ | | **Competitor ASIN** | Required | The ASIN whose BuyBox price you want to track | | **Price adjustment factor** | 1.00 | Multiplier applied to competitor BuyBox price (0.50 to 1.50) | | **Min Price** | Required | Absolute floor price | | **Max Price** | Required | Absolute ceiling price | ### Realistic Example **Product:** Branded supplement on Amazon.de **Competitor ASIN BuyBox:** EUR 24.50 | **Factor:** 0.99 | **Min:** EUR 20.00 | **Max:** EUR 30.00 | Scenario | Competitor BuyBox | Your Target | Result | | ----------------------- | ----------------- | ----------- | ------------------------------------- | | Normal pricing | EUR 24.50 | EUR 24.26 | Price updated | | Competitor price drops | EUR 21.00 | EUR 20.79 | Price updated | | Competitor out of stock | No BuyBox | No change | Logged as NO\_BUYBOX, price unchanged | | Target below your min | EUR 18.00 | EUR 17.82 | Held at EUR 20.00 (min floor) | | Target above your max | EUR 35.00 | EUR 34.65 | Held at EUR 30.00 (max ceiling) | ### When to Use * You want to align with a clear market reference price across similar ASINs * Managing bundles or variations tied to a leading offer * You want predictable, formula-based pricing * You track a specific competitor product and want your pricing to follow theirs {% endtab %} {% tab title="Velocity Balance" %} ### How It Works **Velocity Balance** is demand-based pricing that needs **no competitor** at all. It reads your own recent sales rate (velocity) and nudges the price in small steps: it raises the price while demand stays healthy, and eases it back down when sales slow. Over successive cycles it converges on the price that balances your margin against your sell-through, always within your min/max guardrails. Use it when you are the brand owner, have no clear competitor ASIN to anchor to, and want pricing driven purely by your own demand signal with gradual, predictable moves. **Algorithm logic:** 1. Fetch your current price and confirm the listing is active 2. Calculate recent sales velocity (units/day) over the **measure window** you set 3. Compare velocity to your target band: * Velocity **above** the upper threshold (demand is healthy) → raise the price by one **price step** * Velocity **below** the lower threshold (demand has softened) → lower the price by one price step * Velocity **inside** the band → hold the price, balancing margin against velocity 4. Apply the move within your min/max thresholds - the price never breaches your guardrails {% hint style="info" %} **No competitor required.** Unlike BrandGuard (which also reads inventory and competitor ASINs) and Competitor ASIN-BuyBox Sync (which mirrors a single competitor ASIN), Velocity Balance is driven entirely by your own sales rate. It is the right choice when there is no competitor to reference. {% endhint %} ### Configuration Parameters | Parameter | Default | Description | | --------------------------------- | -------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Measure window (days)** | 14 | Lookback period used to calculate your recent sales velocity (units/day). For slow-moving products, widen this to 21-30 days to smooth day-to-day variance | | **Price step (%)** | 3% | How much the price moves per cycle when velocity is outside the band | | **Lower price below (units/day)** | 0.3 | Velocity threshold under which the price eases down to rebuild demand | | **Raise price above (units/day)** | 1.0 | Velocity threshold over which the price is pushed up while demand stays healthy | | **Min/Max price** | Required | Hard guardrails the repricer never breaches | {% hint style="info" %} The lower threshold must be less than or equal to the upper threshold. Between the two values is your "hold" band, where the price stays put and the strategy is content with the current price/velocity balance. {% endhint %} ### Realistic Example **Product:** Branded reusable water bottle (your brand) on Amazon.de **Min:** EUR 18.00 | **Max:** EUR 26.00 | **Window:** 14 days | **Step:** 3% | **Lower:** 0.3/day | **Upper:** 1.0/day | Scenario | Recent Velocity | Action | | ------------------------------ | --------------- | ------------------------------------------------- | | Strong demand | 1.8 units/day | Above the band → raise price \~3% toward max | | Healthy, steady demand | 0.6 units/day | Inside the band → hold the current price | | Demand softening | 0.1 units/day | Below the band → lower price \~3% toward min | | Demand surges near the ceiling | 2.5 units/day | Above the band, but price held at EUR 26.00 (max) | ### When to Use * You are the brand owner and there is **no clear competitor ASIN** to anchor pricing to * You want pricing driven by your own demand signal rather than competitor offers * You prefer gradual, predictable, step-based moves over reactive repricing * You are finding the optimal price point for a launch and want demand to guide it {% endtab %} {% endtabs %} *** ## Handling Unauthorized Sellers Unauthorized sellers are the primary threat to brand owners on Amazon. Here is how to address them: ### Detection SellerMagnet's **Alerts System** can notify you when a new seller appears on your listing. Configure a **Hijacking Alert** (see [Alerts & Notifications](/inventory-and-operations/alerts-notifications)) to receive instant notifications. ### Response Strategy | Step | Action | | ---- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | 1 | Receive alert about new unauthorized seller | | 2 | Check if the seller is an authorized distributor (may be legitimate) | | 3 | If unauthorized: file a complaint through Amazon Brand Registry | | 4 | Meanwhile, the BrandGuard strategy adjusts your price based on demand/stock signals | | 5 | If a new seller appears, your alert system flags the potential hijacker | | 6 | Document violations for legal action if needed | {% hint style="info" %} **Important:** Repricing alone cannot remove unauthorized sellers. Use Amazon Brand Registry, Project Zero, and Transparency program for enforcement. The repricer protects your price while you address the root cause. {% endhint %} *** ## Brand Strategy Comparison | Strategy | Price Stability | Margin Protection | Buy Box Priority | Brand Perception | | --------------------------- | --------------- | ----------------- | ---------------- | ---------------- | | BrandGuard | High | Very High | Medium | Strong | | Competitor ASIN-BuyBox Sync | High | High | Low | Consistent | | Velocity Balance | High | High | Low | Strong | ***
⚠️ Common Mistakes to Avoid | Mistake | Why It Hurts | | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Using a reseller strategy on your own brand | You undercut yourself and erode brand value | | Setting BrandGuard thresholds without understanding your demand patterns | Random adjustments without understanding your velocity/inventory context | | Not combining repricer with Hijacking Alerts | You do not know when unauthorized sellers appear | | Using Competitor ASIN-BuyBox Sync with a volatile competitor ASIN | Your pricing will swing unpredictably if the reference ASIN has volatile pricing | | Not monitoring your reference competitor regularly | The competitor may delist or change category, leaving your pricing anchored to stale data | | Setting a Velocity Balance measure window too short on a slow-moving product | A few-day window on a low-velocity product is noisy and triggers premature price moves | | Setting the lower and upper velocity thresholds too close together | A narrow band makes the price oscillate up and down instead of settling |
\## ✅ Best Practices 1. **Understand your demand patterns before enabling BrandGuard:** Review your sales velocity and stock turnover rates. BrandGuard works best when you have at least 2 weeks of sales data. 2. **Combine Repricer + Alerts + Brand Registry:** The repricer protects your pricing, alerts provide visibility, and Brand Registry removes unauthorized sellers. 3. **Review pricing quarterly:** Update MAP prices and strategy parameters based on market changes, cost fluctuations, and competitive landscape shifts. 4. **Use BrandGuard for new launches:** During the launch phase, demand-driven pricing helps you find the optimal price point. 5. **Add Competitor ASIN-BuyBox Sync for products with clear market benchmarks:** When you identify the key competitor ASIN to shadow, sync your pricing for predictable market alignment. *** ## ❓ FAQ
How does BrandGuard decide when to increase vs. decrease price? BrandGuard evaluates sales velocity (units/day), current stock levels, and competitor ASIN median prices. Low stock with healthy demand triggers a price increase; high stock with weak demand triggers a decrease. Per-cycle changes are capped to prevent sharp swings.
What happens if the competitor ASIN for BuyBox Sync has no BuyBox? If the competitor ASIN has no current BuyBox (e.g., out of stock), the strategy logs a NO\_BUYBOX status and your price remains unchanged until the next cycle.
Can I use both BrandGuard and Competitor ASIN-BuyBox Sync? Yes. You can assign different brand strategies to different products. Use BrandGuard for products where demand/stock dynamics matter most, and Competitor ASIN-BuyBox Sync for products where a clear market reference exists.
How does BrandGuard interact with seasonal promotions? During promotions (Prime Day, Black Friday), temporarily adjust your min/max price boundaries to reflect promotional pricing. After the promotion, revert to standard settings. The velocity/stock logic will naturally respond to the demand surge.
What if my competitor ASIN for BuyBox Sync frequently changes price? The price adjustment factor acts as a buffer. If the competitor has volatile pricing, consider using a factor slightly below 1.00 (e.g., 0.95) and ensure your min/max boundaries are tight enough to prevent unwanted swings.
When should I use Velocity Balance instead of BrandGuard? Use Velocity Balance when there is no clear competitor ASIN to anchor your pricing to and you want price moves driven purely by your own sales rate. BrandGuard also factors in inventory levels and competitor ASIN medians, so it is the better fit when those signals are available and meaningful. Velocity Balance keeps things simple: healthy demand pushes the price up, softening demand eases it down, all within your min/max.
How do I set the velocity thresholds for Velocity Balance? The thresholds are expressed in units sold per day. Review your recent sales velocity first: set the **Raise price above** value near the rate at which you are comfortable testing a higher price, and the **Lower price below** value at the rate where you want the price to start easing back to rebuild demand. The lower value must be less than or equal to the upper value; the gap between them is your "hold" band where the price stays put. Defaults are 0.3 (lower) and 1.0 (upper).
*** ## ➡️ What's Next? {% content-ref url="/pages/NvEtzIFWDQ7SVD8PBWWz" %} [Reseller Strategies](/selling-tools/repricer-overview/reseller-strategies) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/OeeKq8tIohsSPfiBCG9n" %} [Create & Manage Repricer Rules](/selling-tools/repricer-overview/create-manage-repricer) {% endcontent-ref %} # Create & Manage Repricer Rules Complete walkthrough of the SellerMagnet V1 Create Repricer modal, product selection, strategy configuration, cost basis, pricing rules, live profit preview, and edit/bulk-import flows. {% hint style="info" %} **Difficulty:** 🔴 Advanced · **Reading time:** \~10 min {% endhint %} ![Create Repricer Modal - V1 configuration interface](https://4139654583-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Fih2knSvVpBcq5rIeXVjM%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-cc1dd41dff70daf85dd7b1481609790ac8a5a8e3%2Frepricer-create-modal.png?alt=media) ## 📋 Overview The **Create Repricer** flow in SellerMagnet V1 lives in a single full-page modal that handles both **creating new repricer rules** and **editing existing ones**. It's designed as one visually structured form, three stacked configuration cards on the left, a live profit preview on the right, so you can configure a rule, see the margin impact in real time, and commit in under a minute. {% hint style="info" %} **One modal, two modes.** The same modal opens whether you click **Add New** or click an existing row. A blue badge at the top (`CREATE` or `SAVE`) tells you which mode you're in. In Edit mode the product selector is replaced with the chosen product and extra tabs appear (Settings / Recommendations / Analysis / Sales History). A **Simulation** tab is available in both modes for a risk-free dry run, see [Simulation (Dry Run)](#simulation-dry-run) below. {% endhint %} *** ## 🚪 Opening the Create Modal From the **Repricer Dashboard**, three toolbar buttons in the top-right get you into the creation flow:
ButtonIconWhat it does
Add New+Opens the Repricer Management modal in Create mode. Use this for manual one-at-a-time rule creation.
Import CSVfileOpens the separate 4-step Bulk Import modal (Connection → Upload → Validation → Import) for creating dozens or hundreds of rules at once.
Export↓Opens the Export options modal. Choose what to export, then download as CSV or Excel. See Export options below.
Clicking a row in any of the 4 status tabs (Inactive, Brands/Private Label, Running (Unsuccessful), Running (BuyBox Secured)) opens the same modal in **Edit mode** instead. See [Status tabs explained](#status-tabs-explained) for what each tab contains. {% hint style="info" icon="circle-info" %} **On the v2 Overview dashboard?** The monitoring-first v2 page (`/repricer-v2`) has no create/manage modals of its own, its **New Repricer**, **Import CSV**, and each row's **Manage** button open the **classic v1 page** described here, where these modals live. See [The v2 Overview dashboard](/selling-tools/repricer-overview#the-v2-overview-dashboard). {% endhint %} *** ## 🧭 Modal Anatomy Once the modal is open you'll see five distinct regions, each handling a different part of the configuration. ### 1. Product Header Runs across the full width of the modal above the configuration cards. It shows the product you're repricing: * **Product image, title, SKU (Stock Keeping Unit), and ASIN (Amazon Standard Identification Number)** * **Marketplace flag + name** (e.g. Amazon.de) * **Fulfillment badge:** FBA (blue) or FBM (amber) * **Stock badge:** current units in inventory * **Five price tiles:** Current / Minimum / Maximum / BuyBox / New Offers In Create mode this section is **empty until you pick a product** from the dropdown below. ### 2. Product Selector (Create mode only) {% hint style="warning" icon="triangle-exclamation" %} **You cannot type an ASIN here.** The dropdown is populated from your **synced Active Amazon products**. If a product you want to reprice is missing, verify it's Active in Seller Central and wait for the next sync cycle. {% endhint %} A single `` rotulado **Select Product** lista todos os produtos ativos de todos os marketplaces conectados. Escolha um, o Cabeçalho do produto acima se preenche e os três cartões de configuração + Live Preview se tornam interativos. ### 3. Cartão de configuração da estratégia O primeiro cartão de configuração (ícone cavalo de xadrez, canto superior esquerdo da área do formulário). É aqui que você escolhe COMO a regra compete. {% tabs %} {% tab title="Seletor de estratégia" %} **Strategy** (obrigatório), menu suspenso com todas as estratégias suportadas. Cada opção tem uma breve descrição que aparece em uma caixa de informação azul logo abaixo do menu suspenso após a seleção. Um link "Learn more" leva você à [Visão Geral das Estratégias de Reprecificação](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/repricer-overview/repricing-strategies-overview) completa. **Interruptor Active** (canto superior direito do cartão), liga/desliga a regra sem excluí-la. As regras pausadas permanecem na aba Inactive. **Expiry Date** (opcional), escolha um valor `datetime-local`. A regra para automaticamente nesse momento. Deixe vazio para executar indefinidamente. {% endtab %} {% tab title="Campos específicos da estratégia" %} As diferentes estratégias expõem diferentes subcampos que aparecem dinamicamente abaixo do seletor:
Família de estratégiaCampos extra
Baseada em posiçãoPosition, inteiro, padrão 1, mínimo 1. Determina qual posição você visa.
Same Price as SellerSeller ID. Identificador do vendedor Amazon a espelhar.
Brand Guard / CompetitiveCompetitor ASINs (separados por vírgula), Sales Velocity (dias, padrão 7), Low Stock (padrão 10), High Stock (padrão 50), mais uma caixa de seleção Reduce price when the item is not selling (desligada por padrão). Quando está ligada e nenhum ASIN de concorrente está definido, o preço desce em direção ao seu mínimo com zero vendas ao longo do período de velocidade; deixe-a desligada e o BrandGuard só reduz o preço para ficar abaixo de um concorrente ou escoar excesso de estoque.
Competitor ASIN SyncCompetitor ASIN, Price Adjustment Factor (0.5-1.5, passo 0.01, padrão 1.0).
Lowest Price / MAP (Minimum Advertised Price) / Brand-PLSem campos extra, orientada pela estratégia através do preço Min/Max e das margens que você define no Cartão C.
{% endtab %} {% endtabs %} {% hint style="success" icon="circle-check" %} **Live Strategy Advisory (verificação pré-gravação).** Para as estratégias BrandGuard, Competitor ASIN-BuyBox Sync e Velocity Balance, um aviso contextual aparece abaixo dos campos da estratégia e se atualiza ao vivo à medida que você digita, dizendo antes de você salvar se a configuração atual irá realmente reprecificar. Uma nota verde confirma uma configuração saudável; uma nota âmbar avisa quando não irá, por exemplo "Add a competitor ASIN to start repricing" para Competitor ASIN-BuyBox Sync sem ASIN inserido, ou, para BrandGuard sem ASIN de concorrente e com "Reduce price when the item is not selling" desligada, "This setup won't lower your price on slow sales". Leia-o antes de clicar em Salvar. {% endhint %} ### 4. Cartão de base de custos O segundo cartão de configuração (ícone moedas). Tudo o que você paga pelo produto, usado pela Live Preview para calcular o lucro real.
CampoTipoNotas
Purchase Price *€ númeroCusto unitário pago ao seu fornecedor. Obrigatório, sem ele o cálculo do lucro estará errado.
Shipping Cost€ númeroEnvio por unidade de entrada (FBA) ou saída (FBM). Opcional mas recomendado.
VAT %% númeroTaxa de VAT ou imposto sobre vendas a deduzir. Por padrão usa o padrão do seu marketplace (19% para DE, etc.).
Fee %% númeroTaxas de referral Amazon + FBA em porcentagem. Clique no botão Fetch junto a este campo para obter automaticamente a taxa atual ao vivo da Amazon.
Miscellaneous Cost€ númeroCusto fixo por unidade não coberto em outro lugar (embalagem, etiquetas, inspeção, etc.).
Miscellaneous Fee %% númeroTaxa percentual não coberta em outro lugar (ex. taxas 3PL).
{% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Dica pro:** Clique sempre em **Fetch** para Fee %. A porcentagem de referral da Amazon varia por categoria (8-15%) e o Fetch obtém o valor correto para *este* ASIN, muito mais preciso do que digitar um palpite. {% endhint %} ### 5. Cartão de regras de preço O terceiro cartão de configuração (ícone sliders). As margens e limites de preço que restringem até onde o motor pode ir. {% stepper %} {% step %} ### Margin Calculation Basis Menu suspenso com duas opções: * **Based on Sale Price (Default):** margem = lucro ÷ preço de venda. Margem e-commerce padrão. * **Based on COGs (Markup):** margem = lucro ÷ custo das mercadorias. Útil se você pensa em termos de markup em vez de margem. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Min Margin \* A margem de lucro (%) mais baixa que a regra está autorizada a aceitar. Se um preço proposto produzir uma margem inferior a esta, o motor para no Min Price em vez disso. Exemplo: `8%` significa "nunca vender a menos de 8% de margem aconteça o que acontecer." {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Max Margin \* A margem (%) mais alta que a regra visa. Atua como um limite superior suave, o motor não aumentará os preços acima desta margem mesmo que a Buy Box não tenha concorrência. Exemplo: `35%`. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Minimum Price \* Piso absoluto e rígido. A regra nunca definirá um preço abaixo deste valor, independentemente do que a Min Margin calcule. Esta é a sua última linha de defesa. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Maximum Price (opcional) Teto absoluto. Deixe vazio para permitir que o motor aumente livremente até a Max Margin. {% endstep %} {% endstepper %} {% hint style="warning" icon="triangle-exclamation" %} **Cuidado: alterar a "Margin Calculation Basis" reinterpreta suas margens.** Alternar entre **Sale Price** e **COGs** muda o que suas porcentagens de Min Margin e Max Margin significam, então os mesmos `8%` / `35%` vão fixar o piso e o teto do preço em pontos diferentes. Verifique sempre novamente seus valores de Min/Max Margin depois de mudar este interruptor, antes de salvar. {% endhint %} {% hint style="warning" %} **Min Margin vs Minimum Price : ambos fixam um piso de preço.** O motor usa **o que for maior**. Se a Min Margin calcular um piso de €42,00 mas o Minimum Price for €39,90, o piso efetivo é €42,00. É por design, as margens têm prioridade sobre os preços estáticos. {% endhint %} ### 6. Live Preview / Decomposição do preço A coluna direita do modal, uma pílula verde `LIVE PREVIEW` indica que este painel se atualiza em tempo real à medida que você digita nos campos de custo/preço. Ele mostra dois cartões de preço empilhados:
CartãoMostra
Min Price (azul)Preço base + envio - VAT - taxas Amazon (com sub-decomposição para referral / fulfillment FBA) - COG, depois Profit em uma linha separada em negrito, e o 30-day Avg Sell Price por baixo para contexto.
Max Price (cinza)A mesma decomposição aplicada ao Maximum Price. Veja rapidamente o teto de lucro.
Abaixo dos dois cartões: um botão azul de largura total **Fetch Amazon Fees**. Clicá-lo obtém a **porcentagem de referral** e as **taxas de fulfillment FBA** atuais ao vivo para este ASIN diretamente da Amazon: a taxa de referral preenche o campo **Fee %** e a taxa FBA alimenta a decomposição do lucro, para que os valores de lucro Min/Max reflitam as taxas reais da Amazon em vez de uma estimativa. {% hint style="danger" %} **Banners de aviso vermelhos** aparecem na parte inferior da Live Preview se alguma destas condições for verdadeira: * **O Min price está abaixo da Buy Box atual:** você vai vender, mas provavelmente com prejuízo. **Correção:** aumente seu Minimum Price, ou reduza sua Min Margin %. * **O Min price está acima do preço atual:** você vai fazer subir o preço do anúncio. * **O Max price está abaixo da Buy Box:** sua regra nunca poderá ganhar a Buy Box. **Correção:** aumente seu Maximum Price. {% endhint %} *** ## 🧪 Simulação (Dry Run) A aba **Simulation** permite que você pré-visualize exatamente o que o seu repricer *faria* ao longo dos próximos ciclos, **antes** de salvar a regra e **sem nunca enviar um preço para a Amazon**. Ela executa sua estratégia configurada e o piso/teto contra as ofertas **ao vivo** atuais do produto e projeta os movimentos que faria. {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Sem risco por design.** A simulação é um ensaio puro. Nenhum preço é jamais submetido à Amazon, nada é salvo e o anúncio ao vivo fica intocado. Execute-a quantas vezes quiser para validar uma configuração. {% endhint %} A aba está disponível em **ambos os modos Create e Edit** (em modo Create você deve escolher um produto primeiro, já que o simulador precisa de um ASIN ao vivo para obter ofertas). ### Controles
ControleO que faz
IterationsQuantos ciclos de reprecificação projetar, 1-10 (padrão 5). Cada ciclo é uma decisão que o repricer tomaria contra as ofertas ao vivo. Use o stepper − / +.
ScenariosEscolha um ou mais de três modelos de reação dos concorrentes (veja abaixo). Os três estão selecionados por padrão.
Run previewObtém as ofertas ao vivo e executa a simulação. Um loader esqueleto aparece enquanto trabalha.
### Os três cenários O simulador modela quão agressivamente seus concorrentes reagem aos seus movimentos de preço, para que você possa ver toda a faixa de resultados em vez de um único palpite.
CenárioO que assume
Best case (verde)Os concorrentes mantêm os preços, então você fica com a Buy Box ao melhor preço que sua estratégia permite.
Expected (azul)Apenas o atual detentor da Buy Box reage, ficando abaixo uma vez se você fosse roubar a box; todos os outros mantêm.
Worst case (vermelho)O concorrente mais forte volta a ficar abaixo de você a cada rodada, uma corrida em direção ao seu piso.
### Como ler os resultados Depois de clicar em **Run preview**, o painel de resultados mostra, de cima para baixo: * **Hero da estratégia:** a estratégia em simulação e uma breve descrição de como se comporta. * **Inputs da simulação:** chips listando exatamente o que foi aplicado, estratégia, fulfillment, piso, teto e quaisquer parâmetros específicos da estratégia (posição alvo, ASINs concorrentes, banda de velocidade, etc.). É o mesmo conjunto de limites que o repricer ao vivo respeita. * **Contexto do estado atual:** número de ofertas ao vivo, o vencedor e preço atual da Buy Box e sua banda piso/teto. * **Gráfico de trajetória de preço projetada:** seu preço em cada ciclo, uma linha por cenário, com linhas tracejadas marcando seu piso e teto. * **Cartões de resultado por cenário** (um por cenário selecionado): * Preço inicial → preço final, com a variação líquida. * Um medidor de banda mostrando onde o preço de aterrissagem fica entre seu piso e teto (sinaliza **hits floor** / **hits ceiling**). * **Wins Buy Box** ou **No Buy Box** para esse cenário. * Estatísticas: número de alterações de preço, líquido estimado por unidade, **margem %** no preço de aterrissagem (vermelho se negativo) e a contagem de concorrentes. * Um **insight** em linguagem simples explicando *por que* o preço aterrissa onde aterrissa para sua estratégia escolhida. * **Ciclos passo a passo:** uma tabela colapsável por cenário, uma linha por ciclo, mostrando seu preço antes, a ação tomada (Price change / Hold / Blocked by limit / Out of stock), o novo preço, o líquido por unidade, o vencedor estimado da Buy Box e uma breve explicação. {% hint style="info" icon="circle-info" %} **Estimado, não garantido.** O vencedor da Buy Box a cada ciclo é *estimado*, e comportamentos com tempo controlado (como o lento aumento enquanto você mantém a box, ou o curto bloqueio de paciência após um movimento de um concorrente) são anotados em vez de simulados em tempo real. Trate a projeção como direcional. Se todos os cenários selecionados saírem idênticos, o simulador os colapsa em um único cartão e diz que não há pressão competitiva para divergirem. {% endhint %} {% hint style="warning" icon="triangle-exclamation" %} **O Brand Guard é aproximado.** Para a estratégia Brand Guard, a velocidade de vendas ao vivo, os níveis de inventário e as verificações de vendedores não autorizados são simplificados para a pré-visualização. Os movimentos projetados são direcionais, o repricer ao vivo considera o sinal completo. {% endhint %} > **Por que isso importa:** A simulação é a forma mais segura de validar um novo piso, teto ou mudança de estratégia. Se o cartão de **worst case** já aterrissa no seu piso com uma margem fina ou negativa, seu piso está baixo demais ou seus custos altos demais, corrija-o aqui antes de a regra alguma vez tocar no seu preço ao vivo. *** ## 🎬 Barra de ações Fixa no fundo do modal: * **Reset** (cinza, ícone rotação): limpa todos os campos para os valores padrão. Use com cuidado, sem confirmação. * **Create Repricer** (azul, ícone mais): valida e salva. Se faltar algum campo obrigatório, o modal o destaca em vermelho e o botão fica desativado. Em **modo edição** o botão Create é substituído por um botão azul **Save** que envia para o endpoint de atualização. *** ## ⚡ Push Price Now (Envio Manual de Preço) Em **modo edição**, a barra de ações mostra um botão extra **Push price now** (ícone raio) ao lado de **Save**. Ele fica oculto em modo Create, porque não há anúncio ao vivo para onde enviar até a regra existir. Esta é a sua substituição manual. Clicá-lo abre um pequeno painel inline onde você digita um preço e confirma, e o SellerMagnet define esse preço exato no seu anúncio Amazon **imediatamente**, fora do ciclo normal do repricer. Ele **não** espera pela próxima avaliação do motor, e **não** executa sua estratégia, ele envia o preço que você digitou, diretamente. {% hint style="info" icon="circle-info" %} **Como funciona.** O painel pré-preenche com seu Minimum Price atual como sugestão inicial e mostra sua **banda de preço** configurada (`min - max`) para referência. Insira qualquer preço maior que zero e confirme (ou pressione **Enter** no campo). Em caso de sucesso, o mosaico de preço Current no cabeçalho do produto se atualiza para o novo valor e aparece um toast de confirmação. Clique no botão novamente, ou **Cancel**, para fechar o painel sem enviar nada. {% endhint %} {% hint style="danger" %} **Esta é uma alteração de preço ao vivo.** O preço que você insere é escrito no seu anúncio Amazon real no momento em que você confirma. Não há ensaio nem forma de desfazer, isto não é a aba [Simulação](#simulacao-dry-run). Verifique duas vezes o valor, e a moeda, antes de confirmar. {% endhint %} **Quando usá-lo:** * **Desbloquear um preço encalhado.** Se seu preço ao vivo estiver fora da sua nova banda min/max (por exemplo, depois de apertar suas margens), enviar um preço dentro da banda dá ao motor um ponto de partida limpo para reprecificar. * **Forçar um preço imediato** para uma venda relâmpago, uma equiparação de preço ou uma correção manual, sem esperar pelo próximo ciclo do repricer. * **Substituição pontual** quando você quer definir um preço específico à mão mas manter a regra e sua estratégia em vigor para tudo o mais depois. {% hint style="info" %} **Push price now vs. Apply min/max now.** A barra de ações também oferece um botão **Apply min/max now** (ícone setas esquerda-direita). São ferramentas diferentes: **Push price now** envia um *preço que você digita*; **Apply min/max now** primeiro salva suas configurações atuais, depois, apenas se o preço ao vivo estiver fora da sua banda salva, o move para o limite min/max mais próximo automaticamente (sem digitar). Use **Apply min/max now** quando você acabou de alterar sua banda e quer o preço fixado de volta nela; use **Push price now** quando quer definir um número específico. {% endhint %} *** ## ✏️ Editando uma regra existente Clique em qualquer linha da tabela do Repricer Dashboard, o mesmo modal abre em **modo edição** com: * O emblema de modo `SAVE` substituindo `CREATE` * O produto pré-selecionado (seletor oculto) * Todos os valores atuais de estratégia + custo + preço já preenchidos * **4 abas extras** no topo da área do formulário: Settings / Recommendations / Analysis / Sales History, para que você possa ver o desempenho histórico ao lado da configuração atual Altere o que precisar, clique em **Save** para confirmar. {% hint style="info" %} **Sem necessidade de reconstruir.** As edições se aplicam imediatamente ao salvar, o motor recolhe os novos parâmetros no seu próximo ciclo de avaliação (aproximadamente a cada 5 minutos). Você não precisa pausar e reiniciar a regra. {% endhint %} {% hint style="info" icon="circle-info" %} **Salvando o custo no produto.** Depois de você criar um repricer, ou alterar o **preço de compra** de um repricer, o SellerMagnet pode perguntar *"Save these costs to your products?"* - oferecendo copiar esse preço de compra para o produto como o seu custo de mercadorias (COGS) para que a aba Products e as análises de lucro usem o mesmo valor. Veja [Salvando custos importados nos seus produtos (sincronização de COGS)](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/repricer-overview/bulk-import-export#salvando-custos-importados-nos-seus-produtos-sincronizacao-de-cogs) para saber como ler a pré-visualização. Note que o **custo de envio** do repricer é apenas uma entrada de preço/lucro - não é gravado no produto. {% endhint %} ### A aba Recommendations Em modo edição, a aba **Recommendations** obtém um snapshot de precificação ao vivo para o anúncio (via o endpoint `repricer_price_recommendations`) e o transforma em um único preço sugerido. Ela mostra: * **Pricing overview** - Current Price, Competitive Price (marcado como **You own the BuyBox** quando você já a detém), Listing Price e um **Suggested Price**. A sugestão fica logo abaixo do preço competitivo e é fixada ao seu Min/Max, quando seu Minimum Price a limita, a aba também mostra o valor sem restrição para referência. Uma linha de **Recommendation** em linguagem simples explica o movimento (manter, reduzir para competir, ajustar para o melhor, ou limitado pelo seu mínimo). * **Competitors** - a contagem de **New Offers** e **Other Offers** no anúncio. * **Sales rankings** - o **Primary Rank** e o **Sub Rank** de categoria do anúncio. * Um **gráfico de comparação de preço** plotando seus preços current, competitive, listing, suggested, min e max. Use **Refresh** para reobter o snapshot, ou aplique o preço sugerido diretamente da aba. *** ## ⬇️ Opções de Export (CSV & Excel) O botão **Export** da barra de ferramentas abre o modal **Export options**. Escolha um de três modos, depois clique no botão de download, que é um menu dividido oferecendo **CSV** ou **Excel (.xlsx)**.
ModoO que você obtémFormato
Products & Fees (padrão)Cada produto sincronizado pré-preenchido com suas taxas Amazon reais, VAT e preços atuais, o template inicial recomendado para Bulk Import. Um aviso sobre taxas é mostrado enquanto este modo está selecionado.CSV ou Excel
Import template (Basic)Um template em branco com cabeçalhos corretos e uma linha de exemplo, para construir um arquivo de importação do zero.Apenas CSV*
Current repricersSuas regras de repricer existentes (SKU, ASIN, nome, marketplace, preço, limites min/max, margem min/max, status, última atualização). Um menu suspenso de scope permite restringir isto a, ex., Unsuccessful (No BuyBox) ou Successful (BuyBox Secured).CSV ou Excel
{% hint style="info" icon="circle-info" %} \*O template Basic sempre baixa como CSV porque foi feito para ser preenchido e reimportado, e o importador lê CSV. Os outros dois modos respeitam a sua escolha de CSV / Excel. {% endhint %} > **Recomendação:** Use **Excel** quando você apenas quer ler, ordenar ou compartilhar os dados, e **CSV** quando o arquivo for reimportado aqui ou alimentado em outra ferramenta. Ambos os formatos contêm as mesmas colunas. *** ## 📦 Bulk Import (Modal Separado) Para criar muitas regras de uma só vez, use **Import CSV** em vez de Add New. Isto abre um modal assistente separado com quatro abas numeradas de stepper: {% stepper %} {% step %} ### Connection Escolha sob qual conta de marketplace as regras devem ser criadas. Todas as regras de uma única importação vão para um marketplace, importe separadamente se estiver criando regras para DE, FR, UK, etc. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Upload Arraste e solte seu arquivo CSV na zona de queda ou clique para procurar. O SellerMagnet detecta automaticamente o mapeamento de colunas se você usou o template de Export. Um banner aparece no topo se uma sessão anterior ainda for restaurável. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Validation O assistente analisa cada linha e mostra uma tabela de validação com três filtros: * **Errors:** linhas que serão rejeitadas (campos obrigatórios ausentes, ASINs inválidos, min > max, etc.) * **Warnings:** linhas que serão importadas mas precisam da sua revisão (min abaixo da Buy Box atual, etc.) * **Valid:** linhas prontas para importar Você pode **Edit**, **Fetch Fees** ou **Delete** qualquer linha inline. Um seletor **Bulk Strategy** no topo permite aplicar uma estratégia a cada linha válida com um clique. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Import Tela final de confirmação que mostra a faixa de lucro em todas as linhas válidas. Clique em **Import** para criar todas as regras em uma única transação. {% endstep %} {% endstepper %} {% hint style="success" %} **Obtenha o template certo:** Clique em **Export → Products & Fees** a partir da barra de ferramentas do Repricer ANTES de preencher seu CSV. Isto dá a você um arquivo pré-preenchido com cada produto sincronizado e suas taxas atuais. Tudo o que você precisa adicionar é Min Price, Max Price e Strategy. {% endhint %} *** ## ⚙️ Gerenciando regras após a criação Quando as regras existem, o Repricer Dashboard as mostra em 4 abas de status. A partir da tabela principal de itens você pode:
AçãoComo
Editar uma regraClique na linha em qualquer lugar.
Pausar / ReiniciarUse o menu de ações da coluna Manage, ou o interruptor Active dentro do modal de edição.
Excluir uma regraManage → Delete. Pedido de confirmação.
Ação em massaSelecione linhas com as caixas de seleção e depois use a barra de ferramentas em massa (Start, Stop, Delete, Export) que aparece acima da tabela.
PesquisarA barra de pesquisa filtra por SKU, ASIN ou título do produto em tempo real.
### Abas de status explicadas As quatro abas ordenam suas regras por como estão desempenhando agora, para que você possa ver de relance quais produtos estão ganhando a Buy Box e quais não estão:
AbaO que contém
InactiveRegras pausadas ou desligadas (o interruptor Active está desligado), independentemente da estratégia.
Brands / Private LabelRegras ativas que usam uma estratégia de proprietário de marca (Brand Guard / Competitor ASIN Sync). Estão agrupadas separadamente porque não competem pela Buy Box da mesma forma que as estratégias de revendedor.
Running (Unsuccessful)Regras de revendedor ativas que não estão ganhando atualmente a Buy Box, ex. um concorrente detém a box, a Amazon a detém, a Buy Box está suprimida, a regra está retida por um limite, ou um motivo não relacionado ao preço está mantendo você de fora.
Running (BuyBox Secured)Regras de revendedor ativas que estão ganhando atualmente a Buy Box. Uma regra aterrissa aqui quando seu estado de motor mais recente é um estado vencedor, i.e. detendo a Buy Box, a box acabou de ser garantida, ou o preço está subindo enquanto você mantém a box.
{% hint style="info" icon="circle-info" %} **O que "BuyBox Secured" realmente significa.** Uma regra aparece em **Running (BuyBox Secured)** apenas quando a decisão mais recente do motor deixou você detendo a Buy Box, o mesmo conjunto de estados vencedores que os contadores de backend usam, para que a contagem da aba e as linhas sempre concordem. Tudo o mais que está ativo mas não ganhando fica em **Running (Unsuccessful)**, mesmo linhas que anteriormente detiveram a box. Passe o mouse sobre qualquer emblema de status para uma explicação em linguagem simples de por que a regra está nesse estado. {% endhint %} > **Por que isso importa:** A divisão é sua vista de triagem diária. Trabalhe a aba **Running (Unsuccessful)** primeiro, ordene por status e verifique se você está sendo batido no preço (corrigível, baixe o piso ou ajuste a estratégia) ou por um motivo não relacionado ao preço como velocidade de envio ou avaliação do vendedor (baixar o preço não recuperará a box). *** ## 🚫 Quando a Buy Box é suprimida A Amazon ocasionalmente não mostra **nenhuma Buy Box** em um anúncio ("See All Buying Options"), normalmente porque o preço em destaque está acima do preço que a Amazon espera. Quando isso acontece em uma regra que você está editando, o campo **Buy Box** no modal mostra **N/A** com uma etiqueta vermelha **Suppressed** e um banner de aviso - *"BuyBox suppressed - Amazon is not showing a BuyBox for this listing"* - junto com um link **Learn more** para o artigo de ajuda da Amazon. Se a regra usar a estratégia **BuyBox**, você pode dizer ao repricer como reagir (manter, reduzir o preço em passos, igualar a oferta mais baixa ou ir para o seu mínimo) - veja [Lidando com uma Buy Box suprimida](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/repricer-overview/reseller-strategies#lidar-com-uma-buy-box-suprimida) na página Estratégias para Revendedores. O resultado então aparece em **Recent Activity** como um de: | Status | Significado | | ------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **BuyBox Suppressed** | Nenhuma Buy Box está sendo mostrada; a regra está mantendo e reportando o estado (ou aguardando para agir). | | **Suppressed Price Step** | O repricer reduziu seu preço em um passo para tentar trazer a Buy Box de volta. | | **Suppressed at Min** | A Buy Box continua suprimida mas seu preço já está no mínimo, então nenhuma redução adicional é feita. | *** ## 🧮 Exemplo Prático: Criando um Repricer Aqui está uma passagem completa pelo modal para um produto FBA, mostrando como os três cartões de configuração alimentam a Live Preview. Todos os valores são ilustrativos, use seus próprios custos. **Produto:** um acessório de cozinha na Amazon.de, com fulfillment por FBA, atualmente fora da Buy Box. ### 1. Cartão de configuração da estratégia | Campo | Valor | | --------------- | ---------------------------------------- | | **Strategy** | BuyBox (competir pela Buy Box) | | **Active** | Ligado | | **Expiry Date** | (deixado vazio, executa indefinidamente) | ### 2. Cartão de base de custos | Campo | Valor | Nota | | ---------------------- | ------- | ---------------------------------------------- | | **Purchase Price** | € 18,00 | Custo unitário do fornecedor | | **Shipping Cost** | € 2,50 | Entrada por unidade para FBA | | **Miscellaneous Cost** | € 0,50 | Embalagem / etiquetas | | **VAT %** | 19% | Padrão do marketplace DE | | **Fee %** | 15% | Obtido com **Fetch** (referral para este ASIN) | Custo final das mercadorias (COGS) = 18,00 + 2,50 + 0,50 = **€ 21,00** por unidade. O botão **Fetch** também alimenta a taxa de fulfillment FBA (cerca de **€ 3,10** aqui) na decomposição do lucro. ### 3. Cartão de regras de preço | Campo | Valor | | ---------------------------- | ----------------------------- | | **Margin Calculation Basis** | Based on Sale Price (Default) | | **Min Margin** | 8% | | **Max Margin** | 30% | | **Minimum Price** | € 35,00 (proteção estática) | | **Maximum Price** | (deixado vazio) | Com estes valores a Live Preview resolve cada limite contra COGS, VAT, referral e taxas FBA: * **Min Margin 8%** produz um piso calculado de cerca de **€ 39,50** (lucro ≈ € 3,16). Como este é superior ao **Minimum Price** estático de € 35,00, o motor usa **€ 39,50** como piso efetivo, as margens têm prioridade sobre os preços estáticos. * **Max Margin 30%** produz um teto de cerca de **€ 61,75** (lucro ≈ € 18,53). ### 4. Resultado da Live Preview A Buy Box é atualmente detida por um concorrente a **€ 44,90**. A estratégia BuyBox propõe um preço logo abaixo, **€ 44,89**, que fica confortavelmente dentro da banda € 39,50 - € 61,75: | Linha | Valor | | ---------------------------- | ------------ | | Novo preço | € 44,89 | | menos VAT (19%) | - € 7,17 | | menos taxa de Referral (15%) | - € 6,73 | | menos fulfillment FBA | - € 3,10 | | menos COGS (final) | - € 21,00 | | **Lucro** | **≈ € 6,89** | | **Margem** | **≈ 15,3%** | Nenhum banner de aviso vermelho aparece: o preço proposto está acima do piso, abaixo do teto e ganha a Buy Box. Clique em **Create Repricer**, e como **Active** está Ligado a regra aterrissa na aba **Running (BuyBox Secured)** assim que o motor confirmar a vitória. ***
⚠️ Erros Comuns a Evitar | Erro | Por Que Prejudica | | ---------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Definir o Minimum Price abaixo do ponto de equilíbrio | O motor pode legalmente vender com prejuízo para perseguir a Buy Box; seu piso deve ficar acima de COGS final + VAT + taxas | | Min e Max apertados demais | O motor quase não tem espaço para se mover, então não consegue nem ficar abaixo dos concorrentes nem subir quando a box não tem concorrência | | Base de custos errada (digitar Fee % em vez de usar Fetch) | As taxas de referral variam 8-15% por categoria; uma taxa adivinhada torna errados todos os valores de lucro e margem | | Esquecer o COGS / deixar o Purchase Price vazio | O lucro da Live Preview não tem significado e a Min Margin fixa o piso no preço errado | | Alternar a Margin Calculation Basis sem verificar de novo | Os mesmos 8% / 30% significam preços diferentes em Sale Price vs COGs, movendo silenciosamente seu piso e teto | | Criar a regra mas deixar Active desligado | A regra fica na aba Inactive e nunca reprecifica; nada muda no seu anúncio |
## ✅ Melhores Práticas 1. **Clique sempre em Fetch para Fee %.** Obtenha a taxa de referral ao vivo e a taxa de fulfillment FBA para o ASIN exato antes de confiar em qualquer valor de lucro, nunca digite um palpite. 2. **Defina seu Minimum Price acima do ponto de equilíbrio, não nele.** Adicione uma pequena margem sobre COGS final + VAT + taxas para que uma alteração de taxa ou oscilação cambial não empurre você para um prejuízo. 3. **Dê espaço à banda para trabalhar.** Deixe uma folga significativa entre seu piso e teto para que o motor possa ficar abaixo dos concorrentes e ainda subir quando a Buy Box não tem concorrência. 4. **Simule antes de salvar.** Execute o cenário de pior caso da [Simulação](#simulacao-dry-run); se ele já aterrissa no seu piso com uma margem fina ou negativa, corrija primeiro o piso ou os custos. 5. **Confirme que a regra está Active após a criação.** Verifique se aparece em uma aba Running, não Inactive, depois verifique seu status ao longo dos próximos ciclos. 6. **Mantenha os custos sincronizados.** Quando solicitado, salve o preço de compra no produto como COGS para que a aba Products e as análises de lucro correspondam ao repricer. *** ## ❓ FAQ
Por que o menu suspenso de produtos não mostra o meu novo ASIN? O menu suspenso é construído a partir dos seus **produtos Amazon ativos** na data da última sincronização. Se você adicionou recentemente um anúncio no Seller Central, aguarde 10-15 minutos pelo próximo ciclo de sincronização. Se ainda não aparecer, verifique se o status do anúncio é `Active` (não `Incomplete` ou `Suppressed`) no Seller Central.
Qual é a diferença entre Min Margin e Minimum Price? **Min Margin** é dinâmica : flutua com base no seu custo + taxas. **Minimum Price** é um valor estático que você insere diretamente. O motor sempre usa **aquele que produz o piso mais alto**, assim as margens protegem você quando as taxas sobem e o preço estático protege você quando os custos descem.
Posso obter as taxas Amazon para todas as minhas regras de uma só vez? Sim, use a ação em massa **Fetch Fees** na tela de validação do Bulk Import. Ela chama a API de preview de taxas da Amazon para cada linha válida e preenche a coluna Fee %. Muito mais rápido do que abrir cada regra individualmente.
O que acontece se eu excluir uma regra, o preço do meu anúncio reverte? Não. Excluir uma regra do repricer para atualizações automáticas futuras mas **não altera o preço atual do anúncio**. O preço fica onde o motor o definiu pela última vez. Se você quiser reverter, atualize o preço manualmente no Seller Central ou nas ferramentas complementares do Repricer.
Uma única regra pode cobrir vários marketplaces? Não, uma regra = um anúncio em um marketplace. Se você vende o mesmo produto em DE/FR/IT, crie três regras separadas. Bulk Import é a forma mais fácil de fazer isso.
Por que o meu botão Create está desativado? Pelo menos um campo obrigatório está vazio ou inválido. O formulário destaca os campos problemáticos em vermelho. A causa mais comum é Strategy não selecionada, Purchase Price vazio, ou Min Margin / Max Margin / Minimum Price ausente.
*** ## ➡️ O que vem a seguir? {% content-ref url="/pages/oa3f2dDo1xpBjsAttgGV" %} [Importação e Exportação em Massa](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/repricer-overview/bulk-import-export) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/4vbonRJOLx1KMA6dKtXu" %} [Visão Geral das Estrategias de Reprecificação](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/repricer-overview/repricing-strategies-overview) {% endcontent-ref %} # Importação e Exportação em Massa Configure regras de reprecificador em massa usando importação CSV, e exporte configurações existentes para backup, auditoria ou migração entre marketplaces. {% hint style="info" %} **Dificuldade:** 🔴 Avançado · **Tempo de leitura:** \~7 min {% endhint %} ![Assistente de importação/exportação em massa do Repricer](https://1034596264-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FAUp8wGCBcLktsaowHWoK%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-3b9eb44446d345e85f07eb05408429867179b206%2Frepricer-bulk-import-export.png?alt=media) {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Boa prática : comece a partir de um Export, não de um CSV em branco.** Antes de escrever uma única linha, clique em **Export → Products & Fees** na barra de ferramentas do Repricer. Isto baixa um **modelo pré-preenchido** com cada produto sincronizado, suas taxas reais da Amazon (referral + FBA), taxas de VAT e preços atuais já preenchidos. Você só precisa preencher **Min Price**, **Max Price** e **Strategy**, todo o resto já está feito. Este único passo economiza horas e elimina cerca de 90% dos erros de validação. {% endhint %} ## 📋 Visão Geral O recurso de **Importação e Exportação em Massa** permite criar, atualizar e fazer backup de configurações de reprecificador em escala usando arquivos CSV. Em vez de configurar centenas de regras de reprecificador uma por uma pelo assistente, você pode preparar uma planilha offline e enviar em uma única ação. Isso é essencial para vendedores com catálogos grandes, operações em múltiplos marketplaces ou equipes que precisam revisar e aprovar configurações de reprecificação antes de entrarem em vigor. *** ## Acessando Operações em Massa 1. Navegue até a página do **Repricer** pelo menu lateral. 2. Na barra de ferramentas da Items Table, procure os botões **Import** e **Export**. *** ## 📤 Exportação {% hint style="info" icon="circle-info" %} **CSV ou Excel.** O botão **Export** é um menu dividido, após escolher o que exportar você seleciona **CSV** ou **Excel (.xlsx)**. Ambos os formatos contêm as mesmas colunas; apenas o tipo de arquivo difere. Veja [Escolhendo um formato](#escolhendo-um-formato) abaixo. {% endhint %} ### O Que é Exportado Clicar em **Export** abre o modal **Export options** onde você escolhe o que exportar. **Products & Fees** (estendido) é o modo padrão recomendado, você também pode escolher um *Import template* em branco ou seus *Current repricers*. A exportação de current-repricers contém todas as regras de reprecificador ativas e pausadas na sua conta: | Coluna | Descrição | | ------------------------------------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **ASIN (Amazon Standard Identification Number)** | Amazon Standard Identification Number | | **SKU (Stock Keeping Unit)** | Seu SKU do Seller Central para o anúncio | | **Marketplace** | Código do marketplace Amazon (ex.: `A1PA6795UKMFR9` para Amazon.de) | | **Condition** | New ou Used | | **Strategy** | Nome da estratégia (ex.: `buybox`, `brandguard`) | | **Min Price** | Limite mínimo de preço | | **Max Price** | Limite máximo de preço | | **Current Price** | O preço atual do anúncio na Amazon | | **Status** | Active ou Paused | | **FBA/FBM** | Tipo de fulfillment | {% hint style="info" icon="circle-info" %} **Defina o escopo da exportação de current-repricers.** Quando você escolhe **Current repricers**, um menu suspenso de **scope** restringe o que você baixa: **Unsuccessful (No BuyBox)**, **Brand / Private Label**, **Successful (BuyBox Secured)** ou **All Active Repricers**. O escopo sozinho comanda a exportação - seus filtros ativos da tabela não são aplicados. {% endhint %} ### Casos de Uso da Exportação | Caso de Uso | Descrição | | ------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------ | | **Backup** | Salvar um snapshot de todas as regras antes de fazer alterações em massa | | **Auditoria** | Compartilhar o arquivo com membros da equipe para revisão e aprovação | | **Migração entre marketplaces** | Copiar configurações para adaptar para um marketplace diferente | | **Análise em planilha** | Abrir no Excel/Google Sheets para classificar, filtrar e analisar regras | ### Escolhendo um Formato Quando você clica em **Export**, o botão de download oferece dois formatos com **colunas idênticas**, a única diferença é o tipo de arquivo: | Formato | Tipo de arquivo | Melhor para | | --------- | --------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | | **CSV** | `.csv` | Reimportar no SellerMagnet, alimentar outra ferramenta ou qualquer pipeline de texto simples. CSV é o formato que o importador lê, então escolha sempre CSV se o arquivo for ser editado e enviado de volta. | | **Excel** | `.xlsx` | Ler, classificar, filtrar, compartilhar com sua equipe ou enviar a um fornecedor. Abre de forma limpa no Excel / Google Sheets com colunas adequadas e sem configuração de processamento. | {% hint style="warning" icon="triangle-exclamation" %} **Uma exceção:** o modo de **Import template** em branco sempre baixa como CSV, porque existe para ser preenchido e reimportado. Os modos *Products & Fees* e *Current repricers* respeitam ambos a sua escolha de CSV / Excel. {% endhint %} > **Recomendação:** Exporte para **Excel** para revisão humana e para **CSV** para qualquer ida-e-volta que termine em uma reimportação. Independentemente do que escolher, os dados são os mesmos, então um backup feito como Excel é tão completo quanto um feito como CSV. *** ## Importação ### Preparando Seu Arquivo de Importação Use o CSV exportado como modelo. Cada linha representa uma regra de reprecificador. Modifique linhas existentes ou adicione novas. **Colunas obrigatórias para novas regras:** | Coluna | Obrigatória | Formato | | --------------- | ----------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **ASIN** | Sim | ASIN de 10 caracteres | | **SKU** | Sim | Deve corresponder exatamente ao seu SKU do Seller Central | | **Marketplace** | Sim | Identificador do marketplace Amazon | | **Condition** | Sim | `new` ou `used` | | **Strategy** | Sim | Código da estratégia (veja tabela de referência de estratégias abaixo) | | **Min Price** | Sim | Número decimal na moeda do marketplace (ex.: `19.99`) | | **Max Price** | Sim | Número decimal, deve ser maior que Min Price | | **Status** | Não | `active` ou `paused` (padrão `active` se omitido) | ### Referência de Códigos de Estratégia | Código | Categoria | Descrição | | ------------------ | ---------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | | `lowest` | Revendedor | Ser sempre a oferta mais barata, ficando abaixo do menor concorrente dentro dos seus limites min/max | | `buybox` | Revendedor | Conquistar e manter o Buy Box pelo maior preço lucrativo | | `position` | Revendedor | Manter uma posição-alvo de preço (ex.: 2º menor) entre todos os vendedores | | `same` | Revendedor | Espelhar o preço de um vendedor específico pelo Seller ID dele | | `brandguard` | Marca / PL | Precificação de marca orientada por demanda, estoque e ASINs de concorrentes | | `competitor_sync` | Marca / PL | Sincronizar com o preço do Buy Box de um ASIN concorrente multiplicado por um fator de ajuste | | `velocity_balance` | Marca / PL | Precificação orientada pela demanda a partir da sua própria taxa de vendas, sem concorrente necessário | ### Enviando o Arquivo {% stepper %} {% step %} ### Clique no botão **Import** na barra de ferramentas do Repricer. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Selecione seu arquivo CSV preparado (ou arraste e solte na área de upload). {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Uma tela de pré-visualização mostra as regras processadas com status de validação. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Revise quaisquer avisos ou erros (linhas destacadas indicam problemas). {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Clique em **Confirm Import** para criar ou atualizar as regras. {% endstep %} {% endstepper %} ### Regras de Validação O sistema de importação verifica: | Validação | Erro se Violada | | ------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------ | | Min Price > 0 | "Minimum price must be greater than zero" | | Max Price > Min Price | "Maximum price must exceed minimum price" | | Formato de ASIN válido | "Invalid ASIN format" | | SKU existe no Seller Central | "SKU not found in your catalog" | | Código de estratégia válido | "Unknown strategy code" | | Sem duplicata de ASIN+Marketplace+Condition | "Duplicate rule detected" | | Cota não excedida | "Import would exceed your plan's repricer limit" | *** ## Atualizando Regras Existentes via Importação ![Modal Create Repricer: estratégia, base de custos e pré-visualização de preço ao vivo](https://1034596264-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FAUp8wGCBcLktsaowHWoK%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-cc1dd41dff70daf85dd7b1481609790ac8a5a8e3%2Frepricer-create-modal.png?alt=media) Se o arquivo de importação contiver uma combinação de ASIN + Marketplace + Condition que já existe como regra de reprecificador, o sistema **atualiza** a regra existente em vez de criar uma duplicata. Isso permite modificar estratégias ou limites de preço em massa. {% hint style="info" icon="circle-info" %} **Observação:** Para atualizar apenas campos específicos, exporte primeiro, modifique as colunas que deseja alterar e reimporte. Colunas não alteradas mantêm seus valores atuais. {% endhint %} *** ## 💾 Salvando custos importados nos seus produtos (sincronização de COGS) O preço de compra que você coloca em um arquivo de importação fica dentro do Repricer. O SellerMagnet também pode copiá-lo para o **próprio produto** como seu custo de mercadorias (COGS), para que a aba Products e todas as telas de lucro/analytics usem o mesmo custo - sem entrada dupla. Após uma importação bem-sucedida, se as regras que você acabou de criar tiverem um preço de compra, uma caixa de diálogo pergunta **"Save these costs to your products?"** - *"Neste momento estes preços de compra existem apenas dentro do repricer. Salve-os também nos produtos, para que a aba de produtos e suas análises de lucro os utilizem."* {% hint style="info" icon="circle-info" %} O mesmo aviso aparece quando você cria um repricer manualmente, ou quando edita um repricer e **altera** o seu preço de compra - ele só oferece os SKUs cujo preço realmente mudou. {% endhint %} ### Lendo a pré-visualização Cada SKU é listado com uma caixa de seleção, seu **custo atual → novo custo** e um emblema de status: | Emblema | Significado | | ------------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **No product cost yet** | O produto não tem custo registrado. Estas linhas vêm **pré-marcadas** - salvar é seguro. | | **Updates existing flat cost** | Já existe um custo fixo e é diferente. Marcar o substitui. | | **Overrides batch costs** | O produto usa custos de **batch** de inventário. Salvar um custo fixo sobrepõe esses batches em TODOS os cálculos de lucro. | | **Multiple prices - pick one** | O mesmo SKU aparece com mais de um preço no arquivo - escolha qual preço salvar. | | **Already in sync** | O custo do produto já corresponde - nada a fazer (linha desativada). | | **Current cost unknown** | O custo atual não pôde ser lido - deixado desmarcado para que nada seja sobrescrito por acidente. | {% hint style="warning" %} Linhas marcadas como **"Overrides batch costs"** já têm batches de inventário. Só marque essas se realmente quiser que um custo fixo substitua seus custos de batch em todos os lugares. **Linhas que alterariam ou sobreporiam um custo existente nunca são salvas a menos que você as marque você mesmo** - apenas as linhas "No product cost yet" vêm pré-selecionadas. {% endhint %} Marque as linhas que deseja e clique em **Save to products (N)**, ou escolha **Not now** para pular. Apenas o preço de compra é gravado; ele se torna o custo fixo do produto e é ativado automaticamente. ### Lembrando sua escolha O menu suspenso **"Next time"** define o que acontece em futuras importações e edições para este projeto: * **Ask me every time** (padrão) - mostrar sempre esta caixa de diálogo. * **Save automatically (only products without any cost)** - salvar silenciosamente as linhas seguras "No product cost yet", nunca tocando em produtos que já têm um custo. * **Never ask again** - pular o aviso inteiramente. {% hint style="info" icon="circle-info" %} **O custo de envio não é sincronizado.** A coluna `shipping_cost` é uma entrada do Repricer usada para o seu próprio cálculo de preço min/max e (para vendedores FBM) para os números de lucro. A ação "Save to products" grava apenas o **preço de compra** como COGS - não altera a taxa de envio do produto. {% endhint %} *** ## 🎯 Exemplo Realista **Cenário:** Você vende 500 produtos na Amazon.de e quer configurar reprecificadores para todos com a estratégia BuyBox. 1. **Exporte** seu catálogo atual do Seller Central (ou use a exportação de produtos do SellerMagnet). 2. Abra o arquivo no Excel / Google Sheets. 3. Adicione as colunas obrigatórias: Strategy (`buybox`), Min Price (calculado por produto), Max Price (ex.: 2x seu custo). 4. Salve como CSV. 5. Clique em **Import** na página do Repricer. 6. Revise a pré-visualização: 493 regras válidas, 7 sinalizadas (incompatibilidade de SKU). 7. Corrija os 7 problemas, reenvie. 8. Todos os 500 reprecificadores ativam simultaneamente. **Tempo economizado:** \~8 horas de configuração manual pelo assistente reduzidas a \~30 minutos de trabalho em planilha. ***
⚠️ Erros Comuns a Evitar | Erro | Por Que Prejudica | | --------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------- | | Usar vírgulas em vez de pontos para decimais | O processamento do CSV falha ou os preços ficam incorretos | | Esquecer de corresponder os SKUs exatamente | Regras são rejeitadas porque o SKU não existe no seu catálogo | | Importar sem exportar primeiro | Sem backup para reverter se algo der errado | | Definir o mesmo preço mínimo e máximo | O reprecificador não tem espaço para ajustar preços | | Não verificar a pré-visualização de validação | Erros passam despercebidos e regras não são criadas como esperado |
\## ✅ Melhores Práticas 1. **Sempre exporte antes de importar:** Isso cria um backup que você pode restaurar se a importação produzir resultados inesperados. 2. **Use o arquivo exportado como seu modelo:** Ele garante nomes de colunas e formato corretos. 3. **Valide no Excel primeiro:** Use formatação condicional para sinalizar linhas onde Min Price >= Max Price ou onde campos obrigatórios estão vazios. 4. **Comece com um lote de teste pequeno:** Importe 10-20 regras primeiro, verifique se funcionam corretamente, depois importe o lote completo. 5. **Versione seus arquivos de importação:** Nomeie arquivos com datas (ex.: `repricer-import-2026-04-12.csv`) para trilha de auditoria. *** ## ❓ FAQ
Posso importar regras para múltiplos marketplaces em um único arquivo? Sim. Inclua o identificador do marketplace em cada linha. O sistema processa todos os marketplaces em uma única importação.
O que acontece com regras existentes que não estão no arquivo de importação? Elas não são afetadas. A importação só cria ou atualiza regras para combinações de ASIN + Marketplace + Condition presentes no arquivo.
Existe um tamanho máximo de arquivo para importação? O limite prático é de 10.000 linhas por arquivo de importação. Para catálogos maiores, divida em múltiplos lotes.
Posso excluir regras via importação? Não. A exclusão é feita pela interface do painel (individual ou exclusão em massa). A importação apenas cria e atualiza.
Qual codificação de arquivo devo usar? UTF-8. Isso garante que caracteres especiais em nomes de produtos e SKUs não-ASCII sejam tratados corretamente.
Posso agendar importações automáticas? Não atualmente. As importações são manuais. Para configuração automatizada de reprecificação, use a API (disponível nos planos Enterprise).
*** ## ➡️ O que vem a seguir? {% content-ref url="/pages/rxbKZvLNykyjP2CEy9MS" %} [Criar e Gerenciar Regras de Reprecificador](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/repricer-overview/create-manage-repricer) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/wOlLjyN5SHGJsMrza9KG" %} [Visão Geral do Repricer](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/repricer-overview) {% endcontent-ref %} # Solicitador de Avaliações Automatize os pedidos de avaliacao da Amazon com o SellerMagnet. Envie solicitacoes de avaliacao em conformidade aos compradores, acompanhe as taxas de resposta e aumente as classificacoes dos seus pr {% hint style="info" %} **Dificuldade:** 🟢 Iniciante · **Tempo de leitura:** \~10 min {% endhint %} {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Abra esta pagina no seu dashboard:** [**Ir para o Review Requester →**](https://dashboard.sellermagnet.com/review-request) {% endhint %} ## 📋 Visao geral O **Review Requester** automatiza o processo de envio de emails de pedido de avaliacao em conformidade com a Amazon aos seus compradores. Mais avaliacoes significam melhores rankings de produtos, taxas de conversao mais altas e maior competitividade na Buy Box. O SellerMagnet trata do timing, da segmentacao e do acompanhamento para que voce nunca perca uma oportunidade de recolher feedback. A ferramenta usa o mecanismo oficial "Request a Review" da Amazon, garantindo total conformidade com os Termos de Servico da Amazon. Cada pedido enviado atraves do SellerMagnet e identico a clicar no botao "Request a Review" no Seller Central, mas automatizado em todo o seu historico de encomendas. {% embed url="" %} *** ## 🌟 Por que as Avaliacoes Importam
Ranking de pesquisaProdutos com mais avaliacoes classificam-se mais alto nos resultados de pesquisa da Amazon
Taxa de conversaoAnuncios com mais de 50 avaliacoes convertem 2-3x melhor do que os com 5
Elegibilidade para a Buy BoxA pontuacao de feedback do vendedor influencia a alocacao da Buy Box
Confianca do cliente93% dos consumidores leem avaliacoes antes de comprar
Eficiencia da publicidadeTaxas de conversao mais altas reduzem o seu ACoS (Advertising Cost of Sale) nos Sponsored Products
{% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Dica pro:** A Amazon permite um pedido de avaliacao por encomenda, e os compradores estao mais recetivos assim que o produto chegou e foi usado. O SellerMagnet retem cada encomenda durante um **piso de elegibilidade de 5 dias** antes que possa ser solicitada, e depois envia na **hora de envio diaria** que voce escolher, para que os pedidos cheguem enquanto a compra ainda esta fresca mas o comprador ja teve tempo com o produto. {% endhint %} *** ## 📋 Visao Geral do Dashboard A pagina do Review Requester esta dividida em tres areas principais: {% tabs %} {% tab title="Statistics Panel" %} Quatro metricas KPI no topo mostram a sua atividade de pedidos de avaliacao: | KPI | Descricao | | ------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------ | | **Sent Today** | Numero de pedidos de avaliacao enviados no dia de calendario atual | | **Sent YTD** | Total de pedidos enviados desde o inicio do ano | | **Sent (30d)** | Pedidos enviados nos ultimos 30 dias | | **Sent (All Time)** | Total vitalicio em todos os marketplaces | Estes quatro cartoes dao-lhe as contagens principais, **hoje**, os **ultimos 30 dias**, **desde o inicio do ano** e **todo o tempo**, num relance. Abaixo dos KPIs, um **grafico de tendencia da taxa de envio diaria** representa quantos pedidos sairam em cada um dos **ultimos 30 dias**. Este e o detalhe por tras dos cartoes: permite confirmar que a automacao esta a disparar todos os dias, detetar lacunas onde o envio parou e ver se o seu volume esta a subir ou a descer ao longo do mes. {% endtab %} {% tab title="Latest Seller Reviews" %} Um painel deslizante que mostra o seu feedback de vendedor mais recente em todos os marketplaces. O cabecalho do painel tem tres controlos: | Elemento | Descricao | | ------------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **All marketplaces (N)** | Um selo que aparece quando voce tem **dois ou mais** marketplaces conectados, mostrando quantos estao representados | | **View all reviews** | Abre o modal **Seller Review Details** com os marketplaces de cada conexao fundidos numa unica vista entre contas | | **Default marketplace** | Um chip que indica que o carrossel mostra feedback do seu **marketplace padrao**; clique nele para alterar o padrao em **Settings → Connections** | Cada cartao de vendedor mostra o nome da sua loja, a classificacao por estrelas (com uma barra visual), o total de avaliacoes, a percentagem de **Score** de feedback do vendedor e um botao **View Details**. O slider interno mostra avaliacoes individuais com classificacoes por estrelas, datas e comentarios dos compradores. **Modal Seller Review Details.** Abrir **View Details** (ou **View all reviews**) revela uma analise mais aprofundada: * Uma **distribuicao de feedback** em quatro periodos, **30 dias / 90 dias / 365 dias / Todo o tempo**, dividida em contagens positivas, neutras e negativas. * Uma barra de filtros de feedback recente com **Sentiment** (All / Positive / Neutral / Negative), um filtro **ASIN** e um controlo **Sort** (Newest / Oldest / Most Negative). Quando dois ou mais marketplaces estao representados, tambem aparece um filtro por marketplace. * Acoes por avaliacao negativa: **Open Seller Central case**, **Open Reimbursements** e **Tag investigated** (um marcador local do navegador, armazenado no localStorage). {% endtab %} {% tab title="Order Queue" %} A seccao principal exibe as suas encomendas agrupadas em tres seccoes de acordeao pelo estado do pedido de avaliacao. Cada cabecalho de seccao tem um **selo de contagem** e expande-se para revelar uma tabela. | Seccao | Descricao | Cor do Selo | | ------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------- | | **Waiting** | Encomendas feitas ha menos de 5 dias, ainda dentro do piso de elegibilidade | Azul | | **Ready** | Encomendas que passam nas nossas verificacoes de elegibilidade e podem ser solicitadas agora | Verde | | **Requested** | Historico completo de cada encomenda para a qual foi enviado um pedido | Cinzento | {% hint style="info" %} **Ready e uma estimativa de melhor esforco.** O SellerMagnet marca uma encomenda como **Ready** usando as regras publicas que consegue ver (passado o piso de 5 dias, sem pedido anterior, estado de reembolso). A Amazon ainda aplica regras adicionais por encomenda que nao sao visiveis atraves da API, marketplaces que exigem fatura, sinalizadores de opt-out do cliente, limites de idade da conta e verificacoes de politica de mensagens. Se uma encomenda **Ready** especifica for recusada quando voce clicar em Request, isso e a Amazon a aplicar uma regra privada, nao um erro na lista. A pagina mostra este mesmo aviso como um banner no topo da seccao **Ready**. {% endhint %} {% endtab %} {% endtabs %} *** ## Colunas da Tabela de Encomendas | Coluna | Descricao | | --------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | | **Checkbox** | Selecione encomendas para acoes em massa | | **Fulfillment** | Selo FBA ou FBM | | **Order** | ID da encomenda, data e marketplace | | **Products** | Nome do produto, ASIN (Amazon Standard Identification Number) e imagem em miniatura | | **Unit Price** | Preco por unidade | | **Units** | Quantidade encomendada | | **Gross** | Total da encomenda incluindo impostos | | **Net** | Total da encomenda excluindo impostos | | **Status** | Pilula de estado do pedido de avaliacao (ver abaixo) | | **Active** | Toggle de auto-elegibilidade por encomenda: elegivel para pedidos automaticos, desligue para ignorar esta encomenda especifica | | **Manage** | Botao manual **Send Request** | ### Pilulas de Estado A coluna **Status** mostra uma das seguintes pilulas por linha: | Pilula | Significado | | -------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------ | | **Review Requested** | Foi enviado um pedido para esta encomenda | | **Not Requested** | Elegivel, ainda nenhum pedido enviado | | **Skipped** | Marcada como ignorada na fila (local do navegador, ver abaixo) | | **Failed** | Uma tentativa de pedido falhou | | **Pending...** | Um pedido esta em transito | | **Limit reached** | O limite de pedidos do seu plano foi atingido; atualize para enviar mais | *** ## 🔍 Filtros e Controlos Acima da fila de encomendas voce tem: | Controlo | O que faz | | --------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Refresh** | Recarrega a fila e as contagens | | **Marketplace** | Dropdown para filtrar por um marketplace especifico da Amazon (padrao: All Marketplaces) | | **Filters** | Um popover para filtrar por **Fulfillment**, FBA ou FBM | | **ASIN filter** | Uma caixa de texto livre que restringe as linhas apresentadas a um ASIN correspondente (este e o unico filtro de texto livre na pagina, nao ha pesquisa generica ou filtro de tags) | | **Status** | Um dropdown para filtrar por All Statuses / Requested / Not Requested / Failed | Cada seccao de acordeao esta **paginada em 25 encomendas por pagina** (o servidor limita o tamanho da pagina a 100). *** ## Enviar Pedidos de Avaliacao ![SellerMagnet Review Requester](https://1034596264-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FAUp8wGCBcLktsaowHWoK%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-0e08755ae1b697a24296bcc461bb44bbfb704fc9%2Freview-request.png?alt=media) ### Manual (Individual) 1. Encontre a encomenda na seccao **Ready**. 2. Clique no botao **Send Request** na coluna Manage. 3. Confirme a acao no popup. 4. Em caso de sucesso, a pilula de estado da encomenda passa para **Review Requested** e move-se para o historico **Requested**. ### Pedidos em Massa 1. Selecione varias encomendas usando as checkboxes. Mantenha **Shift** e clique, ou **clique-e-arraste** para baixo na coluna de checkboxes, para selecionar um intervalo de uma so vez. 2. Clique no botao **Bulk** na barra de ferramentas. 3. Confirme a acao em lote. 4. Todas as encomendas elegiveis selecionadas recebem pedidos de avaliacao. ### Acoes em Massa nas Encomendas Selecionadas Assim que voce marca uma ou mais checkboxes, a barra de ferramentas expoe tres acoes de organizacao ao lado de **Bulk**. Elas permitem gerir grandes listas de encomendas sem enviar nada que voce nao pretendia: | Acao | O que faz | | ----------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Tag** | Anexa uma etiqueta curta as encomendas selecionadas para que voce possa agrupa-las e encontra-las mais tarde. Introduza um nome no popover e clique em **Apply**. **As tags sao locais do navegador**, armazenadas no localStorage por projeto, nao sao guardadas no servidor. | | **Skip** | Marca **apenas as encomendas selecionadas** como ignoradas, passando a sua pilula de estado para cinzento **Skipped**. **O estado de Skip tambem e local do navegador**, mantido no localStorage por projeto. O endpoint de Skip e um stub de confirmacao que valida e ecoa a lista de encomendas; nao persiste o skip no servidor. | | **Exclude** | Pega nos produtos por tras das encomendas selecionadas e adiciona-os a sua **lista de exclusao de automacao**. A ferramenta remove ASINs duplicados, resolve cada um para o seu SKU e arquiva-os sob a conexao de marketplace correta, para que esses produtos nunca recebam um pedido automatico nessa loja novamente. Produtos ja na lista sao reportados como duplicados em vez de adicionados duas vezes. | {% hint style="info" %} **Skip vs Exclude, qual quero?** * **Skip** e por **encomenda** e vive apenas no seu navegador. Use-o quando um punhado de encomendas especificas nao devem aparecer (por exemplo, uma encomenda problematica ou uma compra de teste). Porque e armazenado localmente, limpa-se se voce mudar de navegador ou limpar os dados do site, e nao para a automacao no servidor. * **Exclude** e por **produto** e e guardado no servidor por conexao. Use-o quando um ASIN/SKU inteiro deve ficar de fora da automacao daqui em diante, independentemente da encomenda. Adiciona o produto a mesma lista de exclusao por marketplace que voce gere no painel **Automatic**. Em resumo: Skip oculta as encomendas a sua frente (neste navegador), Exclude para o produto de receber pedidos automaticos de vez. {% endhint %} ### Pedidos Automaticos 1. Clique no botao **Automatic** na barra de ferramentas (voce tambem pode ir diretamente para ele com `/review-request#manage-automatic-review-requests`, que a pagina de Settings usa). 2. O painel de automacao abre com um **cartao de configuracoes separado para cada marketplace conectado**, para que voce possa executar regras diferentes por loja. Para cada conexao, voce pode configurar: | Configuracao | Descricao | | ----------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Automation** | O interruptor mestre on/off para pedidos automaticos nessa conexao | | **Daily Send Time** | A hora do dia em que os pedidos saem, escolhida a partir de um dropdown de **hora inteira** definido em **GMT/UTC** (padrao **2 PM**). Uma leitura de **hora local** em direto mostra o equivalente no seu proprio fuso horario para nao haver adivinhacao | | **Enable Scheduling** | Um toggle que liga ou desliga o agendamento da hora de envio diaria. O dropdown de hora e o seu botao **Save** ficam desativados ate o agendamento ser ativado | | **Include Refunded Orders** | Um toggle que decide se as encomendas reembolsadas tambem recebem um pedido. **Desligado por padrao** (recomendado), com um aviso inline, uma vez que solicitar avaliacoes em encomendas reembolsadas tende a atrair avaliacoes negativas | | **Exclude Specific Products** | Uma lista de pesquisa e selecao de produtos a ignorar ao enviar automaticamente (ver abaixo) | {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Dica pro:** Defina a hora de envio diaria para um ponto na tarde ou inicio da noite do comprador no seu mercado local, que e quando os emails "Request a Review" tem maior probabilidade de serem abertos. Use a leitura de hora local para converter de UTC. {% endhint %} #### Excluir Produtos Especificos da Automacao Dentro do cartao de automacao de cada conexao, a seccao **Exclude Specific Products** permite escolher produtos individuais que **nunca** devem receber um pedido de avaliacao automatico, enquanto todas as outras encomendas qualificadas continuam a recebe-lo. * **Pesquise e selecione** produtos por ASIN ou SKU e adicione-os a lista de exclusao. * **Import CSV** para adicionar exclusoes em massa a partir de um ficheiro com colunas `asin`/`sku`, e **Export CSV** para descarregar a sua lista de exclusao atual. * Produtos excluidos sao guardados por conexao, para que voce possa excluir um item num marketplace enquanto ainda solicita avaliacoes para ele noutro. {% hint style="info" %} **Quando usar isto:** Exclua produtos com problemas de qualidade conhecidos, itens sob reclamacao ativa ou SKUs de baixa margem onde avaliacoes extra nao valem o risco, tudo sem desligar a automacao para o resto do seu catalogo. {% endhint %} *** ## Conformidade e Politicas da Amazon {% hint style="danger" %} **Importante:** O SellerMagnet usa a API oficial "Request a Review" da Amazon, que esta em total conformidade com as Diretrizes de Comunicacao da Amazon. No entanto, voce deve estar ciente destas regras: * Voce so pode solicitar uma avaliacao **uma vez por encomenda** * Os pedidos sao elegiveis entre **5 e 30 dias** apos a entrega, do lado da Amazon * Voce **nao pode** incentivar avaliacoes (sem descontos, cupoes ou brindes em troca) * Voce **nao pode** pedir apenas avaliacoes positivas * Voce **nao pode** contactar compradores que optaram por nao receber mensagens do vendedor {% endhint %} O SellerMagnet retem cada encomenda durante um **piso de elegibilidade de 5 dias** antes que possa ser solicitada, e nunca envia mais do que um pedido por encomenda. **Nao** bloqueia rigidamente os pedidos no limite superior de 30 dias: encomendas passado o intervalo ainda podem aparecer como **Ready** numa base de melhor esforco, mas a Amazon rejeita qualquer pedido que caia fora da sua propria janela elegivel. O aviso **Ready** explica que a Amazon tem a palavra final por encomenda. *** ## 🎯 Exemplo Realista **Cenario:** Voce vende na Amazon.de, Amazon.fr e Amazon.it e quer maximizar a recolha de avaliacoes sem passar tempo no Seller Central. **Configuracao:** 1. Abra o painel **Automatic**. 2. Em cada cartao de conexao, ligue o toggle mestre **Automation**. 3. Ligue **Enable Scheduling** e defina a **Daily Send Time** (hora inteira, GMT/UTC), deixando o padrao **2 PM** ou deslocando-o para a tarde local dos seus compradores. 4. Deixe **Include Refunded Orders** **desligado** para que as encomendas reembolsadas nunca recebam um pedido. 5. Adicione quaisquer SKUs problematicos ou de baixa margem a **Exclude Specific Products**. **Como flui:** * Novas encomendas ficam em **Waiting** ate ultrapassarem o piso de elegibilidade de 5 dias. * Assim que elegiveis, movem-se para **Ready** e sao enviadas automaticamente na sua hora de envio diaria (sujeito a Amazon aceitar cada encomenda). * Cada encomenda enviada aterra no historico **Requested**, e os cartoes de KPI e o grafico de tendencia atualizam-se para que voce possa confirmar que a automacao esta a disparar diariamente. Sem automacao, enviar os mesmos pedidos um de cada vez significaria milhares de cliques individuais no Seller Central. *** ## Acompanhar Resultados | Onde Procurar | O que Mostra | | ------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Statistics Panel** | Volume de pedidos enviados ao longo do tempo | | **Trend Chart** | Padroes de envio diario para confirmar a consistencia da automacao | | **Section Count Badges** | Quantas encomendas estao em Waiting, Ready e Requested | | **Latest Seller Reviews** | A sua classificacao geral de vendedor e feedback recente, com o modal Seller Review Details para uma analise mais aprofundada | | **Amazon Seller Central** | Mudancas na contagem de avaliacoes de produtos (cruze com os pedidos) | ***
⚠️ Erros Comuns a Evitar | Erro | Por que Prejudica | | -------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Incluir encomendas reembolsadas na automacao | Compradores reembolsados sao os mais propensos a deixar avaliacoes negativas, mantenha o toggle desligado | | Nao ativar a automacao | Voce esquece-se manualmente de enviar pedidos e perde milhares de avaliacoes | | Tratar uma encomenda Ready como garantida | A Amazon ainda pode recusa-la por regras por encomenda que o SellerMagnet nao consegue ver | | Confiar que Skip ou Tag persistem | Ambos sao locais do navegador, use **Exclude** para um produto que quer manter de fora de vez | | Nao monitorizar o grafico de tendencia | Voce perde falhas ou interrupcoes da automacao |
## ✅ Melhores Praticas 1. **Ative a automacao no dia um:** Configure e esqueca. Cada encomenda elegivel deve receber um pedido de avaliacao. 2. **Use a leitura de hora local:** Converta a hora de envio UTC para a tarde ou inicio da noite local dos seus compradores para as melhores taxas de abertura. 3. **Monitorize a sua pontuacao de feedback de vendedor semanalmente:** Uma pontuacao em queda pode indicar um problema de qualidade do produto que os pedidos de avaliacao estao a revelar. O modal Seller Review Details divide o feedback por 30 dias / 90 dias / 365 dias / Todo o tempo. 4. **Exclua os produtos certos, nao encomendas:** Use **Exclude** (no servidor, por produto) para qualquer coisa que queira manter fora da automacao permanentemente; reserve **Skip** para arrumacao pontual no navegador. 5. **Cruze pedidos com avaliacoes:** Acompanhe o seu volume de pedidos de avaliacao face a nova contagem de avaliacoes para estimar a sua taxa de resposta. A media do setor e de 3-8%. *** ## ❓ FAQ
Usar o Review Requester viola os Termos de Servico da Amazon? Nao. O SellerMagnet usa a API oficial "Request a Review" da Amazon, que e o mesmo mecanismo que o botao no Seller Central. Esta em total conformidade.
Posso personalizar a mensagem do pedido de avaliacao? Nao. O "Request a Review" da Amazon envia um email padronizado da Amazon. Voce nao pode modificar o conteudo, a linha de assunto ou a marca. Isto e intencional para prevenir manipulacao.
O que e uma boa taxa de resposta de avaliacoes? A media do setor e de 3-8%. As taxas de resposta variam por categoria de produto, preco e marketplace. Produtos de preco mais alto e consumiveis tendem a ter taxas de resposta mais altas.
Por que uma encomenda aparece como Ready se a Amazon ainda a rejeita? O SellerMagnet marca uma encomenda como **Ready** usando as regras publicas que consegue ver, passado o piso de 5 dias, sem pedido anterior e estado de reembolso. A Amazon aplica regras extra por encomenda que nao sao visiveis atraves da API (marketplaces que exigem fatura, opt-out do cliente, sinalizadores de politica de mensagens, idade da conta). O SellerMagnet nao bloqueia rigidamente no limite superior de 30 dias, por isso Ready e uma estimativa de melhor esforco e a Amazon decide cada pedido quando voce o envia.
Skip e Tag sao guardados na minha conta? Nao. Tanto **Skip** como **Tag** sao armazenados no localStorage do seu navegador, com escopo por projeto, por isso limpam-se se voce mudar de navegador ou limpar os dados do site. O endpoint de Skip apenas confirma o pedido; nao persiste o skip no servidor. Para manter um produto fora da automacao permanentemente, use **Exclude**, que e guardado no servidor por conexao.
O review requester funciona tanto para avaliacoes de produto como para feedback de vendedor? Sim. O email "Request a Review" da Amazon pede ao comprador tanto uma avaliacao de produto como feedback de vendedor numa unica mensagem.
O que acontece se um comprador ja deixou uma avaliacao? A Amazon impede pedidos duplicados. Se um comprador ja avaliou o produto, o pedido simplesmente nao e enviado (ou e ignorado pelo sistema da Amazon).
Posso excluir produtos especificos dos pedidos automaticos de avaliacao? Sim. Abra o painel **Automatic** e, na seccao **Exclude Specific Products** da conexao, pesquise e selecione os produtos que quer ignorar (ou importe-os em massa a partir de um CSV com colunas `asin`/`sku`). Produtos excluidos sao guardados por conexao e nunca recebem um pedido automatico, enquanto todas as outras encomendas qualificadas continuam a receber.
*** ## ➡️ Proximos Passos {% content-ref url="/pages/MnpWbIzgQZ0bauaQTMxf" %} [Otimizador de Anúncios](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/G7ggh8hoxM7B3ffhTMId" %} [Buscador de produtos](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/product-sourcer-overview) {% endcontent-ref %} # Otimizador de Anúncios Otimize seus anúncios na Amazon com análise baseada em IA. Obtenha uma pontuação de qualidade do anúncio, recomendações práticas para título, bullet points, descrição, imagens e cobertura de palavras- {% hint style="info" %} **Dificuldade:** 🟡 Intermediário · **Tempo de leitura:** \~10 min {% endhint %} {% embed url="" %} {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Abrir esta página no seu painel:** [**Ir para Otimizador de Anúncios →**](https://dashboard.sellermagnet.com/listing-optimizer) {% endhint %} ## 📋 Visão Geral O **Otimizador de Anúncios** usa IA para analisar seus anúncios de produtos na Amazon e fornecer uma pontuação de qualidade completa com recomendações práticas. Ele avalia seu título, bullet points, descrição, imagens e cobertura de palavras-chave, e então informa exatamente o que melhorar, e como, para aumentar a visibilidade nas buscas e as taxas de conversão. Pense nisso como uma auditoria profissional de anúncios que roda em segundos em vez de horas. A página tem duas partes, acessíveis pelas abas no topo: * O **analisador clássico** (a primeira metade desta página) - cole qualquer ASIN, obtenha uma pontuação de qualidade, palavras-chave ranqueadas e uma lista de verificação de correções de melhores práticas para aplicar você mesmo no Seller Central. Ótimo para uma auditoria rápida ou para verificar um concorrente. * **Listing Manager AI** (a aba **Listing Manager**) - uma suíte completa que pontua todo o seu catálogo, **reescreve** título, bullets, descrição, palavras-chave e até imagens com IA, e pode **enviar as mudanças de volta para o seu anúncio ao vivo na Amazon** por você. Veja [Listing Manager AI](#listing-manager-ai) abaixo. {% hint style="warning" %} **Disponibilidade:** O **analisador clássico** e o **Title Checker** desta página estão disponíveis para todos. As ferramentas do **Listing Manager AI** (Listing Quality, Keyword Research, A+ Content, Variations, Listing Builder, Listing Agent) são lançadas **por conta**. Enquanto a sua está pendente, você verá uma pequena **ampulheta âmbar** ao lado desses itens no menu **Listing-Manager** e uma nota "you're on the list" ao abrir um deles - nós os ativamos conta por conta, sem cobrança até você decidir mantê-los. {% endhint %} *** ## Acessando o Otimizador de Anúncios 1. Faça login no seu painel do SellerMagnet. 2. Navegue até **Otimizador de Anúncios** no menu lateral esquerdo. 3. A página abre com um cartão de busca no topo. *** ## Analisando um Anúncio ![SellerMagnet Listing Optimizer](https://1034596264-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FAUp8wGCBcLktsaowHWoK%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-35fa4baf1c1b98553871d226701c6656b1963fbb%2Flisting-optimizer.png?alt=media) ### Etapa 1: Selecione um Produto Use o cartão de busca para encontrar o produto que deseja otimizar: | Método de Entrada | Descrição | | ------------------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Lista suspensa de produtos** | Pesquise seu catálogo ativo por ASIN (Amazon Standard Identification Number), SKU (Stock Keeping Unit) ou nome do produto | | **Entrada manual de ASIN** | Digite qualquer ASIN para analisar até anúncios de concorrentes | ### Etapa 2: Clique em Analisar Clique no botão **Analisar**. O sistema inicia uma análise em várias etapas: 1. **Buscando dados do anúncio:** Recupera o anúncio atual ao vivo na Amazon 2. **Análise por IA:** Avalia cada elemento do anúncio em relação às melhores práticas 3. **Pesquisa de palavras-chave:** Identifica palavras-chave relevantes e verifica a cobertura 4. **Cálculo da pontuação:** Gera uma pontuação geral de qualidade Um esqueleto de carregamento aparece durante o processamento, normalmente concluindo em 10-20 segundos. *** ## 📋 Visão Geral dos Resultados Após a conclusão da análise, os resultados aparecem em três seções principais: ### 1. Cartão Principal do Produto Exibe os detalhes principais do produto analisado: | Elemento | Descrição | | -------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------- | | **Imagem do produto** | Imagem principal do anúncio | | **Badge ASIN** | Identificador Amazon com link direto para o anúncio | | **Título do produto** | Título completo do anúncio como aparece na Amazon | | **Avaliação por estrelas** | Avaliação média dos clientes com estrelas visuais | | **Contagem de avaliações** | Número total de avaliações de clientes | | **Categoria** | Categoria principal do produto na Amazon | ### 2. Pontuação de Qualidade do Anúncio Um indicador circular exibe a pontuação geral de qualidade (0-100): | Faixa de Pontuação | Classificação | Cor | Significado | | ------------------ | ------------- | ----------- | --------------------------------------------------------- | | 90-100 | Excelente | 🟢 Verde | Anúncio altamente otimizado; pequenos ajustes possíveis | | 70-89 | Bom | 🔵 Azul | Anúncio sólido com espaço para melhorias significativas | | 50-69 | Regular | 🟠 Laranja | Várias áreas precisam de atenção; potencial significativo | | 0-49 | Fraco | 🔴 Vermelho | Problemas graves; anúncio precisa de uma revisão completa | A pontuação usa um modelo de penalização simples e transparente: começa em **100** e subtrai **5 pontos fixos por cada recomendação que o anúncio não cumpre**, até um piso de **20**. Cada verificação tem o mesmo peso, então o número é determinado puramente por *quantas* recomendações estão por cumprir, não por quais especificamente. Na prática, corrigir seu título e imagens normalmente entrega os maiores ganhos reais em ranking de busca e conversão, então ao decidir o que trabalhar primeiro, comece por aí, apenas lembre-se de que, para a pontuação em si, cada correção que você conclui vale os mesmos 5 pontos. {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Dica profissional:** Não se fixe em alcançar 100. Uma pontuação de 85+ significa que seu anúncio está com bom desempenho. Concentre-se nas recomendações específicas que têm maior impacto no ranking de busca e na conversão. {% endhint %} ### 3. Grade de Recomendações As recomendações são organizadas em grupos, cada um exibido como um cartão: | Grupo | Ícone | O Que Avalia | | -------------- | -------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | | **Geral** | 🔵 Azul | Comprimento do título, limites de caracteres, densidade de palavras-chave, estrutura geral | | **Mídia** | 🟠 Âmbar | Quantidade de imagens, qualidade das imagens, presença de A+ Content, vídeo | | **Avaliações** | 🟢 Verde | Quantidade de avaliações, nota, resposta a avaliações negativas | Cada cartão de recomendação contém itens individuais com indicadores de aprovação/reprovação: | Indicador | Significado | | ----------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Check verde | Este elemento atende ou supera as melhores práticas | | X vermelho | Este elemento precisa de melhoria; orientação específica é fornecida | *** ## Detalhes das Recomendações {% tabs %} {% tab title="Título" %} | Verificação | Melhor Prática | | --------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Comprimento** | 150-200 caracteres (limites específicos por marketplace se aplicam) | | **Posicionamento da palavra-chave principal** | A palavra-chave principal deve aparecer nos primeiros 80 caracteres | | **Nome da marca** | O nome da marca deve aparecer no início | | **Excesso de palavras-chave** | Evite repetir a mesma palavra-chave mais de duas vezes | | **Caracteres especiais** | Evite TUDO EM MAIÚSCULAS, pontuação excessiva ou linguagem promocional | | {% endtab %} | | {% tab title="Bullets" %} | Verificação | Melhor Prática | | -------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------- | | **Quantidade** | Use todos os 5 bullet points | | **Comprimento por bullet** | 150-250 caracteres cada | | **Estrutura recurso-benefício** | Comece com o recurso, siga com o benefício | | **Integração de palavras-chave** | Inclua palavras-chave relevantes naturalmente | | **Legibilidade** | Use caixa normal, evite TUDO EM MAIÚSCULAS, evite jargão | | {% endtab %} | | {% tab title="Descrição" %} | Verificação | Melhor Prática | | ------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------ | | **Presença de A+ Content** | Vendedores com registro de marca devem sempre usar A+ Content | | **Comprimento da descrição** | Mínimo de 1.000 caracteres se não houver A+ Content | | **Formatação HTML** | Use formatação básica para legibilidade (negrito, parágrafos) | | **Cobertura de palavras-chave** | Inclua palavras-chave secundárias não usadas no título ou bullets | | **Links de venda cruzada** | O A+ Content deve vincular a produtos relacionados do seu catálogo | | {% endtab %} | | {% tab title="Imagens" %} | Verificação | Melhor Prática | | ------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Quantidade de imagens** | Mínimo de 6 imagens; idealmente 7-9 | | **Imagem principal** | Fundo branco, produto preenchendo 85%+ do quadro | | **Imagens lifestyle** | Pelo menos 2 imagens mostrando o produto em uso | | **Imagens infográficas** | Pelo menos 1 imagem destacando recursos principais com texto sobreposto | | **Resolução das imagens** | Mínimo 1000x1000 pixels para funcionalidade de zoom | | {% endtab %} | | {% tab title="Palavras-chave" %} Abaixo das recomendações, uma **Tabela de Palavras-Chave** mostra as palavras-chave para as quais o anúncio é ranqueado, divididas em listas de cauda curta (1-2 palavras) e cauda longa (3+ palavras). Cada tabela tem três colunas: | Coluna | Descrição | | ----------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Palavra-chave** | Termo de busca relevante para seu produto | | **Contagem** | Com que frequência a palavra-chave ocorre ao longo do anúncio | | **Pontuação** | Uma medida ponderada da relevância da palavra-chave, combinando frequência e posicionamento no título, descrição e bullets | Ambas as tabelas podem ser ordenadas por qualquer coluna (a ordenação padrão é por **Pontuação**, decrescente) e incluem uma caixa de busca para filtrar as linhas. Use o menu **Export** para baixar os dados de palavras-chave como **CSV** ou **Excel** para análise adicional, a exportação contém **ambas** as tabelas de cauda curta e cauda longa em um único arquivo. {% endtab %} {% endtabs %} *** ## Seção de Insights O cartão de **Insights** fornece um detalhamento de cada atributo do anúncio: | Atributo | O Que Mostra | | ----------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------- | | **Título** | Título atual completo com notas de análise | | **Bullet Points** | Cada bullet point com pontuações individuais | | **Descrição** | Texto da descrição atual com análise de formatação | | **Palavras-Chave do Backend** | Termos de busca ocultos (se acessíveis) | | **Variações** | Lista de variações do produto com links | | **Imagens** | Grade de miniaturas de todas as imagens do anúncio | *** ## Title Checker O Otimizador de Anúncios inclui um modo dedicado de **Title Checker** para analisar um único título isoladamente, sem necessidade de uma análise completa do anúncio. Mude para ele com a aba **Title Checker** no topo da página (você também pode acessá-lo diretamente via deep-link com `#title-checker`). Antes de analisar, escolha o idioma do marketplace no **seletor de idioma**. O verificador vem com um conjunto completo de regras para **8 idiomas**, inglês, alemão, italiano, francês, espanhol, polonês, português e sueco, para que as verificações de frases promocionais, stop-words e capitalização sejam avaliadas conforme as convenções do marketplace onde você realmente vende, em vez dos padrões do inglês. Cole ou digite qualquer título e clique em **Analisar Título**. O verificador o pontua em relação às regras de estilo de título da Amazon e retorna: | Saída | O Que Mostra | | ---------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Pontuação de conformidade** | Uma pontuação de 0-100 para o quão bem o título segue as regras da Amazon | | **Medidor de caracteres** | Contagem de caracteres em relação ao limite recomendado (ex.: 0/200) | | **Medidores de largura em pixels** | Largura renderizada em **desktop** e **mobile**, para que você saiba se o título será truncado nos resultados de busca | | **Lista de verificações** | Um detalhamento de aprovação/reprovação de cada regra, filtrável por **All**, **Issues** ou **Passed** | | **Sugestões** | Correções concretas para cada problema encontrado | | **Prévias ao vivo** | Prévias em desktop e mobile de como o título aparecerá na Amazon | A pontuação é dedutiva: um título começa com 100 pontos e perde pontos por violação com base na severidade, problemas críticos (violações de comprimento, conteúdo proibido ou promocional, marcas registradas) custam mais, depois problemas moderados (repetição de palavras-chave, erros de digitação, estrutura ausente), depois os menores (pontuação, capitalização, espaços em branco). Uma pontuação de **80+** significa que o título está bem otimizado. Você pode **copiar os resultados** ou clicar em **Verificar Outro Título** para executar um novo. ### Caracteres proibidos e contextuais A Amazon não permite certos símbolos nos títulos de produto, e o Title Checker os sinaliza para você. Dois conjuntos são verificados: | Conjunto | Caracteres | Como o verificador os trata | | ----------------------------- | ----------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Sempre proibidos** | `!` `$` `?` `_` `{` `}` `^` `¬` `¦` | Sinalizados como violação sempre que aparecem, remova-os do título | | **Contextuais (decorativos)** | `~` `#` `<` `>` `*` | Permitidos em usos legítimos (por exemplo, um número de modelo), mas **avisados** quando usados de forma decorativa, como para criar ênfase ou separadores | {% hint style="info" %} **Por que isso importa:** Títulos que contêm os caracteres sempre proibidos podem ser suprimidos ou ter os símbolos ofensivos removidos pela Amazon, o que quebra a legibilidade. Limpar esses sinalizadores antes de publicar mantém seu título intacto nos resultados de busca. {% endhint %} {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Dica profissional:** Coloque suas palavras-chave ranqueadas de maior pontuação perto do início do título, depois passe-o pelo Title Checker para confirmar que ele permanece dentro dos limites de pixels tanto em desktop quanto em mobile antes de publicar. {% endhint %} *** ## 🤖 Listing Manager AI O analisador clássico acima informa o que corrigir e deixa a edição por sua conta no Seller Central. O **Listing Manager AI** vai até o fim: ele pontua cada produto do seu catálogo, **reescreve** as partes fracas com IA e **envia as mudanças aprovadas de volta para o seu anúncio ao vivo na Amazon** através da API da Amazon - sem copiar e colar no Seller Central. Abra as ferramentas pelo submenu **Listing-Manager** na barra lateral esquerda, ou pelos cartões de lançamento na aba **Listing Manager** da página do Otimizador de Anúncios. Cada ferramenta é o seu próprio espaço de trabalho em página inteira, e cada uma tem o seu próprio guia detalhado: | Ferramenta | O que faz | | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | [**Listing Quality**](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview/listing-quality) | Pontua e corrige anúncios em todo o seu catálogo - o espaço de trabalho principal | | [**Keyword Research**](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview/keyword-research) | Veja quais dos seus próprios termos de busca estão em alta, em queda ou totalmente novos | | [**A+ Content**](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview/aplus-content) | Gerencie, edite e edite com IA os seus documentos de A+ Content | | [**Variations**](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview/listing-variations) | Agrupe famílias de variação pai/filho dentro do SellerMagnet | | [**Listing Builder**](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview/listing-builder) | Um assistente de 4 etapas para criar um anúncio totalmente novo do zero | | [**Listing Agent**](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview/listing-agent) | A IA escaneia seu catálogo, redige novo texto por campo e envia produtos selecionados em lotes | Três ideias funcionam da mesma forma em toda a suíte. Entenda-as uma vez e cada ferramenta faz sentido. ### 1. A Pontuação LQI (Listing Quality Index) Cada anúncio recebe uma **pontuação LQI de 0 a 100**. Diferente do modelo de penalização fixa do analisador clássico, o LQI é simplesmente a **proporção de verificações que seu anúncio passa** - são **37 verificações** entre o título e os bullet points, além de sinais de imagem, descrição, A+, vídeo e avaliações. Cada verificação reprovada mostra **por que ela importa** e **quantos pontos de qualidade** você recuperaria ao corrigi-la, para que você possa trabalhar por maior impacto primeiro. | Pontuação LQI | Tier | | ------------- | ------------- | | 80-100 | **Excellent** | | 60-79 | **Good** | | 40-59 | **Average** | | 0-39 | **Poor** | As verificações são rotuladas por severidade - **Critical**, **Moderate**, **Minor** ou **Pass** - e duas subpontuações (uma **Title Compliance Score** e uma **Bullet Quality Score**) permitem ver rapidamente qual metade do anúncio está prejudicando você. A lista completa de verificações e como corrigir cada uma ficam na página [Listing Quality](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview/listing-quality). ### 2. A IA está incluída - nenhuma chave de API necessária A IA roda nos próprios modelos do SellerMagnet; você não traz nem paga pela sua própria chave da OpenAI ou Gemini - o provedor é gerenciado por você. O uso é medido a partir de uma **cota mensal de créditos** incluída no seu plano. Em **AI Settings** você pode escolher o modelo de **texto** e de **imagem** e ver seus créditos restantes. Sempre que você gera conteúdo, está trabalhando em um de quatro **modos** - **Create** (escrever um campo do zero), **Optimize** (melhorar o que já existe), **Competitor** (colar o título de um rival como a meta a bater) ou **Translate** (localizar no idioma do marketplace). Cada prompt tem o guia de estilo da Amazon integrado (Title Case, limites de caracteres, sem linguagem promocional, sem emojis ou símbolos proibidos, estrutura com a marca primeiro, palavras-chave no início), então a saída é compatível por construção e depois re-verificada pelas 37 verificações de qualidade. **Quanto custam as ações de IA.** Os créditos vêm de **uma única carteira compartilhada** que também alimenta o [Bulk Sourcer](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/product-sourcer-overview/bulk-sourcer), reabastecida a cada ciclo de faturamento: | Ação de IA | Custo aprox. | | -------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Gerar texto** (título, um bullet, descrição, palavras-chave) | Medido por comprimento - cerca de **300 a 800 créditos** por campo, com um mínimo de **100 créditos** | | **Gerar uma imagem** (AI Image Studio) | Fixo, cerca de **5.000 créditos** por imagem | | Plano | Créditos mensais | | -------------- | ---------------- | | **Lite** | 10.000 | | **Standard** | 25.000 | | **Premium** | 50.000 | | **Enterprise** | 120.000 | {% hint style="info" %} **Bom saber:** os créditos são gastos primeiro da sua **cota mensal**, depois de quaisquer **créditos de recarga** que você tenha comprado. Pontuar e escanear anúncios é grátis - apenas a **geração de IA** (texto e imagens) gasta créditos. Como a carteira é compartilhada com o Bulk Sourcer, uma semana intensa de análise em massa deixa menos créditos para IA, e vice-versa. Veja [Planos e Faturamento](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/outras-secoes/plans-and-billing) para as cotas atuais e recargas. {% endhint %} ### 3. Enviando mudanças para a Amazon - rascunho primeiro, depois em fila {% hint style="warning" %} **Rascunho vs. ao vivo - os botões dizem qual é qual.** Cada ação é rotulada com sua consequência: **"Applies to the draft - not sent to Amazon"** versus **"Publishes to your live Amazon listing."** Nada chega à Amazon até você explicitamente enviá-lo e escolher os elementos. {% endhint %} {% hint style="info" %} **A Amazon coloca suas mudanças em fila - ela não as aplica instantaneamente.** Um envio bem-sucedido significa que a Amazon **aceitou a submissão em sua fila**; o anúncio é atualizado quando a Amazon termina de validá-lo, e a Amazon ainda pode rejeitar uma mudança durante essa validação. O SellerMagnet mantém um registro do que foi enviado, permite acompanhar o status da submissão e permite **reverter** uma mudança. Uma verificação de política de conteúdo integrada também bloqueia textos sabidamente problemáticos antes mesmo de serem submetidos. {% endhint %} {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Fluxo de trabalho sugerido:** Execute o [**Listing Agent**](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview/listing-agent) para ver onde está o dano em todo o seu catálogo, corrija primeiro seus anúncios de pior pontuação e maior receita no [**Listing Quality**](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview/listing-quality) (rascunho de IA, revisar, enviar), verifique o [**Keyword Research**](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview/keyword-research) em busca de termos em alta para trabalhar no texto, depois re-escaneie para confirmar que o LQI subiu. Trate a saída da IA como um forte primeiro rascunho - sempre leia antes de enviá-la ao vivo. {% endhint %} ### Explore a suíte {% content-ref url="/pages/JZZiVAeUhBqMEJ7Ynabt" %} [Listing Quality](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview/listing-quality) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/gMNIdUztU9RscC9hrlZH" %} [Keyword Research](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview/keyword-research) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/QCMGXFg8Bjwms3IlKsyl" %} [A+ Content](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview/aplus-content) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/QjrRmtLUviMsfKfAwkea" %} [Variations](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview/listing-variations) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/MDZ2cYg2t3UOVVhOyVmk" %} [Listing Builder](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview/listing-builder) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/x7xmg3FhLOr6jx7byinT" %} [Listing Agent](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview/listing-agent) {% endcontent-ref %} *** ## 🎯 Exemplo Realista **Cenário:** Você vende uma garrafa térmica de aço inoxidável na Amazon.de. Seu anúncio tem uma pontuação de 62/100. **Principais descobertas:** * O título tem apenas 85 caracteres (recomendado: 150-200). Faltam termos de busca importantes. * Apenas 3 de 5 bullet points utilizados. * Sem A+ Content apesar de ter Registro de Marca. * Apenas 4 imagens enviadas (recomendado: 7+). * Palavra-chave principal "edelstahl trinkflasche" ausente do título. **Após implementar as recomendações:** * Adicionou palavras-chave ao título, estendendo para 175 caracteres * Escreveu 5 bullet points completos com estrutura recurso-benefício * Criou A+ Content com tabelas comparativas e imagens lifestyle * Enviou 8 imagens incluindo infográficos e fotos lifestyle * Adicionou palavras-chave faltantes nos termos de busca do backend **Resultado:** A pontuação melhorou de 62 para 88. Nos 30 dias seguintes, as impressões de busca orgânica aumentaram 45% e a taxa de conversão melhorou de 8,2% para 12,7%. ***
⚠️ Erros Comuns a Evitar | Erro | Por Que Prejudica | | --------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Excesso de palavras-chave no título | A Amazon penaliza títulos ilegíveis; conversões caem | | Ignorar a formatação dos bullet points | Bullets com texto em bloco não são lidos; a estrutura importa | | Não usar todos os espaços de imagem disponíveis | Você perde oportunidade de venda visual e parece menos profissional | | Pular A+ Content quando tem Registro de Marca | A+ Content pode aumentar a conversão em 5-10% | | Otimizar uma vez e nunca revisitar | Concorrentes melhoram; palavras-chave sazonais mudam; re-otimize trimestralmente | | Otimizar apenas para busca sem considerar conversão | Alto tráfego com baixa conversão desperdiça gastos com publicidade |
\## ✅ Melhores Práticas 1. **Otimize seus produtos mais vendidos primeiro:** Comece com seus 10 ASINs de maior receita. Melhorias aqui têm o maior impacto absoluto. 2. **Implemente as recomendações de maior impacto primeiro:** Otimização de título e melhorias de imagem normalmente geram os maiores ganhos. 3. **Re-análise após fazer mudanças:** Execute o otimizador novamente após atualizar seu anúncio para verificar melhorias e detectar problemas restantes. 4. **Use a exportação de palavras-chave para** [**PPC**](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/gestao-ppc-beta/ppc-manager-overview)**:** Palavras-chave identificadas pelo otimizador que estão ausentes do seu anúncio são excelentes candidatas para campanhas de Sponsored Products. 5. **Compare com concorrentes:** Analise ASINs de concorrentes para ver o que eles estão fazendo bem que você não está. 6. **Revise anúncios trimestralmente:** Tendências de busca, atualizações do algoritmo da Amazon e atividade dos concorrentes mudam com o tempo. Re-otimização regular mantém você competitivo. *** ## ❓ FAQ
Posso analisar anúncios de concorrentes? Sim. Digite qualquer ASIN no campo de busca, mesmo que não seja seu produto. Isso permite que você compare seus anúncios com os principais concorrentes.
Como a pontuação de qualidade é calculada? A pontuação começa em 100 e perde 5 pontos fixos por cada recomendação que seu anúncio não cumpre, até um mínimo de 20. Cada recomendação conta igualmente, então a pontuação reflete **quantas** verificações você falha em vez de uma ponderação por elemento. Corrigir problemas de título e imagem tende a ter o maior impacto nas suas vendas reais, mas para a pontuação em si, cada correção concluída soma de volta os mesmos 5 pontos.
Melhorar minha pontuação do anúncio garante mais vendas? Não é garantido, mas fortemente correlacionado. Um anúncio de maior qualidade rankeia melhor nas buscas, converte mais visitantes em compradores e tem melhor desempenho com publicidade.
Com que frequência devo re-analisar meus anúncios? Mensalmente para os mais vendidos, trimestralmente para o restante do catálogo. Também re-analise após qualquer mudança no anúncio para confirmar melhorias.
O otimizador verifica os termos de busca do backend? Ele analisa a cobertura de palavras-chave e identifica termos que devem estar nos seus campos de busca do backend. O acesso direto aos termos do backend depende da disponibilidade da API da Amazon.
Posso exportar as recomendações? A tabela de palavras-chave suporta exportação em CSV. O conjunto completo de recomendações pode ser capturado via captura de tela ou copiar e colar para compartilhar com sua equipe ou redator.
O otimizador funciona para todos os marketplaces da Amazon? Sim. A análise se adapta às regras específicas de cada marketplace (por exemplo, limites de caracteres do título diferem por marketplace).
O SellerMagnet pode realmente atualizar meu anúncio na Amazon, ou apenas me aconselha? Ambos, dependendo de qual parte você usa. O **analisador clássico** (primeira metade desta página) é consultivo - você aplica as correções você mesmo no Seller Central. O **Listing Manager AI** (a aba Listing Manager) pode **enviar mudanças de volta para o seu anúncio ao vivo na Amazon** através da API da Amazon. Você sempre revisa o rascunho da IA e escolhe quais elementos enviar primeiro; nada é submetido automaticamente.
Minhas mudanças entram no ar na Amazon imediatamente? Não. Quando você envia, a Amazon aceita a mudança **em sua fila** e a aplica após validar - e ela ainda pode rejeitar uma mudança durante essa etapa. O SellerMagnet registra cada submissão, permite acompanhar seu status e permite reverter. Trate como submeter uma edição no Seller Central, não uma edição instantânea.
A IA precisa da minha própria chave da OpenAI ou Gemini, e custa a mais? Nenhuma chave necessária - a IA roda nos próprios modelos do SellerMagnet e está incluída no seu plano. O uso é retirado de uma **cota mensal de créditos** (compartilhada com o Bulk Sourcer). Você pode escolher o modelo de texto e de imagem e ver seus créditos restantes em **AI Settings**.
*** ## ➡️ O que vem a seguir? {% content-ref url="/pages/W8s2JvP0wQypGwgtwiia" %} [Solicitador de Avaliações](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/review-requester-overview) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/G7ggh8hoxM7B3ffhTMId" %} [Buscador de produtos](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/product-sourcer-overview) {% endcontent-ref %} # Listing Quality Pontue cada anúncio do seu catálogo com 37 verificações de título e bullet, corrija os campos fracos à mão ou com IA e envie as mudanças aprovadas de volta para o seu anúncio ao vivo na Amazon - tudo {% hint style="info" %} **Dificuldade:** 🟡 Intermediário · **Tempo de leitura:** \~12 min {% endhint %} {% hint style="warning" %} **Disponibilidade:** o Listing Quality faz parte da suíte **Listing Manager AI**, que é lançada **por conta**. Enquanto a sua está pendente, você verá uma ampulheta âmbar ao lado dele no menu **Listing-Manager** e uma nota "you're on the list" ao abri-lo - sem cobrança até você decidir mantê-lo. É necessário ter uma conta Amazon conectada. Veja [Listing Optimizer](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview). {% endhint %} ## 📋 Visão Geral O **Listing Quality** é o espaço de trabalho principal da suíte Listing Manager AI. Ele pontua cada produto do seu catálogo, diz exatamente quais partes de cada anúncio estão fracas e por quê, permite que você as corrija à mão ou com IA, e envia as mudanças aprovadas de volta para o seu anúncio ao vivo na Amazon através da API da Amazon - sem copiar e colar no Seller Central. Enquanto o analisador clássico do [Listing Optimizer](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview) audita um ASIN por vez e deixa a edição por sua conta, o Listing Quality foi feito para trabalhar em todo o seu catálogo e fechar o ciclo: analisar, editar, enviar, verificar. Cada anúncio carrega uma **pontuação LQI (Listing Quality Index) de 0 a 100**. O LQI é simplesmente a **proporção de verificações que o anúncio passa** - o backend conta quantas verificações passaram do total e expressa isso como um percentual. Se um anúncio passa em 30 de 37 verificações, seu LQI é aproximadamente 81. Como a pontuação é uma taxa de aprovação simples, cada verificação que você corrige move o número numa quantidade previsível, e as verificações reprovadas dizem exatamente onde estão os pontos. ### Tiers Cada pontuação LQI mapeia para um tier, mostrado como um selo colorido na tabela e no painel de detalhes: | Pontuação LQI | Tier | Cor | | ------------- | ------------- | ----------- | | 80-100 | **Excellent** | 🟢 Verde | | 60-79 | **Good** | 🟢 Verde | | 40-59 | **Average** | 🟠 Âmbar | | 0-39 | **Poor** | 🔴 Vermelho | ### Rótulos de severidade Cada verificação individual é rotulada por quanto ela importa, para que você possa triar as reprovadas por maior impacto primeiro: | Severidade | Significado | | ------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Critical** | Um problema de política ou truncamento que pode suprimir o anúncio ou ocultar suas palavras-chave - corrija estas primeiro | | **Moderate** | Prejudica a legibilidade, o ranking ou a conversão, mas não fará você ser suprimido | | **Minor** | Polimento cosmético ou de estilo | | **Pass** | A verificação passa - nada a fazer | ### Subpontuações Ao lado do LQI geral, duas subpontuações dividem o anúncio nas suas duas metades mais editadas para que você veja num relance qual delas está prejudicando você: * **Title Compliance Score** - o quão bem o título segue as regras de título da Amazon (as 25 verificações de título abaixo). * **Bullet Quality Score** - o quão bem os bullet points estão escritos e formatados (as 12 verificações de bullet abaixo). *** ## ✅ As 37 Verificações de Qualidade O LQI é construído a partir de **37 verificações**: **25 no título** e **12 nos bullet points**. Além dessas, o Listing Quality também lê vários **sinais de catálogo** - imagens, descrição, A+ Content, vídeo, contagem de avaliações e nota - que aparecem como suas próprias colunas e contribuem para o quadro, mesmo que a contagem central de verificações seja o conjunto título-mais-bullet. Cada verificação reprovada no painel de detalhes mostra um motivo em linguagem clara (**"Why this matters"**) e quantos pontos de qualidade você recupera ao corrigi-la. ### Verificações de título (25) {% tabs %} {% tab title="Comprimento e truncamento" %} | Verificação | O que ela procura | | ---------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Character Length** | Título na faixa de 80-150; títulos longos demais são truncados ou suprimidos | | **Desktop Truncation** | A largura em pixels renderizada cabe na busca desktop - o título começa a ser cortado no desktop por volta de 1100px, com um aviso a partir de cerca de 900px | | **Mobile Truncation** | A largura em pixels renderizada cabe na busca mobile, onde está a maior parte do tráfego da Amazon - o título é cortado após cerca de 580px | | **Keyword Density** | Palavras-chave descritivas suficientes (os melhores títulos usam 6-10) | | {% endtab %} | | {% tab title="Política e conformidade" %} | Verificação | O que ela procura | | ------------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | | **All-Caps** | Nenhuma palavra em maiúsculas (um gatilho comum de supressão) | | **Promotional Language** | Nenhum "sale", "best seller", "free shipping" e afirmações proibidas similares | | **Amazon Trademark** | Nenhum outro nome de marca que arrisque uma reclamação de PI | | **Regulatory Phrases** | Nenhum texto restrito ou com cara de afirmação | | **URLs / Email / Phone** | Nenhum dado de contato, que é uma violação de política num título | | **Price / Currency** | Nenhum preço - ele muda e a Amazon o proíbe | | **Internal Codes** | Nenhum código ASIN, SKU ou UPC vazando para o título | | {% endtab %} | | {% tab title="Caracteres e formatação" %} | Verificação | O que ela procura | | ------------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Forbidden Characters** | Nenhum dos caracteres que a Amazon rejeita em títulos | | **Emojis & Symbols** | Nenhum emoji ou símbolo (removidos ou rejeitados pela Amazon) | | **HTML Tags / Entities** | Nenhum código HTML perdido | | **Number Formatting** | Numerais em vez de números por extenso | | **Punctuation** | Nenhuma reticência, ponto e vírgula ou colchete sem par | | **Extra Whitespace** | Nenhum espaço duplo | | **Leading / Trailing** | Nenhum espaço ou pontuação no início/fim | | {% endtab %} | | {% tab title="Estilo e estrutura" %} | Verificação | O que ela procura | | -------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Title Case** | Title case consistente e profissional | | **Brand & Structure** | Começa com a marca e separa os atributos com clareza | | **Consecutive Duplicates** | Nenhuma palavra adjacente repetida | | **Keyword Repetition** | Nenhuma palavra-chave repetida (a Amazon a indexa uma vez) | | **Condition Terms** | Nenhuma palavra de condição que pertence ao campo de condição | | **Placeholder Text** | Nenhum texto de espaço reservado remanescente | | **Typo Detection** | Nenhum erro de digitação óbvio | | {% endtab %} | | | {% endtabs %} | | ### Verificações de bullet (12) | Verificação | O que ela procura | | ----------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Pelo menos 5 bullet points** | Anúncios com 5 bullets convertem melhor | | **Cada bullet ≥ 150 caracteres** | Bullets muito curtos desperdiçam o bloco de maior atenção da página | | **Cada bullet ≤ 250 caracteres** | Bullets longos demais somem atrás de "read more" | | **Total de caracteres ≤ 1000** | Passados \~1000 caracteres a Amazon para de indexar o resto | | **Começa com maiúscula** | Bullets que começam em minúscula parecem inacabados | | **Sem emojis nos bullets** | A Amazon remove ou rejeita emoji | | **Sem caracteres proibidos** | Certos caracteres podem bloquear totalmente a atualização do bullet | | **Abre com um benefício** | Comece com o benefício, não com o nome do recurso | | **Declara uma especificação mensurável** | Dê um detalhe concreto e mensurável | | **Responde ao encaixe ou ao que está incluído** | Aborde compatibilidade ou conteúdo | | **Diz para quem é** | Diga para quem o produto é | | **Não se repete** | Nenhuma repetição entre os bullets | {% hint style="info" %} **Por que as verificações são redigidas em torno das próprias regras da Amazon.** Estas não são dicas genéricas de escrita - cada verificação mapeia para um comportamento que a Amazon recompensa ou penaliza (indexação, truncamento, supressão, PI). Limpar as Critical protege o anúncio de ser ocultado; limpar o resto eleva ranking e conversão. {% endhint %} *** ## 📊 O Espaço de Trabalho ![Captura de tela do SellerMagnet Listing Quality](https://1034596264-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FAUp8wGCBcLktsaowHWoK%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-473fba2531a08e643efaa19cac32042bc21d5ff2%2Flisting-quality.png?alt=media) Abra o Listing Quality pela aba **Listing Manager** na página do Otimizador de Anúncios. As pontuações são coletadas automaticamente por um worker em segundo plano, então a tabela já vem preenchida quando você chega; você também pode acionar um escaneamento manual para qualquer produto individual. ### Cartões de estatística Quatro cartões no topo resumem o catálogo: | Cartão | O que ele conta | | ------------------- | -------------------------------------------- | | **Total Products** | Número de anúncios com dados de qualidade | | **Avg. LQI Score** | LQI médio entre esses anúncios | | **Needs Attention** | Anúncios abaixo do limiar "Good" | | **Critical** | Anúncios com problemas de severidade crítica | ### A tabela Product Listings A tabela principal lista cada produto pontuado. Clique em qualquer cabeçalho de coluna para ordenar, e clique em qualquer linha para abrir seu painel de detalhes. | Coluna | O que ela mostra | | --------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **ASIN** | Amazon Standard Identification Number | | **SKU** | Seu Stock Keeping Unit | | **Marketplace** | O marketplace Amazon ao qual o anúncio pertence | | **Título** | O título atual ao vivo (com miniatura do produto) | | **LQI Score** | O índice de qualidade de 0-100, como um selo colorido | | **Bullets** | Cobertura de bullets (também o Bullet Quality Score ao passar o mouse) | | **Images** | Contagem de imagens (contagem HD disponível no detalhe) | | **A+** | Se o anúncio tem A+ Content | | **Video** | Se o anúncio tem um vídeo | | **Reviews** | Contagem de avaliações | | **Rating** | Nota média em estrelas | | **Last Scan** | Quando o anúncio foi pontuado pela última vez | | **Tier** | Selo Excellent / Good / Average / Poor | {% hint style="info" %} Use a opção **Export CSV** para baixar a tabela visível (respeitando seus filtros atuais) para compartilhar com um redator ou sua equipe. Ajuste os filtros primeiro - exportar sem nada em vista não retorna nada. {% endhint %} ### Filtros e busca Acima da tabela: * **Filtro de marketplace** - All Marketplaces, ou um único marketplace. * **Filtro de pontuação** - All Scores, ou um tier: Excellent (80-100), Good (60-79), Average (40-59), Poor (0-39). * **Caixa de busca** - filtre por ASIN, SKU ou título. * **Scan Product** - puxe dados frescos do anúncio da Amazon e repontue um produto sob demanda. *** ## 🔍 O Painel de Detalhes Clique numa linha de produto para deslizar seu painel de detalhes. Um cabeçalho hero mostra a imagem do produto, título, ASIN, SKU e a pontuação LQI atual, e o corpo é organizado em quatro abas. {% tabs %} {% tab title="Quality" %} A aba **Quality** é o coração da ferramenta. Ela lista cada verificação deste anúncio, ordenada por severidade, cada uma com: * um status de **aprovação ou reprovação**, * uma breve explicação **"Why this matters"**, * os **pontos** que você recuperaria ao corrigi-la, * uma estimativa aproximada de **esforço**. Abaixo das verificações ficam os campos editáveis - **Título**, **Bullet Points**, **Descrição**, **Backend Search Terms**, **Imagens** e **A+ Content** - cada um com um botão **Fix in editor** e um botão **AI Optimize**. {% endtab %} {% tab title="Keywords" %} A aba **Keywords** acompanha os termos de busca que este anúncio mira e mostra, por palavra-chave, se ela aparece no **Title (T)**, nos **Bullets (B)** e na **Description (D)**. Adicione palavras-chave manualmente ou clique em **Extract** para extraí-las automaticamente do conteúdo do anúncio. Campos gerenciados pelo A+ Content são marcados como bloqueados (não editáveis aqui). {% endtab %} {% tab title="History" %} A aba **History** tem duas partes: um gráfico **Score Trend** do LQI ao longo do tempo, e um **Change Log** listando cada campo que você mudou, quando e a partir de quê. O Change Log também é a fonte para reverter uma mudança (veja o modelo de segurança abaixo). {% endtab %} {% tab title="AI Studio" %} A aba **AI Studio** é o espaço de trabalho de conteúdo e imagens de IA deste anúncio. Ela oferece otimização com um clique entre campos e o **AI Image Studio**, que pode gerar fotos de produto a partir de 14 presets (White BG, Lifestyle, Home, Outdoor, Infographic, Scale, Close-Up, Multi-Angle, Packaging, Before/After, Gradient, Luxury Dark, Seasonal, Flat Lay) ou limpar uma foto de referência que você envia. O estúdio também recebe entradas de **background**, **mood** e **camera-angle** (por exemplo, um ângulo Macro) e impõe uma regra de segurança em cada imagem - nenhuma pessoa ou rosto, e nenhum texto, selo ou afirmação gravado na imagem. {% endtab %} {% endtabs %} ### Translate a listing Além do modo "Translate" por campo, o painel de detalhes tem um botão dedicado **Translate listing** que abre um modal para localizar um anúncio inteiro de uma só vez. Escolha um **Target language** (11 idiomas, incluindo holandês, japonês e turco), escolha um **Target marketplace** (que define o idioma de destino e os limites de bytes), e marque os **Fields to translate** - Title, Bullet Points e Description estão todos ativados por padrão. Clique em **Start AI translation** e cada campo é traduzido com seu próprio indicador de progresso. Este é um fluxo multicampo e multimarketplace distinto, mais do que o modo Translate de campo único. Como em toda outra ação aqui, nada é enviado à Amazon até você enviar o resultado. ### Os editores Cada campo abre seu próprio editor: | Campo | Notas | | ------------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Título** | Texto livre; re-verificado contra as 25 regras de título conforme você edita | | **Bullet Points** | Um bullet por linha; as 12 verificações de bullet se aplicam | | **Descrição** | Texto livre; bloqueado e somente leitura quando o anúncio é gerenciado pelo A+ Content | | **Backend Search Terms** | Palavras-chave de busca ocultas, limitadas a **250 bytes**. Não mostradas aos compradores - sem vírgulas necessárias, não repita palavras já no título ou nos bullets, e evite marcas concorrentes. Um contador de bytes ao vivo avisa você conforme se aproxima do limite | | **Imagens** | Envie, cole uma URL ou gere com o AI Image Studio, por slot | | **A+ Content** | Busque da Amazon, adicione ou edite módulos, ou atribua um template existente | *** ## 🛠️ Como Usá-lo, Passo a Passo {% stepper %} {% step %} ### Escaneie um produto Escolha um marketplace e pesquise seu catálogo, ou clique em **Scan Product** para puxar dados frescos da Amazon. O escaneamento busca o anúncio, verifica as imagens e calcula a pontuação, terminando numa confirmação **"Scan complete - LQI Score: N"**. (As pontuações em segundo plano se atualizam periodicamente por conta própria, então você só precisa escanear manualmente quando quiser o número mais recente.) {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Revise as verificações reprovadas Clique na linha do produto para abrir o painel de detalhes e permaneça na aba **Quality**. Trabalhe pelas verificações reprovadas de Critical a Minor. Cada uma diz **por que ela importa** e **quantos pontos** está custando a você, para que você sempre saiba o que corrigir primeiro. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Corrija - à mão ou com IA Para qualquer campo fraco, clique em **Fix in editor** para editá-lo você mesmo, ou clique em **AI Optimize** / **Generate with AI** para que o SellerMagnet o reescreva. A saída da IA sempre chega primeiro num **editor de rascunho** - é uma sugestão que você revisa e edita, nunca uma mudança instantânea. A IA segue as regras de estilo da Amazon por construção (Title Case, limites de caracteres, sem linguagem promocional, sem emojis ou caracteres proibidos), e o resultado é re-verificado contra as 37 verificações. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Envie para a Amazon Quando estiver satisfeito com o rascunho, abra **Update listing on Amazon**. Marque os elementos que deseja enviar - **Title**, **Bullet Points**, **Description**, **Keywords**, **Images** - e clique em **Save** (ou **Save & Submit for Approval** para A+ Content). O SellerMagnet submete os campos selecionados à Amazon. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Verifique Após o envio, reabra o produto (ou re-escaneie) para confirmar que a Amazon o aceitou e o LQI subiu. A aba **History** registra a submissão e permite acompanhar seu status. {% endstep %} {% endstepper %} ### O diálogo "Update listing on Amazon" Quando você envia, o diálogo **Update listing on Amazon** pede que você **escolha quais elementos gostaria de atualizar**. Você marca apenas os campos que deseja enviar - nunca precisa enviar tudo de uma vez. Dependendo do campo, o botão de confirmação diz **Save to Amazon** ou **Save & Submit for Approval** (o A+ Content passa pelo fluxo de aprovação da Amazon). O botão **Submit All Changes to Amazon** no Listing Builder envia todos os campos pendentes de uma vez. *** ## 🔒 O Modelo de Segurança de Envio O Listing Quality pode alterar seus anúncios ao vivo, então ele foi feito para tornar cada passo explícito e reversível. Aqui está exatamente o que acontece - dito com honestidade: 1. **A saída da IA é um rascunho primeiro.** Tudo o que a IA escreve chega no editor de rascunho. Nada é enviado a lugar algum até você abrir o diálogo de envio e escolher enviá-lo. 2. **Cada botão diz sua consequência.** As ações são rotuladas com um de dois rótulos para que você sempre saiba onde um clique vai parar: | Rótulo | Significado | | --------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------- | | **Applies to the draft - not sent to Amazon** | Apenas local - seguro para experimentar | | **Publishes to your live Amazon listing** | Este vai para a Amazon quando você confirmar | 3. **A Amazon coloca a submissão em fila - não fica ao vivo instantaneamente.** Um envio bem-sucedido significa que a Amazon **aceitou a submissão em sua fila** ("Changes submitted to Amazon and queued for processing"). O anúncio é atualizado apenas depois que a Amazon termina de validá-lo, e a Amazon ainda pode **rejeitar** uma mudança durante essa validação. Se rejeitar, o SellerMagnet mostra o próprio texto de erro ou aviso da Amazon em vez de uma mensagem genérica. 4. **Cada submissão é registrada e rastreável.** Cada envio grava uma entrada no Change Log (com o valor anterior real) e devolve o ID de submissão da Amazon para que seu status possa ser rastreado. 5. **As mudanças podem ser revertidas.** Como o Change Log armazena o valor que cada campo tinha *antes* da mudança, você pode **reverter** um campo para restaurar o anúncio ao vivo ao seu conteúdo anterior. Uma **proteção contra desvio** protege isso: se o anúncio mudou na Amazon desde a sua edição (pela Amazon, por outro colaborador ou por um experimento publicado automaticamente), a reversão recusa e mostra ambas as versões para que você decida, em vez de sobrescrever silenciosamente conteúdo mais novo. 6. **Uma pré-verificação de política de texto bloqueia conteúdo sabidamente problemático.** Antes de uma submissão ser enviada, uma verificação de conteúdo examina o texto em busca de textos que a Amazon é conhecida por rejeitar. Se encontrar um bloqueador, o envio é interrompido de antemão - poupando você de uma viagem de ida e volta e de um código de erro da Amazon para decifrar. {% hint style="warning" %} **Rascunho versus ao vivo - os botões dizem qual é qual.** Nada chega à Amazon até você explicitamente abrir o diálogo de envio, marcar os elementos e confirmar. Trate um envio como submeter uma edição no Seller Central, não uma edição instantânea. {% endhint %} *** ## ⚙️ Configuração A maior parte da configuração fica dentro do painel de detalhes e dos popovers de IA. ### Opções de IA por campo Quando você otimiza um campo com IA, pode direcionar o resultado: | Opção | O que ela faz | | ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Mode** | Create (do zero), Optimize (melhorar o existente), Competitor (superar o título de um rival) ou Translate | | **Tone** | Professional, Premium-Luxury, Conversational ou Technical | | **Target Audience** | Opcional - com quem o texto deve falar | | **Keyword Emphasis** | O quanto a IA se apoia nas suas palavras-chave alvo | | **Length** | Quão longo o texto gerado deve ser | | **Target Keywords** | Palavras-chave que a IA deve incorporar | | **Negative Keywords** | Palavras que a IA deve evitar | | **Custom Instructions** | Orientação em texto livre (tom, ângulo, público) | | **Backend Search Terms** | Gerenciados em seu próprio editor, limitados a 250 bytes | | **Fields to optimize** | Para a otimização com um clique, marque quais campos a IA deve reescrever | | **Marketplace** | Define o idioma e os limites de bytes usados para o anúncio | ### AI Settings Abra **AI Settings** para controlar a própria IA: * **Text AI Model** e **Image AI Model** - o modelo específico a usar. * **Token Usage** - um medidor mostrando sua cota mensal restante. {% hint style="info" %} **A IA está incluída - nenhuma chave de API necessária.** A IA roda nos próprios modelos do SellerMagnet; você não traz nem paga pela sua própria chave da OpenAI ou Gemini. As gerações são retiradas de uma **cota mensal de créditos** incluída no seu plano (compartilhada com o [Bulk Sourcer](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/product-sourcer-overview/bulk-sourcer)) e reiniciam a cada ciclo de faturamento. O AI Settings mostra quantos créditos você tem restantes. {% endhint %} *** ## ⚠️ Ressalvas e Bom Saber * **Lançamento por conta.** A suíte Listing Manager AI, incluindo o Listing Quality, é lançada por conta. Enquanto a sua está pendente, você verá uma ampulheta âmbar ao lado dele no menu Listing-Manager e uma nota "you're on the list" ao abri-lo - sem cobrança até você decidir mantê-lo. * **Requer uma conta Amazon conectada.** Escanear, enviar e reverter passam todos pela API da Amazon (SP-API), então uma conexão Amazon ao vivo é necessária. * **As pontuações se atualizam periodicamente.** Um worker em segundo plano mantém as pontuações LQI atualizadas por conta própria; o **Scan Product** manual é para quando você quer o número mais recente imediatamente. * **A Amazon tem a palavra final.** Um envio é uma submissão, não uma garantia - a Amazon valida de forma assíncrona e pode rejeitar. * **Bloqueio de A+ / descrição.** Quando a descrição de um anúncio é gerenciada pelo A+ Content, o editor de descrição fica somente leitura; edite o conteúdo pela aba A+ Content. *** ## ✅ Melhores Práticas 1. **Trabalhe por maior impacto primeiro.** Ordene a tabela por LQI crescente, abra seus anúncios de pior pontuação e maior receita e limpe as verificações **Critical** antes de qualquer coisa cosmética. 2. **Corrija verificações de política antes das de conversão.** Um anúncio suprimido não rende nada - limpe primeiro maiúsculas, linguagem promocional, marcas registradas e caracteres proibidos. 3. **Trate a saída da IA como um forte primeiro rascunho.** Sempre leia no editor de rascunho antes de enviá-la ao vivo. 4. **Envie seletivamente.** Envie um campo, confirme que a Amazon o aceitou e o LQI se moveu, depois envie o próximo - em vez de enviar tudo às cegas. 5. **Use as subpontuações para direcionar o esforço.** Um Title Compliance Score baixo mas um Bullet Quality Score saudável diz exatamente onde está o trabalho. 6. **Re-escaneie após enviar.** Confirme que a mudança chegou e a pontuação subiu antes de seguir em frente. 7. **Mantenha o Change Log limpo.** Se um envio parecer errado depois de ao vivo, reverta em vez de sobrepor outra edição. *** ## ❓ FAQ
Como a pontuação LQI é calculada? É a proporção de verificações de qualidade que o anúncio passa, expressa como um percentual de 0-100. Passe em 30 de 37 verificações e o LQI é cerca de 81. Como é uma taxa de aprovação simples, cada verificação que você corrige move a pontuação numa quantidade previsível.
Qual é a diferença entre o LQI e as pontuações Title Compliance / Bullet Quality? O LQI é a pontuação geral em todas as verificações. O Title Compliance Score cobre apenas as 25 verificações de título, e o Bullet Quality Score cobre apenas as 12 verificações de bullet - duas subpontuações que dizem qual metade do anúncio precisa do trabalho.
Minhas mudanças entram no ar na Amazon imediatamente? Não. Quando você envia, a Amazon aceita a mudança em sua fila e a aplica após validar - e ela ainda pode rejeitar uma mudança durante essa etapa. O SellerMagnet registra cada submissão, permite acompanhar seu status e permite reverter.
Posso desfazer uma mudança que enviei? Sim. O Change Log armazena o valor que cada campo tinha antes da sua edição, então **reverter** restaura o anúncio ao vivo ao seu conteúdo anterior. Se o anúncio mudou na Amazon desde a sua edição, uma proteção contra desvio interrompe a reversão e mostra ambas as versões para que você decida.
A IA precisa da minha própria chave da OpenAI ou Gemini, e custa a mais? Nenhuma chave necessária - a IA roda nos próprios modelos do SellerMagnet e está incluída no seu plano. O uso é retirado de uma cota mensal de créditos (compartilhada com o Bulk Sourcer). Escolha o modelo de texto e o modelo de imagem, e veja seus créditos restantes no medidor Token Usage, em AI Settings.
Por que meu editor de descrição está somente leitura? Porque a descrição desse anúncio é gerenciada pelo A+ Content. Edite-a pela aba A+ Content em vez do editor de descrição simples.
O que é o limite de 250 bytes nos backend search terms? A Amazon limita os backend search terms ocultos a 250 bytes. O editor mostra um contador de bytes ao vivo e avisa você conforme se aproxima dele - a Amazon truncará ou rejeitará qualquer coisa acima do limite. Não repita palavras já no seu título ou bullets, evite vírgulas e evite marcas concorrentes.
Por que a Amazon rejeitou meu envio? A Amazon valida as submissões de forma assíncrona e pode rejeitar por regras de conteúdo ou de atributos. Quando o faz, o SellerMagnet mostra o próprio texto de erro ou aviso da Amazon. Uma pré-verificação de política de texto integrada também bloqueia conteúdo sabidamente problemático antes mesmo de ser enviado, para pegar os casos comuns cedo.
*** ## ➡️ O que vem a seguir? {% content-ref url="/pages/x7xmg3FhLOr6jx7byinT" %} [Listing Agent](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview/listing-agent) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/gMNIdUztU9RscC9hrlZH" %} [Keyword Research](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview/keyword-research) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/MnpWbIzgQZ0bauaQTMxf" %} [Otimizador de Anúncios](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview) {% endcontent-ref %} # Listing Agent O escâner de catálogo com IA da suíte Listing Manager AI. Escaneie todo o seu catálogo, agrupe cada produto por severidade, redija novo texto por campo com IA e envie os campos que você aprova de volt {% hint style="info" %} **Dificuldade:** 🟡 Intermediário · **Tempo de leitura:** \~8 min {% endhint %} {% hint style="warning" %} **Disponibilidade:** o Listing Agent faz parte da suíte **Listing Manager AI**, que é lançada **por conta**. Enquanto a sua está pendente, você verá uma ampulheta âmbar ao lado dele no menu **Listing-Manager** e uma nota "you're on the list" ao abri-lo - sem cobrança até você decidir mantê-lo. É necessário ter uma conta Amazon conectada. Veja [Listing Optimizer](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview). {% endhint %} {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Abrir esta página no seu painel:** [**Ir para Listing Agent →**](https://dashboard.sellermagnet.com/listing-agent) {% endhint %} ## 📋 Visão Geral O **Listing Agent** é a maneira mais rápida de encontrar e corrigir lacunas de conteúdo em todo o seu catálogo da Amazon. Em vez de abrir um anúncio por vez, ele escaneia cada produto que você sincronizou, classifica-os por quão urgentemente precisam de atenção e permite que você redija texto com IA e o envie para a Amazon em lotes. Pense nele como uma triagem em massa: o Agent mostra onde está o dano em muitos anúncios de uma vez, redige uma correção para cada campo fraco e submete os campos que você aprova, tudo sem sair da página. Um único escaneamento observa até **seis sinais de conteúdo**, mas só pontua aqueles que a API da Amazon realmente consegue ver: | Sinal | O que ele verifica | Severidade | | ----------------- | ------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Title** | Presente e com pelo menos 50 caracteres | Ausente = Critical · Curto demais = Warning | | **Bullet Points** | Todos os 5 bullet points presentes | 0 bullets = Critical · Menos de 5 = Warning | | **Images** | Pelo menos 5 imagens (7+ recomendado) | 0 imagens = Critical · Menos de 5 = Warning | | **Description** | Só sinalizado quando o corpo está realmente visível | Não visível via API = excluído (chip neutro) · Visível mas com menos de \~100 caracteres = Warning | | **A+ Content** | Só sinalizado quando uma ausência é realmente observada | Status desconhecido (o caso usual) = excluído (chip neutro) · Observado ausente = Warning | | **Video** | Só sinalizado quando uma ausência é realmente observada | Status desconhecido (o caso usual) = excluído (chip neutro) · Observado ausente = Info | A razão pela qual Description, A+ Content e Video se comportam assim é que a API da Amazon (SP-API) geralmente não consegue vê-los - ela raramente retorna o corpo da descrição, e o status de A+/vídeo muitas vezes volta desconhecido. Quando um sinal é desconhecido, o Agent **o exclui da pontuação e o mostra como um chip neutro** em vez de penalizar você por algo que ele não consegue verificar. Uma descrição vazia ou ilegível, portanto, **não é mais Critical**; apenas uma descrição que está genuinamente visível e com menos de \~100 caracteres levanta um Warning. Cada produto recebe uma **pontuação de qualidade** que é a **proporção dos sinais conhecidos que ele passa** - na prática, isso normalmente é Title + Bullets + Images (de 3), nem sempre 6 - mostrada como um percentual com um anel colorido: verde em 80%+, âmbar em 50-79%, vermelho abaixo de 50%. {% hint style="info" %} **Chips "Not visible via Amazon API".** Campos que a API da Amazon não consegue ver - descrição, A+ Content e vídeo - são renderizados como um chip cinza neutro com um ícone de ponto de interrogação e o tooltip **"Not visible via Amazon API"**. Um chip assim **não** é uma falha e não conta contra a sua pontuação; ele simplesmente significa que o Agent não tem dados confiáveis para aquele campo. Apenas Title, Bullets e Images estão consistentemente visíveis, então é a partir deles que a pontuação normalmente é construída. {% endhint %} {% hint style="info" %} **De onde vêm os dados do escaneamento.** O Listing Agent lê o **snapshot mais recente do Listing Quality** de cada produto, ele não busca dados frescos da Amazon por conta própria. Se o Agent mostrar um estado vazio ("No Listing Data Found"), abra o [Listing Quality](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview/listing-quality) e escaneie seus produtos lá primeiro para preencher os dados do catálogo, depois volte ao Agent. {% endhint %} ![Captura de tela do SellerMagnet Listing Agent](https://1034596264-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FAUp8wGCBcLktsaowHWoK%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-ce4826eb05908f37e99644b4a440e676cf1d488e%2Flisting-agent.png?alt=media) *** ## Os cartões de estatística Assim que um escaneamento termina, quatro cartões resumem seu catálogo num relance: | Cartão | O que ele conta | | -------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Total Products** | Cada produto retornado pelo escaneamento | | **Critical Issues** | Produtos que têm pelo menos um problema Critical (um título, descrição ou imagens ausentes) | | **Warnings** | Produtos que têm avisos mas **nenhum** problema Critical | | **Perfect Listings** | Produtos sem nenhum problema entre os sinais conhecidos | Os mesmos grupos aparecem como abas de filtro acima da lista de produtos: **All**, **Critical**, **Warnings** e **Perfect**. Um produto com qualquer problema Critical cai no grupo Critical; um produto apenas com avisos cai em Warnings; um produto limpo cai em Perfect. A lista é ordenada por severidade primeiro, então os anúncios mais prejudiciais (por exemplo, um título ausente) sempre sobem ao topo. Quando um escaneamento cobre menos produtos do que todo o seu catálogo, uma linha aparece acima da grade - **"Scanned {n} of {m} products - data as of {date}"** - para que você sempre saiba quanto do catálogo a visão atual reflete e quão fresca ela é. *** ## 🔧 Passo a passo: escanear, corrigir e enviar {% stepper %} {% step %} ### Escaneie o catálogo Clique em **Scan Catalog** na barra de ferramentas superior. O Agent percorre seus produtos sincronizados e os agrupa em All / Critical / Warnings / Perfect. Use a **caixa de busca** para filtrar por ASIN ou título a qualquer momento. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Escolha um grupo Clique na aba **Critical** para trabalhar nos produtos que mais estão prejudicando você, ou use **Warnings** para uma limpeza mais leve. Cada linha mostra a imagem do produto, título, ASIN e SKU, uma fila de chips de saúde por campo (Title, Bullets, Description, Images, A+, Video) e o anel de pontuação de qualidade. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Abra a gaveta Fix Clique em **Fix** em qualquer produto com problemas (ou clique na linha) para abrir a **gaveta Fix** à direita. Os problemas são listados do mais prejudicial primeiro, cada um como um cartão de recomendação explicando o que está errado. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Gere com IA por campo Para cada campo corrigível, clique em **Generate with AI**. O Agent redige texto de substituição usando o contexto do seu produto e o mostra em linha para revisão. A redação de IA no Agent cobre **Title**, **Bullet Points** e **Description**. Lacunas de imagem e A+ são apresentadas na gaveta como achados, mas você as cria no [Listing Quality](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview/listing-quality) ou no AI Image Studio, não pelo botão Generate do Agent. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Update on Amazon Quando estiver satisfeito com os rascunhos, clique em **Update on Amazon** no topo da gaveta. Um modal abre listando os elementos que você pode enviar: **Title**, **Bullet Points**, **Description**, **Keywords** e **Images**. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Escolha os campos e Save Marque os elementos que deseja enviar, depois clique em **Save**. Apenas os campos para os quais você realmente gerou conteúdo são enviados, se você marcar um elemento sem um rascunho por trás, o Agent diz para gerar conteúdo primeiro em vez de enviar uma mudança vazia. O SellerMagnet então submete os campos selecionados à Amazon como um lote. {% endstep %} {% endstepper %} {% hint style="info" %} **Campos que o Agent pode redigir vs. enviar.** O botão Generate redige Title, Bullet Points e Description. O modal de atualização lista todos os cinco elementos por completude, mas um campo só é submetido quando tem conteúdo gerado por IA (ou editado) por trás. Para trabalho de imagem e A+, e para o editor profundo completo, use o [Listing Quality](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview/listing-quality). {% endhint %} *** ## 🤖 Modos de IA Nos bastidores, a IA roda em templates de prompt pré-construídos com quatro **modos**. O botão **Generate with AI** de um clique do Agent sempre usa **Optimize** (ele melhora o campo que você já tem). Os outros modos estão disponíveis no AI Studio mais profundo do [Listing Quality](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview/listing-quality). | Modo | Use-o para | | -------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Create** | Escrever um campo do zero quando não há nada para começar | | **Optimize** | Limpar e melhorar o SEO do seu título, bullets ou descrição existentes (é isto que o Agent usa) | | **Competitor** | Gerar texto projetado para superar um rival, cole o título de um concorrente como a meta a bater | | **Translate** | Localizar o campo no idioma do marketplace com texto de som nativo, não tradução automática literal | ### A conformidade com o guia de estilo da Amazon é integrada Cada prompt tem as regras de título e conteúdo da Amazon embutidas, então a saída é compatível por construção em vez de precisar de uma limpeza manual: * **Title Case** (capitalizar todas as palavras exceto preposições curtas) * **Limites de caracteres** por campo (títulos por volta de 80-150 caracteres, bullets 150-250 cada e menos de 1.000 no total) * **Sem linguagem promocional** (nenhum "best seller", "#1", "guarantee" e afirmações similares) * **Sem emojis** e nenhum caractere especial proibido (`~ ! * $ ? _ { } # < > ^`) * **Estrutura com a marca primeiro** (Marca + Nome do Produto + Recurso Principal + Tamanho/Cor/Variante) * **Palavras-chave no início** para que os termos de busca mais importantes venham primeiro *** ## 🔒 Segurança de envio O Listing Agent é deliberadamente "rascunho primeiro". Nada que você gera toca seu anúncio ao vivo até você tomar uma ação explícita. {% hint style="warning" %} **Nada é enviado à Amazon até você enviá-lo.** Cada rascunho de IA chega na gaveta Fix como uma **sugestão**, nunca uma mudança aplicada. Seu anúncio ao vivo só muda depois que você abre **Update on Amazon**, marca elementos específicos e clica em **Save**. {% endhint %} {% hint style="info" %} **A Amazon coloca as submissões em fila, ela não as aplica instantaneamente.** Um envio bem-sucedido significa que a Amazon **aceitou a sua submissão em sua fila**. O anúncio é atualizado quando a Amazon termina de validá-lo, e a Amazon ainda pode **rejeitar** uma mudança durante essa etapa. Você verá a confirmação: "Changes submitted to Amazon and queued for processing. Amazon can still reject them during validation." {% endhint %} Salvaguardas adicionais em cada envio: | Salvaguarda | O que ela faz | | --------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Pré-verificação de política de texto** | Antes de qualquer coisa ser submetida, cada campo é examinado em busca de textos sabidamente problemáticos. Conteúdo bloqueado por política é interrompido localmente e reportado a você, não enviado à Amazon. | | **Verificação de propriedade do marketplace** | O Agent confirma que o marketplace de destino pertence à sua conta Amazon conectada antes de submeter. | | **Resultados por campo** | O próprio texto de validação da Amazon é mostrado por campo no modal, então uma falha parcial diz exatamente qual elemento foi recusado e por quê, em vez de um único erro genérico. | | **Change log** | Cada mudança aplicada é registrada (valor antigo e valor novo), então há uma trilha de auditoria do que foi enviado e quando, e as mudanças podem ser revertidas. | *** ## Listing Agent vs. Listing Quality Ambas as ferramentas vivem na suíte Listing Manager AI e ambas podem enviar para a Amazon, mas foram feitas para trabalhos diferentes. | | **Listing Agent** | **Listing Quality** | | ----------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Feito para** | Triagem em massa rápida em muitos anúncios | Trabalho profundo num único anúncio | | **Escopo** | Todo o catálogo de uma vez, agrupado por severidade | Um produto por vez | | **Verificações** | Seis sinais de conteúdo por produto | 37 verificações detalhadas com subpontuações | | **Edição** | Rascunho de IA de um clique por campo, envio em lote | Editor completo, AI Studio, abas de palavras-chave e histórico, ferramentas de imagem | | **Melhor quando** | Você quer varrer o catálogo e corrigir as piores lacunas rapidamente | Você quer aperfeiçoar um anúncio específico de alto valor | Use o Agent para encontrar onde está o dano e limpar as lacunas óbvias em massa; entre no [Listing Quality](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview/listing-quality) quando um anúncio precisar de trabalho cuidadoso e detalhado. *** ## ⚠️ Ressalvas * **Lançamento por conta.** A suíte Listing Manager AI é lançada por conta. Enquanto a sua está pendente, você verá uma ampulheta âmbar ao lado dele no menu Listing-Manager e uma nota "you're on the list" ao abri-lo - sem cobrança até você decidir mantê-lo. * **Requer uma conta Amazon conectada.** O Agent lê seu catálogo sincronizado e envia através da API da Amazon, então uma conexão Amazon ativa é necessária. * **Precisa de dados do Listing Quality primeiro.** O escaneamento lê os snapshots mais recentes do Listing Quality. Se nada foi escaneado ainda, preencha os dados a partir do [Listing Quality](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview/listing-quality) antes que o Agent possa mostrar seus produtos. * **A IA roda com créditos da plataforma, nenhuma chave de API necessária.** A IA usa os próprios modelos do SellerMagnet; você não traz nem paga pela sua própria chave da OpenAI ou Gemini. A redação é retirada de uma **cota mensal de créditos** incluída no seu plano, **compartilhada com o** [**Bulk Sourcer**](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/product-sourcer-overview/bulk-sourcer). Se o saldo acabar, o botão Generate para até a cota reabastecer. *** ## ✅ Melhores Práticas 1. **Trabalhe a aba Critical primeiro.** Ela apresenta os anúncios que estão ativamente perdendo conversão e descoberta para você, um título, descrição ou imagens ausentes. Corrigir estes entrega os maiores ganhos reais. 2. **Ordene por receita na sua cabeça.** O Agent classifica por severidade, mas você decide a ordem. Limpe as piores lacunas nos seus ASINs mais vendidos antes da cauda longa. 3. **Sempre leia o rascunho da IA antes de enviar.** Trate cada rascunho como uma forte primeira versão, não uma acabada. Leia-o, ajuste se necessário, depois submeta. 4. **Envie apenas os campos que você gerou.** Marcar Keywords ou Images sem um rascunho por trás não faz nada útil, gere o conteúdo primeiro, ou trate esses campos no Listing Quality. 5. **Re-escaneie após a Amazon processar a mudança.** Um envio é enfileirado, não instantâneo. Re-escaneie depois para confirmar que o campo foi limpo e a pontuação subiu. 6. **Fique de olho no seu saldo de créditos.** A redação gasta da cota mensal compartilhada com o Bulk Sourcer; o saldo restante é mostrado no menu Listing. Veja [quanto custam as ações de IA](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview) para os custos de crédito por ação. *** ## ❓ FAQ
Por que meu Listing Agent está vazio mesmo eu tendo produtos? O Agent lê o snapshot mais recente do Listing Quality de cada produto, ele não busca dados frescos da Amazon por conta própria. Abra o [Listing Quality](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview/listing-quality), escaneie seus produtos lá, depois volte ao Agent e ele mostrará seu catálogo.
Qual é a diferença entre um problema Critical e um Warning? Problemas Critical são lacunas que ativamente suprimem conversão ou descoberta, um título ausente, uma descrição ausente ou nenhuma imagem. Warnings são conteúdo que existe mas está fraco (curto demais, ou menos de cinco bullets) e vale a pena melhorar quando você tiver tempo. Um produto com qualquer problema Critical cai no grupo Critical; um apenas com avisos cai em Warnings.
Quais campos o Agent pode redigir com IA? Title, Bullet Points e Description. O modal de atualização também lista Keywords e Images por completude, mas o botão Generate do Agent não os cria, use o [Listing Quality](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview/listing-quality) e o AI Image Studio para trabalho de imagem e palavras-chave.
Minhas mudanças entram no ar na Amazon imediatamente? Não. Quando você envia, a Amazon aceita a mudança em sua fila e a aplica após validar, e ela ainda pode rejeitar uma mudança durante essa etapa. O SellerMagnet registra cada submissão e grava os valores antigo e novo para que as mudanças possam ser revertidas. Trate como submeter uma edição no Seller Central, não uma edição instantânea.
A saída da IA é compatível com a Amazon? Os prompts têm o guia de estilo da Amazon integrado, Title Case, limites de caracteres, sem linguagem promocional, sem emojis ou símbolos proibidos, estrutura com a marca primeiro e palavras-chave no início, então a saída é compatível por construção. Além disso, uma pré-verificação de política de texto examina cada campo em busca de textos sabidamente problemáticos antes de ser submetido.
A IA precisa da minha própria chave da OpenAI ou Gemini, e custa a mais? Nenhuma chave necessária. A IA roda nos próprios modelos do SellerMagnet e está incluída no seu plano. O uso é retirado de uma cota mensal de créditos que é compartilhada com o Bulk Sourcer. Se o saldo chegar a zero, o botão Generate pausa até a cota reabastecer.
Quando devo usar o Listing Agent em vez do Listing Quality? Use o Agent para triagem em massa rápida, varrendo todo o catálogo, classificando por severidade e enviando vários anúncios rapidamente. Use o [Listing Quality](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview/listing-quality) quando um único anúncio precisar de trabalho profundo e detalhado com o detalhamento completo de 37 verificações, editor e ferramentas de imagem.
*** ## ➡️ O que vem a seguir? {% content-ref url="/pages/JZZiVAeUhBqMEJ7Ynabt" %} [Listing Quality](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview/listing-quality) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/gMNIdUztU9RscC9hrlZH" %} [Keyword Research](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview/keyword-research) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/MnpWbIzgQZ0bauaQTMxf" %} [Otimizador de Anúncios](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview) {% endcontent-ref %} # Listing Builder Crie um anúncio da Amazon totalmente novo com um assistente guiado de 4 etapas - Setup, Content, Attributes, Review & Submit - com uma Listing Score ao vivo, verificação de conformidade e prévia da Am {% hint style="info" %} **Dificuldade:** 🟡 Intermediário · **Tempo de leitura:** \~8 min {% endhint %} {% hint style="warning" %} **Disponibilidade:** o Listing Builder faz parte da suíte **Listing Manager AI**, que é lançada **por conta**. Enquanto a sua está pendente, você verá uma ampulheta âmbar ao lado dele no menu **Listing-Manager** e uma nota "you're on the list" ao abri-lo - sem cobrança até você decidir mantê-lo. É necessário ter uma conta Amazon conectada. Veja [Listing Optimizer](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview). {% endhint %} {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Abrir esta página no seu painel:** [**Ir para Listing Builder →**](https://dashboard.sellermagnet.com/listing-builder) {% endhint %} ## 📋 Visão Geral O **Listing Builder** é um assistente guiado para criar um anúncio da Amazon **totalmente novo** do zero. Em vez de lutar com o formulário plano do Seller Central, você percorre quatro etapas claras - **Setup → Content → Attributes → Review & Submit** - enquanto uma barra lateral à direita mostra, em tempo real, quão forte é o seu anúncio antes mesmo de você submetê-lo. Essa barra à direita tem três painéis ao vivo: | Painel | O que ele mostra | | ------------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Listing Score** | Uma pontuação de qualidade de 0-100 num anel colorido, atualizada conforme você digita | | **Compliance** | Verificações de aprovação/reprovação para as regras de conteúdo mais comuns da Amazon (comprimento, TUDO EM MAIÚSCULAS, palavras banidas, HTML, limites de bytes) | | **Amazon Preview** | Um mock-up de como seu título, marca, preço, bullets e descrição aparecerão na Amazon, com uma vista **desktop** e uma **mobile** | A coisa mais importante que o Builder faz é **gerar a etapa Attributes a partir da definição exata de tipo de produto que a Amazon impõe**. A Amazon exige campos diferentes para um Colar do que para uma Capa de Celular, então o assistente puxa a definição ao vivo para o tipo de produto escolhido e pede a você exatamente os campos que a Amazon exigirá. É isso que transforma "submeter e torcer" em "validar antes de submeter". {% hint style="info" %} **Sem IA nesta página.** Diferente do **Listing Quality** e do **Listing Agent** (que reescrevem o texto para você), o Builder não escreve nada por conta própria. A Listing Score, as verificações de Compliance e o Keyword Bank são todos auxiliares simples baseados em regras que rodam no seu navegador - você escreve cada palavra. Não há botão "Generate with AI" no Builder. {% endhint %} {% hint style="warning" %} **"Import existing listing / clone an ASIN" ainda não foi construído.** A Etapa 1 mostra um cartão **Import Existing Listing** com um campo de ASIN e um botão **Import**, mas ambos estão **desativados** e rotulados **"coming soon"**. A dica in-app diz: "Importing an existing listing is coming soon. For now, edit live listings from Listing Quality." Tudo o que você constrói aqui começa de uma folha em branco. {% endhint %} ![Captura de tela do SellerMagnet Listing Builder](https://1034596264-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FAUp8wGCBcLktsaowHWoK%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-dfbcc0cd355f24e318707ce484f8e56da855b105%2Flisting-builder.png?alt=media) *** ## Antes de começar * Você precisa de uma **conta Amazon conectada**. A página não abrirá sem uma, e o **Push to Amazon** retorna "No Amazon connection found" se a conexão estiver faltando. Reconecte em **Settings** se necessário. * Escolha seu **marketplace** no seletor no cabeçalho superior direito. Ele usa por padrão o marketplace padrão do seu projeto e conduz tanto a busca de tipo de produto quanto onde o anúncio é criado. * Sua **moeda** é retirada do seu projeto (EUR por padrão) e é submetida com o preço, para que o Amazon Preview mostre o símbolo correto. *** ## As quatro etapas {% stepper %} {% step %} ### Setup - tipo de produto Pesquise na caixa **Search Amazon Product Types** (digite pelo menos dois caracteres, por exemplo "Necklace", "T-Shirt" ou "Phone Case"). O Builder consulta o catálogo ao vivo de tipos de produto da Amazon para o seu marketplace selecionado e lista as correspondências. Clique numa para selecioná-la - uma confirmação verde aparece, e o assistente imediatamente carrega a definição de atributos daquele tipo em segundo plano. Selecionar um tipo de produto é **obrigatório**; o botão **Next: Content** permanece desativado até você escolher um. Use o pequeno controle de limpar (**x**) para mudar sua escolha. O cartão **Import Existing Listing** abaixo está desativado ("coming soon") - veja a ressalva acima. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Content - as palavras que vendem É aqui que você escreve o texto voltado ao cliente. Cada campo tem um contador de caracteres ao vivo que fica vermelho quando você excede o limite, e um tooltip de ajuda com a própria orientação da Amazon. | Campo | Limite / orientação | | ------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | | **Product Title** (obrigatório) | 0 / 200 caracteres. Mire em 80-200, inclua suas 3-5 principais palavras-chave, comece com o nome da marca, sem TUDO EM MAIÚSCULAS ou linguagem promocional | | **Bullet Points** (obrigatório) | Adicione até 10 slots (5 mostrados por padrão); 150-500 caracteres cada; comece com uma frase de benefício capitalizada | | **Product Description** | 0 / 2000 caracteres; mínimo 200; uma pequena barra de ferramentas insere HTML básico de **Bold**, **Italic**, **Line Break** e **List** | | **Search Terms (Backend)** | 0 / 249 **bytes**; separados por espaço; não repita palavras do título/bullets; um botão **Dedup** remove qualquer palavra já usada no seu título ou bullets | Abaixo do cartão de conteúdo fica o **Keyword Bank** - um bloco de rascunho, não uma ferramenta de IA. Adicione palavras-chave uma por vez ou faça **Bulk Import** de uma lista colada (uma por linha, volume opcional após uma vírgula). Conforme você escreve, cada palavra-chave acende pontos coloridos mostrando onde ela aparece - título, bullets, descrição ou backend - e uma cifra de **Coverage** acompanha quantas das suas palavras-chave você realmente incorporou ao anúncio. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Attributes - os campos que a Amazon exige Esta etapa é **gerada a partir do tipo de produto que você escolheu no Setup**, então ela parece diferente para cada categoria. Os campos são divididos em dois grupos: | Grupo | Significado | | --------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------- | | **Required Attributes** (selo vermelho) | A Amazon rejeitará o anúncio sem estes | | **Recommended Attributes** (selo azul) | Opcionais, mas melhoram a completude e a descoberta | Cada campo é renderizado como o controle certo para seu tipo - uma lista suspensa para escolhas fixas, uma caixa de número ou uma caixa de texto - com a própria descrição da Amazon como tooltip e qualquer comprimento máximo mostrado. Preencha pelo menos cada campo obrigatório aqui para que a validação não te pegue na submissão. {% hint style="info" %} **Mude o tipo de produto, mude este formulário.** Se você voltar ao Setup e escolher um tipo de produto diferente, a etapa Attributes recarrega com um conjunto de campos completamente diferente. Faça isso antes de investir tempo preenchendo atributos. {% endhint %} {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Review & Submit - identificadores, imagens, variações A etapa final coleta tudo o que a Amazon precisa para realmente anunciar o item, e é onde você submete. **Pricing & Identifiers** | Campo | Notas | | ------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **SKU** (obrigatório) | Seu próprio código de estoque; máx. 40 caracteres; apenas letras, números, hifens, underscores. Deixado em branco, um é gerado para você | | **Price** (obrigatório) | Deve ser maior que 0; submetido na moeda do seu projeto | | **Quantity** | Estoque inicial disponível para fulfillment | | **Brand** (obrigatório) | O nome da sua marca | | **Condition** | New (padrão), Used - Like New / Very Good / Good / Acceptable, ou Refurbished | | **Product ID (UPC/EAN/ISBN)** (obrigatório) | O código de barras / GTIN do produto | | **ID Type** | EAN, UPC, ISBN ou GTIN | **Images** - a grade de 7 slots de foto mais 1 slot de vídeo é uma **prévia do que o anúncio precisará, não um uploader**. As imagens são adicionadas **depois** que o anúncio é criado - abra-o no **Listing Quality** para enviá-las e validá-las. **Variations (opcional)** - se o tipo de produto suportar, escolha um **Variation Theme** (por exemplo Size, Color) e adicione variantes filhas na tabela, cada uma com seu próprio SKU, preço e quantidade. O Builder cria um anúncio pai e um anúncio filho por variante. Deixe o tema em "No variations" para um único produto. {% endstep %} {% endstepper %} *** ## 📋 A barra à direita - Score, Compliance, Preview ### Listing Score A pontuação é um cálculo transparente, no navegador, de 100. Ela **não** é o mesmo modelo do LQI do Listing Quality - é uma autoverificação rápida enquanto você redige: | Componente | Pontos máx. | Como ganhar nota máxima | | ------------------------------- | ----------- | ------------------------------------------------------------ | | **Título** | 30 | 80-200 caracteres (40-79 ganha 20; qualquer título ganha 10) | | **Bullet Points** | 25 | Cinco bullets de pelo menos 50 caracteres cada | | **Descrição** | 15 | 200+ caracteres (100-199 ganha 10; qualquer um ganha 5) | | **Search Terms** | 10 | Presente e dentro do limite de 249 bytes | | **Cobertura de palavras-chave** | 20 | Cada palavra-chave no seu Keyword Bank usada em algum lugar | O anel fica verde em 80+, âmbar em 50-79 e vermelho abaixo de 50. ### Compliance Uma lista de verificação ao vivo sinaliza os problemas de conteúdo que a Amazon mais frequentemente penaliza: * Título dentro (ou acima) do limite de 200 caracteres * Palavras em TUDO EM MAIÚSCULAS excessivas * **Palavras promocionais restritas** - frases como "best seller", "#1", "free shipping", "limited time", "buy now", "guaranteed", "sale", "discount", "lowest price" e similares são sinalizadas * Tags HTML acidentalmente deixadas no título * Backend search terms acima de 249 bytes ### Amazon Preview Um mock-up em andamento da vista do comprador - título, "by \[brand]", preço com o símbolo de moeda correto, bullets "About this item" e descrição. Alterne entre as renderizações **desktop** e **mobile** com os dois ícones no cabeçalho do painel. *** ## 💾 Botões - Save Draft vs Push to Amazon {% hint style="warning" %} **Um rascunho vive apenas no seu navegador. Push to Amazon é a única ação que toca a Amazon.** Nada do que você digita chega à Amazon até você explicitamente enviá-lo. {% endhint %} | Controle | O que ele faz | | ------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Save** / **Save Draft** | Salva o anúncio inteiro sob um nome que você digita, no armazenamento local do seu navegador. Ele nunca sai do seu dispositivo e nunca é enviado à Amazon | | **Autosave** | A cada dois segundos, o assistente salva automaticamente seu trabalho em silêncio; o cabeçalho mostra "Saving..." depois "Saved". Na próxima vez que você abrir a página, ele se oferece para restaurá-lo | | **Drafts** | Abre seus rascunhos salvos para recarregar ou excluir um | | **Export** | Baixa o anúncio atual como um arquivo **TSV** (linhas de campo/valor) para seus registros ou um redator | | **Push to Amazon** | Valida o anúncio e o submete à Amazon para criar o novo anúncio | Quando você pressiona **Push to Amazon**, o Builder primeiro verifica se você tem um tipo de produto, SKU, título, preço e product ID - saltando você de volta à etapa problemática se um estiver faltando - depois submete. Em caso de sucesso, ele limpa o autosave para que visitas futuras não se ofereçam para "restaurar" um anúncio que você já criou. {% hint style="info" %} **Enviar coloca o anúncio em fila - ele não fica ao vivo instantaneamente.** Um envio bem-sucedido significa que a Amazon **aceitou a sua submissão em sua fila de processamento**, não que o anúncio está ao vivo. A Amazon o valida em segundo plano nos próximos minutos e **ainda pode rejeitá-lo** - por um atributo obrigatório faltando, um código de barras inválido, uma marca não registrada, um problema de imagem ou uma duplicata. O Builder transforma os códigos de rejeição da Amazon em mensagens em linguagem clara contra o campo específico que falhou, para que você saiba exatamente o que corrigir e ressubmeter. {% endhint %} {% hint style="warning" %} **A Amazon aceita no máximo 5 bullet points.** A etapa Content permite adicionar até 10 slots de bullet, mas a submissão é rejeitada se você enviar mais de 5. Mantenha seus cinco mais fortes. {% endhint %} *** ## ✅ Melhores Práticas 1. **Escolha o tipo de produto primeiro, e acerte-o.** Ele conduz toda a etapa Attributes. Mudá-lo depois descarta os campos de categoria que você preencheu. 2. **Preencha cada Required Attribute.** Estes são os campos por causa dos quais a Amazon rejeita anúncios. Limpá-los no assistente é muito mais rápido do que uma ida e volta de rejeição. 3. **Tenha seu GTIN pronto.** Um UPC/EAN/GTIN válido (ou uma isenção de GTIN do Brand Registry) é o motivo mais comum de um envio ser rejeitado. Verifique o código de barras antes de submeter. 4. **Mire numa pontuação verde, mas não obcecue por 100.** 80+ significa que seu rascunho está sólido. Título e bullets carregam o maior peso, então comece por aí. 5. **Limpe cada sinalizador de Compliance antes de enviar.** Palavras promocionais restritas e TUDO EM MAIÚSCULAS podem fazer um anúncio ser suprimido mesmo depois de aceito. 6. **Trate Save/Export como sua rede de segurança.** Os rascunhos vivem apenas neste navegador - exporte um TSV se precisar do conteúdo em qualquer outro lugar. 7. **Planeje suas imagens.** O Builder não as envia. Logo após o anúncio ser criado, abra-o no Listing Quality para adicionar e validar fotos. *** ## ❓ FAQ
O Listing Builder usa IA para escrever meu anúncio? Não. O Builder não tem IA. Você escreve o título, bullets, descrição e palavras-chave você mesmo. A Listing Score, as verificações de Compliance e o Keyword Bank são auxiliares simples baseados em regras que rodam no seu navegador. Se você quer que a IA redija ou reescreva texto, use o **Listing Quality** ou o **Listing Agent** na suíte Listing Manager.
Posso clonar ou importar um ASIN existente como ponto de partida? Ainda não. O cartão **Import Existing Listing** na Etapa 1 está desativado e marcado "coming soon". Para editar um anúncio que você já tem ao vivo, use o **Listing Quality**. Tudo no Builder começa de um anúncio em branco.
Meu anúncio fica ao vivo na Amazon assim que eu o envio? Não. Um envio bem-sucedido significa que a Amazon **aceitou a submissão em sua fila**. A Amazon o valida em segundo plano e ainda pode rejeitá-lo - por um atributo faltando, um código de barras ruim, uma marca não registrada ou um problema de imagem. Dê alguns minutos e verifique o resultado; o Builder mostra o erro específico da Amazon se for rejeitado.
Onde meus rascunhos são armazenados? No armazenamento local do seu navegador apenas no dispositivo atual. Eles nunca são enviados ao SellerMagnet ou à Amazon. Use **Export** para salvar uma cópia como arquivo TSV, e lembre-se de que um rascunho não o seguirá para outro computador ou navegador.
Por que minha etapa Attributes parece diferente da de outra pessoa? Porque ela é gerada a partir da definição exata de tipo de produto que a Amazon impõe para a sua categoria e marketplace. Um Colar, uma Camiseta e uma Capa de Celular exigem, cada um, campos obrigatórios diferentes, então o assistente pede apenas o que o seu tipo escolhido precisa.
Como adiciono imagens de produto? Não no Builder - a grade de imagens lá é apenas uma prévia do que o anúncio precisará. Depois que o anúncio é criado, abra-o no **Listing Quality** para enviar e validar as fotos.
Quantos bullet points eu posso realmente submeter? Cinco. A etapa Content permite adicionar até 10 slots para redação, mas a submissão é rejeitada se você enviar mais de 5 bullet points, então mantenha seus cinco melhores.
*** ## ➡️ O que vem a seguir? {% content-ref url="/pages/JZZiVAeUhBqMEJ7Ynabt" %} [Listing Quality](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview/listing-quality) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/QCMGXFg8Bjwms3IlKsyl" %} [A+ Content](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview/aplus-content) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/MnpWbIzgQZ0bauaQTMxf" %} [Otimizador de Anúncios](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview) {% endcontent-ref %} # A+ Content Gerencie, edite e publique seus documentos de A+ Content da Amazon existentes de dentro do SellerMagnet. Filtre por tipo e status, edite módulos e Save to Amazon ou submeta para aprovação - tudo sem s {% hint style="info" %} **Dificuldade:** 🟡 Intermediário · **Tempo de leitura:** \~8 min {% endhint %} {% hint style="success" icon="rocket" %} **Abrir esta página no seu painel:** [**Ir para A+ Content Manager →**](https://dashboard.sellermagnet.com/listing-aplus) {% endhint %} {% hint style="warning" %} **Disponibilidade:** o A+ Content faz parte da suíte **Listing Manager AI**, que é lançada **por conta**. Enquanto a sua está pendente, você verá uma ampulheta âmbar ao lado dele no menu **Listing-Manager** e uma nota "you're on the list" ao abri-lo - sem cobrança até você decidir mantê-lo. É necessário ter uma conta Amazon conectada. Veja [Listing Optimizer](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview). {% endhint %} ## 📋 Visão Geral O **A+ Content Manager** é o lugar para trabalhar com os documentos de A+ Content que já existem na sua conta Amazon. Ele lista cada documento entre os seus marketplaces, permite que você edite os módulos dentro de um documento e envia suas mudanças de volta para a Amazon - salvas silenciosamente ou enviadas para a fila de aprovação da Amazon - sem você nunca abrir o Seller Central. ### O que é A+ Content (uma introdução rápida) O **A+ Content** é a seção rica e de marca de uma página de produto da Amazon: a área de descrição aprimorada com texto formatado, tabelas comparativas e imagens lifestyle ou infográficas, situada abaixo do buy box. Ele substitui a descrição de produto em texto simples para marcas elegíveis. O A+ Content está disponível para vendedores inscritos no **Amazon Brand Registry**, e a Amazon há muito reporta que um A+ Content bem construído aumenta a conversão porque os compradores obtêm uma compreensão mais clara e visual do produto antes de comprar. O A+ Content é organizado como **documentos**. Um documento é uma pilha de **módulos** - blocos de conteúdo reutilizáveis, como um parágrafo de texto, uma grade de quatro imagens, uma tabela comparativa ou um logotipo da empresa. Você monta módulos em um documento, e então esse documento é aplicado a um ou mais dos seus ASINs. {% hint style="info" %} **Esta página gerencia documentos existentes.** Para criar um documento de A+ Content totalmente novo do zero, use a página **Listing Quality** na suíte Listing Manager AI - veja [Listing Quality](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview/listing-quality). O A+ Content Manager foi feito para navegar, editar e publicar documentos que já existem na sua conta. {% endhint %} ![Captura de tela do SellerMagnet A+ Content Manager](https://1034596264-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FAUp8wGCBcLktsaowHWoK%2Fuploads%2Fgit-blob-330631912d963d3a1ee6d5a992f28c7fae28f2cd%2Faplus-content.png?alt=media) *** ## 🗂️ A grade de documentos Quando a página abre, ela carrega cada documento de A+ Content para o marketplace mostrado no seletor no canto superior direito, depois os exibe como uma grade de cartões. A API de A+ Content da Amazon é **baseada em região** - ela retorna documentos para cada marketplace de uma região - então o gerenciador filtra a lista até o único marketplace que você selecionou. Troque de marketplace com o seletor, ou clique em **Refresh** para recarregar. Cada cartão mostra: | Elemento | O que ele mostra | | --------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Nome do documento** | O título do documento (ou "Untitled Document" se a Amazon não tiver nenhum) | | **Reference key** | A chave de referência de conteúdo Amazon única do documento (monoespaçada, sob o nome) | | **Selo de status** | O estado de aprovação do documento - veja a tabela de status abaixo | | **Selo de tipo** | Standard, Auto-Generated ou Brand Story - veja a tabela de tipos abaixo | | **Marketplace** | O marketplace ao qual o documento pertence, mostrado como um **chip de bandeira** de país | | **View / Edit** | Botões que abrem o documento no painel de detalhes | {% hint style="info" %} **Documentos idênticos são agrupados.** Quando o mesmo documento A+ existe como várias cópias idênticas, a grade as recolhe num único cartão rotulado **"x N versions"** com um botão **Show versions**. Expanda-o para ver e abrir as versões individuais em vez de rolar por uma fileira de duplicatas. {% endhint %} ### Selos de tipo | Selo | Significado | | ------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Standard** | Um documento A+ normal que você construiu ou importou | | **Auto-Generated** | Um documento que a Amazon gerou automaticamente; estes ficam esmaecidos na grade e são empurrados para o fim da lista | | **Brand Story** | Um documento Brand Story - uma família de módulos especial que abre no Seller Central (veja abaixo) | ### Selos de status | Selo | Cor | Significado | | --------------------------- | ----------- | -------------------------------------------- | | **Active** / **Approved** | 🟢 Verde | Ao vivo e aprovado pela Amazon | | **Draft** | 🟠 Âmbar | Salvo mas não submetido para aprovação | | **Pending** / **Submitted** | 🔵 Azul | Enviado à Amazon e aguardando a revisão dela | | **Rejected** | 🔴 Vermelho | A Amazon recusou a submissão | *** ## 🔍 Filtrando e encontrando um documento Uma barra de filtros fica acima da grade com dois grupos independentes. A página abre focada em **My Content** para que seus próprios documentos fiquem em destaque; mude para **All** para incluir os gerados automaticamente. **Por tipo:** | Filtro | Mostra | | ------------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **All** | Cada documento no marketplace | | **My Content** | Documentos que você possui - documentos gerados automaticamente ficam ocultos | | **Auto-Generated** | Apenas os documentos que a Amazon gerou automaticamente | | **Brand Story** | Apenas documentos Brand Story | **Por status:** | Filtro | Mostra | | -------------- | ------------------------------------- | | **All Status** | Documentos em qualquer estado | | **Approved** | Apenas documentos aprovados / ao vivo | | **Draft** | Apenas rascunhos não submetidos | Cada botão de filtro carrega uma **contagem** ao vivo para que você veja num relance quantos documentos caem em cada grupo. Há também uma **caixa de busca** na barra de ferramentas superior - digite qualquer parte do **nome** de um documento ou da sua **reference key** para estreitar a grade instantaneamente. Uma linha de resultados ("Showing X of Y documents") diz quantos cartões os filtros e a busca atuais encontraram. *** ## ✏️ Editando um documento Clique em **View** ou **Edit** num cartão (ou clique no próprio cartão) para abrir o **painel de detalhes** - uma gaveta que desliza da direita. Ele carrega o documento por sua reference key e lista cada módulo dentro dele. {% stepper %} {% step %} ### Abra o documento Clique num cartão para abrir o painel de detalhes. O título do painel mostra o nome do documento, e cada módulo aparece como uma linha recolhível com um ícone e seu tipo (por exemplo **Text Block**, **Four Image & Text** ou **Comparison Table**). {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Expanda um módulo e edite seus campos Clique numa linha de módulo para expandi-la. O SellerMagnet lê a estrutura do módulo e apresenta seus **campos editáveis** - títulos, corpo de texto e **alt text** de imagem - como caixas de texto. Blocos de imagem mostram uma prévia em miniatura ao lado de um campo de alt text. Digite suas mudanças diretamente nos campos. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Adicione ou remova módulos Use **Add Module** na parte inferior do painel para abrir o seletor de módulos, depois escolha um tipo de módulo para anexar um bloco novo e vazio desse tipo ao documento. Para excluir um bloco, clique no ícone de lixeira na sua linha de módulo. Ambas as ações atualizam o documento de trabalho no painel; nada chega à Amazon até você salvar. {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Salve seu trabalho Use os botões do rodapé para publicar. **Save to Amazon** armazena suas edições no documento; **Save & Submit** adicionalmente o envia para a fila de aprovação da Amazon (veja a próxima seção). {% endstep %} {% endstepper %} ### Os tipos de módulo que você pode adicionar O seletor **Add Module** oferece a família padrão de módulos A+: | Módulo | Módulo | Módulo | | ----------------------- | ------------------ | ------------------- | | Company Logo | Text Block | Image Text Overlay | | Header Image + Text | Four Image & Text | Four Image Quadrant | | Single Image Highlights | Single Image Specs | Side Image | | Three Image & Text | Comparison Table | Tech Specs | | Multiple Image & Text | Image Sidebar | | {% hint style="info" %} **Apenas campos editáveis.** O painel apresenta os campos de texto e alt text que ele consegue editar com segurança. Algumas peças estruturadas - como a grade completa de uma tabela comparativa ou listas de especificações - podem não aparecer como entradas editáveis aqui; para trabalho estrutural profundo nessas, use o Seller Central. Se um módulo não tiver nada editável, o painel diz "No editable fields." {% endhint %} *** ## 🤖 Edit with AI Os documentos A+ não são mais somente edição manual. Num documento standard editável, um botão **Edit with AI** abre um editor de IA em linha, **somente texto**. É um recurso medido que gasta créditos de IA. {% stepper %} {% step %} ### Abra o painel de IA Clique em **Edit with AI** num documento standard editável. Um painel em linha abre, rotulado **"What should the AI change?"** com um prompt de exemplo como "Make the copy more concise and benefit-focused". {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Descreva a mudança Digite o que você quer reescrito. O painel carrega a nota **"Only text is rewritten - images and layout stay untouched. Nothing is sent to Amazon until you press Save."** {% endstep %} {% step %} ### Aplique a edição Clique em **Apply AI edit**. A IA reescreve apenas os campos de texto do documento e mostra o resultado em linha para revisão. Ela gasta créditos de IA a cada execução. {% endstep %} {% endstepper %} {% hint style="info" %} **Somente texto, e nunca publicado automaticamente.** O editor de IA toca apenas o texto - imagens e layout dos módulos são deixados exatamente como estavam - e nada chega à Amazon até você usar os botões de rodapé **Save to Amazon** ou **Save & Submit** abaixo. {% endhint %} *** ## 💾 Save to Amazon vs Save & Submit Os dois botões de rodapé fazem coisas diferentes, e a diferença importa. | Botão | O que ele faz | | ------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Save to Amazon** | Armazena suas edições de módulo no documento. Ele atualiza o documento mas **não** o envia para revisão. | | **Save & Submit** | Salva suas edições **e** submete o documento para a fila de aprovação da Amazon. | {% hint style="warning" %} **A Amazon coloca as submissões em fila - ela não as aplica instantaneamente.** Um **Save & Submit** bem-sucedido significa que a Amazon **aceitou o documento em sua fila de revisão**, não que ele está ao vivo. A Amazon valida o conteúdo e ainda pode **rejeitá-lo**. Se uma submissão for rejeitada, o motivo volta no documento para que você corrija o conteúdo e ressubmeta. Até a Amazon terminar a revisão, o documento fica em um estado **Pending**. {% endhint %} *** ## 👑 Módulos Premium A+ e Brand Story Alguns documentos usam módulos **Brand Story** ou **Premium A+**. Estes não são suportados pela API padrão de A+ Content da Amazon que o SellerMagnet usa, então **não podem ser editados neste painel**. Quando você abre um documento assim, o painel mostra um aviso e um botão para **Open in Seller Central**, levando você ao painel A+ no Seller Central regional correto para aquele marketplace, onde você pode ver e editar esses módulos diretamente. {% hint style="info" %} **Por que a divisão?** O SellerMagnet edita o conjunto padrão de módulos através da API suportada da Amazon. Premium A+ e Brand Story são um formato separado e mais rico que a Amazon só expõe no Seller Central. Em vez de renderizá-los parcialmente e arriscar corromper o layout, o gerenciador envia você para a ferramenta que os possui. {% endhint %} *** ## ⚠️ O que saber * **A criação de A+ totalmente novo é feita em outro lugar.** Esta página gerencia documentos que já existem. Para construir um novo documento de A+ Content, comece pela página **Listing Quality** - veja [Listing Quality](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview/listing-quality). O estado vazio nesta página também aponta para lá. * **"Assign to ASINs" não é conduzido a partir desta página.** Você pode ver a frase "Assign to ASINs" na ajuda in-app e no tour do produto. Atribuir um documento a ASINs específicos (aplicá-lo para que apareça numa página de produto) é tratado nos fluxos de criação e builder de anúncios, **não** a partir da grade do A+ Content Manager. Trate esta página como sua oficina de documentos - navegar, editar e publicar conteúdo de documentos - em vez do lugar onde você anexa um documento a um produto. * **É necessária uma conta Amazon conectada.** O gerenciador lê e grava através da sua conta Amazon vinculada. Sem uma conexão, nenhum documento carrega. * **O Brand Registry é necessário para A+.** O A+ Content está disponível apenas para marcas inscritas no Amazon Brand Registry. Se a sua conta não está inscrita, você não terá documentos A+ para gerenciar. A dica in-app afirma isso diretamente: "A+ Content requires Amazon Brand Registry - sellers without Brand Registry will not see A+ documents here and cannot create new ones." * **A lista é por marketplace.** Como a API A+ é baseada em região, sempre confirme que o seletor de marketplace está no que você quer antes de editar. *** ## ✅ Melhores Práticas 1. **Filtre para My Content primeiro.** Comece no filtro **My Content** para que os documentos gerados automaticamente pela Amazon não baguncem sua vista, depois mude para **All** apenas quando precisar deles. 2. **Edite, revise, depois Save & Submit.** Use **Save to Amazon** enquanto itera, e só **Save & Submit** quando o documento estiver genuinamente pronto - cada submissão passa pela revisão da Amazon. 3. **Escreva alt text significativo.** Cada campo de imagem tem uma caixa de alt text. Um alt text descritivo melhora a acessibilidade e dá à Amazon mais contexto sobre suas imagens. 4. **Corrija rejeições na origem.** Se um documento voltar **Rejected**, leia o motivo da Amazon, corrija o módulo ofensor e ressubmeta em vez de ressubmeter sem mudanças. 5. **Use o Seller Central para Premium A+ e Brand Story.** Quando o painel encaminhar você para fora, siga - esses formatos são feitos para serem editados lá. 6. **Confirme o marketplace.** Como a grade é filtrada por marketplace, verifique duas vezes o seletor antes de assumir que um documento está faltando. *** ## ❓ FAQ
Posso criar um novo documento de A+ Content a partir desta página? Não. O A+ Content Manager é para gerenciar documentos que já existem na sua conta. Para criar um documento totalmente novo, use a página **Listing Quality** na suíte Listing Manager AI. O estado vazio desta página também leva você para lá.
Como atribuo um documento a um ASIN específico aqui? Atribuir um documento a ASINs não é conduzido a partir desta grade do gerenciador. A frase "Assign to ASINs" aparece na ajuda in-app e no tour, mas anexar um documento a um produto é tratado nos fluxos de criação e builder de anúncios. Use esta página para navegar, editar e publicar conteúdo de documentos.
Qual é a diferença entre Save to Amazon e Save & Submit? **Save to Amazon** armazena suas edições de módulo no documento sem enviá-lo para revisão. **Save & Submit** salva suas edições e adicionalmente coloca o documento na fila de aprovação da Amazon. Apenas **Save & Submit** aciona a revisão da Amazon.
Por que não consigo editar um documento Brand Story ou Premium A+? Esses documentos usam módulos que a API padrão de A+ Content da Amazon não suporta. O painel mostra um botão "Open in Seller Central" para que você possa vê-los e editá-los na própria ferramenta da Amazon, que possui esse formato mais rico.
Minhas mudanças foram submetidas - por que ainda não estão ao vivo? Uma submissão significa que a Amazon **aceitou o documento em sua fila de revisão**, não que ele está publicado. A Amazon valida o conteúdo e ainda pode rejeitá-lo. O documento fica **Pending** até a Amazon terminar a revisão; uma rejeição volta com um motivo para que você corrija e ressubmeta.
Por que vejo menos documentos do que eu esperava? Verifique duas coisas: o **seletor de marketplace** (a grade é filtrada para um único marketplace porque a API A+ é baseada em região) e seus **filtros** (a página abre em **My Content**, que oculta documentos gerados automaticamente - mude para **All** para ver tudo).
Preciso do Brand Registry para usar A+ Content? Sim. O A+ Content é um recurso da Amazon reservado para marcas inscritas no Amazon Brand Registry. Se a sua conta não está inscrita, você não terá documentos A+ para gerenciar.
*** ## ➡️ O que vem a seguir? {% content-ref url="/pages/JZZiVAeUhBqMEJ7Ynabt" %} [Listing Quality](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview/listing-quality) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/MDZ2cYg2t3UOVVhOyVmk" %} [Listing Builder](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview/listing-builder) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/MnpWbIzgQZ0bauaQTMxf" %} [Otimizador de Anúncios](/pt-or-guia-do-sellermagnet/ferramentas-de-venda/listing-optimizer-overview) {% endcontent-ref %} --- [Next Page](/llms-full.txt/1)